ss f->?ii>« ^^ \-\l T\i \l '" - ■^"-^^ JL i-iuIiQ^dj-'i K Vi\iu-V--V- rrg 1 ■ 1 if^T^r M ^fevX^i^C-^*^^ :TrTi^^71tM l?tli I iijiiiiiiJiiliilH: i 1 1 hi liiii I i- Artizan's Guiile aud Evervliody's Assistaiit, • » The mo?;t comprehensive Collection of New and Reliable Secrets, IvecLijJts, Tables, &c., in existence, Jnpt issMod, contains directions fur construction and manaec- Bientof Steain Knguioii, Boil* re, Aiilvts, (Juii/fs, &c., Ccmf.its fir Stioin work, bi'ile Pifveutives, Strain l'r.ckiiip, C'omposilion Boiler Covnnnp, p'olis?! lor bright work. R'.:iis tor coinpulli ff Power of Engine's, Size ot CyMn.icr, 1 ly-whiels, &c. On Flour Mill*, I'sefui items fbr JI:li«iiglrs ond" M;;"t«. <>n Ssw-rKilli & Shiniic Micl.;i'.f-s. iJ.'st .Saw-m ils, Ki:' '■■' f !" Wheels, Pulleys, iJruns, <:ii-c;ilar S'uvs, ft", o^ ,, t'lll direc- tions, with Diai;.'!in'<,To.nieu'l l> oken S ' fA't.i'iilr- tort. On Helt!';ff. ShaftiMs, Ge*r-r.iuiir Screw work. Plei;!::;;, Birine, Turr.iiic and terap-rini? Anvu.j, !^o.^ninotive 'xir' Springs, Suw8. Ailes, iSteol i'loushs, Totu-. .'.at, t .\i:», Ti.p»," Reamers, Ccid chisels, Mrtrhle and Stone Cutters' 'i'cols. Stone Drills, Die?, Mill Pii.ks, EdRC Tools, Scitsors Razori, foythes, ;)ental and Surgical Inarnincnts. Cutery, Cl-.isi-ls, Gunlocic Sprinss, Lii^raved steel i'lates. Watch Spniirs, Gold and Steel I'ens, Neeiles, Fisn Ur->''- " Kuicry VVheels, 2 kinds. Weld- ing Compour.ds, 6 kiud , iCmpPMrc Liquids, 7 kinds. Metallic Temperins batn. Ca«c hardeiiiiip. G wavs. To restore Buret Steel, 2 ways, Annealinc; Steel, *:c. 'J'o t0U)?hen pi i r .>^tei.!. To iin- rirove poor Iron and StceL Diie c. ions tor iin'.e;t;ni.' Gold, Silver, T-. 7, Oxices, Iron, Copner, Lend, Antimony, Zinc. A'' Alloys for Gold H'-, kinds, Silver.i'k^nii'- '-, 13 kinds. An!;-!,i tion metals, IS* Itiiids, . ~- man Silver, 1.; kin-is. Type and Stereiitj i ip sol iers, 47 kindj, Gjld and Silver scM.i-s, :;•; itusiia, Ccnipojitmiii for I.ocomoiiv.s. Urean I'ipei, Pumps, CiccVs. Tootiied Wheels, Telescores, R-flectors, PInied Goods, A'.hato. British Plate, I!id- ery. Bir'minirha^n Platin, plectrum. Pincht/p-k, Cireide, Rivets, Buttons, Pewter, Giidinff metal, Muntz m'-tal. I'ot rKt'l, Steam metal. Queen's metal, Prince's metal, H.-.th inetul. S.^^eitl-.ins metal, '*liot tncal. Gun metal, Goncs, C'jmr'ciB, Mcnids, Sitvered tilass. Mirrors, Klectrical Machinet. "cr- . 7" kinds. For Tinning, Mlueins. Galvanizinp. Coppir.nL'. I /i;ncir.p. & Snamel- lini on metnlF. 1») methodi. l;ro'i l: Acids, ],acquer«. Paints, .lapa-s. Inlaid Mother o' i lor metal ■.>ork,7r kindt: Bron/,e Powder, nine kinds. CVivi.ii-, Gildi'c, an'' Piat- inp, inclulini? Mc'^el plating, 24 methods. For Wait.T, Chro- nometer, Cloek, and .Tewelry work, :i'2 very valuable receipts, tjver two reliable processes for Iron, Steel. Anchor, Ssw, Tur>e, Chain, ,'(;, Gas tixtnr-, and Fire-erm Manufaiture^';. Mnrter Mer.hnn'ei, M«chii:istJ, Knginecrs, UlacksinithK, Ilorse6lii.erK,CerriaKe,*W»p- 01! .^Tikr'!, I-i'!, \r..'l — !,]c Ir-n, Hrni-. Ts ne. Sfreofv.e. * ^eil y ■ . r ■. . - ■ ,^ I. .»! Koto. C<-i,(.«:r I'hiti.- au.l \. ...1 i:.;t;:-.iviT=, i ciittera, .Kc. Glasi, i". kinds. Color, d Glass, (, inu. * China Deciration, li'J rerelpts. To ' ■, .'. m' thnd«! Sti.ins f ir Wooil, AS kinds; Polisl-jm, U l,.iiid(.. V\,.od fllliiiK. 10 kinds! Oil Finishes. (J kinds. Fir iicnse. S'lrn, Ship. Carriiiue. fc Ornnnn ntal Painters, Graincrs, Caliinet * .Musual In«triiiMi'nt .Makers, GiMers, Carvers, Poli-hers. Picture Fruinc Vnriiiiih"'i. Workers, &e., y-'.'.) verv v.duabl;' re- • "7 kinds. 1 - ' '' ■•', Mioe, i. For I) llslters, •, F-^- !■ ■■ V"pu- , -s; 1> 1 IV ines, Vi:i>< t Br.ut IV. V r.i Nir.- i;; Ku.,1 . .S.xla Wniir, S.Miiin.T llri)ika, I ider, 1: I I air., Printera' Ink Ini; ^ K.Tf>«e.ie 1 1 1 M, il-.r V.u.ii!, hj : ip", liiili-is, I .'nil':ls, ' eer. Ale, I'l.rter. Ji lli.p, Sjiii-es, Keli»hi». I'luvorimt Jix- :AkiiiK Pou d< T, ('mined A Sealed liiUv, Viin>'!ir«, ICarkinii, UlnrinF, - Pri'SiTviiii! ^^•l!•. 1 ruits, «..lder, I. ('ottonHe..d. Coul, I,ub.-ii'«t- 'it, .Mi» (;r<'.ise, CompiVitloa " ' 'necu flavors, .,Ar. Fi.rln- .^ir., I'ii r«- , ,1. !• ,.| ■ . . \. ,, 1 * Mi.del . ' , ■ I, I,»-ad. I-i > li .11 Culm. Ill', .^'c, at HK^'t- iret lij inaii, 4 .ile'l. iJlrert oil orders to ii-,'.7.-\u', I ttoinpjoo. 4 Ai!tl*r»n, Krwlmf tea, K.B., Cinidi. (or \ THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE AND EVERYBODY'S ASSISTANT: CONTAIKING OVER TWO THOUSAND NEW AND VALUABLE RECEIPTS AND TABLES IN ALMOST EVERY BRANCH OP BUSINESS CONNECTED WITH CIVILIZED LIFE, FROM THE HOUSEHOLD TO THE MANUFACTORY. By R. MOORE. PUBLISHED FOR THE PROPRIETOR. PRINTED BY JOHN LOVELL, ST. NICHOLAS STREET. 18734 r (, '' 9 / : PEEFACE The following work will be found to embrace an immense amount of the most valuable information regarding almost every branch of useful industry. The information has been collected from many sources with much care and expense, many of the items being valuable trade secrets, consequently obtainable only at a heavy cost. On the whole, " The Artizan's Guide" will be found to embrace a vast amount of most useful knowledge in connection with business and manufacturing requirements, as well as the no less indispensable department of domestic uses, much of this information being very difficult to obtain in books. The Appendix, embracing the subject of cor- respondences, &c., is now inserted for the first time, and if favourably received will be inserted in future editions. Many persons who are in ])roper states for receiving these truths remain in total ignorance of their existence, and have no means of knowing them except through some such eflbrt as this. These ex- planations are now appended for the benefit of all Huch, certainly not for my own personal emolument, except so far as happiness may be derived from the consciousness of having tried to benefit others, and this, beyond all doubt, is an exceeding great reward. March 1S73. [Entered uccorilinif to Act of Parliament, in the year One Thousand Eight Hundred uud Sevoiif y-two, by li. Mookic, in tho offlco of the MiniMiT .>r AKrlciilliii«' Hii.l SfiitU1i.-M ..ftli.- I )..inini.in of f'lmiidn.l INDEX. For Baking, Cooking, Preserves, Jellies, &c... 3-19 For Dyers, Bleachers, Furriers, Hatters, and Clothiers 19-31 For Druggists, Dentists, Family Medicines, Barbers, Perfumers, Fancy Soaps, &c 40-64 For Grrocers, Confectioners, Domestic Wines, Sealed Goods, S;^Tups, Cordials, Ice Creams, Beer, &c 64-96 For Tanners, Curriers, Furriers, Boot, Shoe and Harnessmakers, Marble and Ivory- workers, Bookbinders, Anglers, Trappers. &c 96-106 For Painters, Varnishers, Cabinet-makers, Gilders, Bronzers, Piano and Organ man- ufacturers. Glass Stainers, China Decora- tors, Potters, Polishers, Wood Stainers, Glass Makers, Architects, &c 106-140 For Watchmakers, Jewellers, Gilders, Color- ers, Hefiners, Gold Beaters, Gold and Silver- smiths, Burnishers, Diamond cutters, &c. 140-167 For Machinists, Master Mechanics,Engineers, Blacksmiths, Edge tool, Carriage and Wag- gon makers. Mill owners, Iron and Brass- Founders and Finishers, Locomotive Build- ers, Hardware Dealers, Metal Smelters, Iron, Steel, Anchor, Tube, Spring, Saw, File, Chain, Anvil, Sewing Machine, Fire- proof Safe, Iron Eailing, Gas Fixture, and Fire- Arm manufacturers, Bronzers, Lock- smiths, Cutlers, Millers, Sawyers, Copper- smiths, Gasfitters, Steamfitters, Plumbers, Tinmen, Die Sinkers, Steel, Copper-plato and Wood Engravers, Stencil cutters. Gold and Silversmiths, Sweepsmelters, Enam- ellers, Japanners, Rubber work. Gas Com- panies, Boiler Makers, Sugar Eefiners, Starch Manufacturers, Petroleum and Oil Dealers, Navigators, Button, Needle and Pen Manufacturers, Miners, &c., &c 167-280 Items for Daily Eemembrance..... 281-284 Ready Reckoner, Interest, Produce, Lumber, Coal, Cordwood, Bark, Moulders', Pattern and Model makers Tables, Weights of Iron, Steel, Brass, Copper, Lead, Russia Iron, Lead Pipe, Strength of Cast Iron Columns, &c., at sight, embracing 22 pages following Page 284 On Correspondences, &c., See Apjjcndix. VALUABLE RECEIPTS. BAKING AND COOKING DEPARTMENT. Baking Bread. — The quantities and best manner of mixing the diflfei-eut ingredients necessary to make good bread, viz., to malie the fermentation, say, for 10 buckets of fiour ; take 5 gals, of potatoes ■well boiled and mashed in a tub, with 1 bucket of water (in summer this water should be about milk-warm, in Avinter much warmer; in all cases this must be governed by the weather), six pounds of flour and five quarts of j-east ; stir the whole up well, and cover till it rises. It is better to work the same as soon as it does rise and commences falling again ; otherwise the bread will not be so good. The time of rising, however, varies much ; sometimes it will rise in eight hours, at other times it will take much longer. Again, to make the sponge ; take 2 1 buckets of the above ferment, and 2| buckets of water, milk-warm, run the whole through a sieve into a trough, and make it into light dough, with flour for sponge. When this sponge has risen and commenced falling, add 5 lbs. salt and 5 buckets of water; break the sponge well in the water, and stir up sufficient flour to make a stiS" dough, cover it up until it rises sufBciently ; it is then fit for being weighed off and put into the tins for baking Let it stand in the tins until it rises, Avhen it should be placed in the oveo. N.B. — A I oz. carbonate of magnesia added to the flour, for » 4 lb. loaf, materially improves the quality of the bread even when mada from the very worst new seconds flour. It is usual with bakers to add alum to the flour, in order to make a Avhite, light, and porous bread. Two ounces of alum per 100 lbs. flour is generally sufiBcient. Hop Yeast. — Boil 5 gals, water and 10 ozs. hops together from 10 to 15 minutes ; put 6 lbs. flour in a tub, to which add' as much of the boiling liquor as will be necessary to make a thick paste. When the remainder of the liquor is perfectly cool, add it, together with 1 gal of stock yeast, to the paste, when the whole will be ready for use. Malt Yeast. — Boil 10 ozs hops in 5 gals, of water from 10 to 15 minutes, pour the same into a tub. When cooled to 70® Fahr add j peck of malt ; stir the whole up well, and cover it till nearly cool ■ then add 3 qts. of old yeast to make it fer- ment. Another Excellent Bread. — Knead 21 lbs. fiour with 9 lbs. of pared and mashed potatoes, from which the water has been well steamed off previous to mashing ; mix together while the pota- toes are warm, adding about 3 or 4 spoonfuls of salt. Then add about 3 qts. milk-warm water, with 'J large spoonfuls of yeast, gradually to the potatoes and flour; knead and work it 4 BAKING AND COOKING RECEIPTS. well into a smooth dough, and let it stand 4 hours before put- ting into the oven. Healthy Mixed Bread. — Boil 3 lbs. of rice to a soft pulp in water ; pare and cook by steam 6 lbs. of your best potatoes, mash 3'our potatoes, and rub them up with rice pulp ; add to the whole 6 lbs. floui- ; make all into a dough with water, fer- ment with yeast, let it stand a proper length of time, and then place it in the oven to bake. Crated Bread, without Yeast. — 1. Dissolve 1 oz. of sesqui- carbonate of ammonia in water, sufficient to make 7 lbs. of Hour into a dough, which must be formed into loaves, and baked immediately. 2. Divide 3 lbs. flour into two portions : mix up the first with water, holding in solution 2 oz. bicarbonate of soda; then mix the second jiorfion ot flour with water, to which I oz. of muriatic acid has been added ; knead each mass of the dough thoroughly. When this is done, mix both portions to- gether as rapidly and perfectly as possible, form the mass into loaves, and bake immediately. This bread contains no yeast, and is ver3' wholesome. Note. — Bicarbonate of soda and muriatic acid, when chemically combined, form common salt. Superior Bread from Buckwheat Meal.— To 2 qts. of sifted buckwheat meal, add hot water enough to wet the same; when sufhciently cooled, add 1 teaspoonful or more of salt, half a pint of yeast, and half a teaspoonful of molasses ; then add wheat ttou'' enough to make it into loaves (it should be kneaded well) ; ani when risen light, bake or steam it three or more hours. If thi-^ should get sour while rising, add a teaspoonful of sugar and t little saleratus, dissolved in water. For bread from Indian meal proceed in the same way, using it instead of the buckwheat meal. Cohn-iMeal Bread No. 1. — Take 2 qts. of corn meal, with about a. pint of (thin) bread sponge, and water enough to wet it ; mix in about half a pint of wheat flour, and a tablespoonfiil of salt; let it rise, and then knead well the second time; bake li hours. Corn-Meal Bread No. 2. — Mix 2 qts. of new corn meal with three pints of warm water ; add 1 tablespoonful of salt, 2 table- spoonfuls of sugar, and 1 large tablespoonful of hop yeast; let it stand in n warm jihice five hours to rise ; then aild li teacupfulr of wheat flour, and linlf a pint of warm water. Let it rise again \\ hours, then pour it into a pan well greased with sweet lard, and let it rise a few minutes. Then bake, in a moderately hot oven, 1 liour and 30 minutes. Corn-.Mkal Bread No. 3. — Take 2 qts. of white corn-meal, I tablespoonful of lard, 1 pint of hot water ; mix the lard in water r siiritwell that it may get heated thoroughly, and add one-halt pint of cold water. Wlicn the mixture is cool enough, add two well-beaten eggs, and two tablesiioonfuls of home-made yeast, liake 1 hour in a moderately heated oven. If for breakfast, make over night. Lo.NDo.N Bakers' Bread.— To make a half-peck loaf, take J lbs. of well-boiled, mealy potatoes ; masli them through a fine colander potaK Id i p add \ i>t. of yeast, or \ oz. German dried yeast, BAKING AND COOKING RECEIPTS. 5 and I pt. lukewarm water (88'* Falir.;), together with 5 lb. of flour, to render the mixture the consistence of thin batter ; this mixture is to be set aside to ferment ; if set in a warm place, it will rise in less than two hours, when it resembles yeast except in color. The sponge so made is then to be mixed with 1 pt. of water nearly blood warm, viz., 92° Fahr., and poured into a half peck of flour, which has previously had ij oz. salt mixed into it ; the whole should then be kneaded into dough, and allowed to rise in a warm place for 2 hours, when it should be kneaded into loaves, and baked. French Bread.— Take nice rice, 5 lb. ; tie it up in a thick linen bag, giving enough room for it to swell ; boil from three to four hours till it becomes a perfect paste ; mix while warm with 7 lbs. flour ; adding the usual quantities of yeast, salt, and water. Allow the dough to work a proper time near the fire, then divide into loaves, dust them in, and knead vigorously. This quantity will make 13 lbs. 7 oz. of very nutritious bread. Paris Baker's White Bread. — On 80 lbs. of the dough left from the previous day's baking, as much luke-warm water is poured as will make 320 lbs. flour into a rather thin dough. As soon as this has risen, 80 lbs. are taken out, and reserved in a warm place for next day's baking. One pound of dry yeast dissolved in warm u-ater is then added to the remaining portion, and the whole lightly kneaded. As soon as it is sutiiciently " risen," it is then made into loaves, and shortly afterwards baked, the loaves being placed in the oven without touching each other, so that they may be •' crusted " all round. Brown Bread. — Take equal quantities of Indian meal and rye flour, scald the meal, and when lukewarm add the flour, adding one-half pint of good yeast to four quarts of the mixture, a table- Bpoon, even full, of salt, and half a cup of molasses, kneading the mixture well. This kind of bread should be softer than wheat flour bread. All the water added after scalding the meal should be lukewarm. When it has risen well, put it to bake in a brick oven or stove, the former should be hotter than for flour bread ; if a stove oven, it should be steamed two hours then baked one hour or more ; when done it is a dark brown. The best article for baking this kind of bread is brown earthenware — say pans eight or ten inches in height, and diameter about the same ; grease or butter the pans ; put in the mixture ; then dip your hand in cold water and smooth the loaf; after this slash the loaf both ways with a knife, quite deep. Some let it rise a little before they put it to bake. Many people prefer this bread made of one-third rye flour instead of one half. When it is difficult to get rye, wheat flour will answer as a substitute. It adds very much to the rich- ness and flavor of this kind of bread to let it remain in the oven over night. Gingerbread. — Mix together 3^ lbs. of flour ; | lb. butter; 1 lb. sugar ; 1 pint molasses ; i lb. ginger, and some ground orange- peel. Dyspepsia Bread. — The following receipt for making bread has proved highly salutary to persons afllicted with dyspepsia, viz : — "3 quarts unbolted wheat meal ; 1 quart soft water, .warm but not 6 BAKING AND COOKING RECEIPTS. hot ; 1 gill of fresh yeast ; 1 gill molasses, or not, as may suit the taste ; 1 teaspoonful of saleratus. Rules to be observed in Cake-making. — 1. In making cakes, use refined white sugar, although clean brown sugar does as well. 2. Use good sweet butter in every case. 3. Cake mixture cannot be beaten too much. 4. An earthen basin is the best for beating cake mixture, or eggs in. 5. A good regular heat must be kept up in the oven. 6. Use a broom splint to run through the thickest part of the cake ; if done, it will come out clean, if not done, there will be some of the dough sticking to it. This rule applies to bread also. The following cakes will be foimd to come out all right with a fair trial. ScPERioR Indian Cake. — Take 2 cups of Indian meal, 1 table- spoonful of molasses, 2 cups milk, a little salt, a handful of flour, and a little saleratus ; mix thin, and pour it into a buttered bake- pan, and bake half an hour. Nut Cakes. — Take 1 lb. flour, i lb. butter, Same of sugar, five eggs, and spice to your taste. Seed C.oce. — 1 tea-cup butter, 2 cups sugar, rubbed into 4 cups flour ; mix with milk hard enough to roll : j teaspoonful saleratus ; seeds to your taste. Buckwheat Cake. — Make a batter of buckwheat flour as you would for pan-cakes ; let it rise light. Then to each quart of tho batter add 1 cup of molasses, 2 eggs, 1 teaspoonful of saleratus, a few caraway seeds, and 1 teacupful wheat flour ; stir well together, l)our into a greased breadpan, and bake in a moderate hot oven f of an hour. Almond Cake. — Take one pound of almonds, blanched and beaten ; ten eggs, well beaten; three-quarters of a pound of sugar, and three-quarters of a jtound of flour, well mixed and baked. Wedding Cake. — Take three lbs. flour, three lbs. butter, threu lbs. sugar, two dozen eggs, four lbs, raisins, six lbs. of currants, two lbs. citron, one ounce mace, one ounce cinnamon, one ouncti nutmeg, half-ounce cloves, half-j)int brandy. Beat the batter with your hand to cream ; then beat the sugar into the butter ; add th* froth of the yolks of the eggs, after being well beaten, then th(» froth of the whites, mix Iruil, spice and flour together, then add them in, baking five or six hours for a large loaf. TouND Cake. — One pound of flour, ore pound of sugar, on* ])ound of butter, eight eggs, three spoonfuls rose-water, mace, oi other spice. Buckwheat Short Cake.— Take 3 or 4 cups nice sour milk, 1 teaspoonful of soda saleratus dissolved in the milk; if the milk is very sour, you must use saleratus in proportion with a littl salt: mix up a dough with buckwheat flour thicker than you would mix the same for griddle cakes, say quite stifl"; put into a buttered tin, and put directly into the stove oven, and bake about 30 minutes, or as you would" a .short-cake from common flour. {SiioKT Cake. — 5 lbs. flour, a oz. butter, ^ lbs. sugar, 8 eggs, rose- water and nutmeg. SuciAu Cakk.— Take 7 eggs, and beat the whites and yolks sepa rately : then beat well togclhcr; now put into them sifted wiiifo sugar, 1 lb. j with melted butter, J lb. ; add a small teaspoonful of BAKING AND COOKING RECEIPTS. 7 pulverized carbonate of ammonia. Stir in just sufficient sifted flour to allow of its beinj? rolled out, and cut into cakes. Gl\ger Cake. — Flour 3 lbs., sugar and butter, each 1 lb., ginger 2 oz., molasses 1 pint, cream I pt. and a little nutmeg; mix warm and bake in slack oven. Pn'M Cake. — Flour 1 lb., butter i lb., sugar I lb., currants i lb., 3 6ggs, i pint milk, carbonate of soda, a small teaspoonful. Rich Soda Cake.— 1 i)0und of pulverized loaf-sugar mixed with 5 lb. of sweet butter, the beaten whites of 14 eggs, and two tea- spoonfuls of cream of tartar, sifted with a pound of flour, and lastly, a teaspoonful of soda dissolved in half a teacupful of sweet milk, and strained. Bake immediately. Delicate Tea Cake.— The M-hites of 3 eggs beaten to a froth, 1 cup of pulverized white sugar, ^ cup of sweet milk, one tea- spoonful of cream of tartar, | teaspoonful of soda, 2^ cups of flour, a teaspoonful of almonds, ^ cup of melted butter. Strawberry Short Cake. — One teacupful of sour milk (no.t buttermilk), a piece of butter the size of a walnut, j teaspoonful of soda, 5 teasooonful of salt. Mix very lightly, and bake in a quick oven. While baking, take 1| pts. of strawberries, mashed fine with the hand ; when the cake is cooked enough, cut in two, taking oS about j, leaving f at the bottom ; spread each part thickly with batter, then put on the large portion a layer of sugar, then the berries, then sugar, and lastly, turn the other part over. Serve immediately. Spoxge Cake. — Sift 1 lb. of flour and 1 lb. of loaf sugar ; take the juice of 1 lemon, beat 10 eggs very light, mix them well with the sugar, then add the lemon and flour ; if baked in a pan, two hours is lecessary. Loaf Cake. — Take 2 lbs. of flour, l lb. of sugar, J lb. of butter, 3 eggs, 1 gill of milk, ^ teacupful of sweet yeast, cloves and nut- meg for spice. Cream Cake. — 1 teacup cream, 2 teacups sugar, three well beaten eggs, teaspoonful saleratus dissolved in a wine glass of milk, piece of butter half the size of an egg, flour to make as thick as pound cake, add raisins and spice to taste ; wine and brandy if you like. Corn Starch Cake. — ] lb. of sugar, 4 oz. of butter, 5 eggs, 1 teaspoonful cream of tartar, | teaspoonful soda, I pound ot corn starch, 5 a gill of sweet milk. Railroad Cake. — A pint of floiiT 1 teaspoonful of cream of tartar, I a teaspoonful of soda, a tablespoonful of butter, a tea- spoonful of sugar ; bake the batter in a square pan twenty minutes. Mountain Cake. — 1 cup of sugar, "2 eggs, half cup butter, half cup of milk or water, 2 cups of flour, teaspoonful of cream of tartar, half a teaspoonful of soda, nutmeg. Poor Man's Cake. — 1 cup of sugar, J cup of butter, 1 cup sour cream, 1 egg, flour enough to make a good batter, ^ a teaspoonful of saleratus. Fruit Cake. — 1^ lbs. sugar, IJ lbs. flour, 3 lb. butter, 6 eggs, a Eint of sweet milk, 2 teaspoonfuls saleratus, 1 glass of wine, 1 of randy, and as much fruit and spice as you can afford and no more. 8 BAKING AND COOKING RECEIPTS. Scotch Short Bread. — Flour 2 pounds, butter 1 pound, brown- sugar i pound, blanched almonds, cut small, i pound, candied lemon peel, I pound ; beat the butter to a cream, and add it to the iiour and sugar ■with the other ingredients. "When Avell kneaded and incorporated roll it out into cakes about one inch thick. Bake- in a moderate oven. Gold Cake. — Yolks of 1 doz. eggs ; flour, 5 cups ; white sugar, and butter, of each, one cup ; cream or sweet milk, 1 cup ; cream of tartar, 1 teaspoon ; soda, J teaspoon. Beat the eggs with the sugar ; have the butter softened by the fire, then stir it in ; put the soda and cream of tartar into the cream or milk, stirring up and mixing all together; then sift and stir in the flour. Wonders. — 2 pounds flour, j pound butter, i ounce sugar, 10 eggs, cinnamon. Cookies. — 3 pounds flour, 5 pound butter, | pound sugar, 3 eggs; or, without eggs, wet up, raise with saleratus and sour milk. Common. — 12 pounds flour, 3 pounds butter, 3 pounds sugar, 2 quarts milk, j'east, spice to taste. Loaf. — 9 quarts flour, 3 pounds butter, 4 pounds sugar, 1 gallon- milk, wine 1 pint, yeast 1 pint. Cider Cake. — Flour, 6 cups ; sugar, 3 cups ; butter, 1 cup ; cider, 1 cup; saleratus, 1 teaspoon ; 4 eggs; 1 grated nutmeg. Beat the eggs, sugar, aud butter together, and stir in the flour and nutmeg; dissolve the saleratus in the cider, and stir into the mass, and bake immediately in a quick oven. Molasses Cake. — Molasses, IJ cups; saleratus, 1 teaspoon; sour milk, 2 cups ; 2 eggs; butter, lard, or pork gravy, what you would take upon a spoon; if you use lard, add a little .roves it. Fruit Pik. — 1 cup of sugar, 1 of water, tablcspoonful of flour, tea- spoonful of lemon essence (or lemon grated).! teaspoonful of r ream of tartar, half a teaspoonful of soda, half a cujt of dried currants: mix and boil, stirring to ])rcvent the iUnn from settling. CnicKE.N Pik— Take one jiairofgood young chickens, cutinsmnll BAKING AND COOKING RLJl-IPTS. 11 pieces, season with pepper and salt and small strips of salt pork, put in saucepan with water to cover it, boil for half an hour, add flour and butter to thicken the gravy, have ready a large dish, served with paste, put all in the dish covered with a good rich paste. Bake for half an hour Veal Pot Pie. — Take 2 pounds of best veal, cut in small pieces, half pound of salt pork, sliced thin, four quarts of cold water; pepper and salt all, put on the tire ; after boiling for 1 hour have 3 pounds of light bread dough, pick small pieces, say one ounce pieces, put in saucepan, with the veal and pork and let it boil for twenty minuteS: tServe as soon as taken from the fire Plum Pudding. — Pound 6 crackers, and soak them over night in milk enough to cover them, then add 3 pints of milk, 4 or 5 eggs, raisins ^ lb., spice with nutmeg and sweeten with sugar and molasses. Bake about 2 hours. Tapioca Pudding. — Pick and mash a coffee cup full of tapioca, and pour upon it 1 pint boiling milk; after standing ^ an hour, add another pint of cold milk, with sugar and raisins if j'ou desire. Baked Pudding. — 5 tablespoonfuls of corn starch to 1 quart of milk, dissolve the starch in a part of the milk, heat the remainder of the milk to nearly boiling, having salted it a littk-, then add the dissolved starch to the milk, boil 3 minutes, stirring it briskly; allow it to cool, and then thoroughly mix with it 3 eggs, well beat- en, with 3 tablespoonsfuls of sugar ; flavor to your taste and bake tt ^ an hour. This pudding ranks second to none. Orange Pudding.— Take 1 lb. of butter, 1 lb of sugar, 10 eggs, the juice of 2 oranges, boil the peel, then pound it fine and mix it with the juice Add the juice of 1 lemon, a wineglassful of brandy, Avine and rose-water. If you do not have the fruit add the extracts. CocoANUT Pudding. — To a large grated cocoanut add the whites of 6 eggs, i lb of sugar, 6 ounces of butter, | a wineglassful of rose-water, and baked in or out of paste. Rice Pudding. — Take 1 lb. of rice, boiled well with rich milk, stirring well until it is soft, and then add I lb, butter, 12 eggs, well beaten, and spice to your taste, and bake it. Hard Times Pudding. — ^ pint of molasses or syrup, ^ pint water, 2 teaspoonfuls of soda, 1 teaspoonfui of salt, flour enough to make a batter; boil in a bag for 3 hours. Eat it with sauce. Baked Apple Pudding. — Pare and quarter four large apples, boil them tender with the rind of a lemon in so little water that when done no water may remain, beat them quite fine in a mortar, add the crumb of a small roll, i lb. of butter melted, the yolks of 5 and whites of 3 eggs, juice of ^ lemou, sugar to your taste, beat all well together, all in paste. Ground Rice, or Sago Pudding.— Boil a large spoonful of it, heaped, in 1 pint milk with lemon peel and cinnamon ; when cold add sugar, and nutmegs, and 4 eggs, well beaten. Custard Pudding.— Take 1 pint milk, 4 spoonfuls flour, 6 eggs spice to your taste and bake, AViNTER Pudding — Take the crust of baker's loaf of bread, anu. fill it with plums, boil it in milk and water. 12 BAKING AND COOKING RECEIPTS. Baked Potatoe Pudding. — Baked potatoes skimmed and mashed 12 oz., suet 1 oz , cheese, grated tine, 1 oz , milk 1 gill. Mix the potatoes, suet, milk, cheese and all together, if not of a proper consistence, add a Utile water. Bake in an earthen pot. College Pcddings. — j lb of stale bread, grated ; the same quan- tity of beef suet, cho|)ped very fine ; 1 lb. of currants, ^ nutmeg, a few cloves, a glass of brandy, 2 or 3 eggs, 2 spoonfuls of cream or milk ; mix these well together, and make into a paste in the shape of eggs. Fry ihem gently over a clear fire, in 5 lb of butter; let them be of a nice brown color all over You may add blanched almonds and sweetmeats IServe them up with wine Family Pudding. — 1 quart of sweet milk, 1 pint of bread crumbs soaked in the milk, 3 eggs well beaten; 1 teacupful of sugar, little mace, 6 good tart apples, pared, cores dug out, and stand them in the pudding, and steam until the apples are well done. An hour will suffice. Cottage Pudding. — 1 egg, 1 cup of sugar, 1 of sweet milk, 1 teaspoonful of soda, 2 of cream of tartar, 1 pint of flour, and a little salt. To be eaten with milk and sugar Gkeen Gooseberkies make a nice pudding by stirring a pint of them into a pint of batter, and either baking or boiling Lemon Pudding. — Melt (J oz. of butter, pour it over the same quantity of powdered loaf sugar, stirring it well till cold, then grate the rind of a large lemon, and add it with 8 eggs well beaten and the juice of 2 lemons : stir the whole till it is completely mixed together, and bake the pudding with a paste round the dish. Sauces and Creams for Puddings. — 1. Take equal quantities of sugar and molasses, boil them together, and stir in a little flour • 2 Take the juice of an orange, a cup of sugar and tlie same of good cream . 3 Good sour cream made very sweet with sugar, Ti ith or Avilhout seasoning, makes a good sauce : 4. Beat 2 eggs Avell, then add a cup of stewed apples and a cup of sugar. Bekf Steak with Onions — Prepare a rump steak by pounding it till quite tender, season Avith salt, i)cpper and fresh butter, put in the steak and fry it, when brown on one side turn over, do not let it scorch, when nicely done, take it up, put a little flour over the steak, then add gradually a cup of hot water, seasoned with more salt and i>epper, if necessary ; then put the water over the fire and boil again, and jjour over the steak Peel 2 dozen onions, i)Ut them on to boil with about 2 quarts of water an hour before the steak is jiutou to fry. \\'hen the steak is done, cut tiiem uj), put them in tlie frying pan, season well with salt, j)epper, and butter, sprinkle with flour, stir all well togetlier, l)lace over the fire, stir otten to jirevent scorciiing ; wheu they are n little brown and soft, turn them over the sieak Skasonino for Stuffing. — 1 lb. of salt, dried and sifted ; half an ounce of ground white jiepper; two oimces of dried thyme; 1 oz of dried marjoram ; and one oz of nutmeg. When this seasoning is used, parsley only is required to be cho))i)ed in sufTi- cient (luimtity to make the stufling green. The proportions are — \ jiourid of Ijrcad crumb.-* ; 3 eggs ; \ lb. of guct ; ^ oz. of 6ea- aoning ; and the peel of half a lemon, grated. BAKING AND COOKING RECEIPTS. 13 Economical Soup. — Put into a saucepan one-pound pieces of Btftle bread, three large onions sliced, a small cabbage cut fine, a carrot and turnip, and a small bead of celery (or the remains of anr cold vegetables i, a tablespoonful of salt, a tablespoonful of pepper, a bunch of parsley, a sprig of marjoram and thyme Put these into two quarts" of any Aveak stock, (the liquor iu which mutton has been boiled will do,) and let them boil for two hours; rub through a fine hair-sieve, add a pint of new milk, boil up, and serve at once. Vegetable Soup.— Take a shin of beef, 3 large carrots, 3 large yellow onions, 6 turnips, ^ pound of rice or barley ; parsley, leeks, summer savory ; put all into a soup-kettle, and let it boil four hours ; add pepper and sail to taste ; serve altogether. It makes a good family soup. Pea Soup.— Beet 5 lbs., water 5 qts., 6 large carrots, 6 good turnips, 3 large onions, salt sufficient, put it on a good slow fire, let it boil 3 hours, then strain all the broth from meat and vegetables, and then add 3 lbs. of split peas to the broth ; set it on a slow fire for 2 hours, stirring often, so that all the peas will dis- solve ; take 1 lb. fresh sausage meat, fried to a crisp and fried bread crumbs ; put all together, add a few fine herbs, and serve hot. Fricassee Chickens.— Take 2 large young chickens, cut in small pieces, put in cold water for 1 hour to take all the blood out, then put in saucepan to parboil for half an hour, then take from sauce- pan drained well, have ready 1 qt. good fresh cream, 2 oz. good butter, 1 oz. of flour, all well mixed together; put in saucepan ■with the chickens ; put on the fire to boil tender ; season with pepper and salt ; served Avith toast bread in the bottom of the dish. Baked Tomatoes.— "Wash the tomatoes, take out the seed, make a dressing of crumbs of bread and onions chopped fine ; add salt, butter and pepper. Bake and serve hot. Stewed Tomatoes. — Scald the tomatoes with hot water, take off the skins, put them in an earthen vessel, strain off the water and add butter, salt and pepper to taste. Mashed Turnips. — Wash turnips, boil well, take them up in the colander, press out all the water, mash very fine ; season with salt, butter and sugar Serve hot with trimmings Hashed Meat. — Take 2 lbs of fat corned beef, well boiled and cold; 1 lb. of well boiled potatoes, cold; 1 large white onion; put in chopping tray, mince it fine, put all in saucepan together, add 2 ozs. butter ; pepper and salt to taste ; add boiling water to make it soft ; set it on a slow fire, stirring it often. When well stewed serve hot It makes a fine reli's-h for breakfast Lobster Salad. — Take inside of large lobster, mince fine, take yolk of 2 eggs boiled hard and mashed fine, with four tablespoon, fuls of sweet oil ; pepper, salt, vinegar, and mustard to taste ; mix well ; add celery or lettuce to taste ; then when serving, garnish with hard-boiled eggs. Succotash. — Take 1 doz. ears of corn, cut the grains from the cob, add 1 qt. of Lima beans, and mix with the corn ; put it on to boil in 3 qt, of water with 1 lb. of jiork tut, udd black pepper and 14 BAKING AND OOOKINQ RECEIPTS. salt to taste. When the -water has boiled away to l the original quantity, serve in a tureen as soup. Maccauoni Sodp. — 4 lbs. of lean beef, 4 qts. of water, carrot, turnip, onions ; set it for 4 hours till all mix together ; strain it all through a sieve ; have 2 lbs. of maccaroni broken into pieces of one inch long ; put all into a saucepan together, and let it boil for 10 minutes, and serve it hot. Boiled Custard, or Mock Cream. — Take 2 tablespoonfuls of corn starch,|l qt. of milk, 2 or 3 eggs, ^ a teaspoonful ot salt and a small piece of butter , heat the milk to nearly boiling and add the starch, previously dissolved in 1 qt. of milk, then add the eggs, well beaten, with 4 tablespoonfuls of powdered sugar ; let it boil up once or twice, stirring it briskly, and it is done. Flavor with lemon or vanilla, or raspberry, or to suit your taste. Lemon Cream. — Take a pint of thick cream and put to it the yolks ot two eggs, well beaten, 4 oz of fine sugar and the thin rind of a lemon , boil it up, then stir till almost cold , put the juice of a lemon in a dish or bowl and pour the cream upon it, stirring till quite cold. Frcit Creams. — Take I oz. of isinglass dissolved in a little water, then put 1 pt. of good cream, sweetened to the taste ; boil it When nearly cold lay some apricot or raspberry jam on the bottom of a glass dish and pour it over This is most excellent. Raspberry Cream. — Put 6 ozs. of raspberry jam to 1 qt. of cream, pulp it through a lawn sieve, add to it the juice of a lemon and a little sugar, and whisk it till thick. Serve it in a dish or glasses. To roast fowls the fire must be quick and clear. If smoky, it will spoil both their taste and looks Baste frequently, and keep a white paper pinned on the breast till it is near done TtiRKiT. — A good sized turkey should be roasted 2J hours or 3 hours — very slowly at first If you wish to make plain stuffing, pound a cracker or crumble some bread very „Tie, cliop some raw salt ])ork very fine, sift some sage, (and summer-savory, or sweet-marjoram, if you have them in the house, and fancy them,) and mould them all together, seasoned with a little pepper. An egg worked in makes^he stuffing cut better Boiled Turkey. — Clean the turkey, fill the crop with stuffing, and sew it up. Put it over the fire in water enough to cover it, let it boil slowly — take off all tlie scum When this is done, it should only simmer till it is done. Put a little salt into the water, and dredge the turkey witii fiour before boiling. Roast Ducks and Gee.se. — Take sh^p, wasli and ])ick it, and an onion; chop .hem fine, with pei>ii. A leg of mutton of six pounds will require 1 hour to roast before a quick fire. To Boil Eggs.— In 3 minutes an egg will boil soft, in 4 the white part is completely cooked, in 10, it is fit for a salad. Try their freshness in cold water, those that sink the soonest are the fr6sli6st. Sausage Meat.— Take 2 lbs. lean meat, 1 lb. fat-pork, chop fine, 16 BAKING AND COOKING RECEIPTS. and mix with 2 teaspoonfuls of black pepper, 1 of cloves, 7 o< powdered sage, and 5 of salt. Apple Ccstard. — Take apples, pared, cored, and, slightly stewed, sufficient to cover the dish, 8 eggs, 1 qt. of milk ; spice to your taste ; bake it ^ of an hour. New-Englaxd Apple-sacce or Butter. — Boil 2 brls. of new cider down to I a brl. Pare, core, and slice up 3 bushels of apples (sweet apples are preferable), and put them into the cider thus reduced, and still kept boiling briskly-. Stir the whole mass constantly, to prevent burnmg, till of the consistence of soft butter. A small quantity of pulverized allspice, added during the boiling, is an improvement. Boil in a brass kettle, and, when done, put it into a wooden firkin, or small cask, and it will keep for years. Apple Butter (Pennsylvania Method). — Boil new cider down to \. Pare, cut, and core equal quantities of sweet and sour apples. Put the sweet apples in a large kettle to soften a little first, as they are the hardest. Add enough boiled cider to cook them. After boiling { an hour, stirring often, put in the sour apples, and add more boiled cider, with molasses enough to sweeten moderately. Boil until tender, stirring to prevent burning. Pack in firkins or stone pots for winter use. Irish Stew. — Take 4 lbs. good breast of fat mutton, cut m small pieces ; 2 large white onions ; 10 large potatoes, well peeled and sliced: put all in saucepan together, with fine herbs, pepper and salt to suit; a little salt pork is a good addition ; \ lb. of flour ; J lb. good fresh butter, well rubbed together, and let it boil for one hour, and have it well cooked. Apple Dumplings. — 6 eggs, 1^ lbs. of flour, some butter to your taste, and tablespoonful of yeast, and sufficient milk to make a dough to roll-out ; when raised, cut in small pieces, put in the apples, and cook for % of an hour ; serve with white sugar or wine sauce. Boiled Poultry. — Take large chickens, well cleaned with cold water, put in saucepan with water to cover, boil I hour; served with sauce. Hashed Turkey. — Take meat from boiled fowls, chop fine, put in saucepan, with seasoning to suit taste. Served on toast. Boiled Maccaroni. — Take "2 lbs., break in small pieces, put in warm water to steep 1 hour, drain off, put in sauccj'au with 2 qts, fresh cream, with grated cheese; .seasoned witli red ])epper. Strasburg Potted Meat.— Take \\ lbs. of the rumj) of beef, cut into dice, put it in an earthen jar, with \ lb. of butter, tie the jar close up with paper, and set over a ])ot to boil ; when nearly done, add cl'ives, mace, allspice, nutmeg, salt, and cayenne pepper to taste, then boil till tender, and let it get cold, pound the meat, with 4 anchovies mashed and Jjoned, add \ lb. of oiled butter, work it well together with the gravy, warm a little, and add cochineal to color, then press into small pots, and pour meltel niiittuii suet over tlie top of each. Bologna Sausages. — Take equal quantities of bacon, fat and lei^n, liecf, veal, pork and beef suet; clioj) tlicni small, season with pep- Jtcr, salt, &c., with sweet herbs and sage rubbed fine. Have i^cll BAKTva AND COOKING RECEIPTS. 17 washed intestines, fill, and prick them ; boil gently for an hour, and lay on straw to dry. Rich Sausages. — Take 30 lbs. of chopped meat, 8 oz. fine salt, 21 oz. pepper, 2 tea cups of sage, and Ij cups of sweet marjoram, passed through a fine sieve, or, if preferred, thyme and summer savory can be substituted for the latter. How TO SAVE YOUR IcE BiLL. — Get a quantity of empty barrels or boxes during the coldest time in the winter, and put a few inches of water in each; the evening when the cold is most intense is the best time to do this. After the water is frozen solid, fill up again, repeat the process until the barrels are full of solid ice, then roll them into your cellar, cover them up with plenty of sawdust or straw, and your ice crop is safely harvested. Charlotte Rcsse. — Take 1 pt. milk, dissolve with heat, 3 oz. isinglass and 1 lb. sugar ; add, after it is cool, 1 qt. beaten cream and flour, suit your taste and line out some mould with sponge cake, and put the cream in it and cool. Wine Jelly. — Take 1 pt. water and 3 oz. isinglass, H lb. sugar, the juice of 2 lemons, and dissolve that and let it come to a boil, then add wine, brandy and spice to your taste, and strain it through a cotton or flannel cloth and put it in moulds to cool. To MAKE Apple ^Iolasses. — Take new sweet cider just from the press, made from sweet apples, and boil it down as thick as West- India molasses. It should be boiled in brass, and not burned, as that would injure the flavor. It will keep in the cellar, and is said to be as good, and for many purposes better, than West-India molasses. gl^°Acid fruits should be cooked in bright tin, brass, or bell metal, anl poured out as soon as they are done. Brown earthen vessels should never be used, as they are glazed with white lead, a poison which very readily unites with an acid. Jellies. — Lemon Jelli/. — Isinglass, 2 oz. ; water, 1 qt. ; boil ; add sugar, 1 lb.; clarify; and, when nearly cold, add the juice of 5 lemons, and the grated yellow rinds of 2 oranges and 2 lemons ; mix well, strain off the peel, and put it into glasses or bottles; Hartshorn Jelly. — Hartshorn, 1 lb. ; water 1 gal. ;peel of 2 lemons ; boil over a gentle fire till sufficiently thick ; strain and add loaf sugar, ^ lb. ; whites of 10 eggs beaten to a froth ; juice of 6 lemons ; mix well together, then bottle. Isijiglass Jelly. — Put 4 oz. isingla.=s and 2 oz. cloves into 1 gal. water ; boil it down to half a gal. ; strain it upon 4 lbs. of loaf sugar ; add, while cooling, a little wine ; then bottle. Apple Jelly from Cider. — Take of apple juice, strained, 4 lbs. ; sugar, 2 lbs. ; iDoil to a jellv, and bottle. Gooseberry Jelly. — Sugar, 4 lbs. ; water, 2 lbs. ; boil together ; it will be nearly solid when cold ; to this syrup, add an equal weight of gooseberry juice ; give it a short boil, cool, then pot it. Currant Jelly. — Take the juice of red currants, and loaf sugar, equal quantities ; boil and stir gently for three hours ; put it into glasses ; and in three days it will concentrate into a firm jelly. Tapioca Jelly. — Wash 8 oz. of tapioca well : then soak it in 1 gal. fresh water, five or six hours ; add the peels of 8 lemons, and set all on to heat ; simmer till clear ; add the juice of the 8 lemons with wine and sugar to taste ; thei^ bottle. 18 BAKING AND COOKING IIECEIPTS. Blackberry Jelly. — This preparation of the blackberry is mor» agreeable ihao the jam, as the seeiis, though very wholesome, are not agreeable to all. It is made in the same way as currant jelly ; but the fruit is so sweet that it only requires half the ■weight of the juice in sugar. Peau Marmalade. — To 6 lbs. of small pears, take 4 lbs. of sugar: put the pears into a saucepan, with a litile cold water; cover itj and set it over the fire until the fruit is soft, then put them into cold water ; pare, quarter, and core them ; jjut to them three tea- cups of water, set them over the fire ; roll the sugar fine, mash the fruit fine and smooth, put the sugar to it, stir it well together until it is thick, like jelly, then put it in tumblers, or jars, and, when cold, secure it as jelly. Preserved Citron. — Pare and cut open the citron ; clean all out except the rind ; boil till soft. To 1 lb. of citron add 1 lb. of sugar, and a lemon to each lb. ; put the sugar and lemon together, and boil it till it becomes a syruji, skimming it well ; then put the syrup and citron together, and boil it an hour. Scotch Marmalade. — Take of the juice of Seville oranges 2 pts., yellow honey, 2 lbs. Boil to a proper consistence. Raspberry Jam. — Allow a pound of sugar to a pound of fruit, mash the raspberries and put them, Avith the sugar, into your ])reserving kettle. Boil it slowly for an hour, skimming it well. Tie it up with brandy paper. AH jams are made in the same manner. French Honey. — White sugar, 1 lb. ; 6 eggs, leaving out the Avliites of 2 ; the juice of 3 or 4 lemons, and Uie grated rind of 2, and 5 lb. of baiter; stir over a slow fire until it is of the consis- tency of honey. Almond Blanc Mange. — Take four ounces of almonds, six oz. sugar, boil together Avith a (piart of water, melt in this two ounces of pure isinglass, strain in a small tin mould to stiffen it. When wanted, dip the mould in hot watt- r and turu it out. Lemon Blanc Mange. — Pour a pint of hot water upon half an ounce of isinglass ; when it is dissolved add the juice of three lemons, the peel of two lemons grated, six yolks of eggs beaten, and about a good wine-glass of Jladeira wine to it ; sweeten to your taste ; let it boil ; then strain it and put it in your moulds. Molasses Presehnes. — Boil 1 (jt. of molasses about ten or fifteen niinutes to a thickish consistency, then add (J eggs well beaten, and a spoonful of Hour. Boil a few minutes longer, stirring con- stantly, then set oft the lire, and fiavor with leinou or allspice as desired. Fruit Extracts, &c — Good alcohol, 1 (|t. oil of lemon, 2 oz. Break fuiil bruise the ]>e(d of 4 lemons, and ad(l to the alcohol for a few days, then filter. For currants, peaches, raspberries, pine apples, strawberries, blackberries &c., take alcohol and water half and half, and ])our over the fruit, entirely covering il, and let it staml for a few days. For essence of cinnamon, nutmeg, mace, vanilla, aid for. A little before ])lanting, moisten the heap with water, or, better still with urine ; cover well over with old mats, and let it lie till wanteil for use Apply it to beans corn, or )>otat()es, at the rate of a hamlful to a hill ; and mix with the soil belorw droj>piuj; the seed. This will be fouml the best PARMERS' RECEIPTS. 21 substitute for guano ever invented, and may be depended on for bringing great crops of turnips, corn, potatoes, &c. To Dissolve Large Bones forMaxcre, without Expense. — Take any old flour-barrel, and put into the bottom a layer of hard-wood ashes ; put a layer of bones on the top of the ashes, and add another layer of ashes, filling the space between the bones with them ;' then add bones and ashes alternately, finishing off with a thick layer of ashes. When your barrel ia filled, pour on water (urine is better,) just sufficient to keep them wet, but do not on any account suffer it to leach one drop ; for that would be like leaching your dungheap. In the c jurse of time they will heat, and eventually soften down so that you can crumble them with your finger. When sufficiently softened, dump them out of the barrel on a heap of dry loam, and pulverize and crumble them up till they are completely amalgamated into one homoge- neous mass with the loam, so that it can be easily handled and distributed whenever required. You may rely on it, tliis manure will leave its mark, and show good results wherever it is used Substitute for Superphosphate. If you have inch bone ground in a bone-mill, and cannot afford to purchase sulphuric acid to work it up into superphosphate of lime, you can reduce your bones into a fine impalpable powder by simply using three barrels of loamy soil to every barrel of inch bones ; mix them together The bones will soon begin to heat and ferment, and continue so for some time ; they will then cool off. You will then proceed to chop down and pulverize and work the mass thoroughly ; it will begin to re- heat and ferment and cool down again ; and you will continue .working it over till the contents are brought to the proper state of fineness, when you will have a fertilizer of astonishing power It is only a year or two since a statement appeared in the " Country Gentleman," of the experiments of a Mr. Haskell with a manure prepared after this method, who found it even superior to super- phosphate of lime. How TO DOUBLE THE USUAL QUANTITY OF MANURE ON A FaRM. — Provide a good supply of black swamp mould or loam from the woods, within easy reach of your stable, and place a layer of this, one foot thick, under each horse, with litter as usual, on the top of the loam or mould. Remove the droppings of the animals everj day, but let the loam remain for two weeks ; then remove it, mixing it with the other manure, and replace with fresh mould. By this simple means, any flirmer can double not only the quantity but also the quality of his manure, and never feel himself one penny the poorer by the trouble or expense incurred, while the fertilizing value of the ingredients absorbed and saved by the loam can scarcely be estimated. Josiah Quincy, jun., has been very successful in keeping cattle in stables the yearthrough, and feeding them, by means of soiling. The amount of manure thus made had enabled him to improve the fer- tility of a poor farm of 100 acres, so that in twenty years the hay crop had increased from 20 to 300 tons. The cattle are kept in a well-arranged stable, and are let out into the yard an hour or two morning and afternoon ; but they generally appear glad to return to their quarters. By this process, one acre enables him to aup- 22 farmers' receipts. port three or four cows. They are fed on grass, green oats, com fodder, barley, &c., which are sown at intervals through the spring and summer months, to be cut as required ; but he remarks that his most valuable crop is his manure crop. Each cow produces 3i^ cords of solid, and 3 cords of liquid manure, or 6^ cords in all He uses twice as much muck to mix with it, making 20 cords in all. Five to eight miles from Boston, such manure is worth five to eiglit dollars a cord. From this estimate, he has come to the conclusion that a cow's manure may be made as valuable as her milk Twenty Dollars' Worth of Manure for almost Nothing — If you have any dead animal,— say, for instance, the body of a horse, — do not sufiFer it to pollute the atmosphere by drawing it away to the woods or any other out of the way place, but remove it a short distance only, from your premises, and put down four or fire loads of muck or sods, place the carcass thereon, and sprinkle it over with quick-lime, and cover over immediatelv with sods or mould sufficient to make, with what had been previously added, 20 good waggon-loads ; and you will have, within twelve months, a pile of manure Avorth S20 for any crop you choose to put it upon. Use a proportionate quantity of mould' for smaller animals, but never less than twenty good waggon-loads for a horse ; and, if any dogs manifest too great a regard for the enclosed carcass, shoot them on the spot Fish Compost, Scbstitute for BoxE-DrsT, Manure from Fish Refuse, &c. — The fish owes its fertilizing value to the animal matter and bone-earth which it contains. The former is precisely similar to flesh or blood, consisting of 25 per cent, of fibrin, the rest being water ; and their bones are similar in composition to those of terrestrial animals. As fertilizing agents, therefore, the bodies of fishes will act nearly in the same way as the bodies and blood of rnimals ; 100 lbs., in decaying, produce 2i lbs of ammonia Hence 4')0 lbs offish rotted in compost are enough for an acre The great effect is due to the ammoniacal portion ; for it renders the her- bage dark-green, and starts it very rapidly One of the best com- posts is made as follows: Dried bog-earth, loam, or peat, seven barrels ; hardwood ashes, two barrels ; fish, one barrel , slacked lime, one bushel. Place a thick layer of the bog-earth on the bottom , on the top of this put a layer of the fish, then a sprinkling of lime, then a layer of ashes , on'top of the ashes pnta thicklayer of bog- earth, loam, or peat ; then another thin layer of fish, lime,"and ashes, and so on till your matorials are worked in ; then top off with a thick layer of the absorbents, to retain the fertilizing gases The decomposition of the fish will proceed very rapidly, and a very rich compost will be the result Itsliould be "shovelled over and" over and thorouerhly intermi.xed and jiulverized. Put this on so as to have 400 lbs offish to the acre. It may be applied with the greatest benefit to corn, turnips, potatoes, beans, &c., in the drill • and broad cast on the grass Siij)fTphosphatc can be made from pogy-chum, or the refuse of othor fish, after the oil is expressed, by dissolving in sulphuric acid, 'and afterwards mixing with dry loam, precisely as directed for makinp sufierpliosiiimte with liones Whale-oil" or the oil of any fish, when made into a compost with loam, and a little lime or I*ARMERS' RECEIPTSr 23 wood ashes, yields a very powerful manure, merely mixed with absorbent earth and applied at the end of the month. Impure whale- oil, at the rate of 40 gallons per acre, has produced a crop cf 23^: tons of turnips per acre ; while on the same soil, and during the same season, it took 40 bushels of bone-dust toproduceonly 22 tons per acre. -t Ashes from Soil by SpoNXANEors Combustion. — Make your mound ] 21 feet long by lOJ feet wide. To fire, use 72 bushels of lime. First' a layer of dry sods or parings on which a quantity of lime is spread, * mixing sods with it ; then a covering of eight inches of sods, on which the other half of the lime is spread, and covered a footthick, ■ the height of the mound being about a yard. In twenty-;*bur hours it will take fire. The lime should be fresh from the kiln. It is better to suffer it to ignite itself than to effect it by the operation of water. When the fire is fairly kindled, fresh sods must be ap- plied ; but get a good body of ashes in the first place. I think it. may be fairly supposed that the lime adds full its worth to the quality of the ashes, and, when limestone can be got, I would ad- vise the burning a small quantity in the mounds, which would be a great improvement to the ashes, and would help to keep the fire in. Substitute for Barn*manure. — Dissolve a bushel of salt iu water enough to slack 5 or 6 bushels of lime. The best rule for pre- paring the compost heap is, 1 bushel of this lime to 1 load of swamp-muck, intimately mixed ; though 3 bushels to 5 loads makes a very good manure. In laying up the heap, let the layer of muck , and lime be thin, so that decomposition may be more rapid and , complete. When lime cannot be got, use unleached ashes, — 3 or 4 bushels *o a cord of muck. In a month or six veeks, overhaul and ' work over the heap, when it will be ready for use. Sprinkle the salt water on the lime as the heap goes up. ; Sheep-Dipping Composition. — Water, 1 gal. ; benzine, 8 ounces ; cayenne pepj er, 2 ounces. 5Iix : make what quantity you require, using these proportions. Dip your sheep and lambs in the composition, and it will make short work of the vermin. Oat or Wheat Straw made equal to Hat. — Bring 10 gallons Water to a boiling heat ; take it off the fire, and add to it at once S gallons of linseed unground ; let it remain till Hgets cold ; then empty the whole into a cask, coKtaining 44 gallons of cold water, and let it remain for forty-eight hours. At the end of that time, it will be reduced into a thin jelly, like arrowroot. Spreat out J ton straw, and sprinkle it over regularly with the whole of the liquid from the cask. The stock will eat it up as clean, and keep as fat on it, quantity for quantity, as they would do on hay. Death for Vermin on Plants or Animals. — Pour a gallon of boiling water on one pound tobacco leaves, strain it in twenty minutes ; for vermin, on animals or plants, this decoction is certain death. Remedy for CtJRCULio in Fruit trees. — Sawdust saturated in coal oil, and placed at the roots cf the tree, will be a sure preven- tive ; or, clear a circle around the tree from all rubbish ; fill up all little holes and smooth off the ground for a distance of at least 3 feet each way from the tree, then place chips or small pieces of 24 farmers' receipts. wood ou the ground within the circle ; the curculio will take refuge in large numbers below the chipSj and you can pass around in the mornings and kill them off. Grafting Wax. — Rosin, 1 lb. ; bees-wax, 1 lb. ; with tallow or lard sufficient to soften until it can be readily applied with the hand ; melt. De. Cole's King of Oils. — 1 oz. green copperas; 2 oz. white Titriol , 2 oz. common salt; 2 oz. linseed oil ; 8 oz. molasses. Boil over a slow fire fifteen minutes, in a pint of urine ; when almost cold, add 1 oz. of oil of yitriol and 4 oz of spirits turpentine. Apply to wonnds with a feather A very powerful liniment. Sloan's Horse Oimtment. — 4 oz rosm ; 4 oz. bees-wax ; lard, 8 oz. ; honey, 2 oz., Mix slowly and gently bring to a boil ; then add less than 1 jnnt spirits turpentine; then remove, and stir till cool. Unsurpassed for horse-flesh, cracked hoofs, human flesh, &c. Mexican Mustang Lumment. — Petroleum, olive oil, and car- bonate of ammonia, each equal parts ; and mix. It is one of the best liniments in use. Merchant's Gargling Oil.— Take 2i gals, linseed oil ; 2J gals, spirits turpentine ; 1 gal. western petroleum; 8 oz. liquor potass; sap green. 1 oz Mix all together, and it is ready for use. Arabian Condition Powders. — Ground ginger, 1 lb. ; sulphuret of antimony, 1 lb.; powdered sulphur, 1 lb. ; saltpetre, 1 lb. Mix all together; and administer in a mash, in such quantities as may be required. The best condition powder in existence. Blistering Liniment. — 1 part Spanish flies, finely powdered ; 3 of lard; and 1 of yellow rosin. Mix the lard and rosin together, and add the flies when the other ingredients begin to cool. To render it more active, add 1 pint spirits turpentine. Medicated Food for Horses and Cattlk. — Take linseed cake and pulverize or grind it up in the shape of meal, and to every 50 lbs of this ingredient, add 10 lbs. Indian meal; 2 lbs, sulphuret of antimony; 2 lbs. ground ginger, 13 lbs. of saltpetre, and 2 lbs. ]iowdered sulphur. Mix the whole thoroughly together, put up in neat boxes or packages for sale or otherwise as desired, ana you will have an article equal in value to " Thorley's Food," or almost any other preparation that can be got up for the purpose of fattening stock, or curing disease in every case when food or medicine can be of any use whatever. This article can be fed in any desired quantity, beginning with a few tablespoonfuls at a time, for a horse, mixing it with his grain, and in the same ])roportion to s-inallcr animals, repeating the dose and increasing the quantity as the case may seem to require. Lotion for Mange. — Boil 2 oz. tobacco in 1 quart water ; strain ; adil sulphur and soft soap, each 2 oz. For Strains and Swellings.— Strong vinegar saturated with common salt, used warm, i.s good for strains and reducing swel- lings. 1 oz. of white vitriol ; 1 oz. of green copperas ; 2 teaspoon- fulsof gunpowder, all pulverized together, and Uissolved in I quart of soft water, and used cold, ruVjbing in thoroughly, is one or tbo best a|(])licalionfl known for reducing swellings. HooF-Boi'ND Wash. — Sjiirits turpentine, 4 oz. ; tar, 4 oz. ; whale- Vil, a oz. Mix, and apply to the hoofs often. farmers' receipts. ' 25 To Toughen Hoofs. — Wash them frequently in strong brine, and turn brine upon the bottoms, and soak a few minutes each time. Scratches. — Cut off the hair close, and wash the legs in strong soap-suds or urine, or wash with warm vinegar saturated with salt, and afterwards dress over with a small quantity of hog's lard. Cough. — Quit feeding musty hay, and feed roots and laxative food. Sprinkle human urine on his fodder, or cut up cedar boughs and mix with his grain ; or boil a small quantity of flax-seed, and mix it in a mash of scalded bran, adding a few ounces of sugar, molasses, or honey. Administer lukewarm. If there should be any appearance of heaves, put a spoonful of ground ginger once per day in his provender, and allow him to drink freely of lime water. Split or Broken Hoof. — Let the blacksmith bore two holes on each side of the crack or split ; pass long nails through the holes, and clinch tight. After anointing with the hoof-bound liquid, it will soon grow together. Colic Cure. — Bleed freely at the horse's mouth ; then take i lb. raw cotton, wrap it around a coal of fu'e, so as to exclude the air ; when it begins to smoke, hold it under his nose till he becomes easy. To cure Distemper. — Take H gals, of blood from the neck vein ; then administer sassafras oil, 1| oz. Cure, speedy and certain. Founder cured in 24 Hours. — Boil or steam stout oat-straw for half-an-hour, then wrap it around the horse's leg quite hot, cover up with wet woollen rags to keep in the steam; in 6 hours renew the application, take 1 gal. of blood from the neck vein, and give 1 quart linseed oil. He may be worked next day. Cure for Staggers.— Give a mess twice a week, composed of bran, 1 gal. ; sulphur, 1 tablespoonful ; saltpetre, I spoonful ; boiling sassafras tea, 1 quart ; assafeetida, Ij oz. Keep the horse from cold water for half a day afterwards. Ring-Bone and Spavin. — Take sweet oil, 4 oz. ; spirits turpen- tine, 2 oz. ; oil of stone, 1 oz. Mrs, and apply three times per day. If the horse is over four years old, or in any case when this is not sufficient, in addition to it, you will fit a bar of lead just above it, wiring the ends together, so it constantly wears upon the enlarge- ment; and the two together will cure nine cases out of every ten, in six weeks. Poll Evil and Fistula.— Common potash dissolved in j pint of water, 1 lb. ; add i oz. belladonna extract, and 1 oz gum arable dissolved in a little water ; work all into a paste with wheat flo»r, and bottle up tight. Directions : wash the sores well with Castile soap-suds ; then apply tallow all around them. Next, press the above paste to the bottom of all the orifices ; repeat every two days till the callous fibrous base around the poll evil or fistula is com- pletely destroyed ; put a piece of oil-cloth over the sores, and after- wards heal up with Sloan's Horse Ointment. To Tame Horses.— Take finely-grated horse castor, oils of rho- dium and cummin ; keep them in separate bottles well-corked ; put some of the oil cummin on 3'our hand, and approach the horse on the windy side. He will then move toward you. Then rub 26 farmers' receipts. so'me of the cummin on his nose, give him a little of the castor on anything he likes, and get eight or ten drops oil rhodium on his tongue. You can then get him to do anything you like. Be kind and attentive to the animal, and your control is certain. Best Remedy for Heaves. — Balsam of fir and balsam of copaiba, 4 oz. each, and mix with calcined magnesia sufficiently thick to mak( it into balls , and give a middling-sized ball night and morning for a week or ten days. CcTRE FOR BoTs IN HoRSES. — Givc the horse, first, 2 quarts of new milk, and 1 quart molasses ; 15 minutes afterwards, give 2 ^quarts very strong sage tea ; 30 minutes after the tea, give 3 pints for enough to operate as plij'sic), of curriers' oil. The molasses and milk cause the bots to let go their hold, the tea puckers them up, and the oil carries them completely away. Cure certain, in the worst cases. Certain Ring-bone amd Spavin Cure. — Venice turpentine and Spanish flies, of each 2 oz. ; euphorbium and aqua-ammonia, of each 1 oz. ; red precipitate, ^ oz. ; corrosive sublimate, i oz. ; lard, IJ lbs. Pulverize all, and put into the lard ; simmer slowly over coals, not scorching or burning ; and pour olf, free of sedi- ment. For ring-bones, cut off the hair, and rub the ointment well into the lumps once in 48 hours. For spavins, once in 24;hours for 3 mornings. Wash well previous to each application with suds, rubbing over the place with a smooth stick, to squeeze out a thick, yellow matter. This has removed very large ring-bones. Bone Spavins, French Paste. — $300 Recipe. — Corrosive subli- mate, quicksilver, and iodine, of each 1 oz. Rub the quicksilver and iodine together ; then add the sublimate, and lastly the lard, rubbing them thoroughly. Shave off the hair the size of the bone enlargement , grease all around it, but not where the hair is shaved off, this prevents the action of the medicine, except on the spavin. Then rub in as much of the paste as will lie on a 3 cent piece, each morning, for 3 or 4 mornings. In from 7 to 8 days, the whole spavin will come out; then wash tiie wound with suds for an hour or so, to remove the poisonous effects of the paste ; afterwards heal up the sore with any good healing salve, or Sloan's Horse Ointment, as per recipe above, keeping the sore covered wliile it is liealing up Another very Valuable Recipe for Ring-Bonk. — Pulverized cantharides, oils of sjjike, origanum, amber, cedar, Barbadoes tar, and British oil, of each 2 oz ; oil of wormwood, 1 oz. ; spirits turpentine, 4 oz. ; cunimon j)otash, ^ oz. ; nitric acid, 6 oz. ; sulphuric acid, 4 oz ; hird, 3 lbs. Melt the lard, and slowly add the acids ; stir well, and add the other articles, stirring till cold; clip off the liair, and apply by rubljing and heating in. In about 3 days, or wlien it is iloiu; riiiuiuig, wash off with soan-suds, and ti[)i)ly again. In old casi'.-t, it may take 3 or 4 weess ; but, in recent cases, 2 or 3 applications have cured. Another. — Pulverized cantliaridcs, oils of origanum and am))er, an, e.icli, 2 drams ; oil of anise, or pepDrrminl, 20 drops; pulverize and make all into one ball, with thick gum solution. Feed by giving scalded bran instead of oats, for two days before giving the physic, and duriug its operation. Piivsic FOR Cattle. — Take half only of the dose above for a horse, and add to it glaiibcr-salts, 8 oz. ; dissolve all in gruel, 1 quart, and give as a drench. HooF-AiL IN .Sheep. — Muriatic acid and butter of antimony, of each 2 oz. ; white vitriol, pulverized, 1 oz. ; mi.^. liift the foot, fMKJ drop a little of it on the bottom, only once or twice a week. It kills the old hoof, and a new one soon lakes its ]>lace. To Cultivate Toracco. — To raise tobacco, select a sheltered situation, where the young plants can receive the full force of the iun ; burn over the surface of the gifnind early in spring (new luiid is bfst), rako it well, and sow the seeds ■ have a, dry, mellovr, farmers' receipts. 29 rich soil, and after a shower, when the plants have got leaves the size of a quarter-dollar, transplant asyou would cabbage plants, 3J feet apart, and weed out carefully afterwards. Break off the suckers from the foot-stalks, as they appear; also the tops of the plants when they are well advanced, — say, about 3 feet high, — except those designed for seed, which should be the largest and best plants. The ripeness ot tobacco is known by small dusky spots appearing on the leaves. The plants should then be cut near the roots, on the morning of a day of sunshine, and should lie singly to wither. When sufficiently withered, place the plants in close heaps, under cover, to sweat 48 hours or more ; then hang them up under cover to dry. To Preserve Potatoes from Rot. — Dust over the floor of the bin with lime, and put in about 6 or 7 inches of potatoes, and dust with lime as before, then more potatoes, using about 1 bushel of lime to 40 bushels of potatoes. The lime improves the flavor of the potatoes, and effectually kills the fungi which causes the rot. An old veteran farmer, with 63 years' experience, has success- fully fought the potatoe rot in the ground, as follows. He plants them in the latter )iart of April, or beginning of May, and in the old of the moon. When six inches high, they are plastered and dressed out nicely. Now for the secret. When blossoming, take 2 parts plaster, and 1 ]iart fine salt, mix well together, and put 1 large spoonful of this compound as near the centre of each hill as possible. When ripe, take them out of the ground, have them dry when put in the cellar, and keep them in a dry, cool place. IPackixg Fruits for Long Distances. — Take a box of the proper size, soft paper, and sweet bran. Place a layer of bran on the bottom, then each bunch of grapes is held by the hand over a sheet of the paper ; the four corners of the paper are brought up to the stalk and nicely secured ; then laid on its side in the box, and so on until the first layer is finished. Then dust on a layer of bran, giving the box a gentle shake as you proceed. Begin the second layer as the first, and so on until the whole is full. The bloom of the fruit is thus preserved as fresh at the end of a journey of 500 miles as if they were newly taken from the tree. Never fails to preserve grapes, peaches, apricots and other fruit. To Sprout Onions. — Pour hot water on the seed, let it remain 2 or 3 seconds, and they will immediately sprout, and come up much earlier. To Renew Old Orchards. — Early in the spring, plough the entire orchard, aud enrich the whole soil with a good dressing of compost of manure, swamp-muck, and lime ; scrape off the old bark with a deck-scraper, or a sharp hoe ; apply half a bushel of lime, and the same of ground charcoal round each tree. Then apply diluted soft soap, or strong soap-suds, on the trunks and limbs, as high as a man can reach. When the trees are in full bloom, throw over them a good proportion of fine slacked lime, and you will reap abundant fruits from your labors. To" Destroy the Moth or Miller. — Dr. Waterman says, " I took t'^o white dishes (because white attracts their attention in the night) or deep plates, and placed them on the top of the hives, and filled them about half-full of sweetened vinegar. The next 30 farmers' receipts. morning I had about 50 miUers caught; the second night I caught 50 more ; the third night, being cold, I did not get any ; the fourtli night, being very warm, I caught about 400 j the fifth night I got about 200." To Keep Milk Sweet, and Sweeten Sour Milk. — Put into the milk a small quantity oi carbonate of magnesia. To MAKE Cheap and Good Vinegar. — To eight gallons of clear rain-water, add 6 quarts of molasses ; tiu-n the mixture into a clean, tight casli, shake it well two or three times, and add 1 pt. of good yeast. Place the cask in a warm place, and in ten or lifteen days add a sheet of common wrapping-paper, smeared with molasses, and torn into narrow strips ; and you will have good vinegar. The paper is necessary to form the " mother," or life of the liquor. Mr. Cullby's Red Salve, to core the Rot in Sheep. — Mix 4 oz. of the best honey, 2 oz. of burnt alum reduced to powder, and i a pound of Armenian bole, with as much train or fish oil as will convert these ingredients into the consistence of a salve. The honey must first be gradually dissolved, when the Armenian bole must be stirred in ; afterwards tlie alum and train-oil are to be added. To IMPROVE THE WooL OP Sheep, BY Smearing. — Immediately after the sheep are jhorn, soak the roots of the wool that remains all over with oil, or butter, and brimstone ; and, 3 or 4 days after- ward, wash them with salt and water. The wool of next season will not be mucli liner, but the quantity will be in greater abundance. It may be depended upon, that the sheep will not be troubled with the scab or vermin that year. Salt water is a safe and effectual remedy against maggots. To Mark Sueep without injury to the Wool. — To 30 spoonfuls of linseed oil, add 2 oz. of litliarge, and 1 oz of lampblack; boil all together, and mark the sheep therewith. To Prevent tub Fly tn Turnips. — From experiments lately made, it has been ascertained that lime sown by hand, or dis- tributed by a macliine, is an infallible protection to turnips against the ravages of this destructive insect. It should be applied as soon as the turnips come up, and in the same daily rotation in which they were sown. The lime should be slacked immediately before it is used, if the air be not sufficiently moist to render thaV oj)eratiou unnecessary. CoLouiNO FOR Cheese. — The coloring for cheese is, or at least should Ix;, Spanisii annotto; but, as soon as coloring became eneral in this country, a color of an adulterated kind was exposed or sale in almost every shop. The weigiit of a guinea and a half of real Spanisii annotto is sufficient f'wr a cheese of fifty ])ounds' weigiit. If a considerable ])arl of the cream of the nigiit's milk lie taken for liutter, more cohu-ing will be requisite. The leaner tlie cheese is, the more coloring it recpiires. Tiie manner of using annotto is to tie U|) in a linen rag tlie (piantity deemed sufficient, and put it into J jit. of warm water over night. Tliis infusion is jiiit into the tub of milk in the morning with the rennet infusion ; (lipjiing the rag into tlie milk, and ruliliing it against the ]talm of tin; liand as long as any color runs out. Tiie yolk of egg will color butler. f. DYERS AND BLEACHERS' RECEIPTS. 31 Composition for Driving out Rats, etc. — Keep on baud a quantity of chloride of lime. The whole secret consists in scatter- ing it dry all around their haunts and into their holes, and they will leave at once, or a 'iberal decoction of coal tar placed in the entrance of their holes will do as well. How to form Springs. — The finest springs can be made by boring, which is performed by forcing an iron rod into the earth by its own weight, turning it round, and forcing it up and down by a spring-pole contrivance. The water will sometimes spout up seve- ral feet above the surface. Lead pipes are put down in the hole after the water is found. Depressed situations, having a southern exposure, with rising ground towards the north, are the best situations in the United States or the Canadas to find water. To Burn Lime without a Kiln. — i\Iake a pyramidal pile of large limestones, with an arched furnace next the ground for putting in the fuel, leaving a narrow vent or funnel at the top ; now cover the whole pile with earth or turf, in the way that charcoal heaps are covered, and put in the fire. The heat will be more completely diffused through the pile, if the aperture in the top is partially closed. Produces a superior article of lime. Eye Water for Horses and Cattle. — Alcohol, 1 tablespoonful ; extract of lead, 1 teaspoonful ; rain water, ^ jjint. To Destroy Moss on Trees. — Paint them with white-wash made of quick lime and wood ashes. To Protect Fruit-trees from attack op Mice, etc. — Tar, 1 part ; tallow, 3 parts ; mix. Apply hot to the bark of the tree with a paint brush. To Prevent Decay of Farm Implements. — "When not in use, have them sheltered from the sun, wind, rain, and snow. By this means, sleighs, waggons, carts, ploughs, threshing-machines, har- rows, and the like, would last twice as long as they would if left in the open air, swelling from moisture one week, and shrinking the next, from the influence of the sun and wind. Oiling or Cleaning old CARRiAot-roPs. — Enamcd leather-tops should be first washed with Castile soap and warm water, then oiled with neat's foot oil ; or sweet oil and a coat of enamel varnish put on, the leather will look like new. Dashes may be cleaned in the same manner, but varnish color is not very beneficial to patent leather ; however, when old and cracked, it may be colored to improve the appearance. DYERS, BLEACHERS, AND CLOTHIERS' DEPARTMENT; Dyeing. — It may be necessary to remark, and I do it here once for all, that every article to be dyed, as well as everything used about dyeing, should be perfectly clean. In the next place, the article to be dyed should be well scoured in soap, and then the soaj) rinsed out. It is also an advantage to dip the article you wish to dye into warm water, just before put- 32 DYERS AND BLEACHERS' RECEIPTS. ting it into the alum or other preparation ; through neglect of this precaution, it is nothing uncommon to have the goods, or j-arn spotted. Soft water should always be used if possible, and suflB- cient to cover the goods handsomely. As soon as an article is dyed it should be aired a little, then well rinsed, and afterwards hung up to dry. When dyeing or scouring silk or merino dresses, care should be taken not to wring them ; for this has a tendency to wrinkle and break the silk. In putting the dresses and shawls out to dry, that have been dyed, they should be hung up by the edge so as to dry evenly. Chromb Black. — For Woollen Goooa. — For 5 lbs. of goods, blue vitriol, 6 oz. ; boil it a few minutes ; then dip the goods j ot' an hour, airing) often ; take out the goods, and make a dye with logwood, 3 lbs. ; boil ^ hour ; dip I of an hour, and air the goods, and dip I of an hour more. Wash in strong suds. This will not impart any of its color in fulling, nor fade by exposure to tiic sun. Black on Wool. — For Mixtires.— For 10 lbs. of wool, bichro- mate of potash, 4 oz. ; ground argal, 3 oz. ; boil together, and put in the wool ; stir well, and let it remain in the dye 4 hours. Then take out the wool, rinse it slightly in clear water ; then make a new dye, into which put logwood, 3^ lbs. Boil 1 hour, and add chamber-lye, 1 pt., and let the wool lie in all night. Wash in clear water. Steel mixed. — Dark. — Black wool, it may be natural or colored, 10 lbs. ; white wool, IJ lbs. Mix evenly together, and it will be beautiful. Snuff Brown.— Dark, for Cloth or Wool. — For 5 lbs. goods, camwood, I lb. ; boil it 15 minutes, then dip the goods for J of an hour; take out the goods, and add to the dye, fuiJtic, 2h lbs. ; boil 10 minutes, and dipthe goods I hour; then add blue vilriol. 1 oz. ; copperaa, 4 oz. ; dip again J hour ; if not dark enough, add more copperas. It is dark and permanent. Wine Color. — For .'> lbs. goods, camwood, 2 lbs. ; boil 15 min- utes ; then dip the goods for J hour ; boil again, and dip \ hour ; then darken with blue vitriol, \\ oz. ; if not dark enough, add copperas, ^ oz. Madder Red. — To each lb. of goods, alum, 5 oz. ; red, or cream of tartar, 1 oz. ; jait in the good.s, and bring your kettle to a boil for J an hour ; then air them, boil ^ hour longer ; then empty your kettle, and fill with clean water ; put in bran, 1 pk. ; make it milk warm, and let it stand until the bran rises; tlien skim off the bran, and put in madder, ^ lb.; j)ut in your goods, and heat slowly until it boils and is done. Wash in strong suds. Green. — On Wool or Silk, with Oak Bark. — Make a strong yellow dye of yellow oak and hickory bark in C(|ual (|iianiitie3. Add the extract of in DVERS AND BLEACHERS' RECEIPTS. in, let the .bottle stand until the ebullition subsides ; then stoii it up with a bees'-wax or glass stopper, and set it away ; and it will keep good fur a year or more, or will be fit for use iir24 hours. Green. — Very Handsome with Oak Bahk. — For 1 lb. of silk, yellow oak bark, 8 oz. ; boil it j hour ; turn off the liquor froni the bark, and add alum, 6 oz , let stand until cold ; while this dye is being made, color the goods in the blue dye-tub, a light blue ; dry, and wash ; then dip in the alum and bark dye ; if it does not take well, warm the dye a little GUI' EN OR Yellow — On Silk or Wool, in Fm? to Fifteen Minutes. — For 5 lbs. of goods, black oak bark or peach leaves. ^■ peck; boil well; then take out the bark or leaves, and add muri- ate of tin, ^- teacup, stirring well ; then put in the goods and stir them round, and it will dye a deep yellow in from 5 to 1.") minutes, according to the strength of the bark ; take out the goods, rinse, and dry immediately. N.B. — For a green, add to the above dye extract of indigo, or chemic, 1 tablespoon only at a time, and work the goods 5 min- U'.es, and air; if not suificiently dark, use the same amount of chemic as before, and work again until it suits. Mulberry. — For 1 lb. of silk, alum, 4 oz. ; dip 1 hour ; wash out, and make a dye with Brazil wood, 1 oz ; and logwood, J oz. ; by builing together; dip in this ^ hour, then add mure Brazil wood and logwood, in equal proportions, until the color is dark enough. Black. — Make a weak dye as you would for black on woollens, work the goods in bichromate of potash, at a little below boiling heat, then dip in the logwood in the same way; if colored in ihe blue vitriol dye, use about the same heat. Si'OTS — To Remove and Prevent when Coloring Black on Silk or Woollen. — N.B. In dyeing silk or woollen goods, it they should become rusty or sjiotted, all that is necessary is to make a wiak lye, and have it scalding hot, and juit your goods in for 15 minutes; or ihrow some ashes into your dye, an0 druggist's receipts. ' For Cnnoxic Female Complaints.— White vitriol and sugar of lead, each, ^ oz. ; common salt, pulverized alum, aud loaf sugar, each, ^ dr. ; soft water, 1 pt. Inject as above. Fou Prelapscs uteri, or Falling of the Womb. — Not only the cheapest but the best support v,'i\\ be found to be a piece of fine tirm sponge, cut to a proper size, to admit when danip of being l)res3ed up the vagina to hold the womb in its place. The sponge should have a stout ])iece of small cord sowed 2 or 3 times through its centre, up and down, and left sufficiently long to allow its being taken hold of to remove the sponge, once a day, or every other day at the farthest, for the purpose of washing, cleaning, and using the necessary injections ; and this must be done while the * patient is lying down, to prevent the womb from again falling or prolapsing. After having injected some of the above tea, wet the sponge in the same, and introduce it sufficiently high to hold the womb in its place. If pain is felt about the head, back, or loins for a few days before the menses appear, prepare and use the fol- lowing : EMMENAGoorE TiNCTCRE. — Alcoliol, 1 pt. ; rcd oxide of iron, 1 oz. ; oils of juniper and savin, each i oz. ; oil of tansey, 1 dr. ; tincture of ergot, 3 drs.; tincture Spanish hies, ^ oz. ; mix all, and shake when taken. Dose, 1 teaspoon 3 times daily, to be taken in mueilage of slipperj- elm or gum arabic, and drink freely of the mucilage also through the day, or use the following : PlMMKN'Ar.oouE PiLL. — Prccipitatcd carbonate of iron and gum myrrli, of each 2 drs. ; aloes and tincture of Sjianish flies, of each 1 dr. ; and oil of savin, 1 dr. ; all to be pulverized, and made into 100 pills by using thick gum solution. Dose, 1 pill, from 1 to 3 times daily, but not to move the bowels too much. Uterine JIemouriiages. — Unfailing cure. Sugar of lead, 10 grs.; ergot, 10 grs.; opium, 3 grs.; ipecac, 1 gr. ; all jiulverized and well mixed. Dose, 10 to 12 grs. ; given m a little honey or syrup. In very bad cases after cliildbirth, it might be repeated in 30 minutes, or the dose increased to \5 or 18 grs. ; but in cases of ra- ther profuse wasting, rejieat it once at the end of 3 hours, or as the urgency of the case may require. In every case of female dibilily make a liberal use of iron, as the want of iron in the system is often the cause of the trouble. Mix fine iron tilings with as much ground ginger. Dose, half of a tea- spoon 3 times daily in a little honey or molasses, increasing or lessening the dose to produce ..blackness of the stools. Continue this course until avcU. Neuve and Bone Liniment. — Beef's gall. 1 qt. ; alcohol, 1 pt. ; vo- latile liniment, 1 lb. ; .spts. of turpentine, 1 lb. ; oil origanum, 4 oz. ; aqua ammonia. 4 oz. ; tincture oi cayenne, ^ pt. ; oil of amber, 3 oz. ; tincture Spanish fiiec, C oz. ; mix well. Cephalic Sni'Kf. — Take asaraltacca leaves, marjoram, light Scotch snuff, equal i)arls; grind them and sift, use like common snuff. Downeu'b Saj.ve. — Beeswax, 4 oz. ; opium, ^ oz. ; sugar of lead, ] oz ; melt the lieeswax, and rub the lead up in the wax, then the opium, then ] gill of .sweet oil, incorporate all tiioroughly to- gether, spread litrhtly on cloth ; good for burns, pileS; &c. druggist's receipts. 51 Another Salve.— Burgundy pitch, beeswax, white pine pitch, and rosin, 1 oz. each, mutton tallow, 8 oz. ; goose oil, 1 gill, tar 1 gill, melt and mix thoroughly. A first-rate salve. ' Whooping Cough Sykup.— Best rum, 1 pt. ; anise oil, 2 ozs. ; honey, i pt. ; lemon juice, 4 oz., mix. Dose for adults, 1 table- spoonful, 3 or 4 tmies per day ; children 1 teaspoon, with sugar and water. Liquid Opodeldoc. — Warm brandy, 1 qt. ; add to it gum cam- phor, 1 oz. ; sal ammoniac, i oz. ; oils of origanum and rosemary each i oz. ; oil wormwood, i oz. ; when the oils are dissolved, add 6 oz. soft soap. Green Mountain Salve.— For rheumatism, burns, pains in the back or side, &c., take 2 lbs. rosin b ^rgundy pitch, i lb. ; bees- wax, ^ lb.; mutton tallow, ^ lb. ; melt slowly ; when not too warm, add oil hemlock, 1 oz. ; balsam fir, 1 oz ; oil of origanum, 1 oz. ; oil of red cedar, 1 oz ; Venice turpentine, 1 oz. ; oil of wormwood, 1 oz. ; verdigris, ^ oz. The verdigris must be finely pulverized and mixed with the oils ; then add as above, and work in cold water like wax till cold enough to roll ; rolls 5 inches long, 1 inch diameter, sell for 25 cents. English Remedy for Cancer.— Take chloride of zinc, blood- root pulverized, and tiour, equal quaurities of each, worked into a paste and applied. Fkst spread a common sticking-plaster muck larger than the cancer, cutting a circular piece from the centre of it a httle larger than the cancer, applying it, which exposes a narrow rim of healthy skin ; then apply the cancer plaster, and keep it on 24 hours. On removing it, the cancer will be found to be burned into, and appears the color of an old shoe-sole, and the rim outside will appear white and parboiled, as if burned bv steam. Dress with slippery elm poultice until suppuration takes place, then heal with any common salve. Chronic Gout — To Cure— Take hot vinegar, and put into it all the table salt which it will dissolve, and baihe the parts affected with a soft piece of flannel. Rab in with the hand, and dry the foot, &c., by the fire. Repeat this operation four times in the 24 hours, 15 minutes each time, for four days ; then twice a day for the same period ; then once, and follow this rule whenever the symptoms show themselves at any future time. Gout Tincture.— Veratrum viride (swamp hellebore), i oz. ; opium, I oz. ; wine, i pt. ; let them stand for several days. Dose, 15 to 30 drops, according to the robustness of the patient, at inter- vals of 2 to 4 hours. Paralytic Linlment. — Sulphuric ether, 6 oz. ; alcohol, 2 oz. ; laudanum, 1 oz. ; oil of lavender, 1 oz.'; mix, and cork tightly. In a recent case of paralysis let the whole extent of the numb surface be thoroughly bathed and rubbed'Avith this preparation, for several minutes, using the hand, at least three times daily ; at the same time take internally, 20 drops of the same, in a lit le sweetened water, to prevent translation upon some internal organ. Charcoal a Cure for Sick Headache. — It is stated that 2 tea spoons of finely powdered charcoal, drank in J a tumbler of water will, in less than fifteen inioiites, give relief to the sick headache, 52 druggist's receipts. when caused, as in most cases it is, by superabundance of acid on the stomach. We have frequently tried this remedy, and its eilicdcy in every instance has been signally satisfactory. Cathartic Syrup. — Best senna leaf, 1 oz. ; butternut, the inner bark of the root, dried and bruised, '2oz. ; peppermint leaf, ^ oz. ; fenni^l seed, ^ oz. ; alcohol, 2 pt. ; water, Ij pts. ; sugar, 2 lbs. ; put all into the spirit and water, except the sugar, and let it stand two weelis, then strain, pressing out from the dregs, adding the sugar and simmering a tew minutes only, to form the syrup. If it should cause griping in any case, increase the fennel seed and pepper- mint leaf. Dose, 1 tablespoon, once a day, or less often if the bowels become too loose, up to the next period when the headache might have been expected, and it will not be forthcoming. Chilblains. — To Cure. — Mutton tallow and lard, of each i lb.; melt in an iron vessel, and add hydrated oxyde of iron, 2 oz. ; stirring continually with an iron spoon, until the ma.^s is ot a uniform black color; then let it cool, and add Venice turpentine, 2 oz. ; Armenian bole, 1 oz. ; oil of bergamot, 1 dr. ; rub up the bole with a little olive oil before putting it in. Felons. — If Recent, to Cure in Six Hours. — Venice turpentine, 1 oz ; and put into it half a teaspoon of water, and stir with a rough stick until the mass looks like candied honey; then spread a good coat on a cloth, and wrap around tlie finger. If the case is only recent, it will remove the pain in six hours. Fklon Salve. — A salve made by burning one tablespoon of copperas, then pulverizing it and mixing it with the yolk of an egg, is said to relieve the pain, and cure the felon in 24 hours ; tjje.i heal with cream two parts, and soft soap one part. Apply the healing salve daily after soaking the part in warm water. Felon Ointment. — Take sweet oil, ^ pt., and stew a 3-cent plug of tobacco in it until the tobacco is crisped; then squeeze it out, and add red lead, 1 oz. ; and boil until black ; when a little cool, add pulverized camphor gum, I oz. Wakts and Corns. — To Cure in Ten Minutes. — Take a small piece of potash, and let it stand in tlie open air until it slacks, then thicken it to a paste with pulverized gum arable, which pre- vents it from spreading where it is not wauled. Gkhman IiuEU.MATic Fluid. — Oils of hemlock and cedar, of each i oz. , oils of origanum and sassafras, each 1 oz. ; aqua ammonia, 1 oz i capsicum pulverized, 1 oz. ; spirits of turpentine and gum (!ainplior, eacli ^ oz. ; put all into a quart bottle, and fill with 9.5 \ier cent alcohol. Uuse, for colic, for man, half a teaspoonful ; for a horse, ^ to 1 oz., \n a little warm water, evety 15 minutes, till relieved. Liniment for Old Sores. — Ale >hol, 1 qt. ; aqua ammonia, 4 oz. ; oil of origanum, 2 oz, ; fani])hoi gum, 2 oz. ; opium, 2 oz. ; gum myrrh, 2 oz. ; ci mmoii salt, two tablespoons. Mix, and shake occa- sioiiaily for a week. Liniment.— Good Samaritan. — Take 98 per cent, alcohol, 2 qts.-, and add to it liie following articles : Oils of suasafra.-5, hemlock, sjiints of turi)Cnliue, tincture of cayenne, catechu, guaiac (guac), and laudanum, of each, 1 oz. ; tincture of myrrh, 4 oz. ; oil oforig.'i- liuni, - z ; "il of wiitcrgrceu, ^ oz. ; gum camphor. 2 oz. ; and _-— ^ druggist's receipts. 53 chloroform, 1 J oz. This is one of the best applications for internal pains known : it is superior to any other enumerated in this ■work. Cook's Electro-Magnetic Liniment. — Best alcohol, 1 gal. ; oil of amber, 8 oz. ; gum camphor, 8 oz. ; Castile soap, shaved fine, 2 oz. ; beef's gall, 4 oz. ; ammonia, 3 F.'s strong, 12 oz. ; mix, and shake occasionally for 12 hours, and it is fit for use. This will be found a strong and valuable liniment. London Liniment. — Take chloroform, olive oil, and aqua ammo- nia, of each 1 oz. ; acetate of morphia, 10 grs. Mix and use as other liniments. Very valuable. Ointments. — For Old Sores. — Red precipitate, § oz. ; sugar of lead, i oz. ; burnt alum, 1 oz. ; white vitriol, i oz., or a little less ; all to be very finely pulverized ; have mutton tallow made warm, J lb. ; stir all in, and stir until cool. Judkin's Ointment. — Linseed oil, 1 pt. ; sweet oil, 1 oz. ; and boil them in a kettle on coals for nearly 4 hours, as warm as you can ; then have pulverized and mixed borax, ^ oz. ; red lead, 4 oz. ; and sugar of lead, IJ oz.; remove the kettle'from the fire, and thicken in the powder ; continue the stirring until cooled to blood heat, then stir in 1 oz. of spirits of turpentine ; and now take out a little, letting It get cold, and if not then'sufficiently thick to spread upon, thin soft linen as a salve, you will boil again until this point ia reached. It is good for all kinds of wounds, bruises, sores, burns, white swellings, rheumatisms, ulcers, sore breasts ; and even where there are wounds on the inside, it has been used with advantage, , by applying a plaster over the part. ' Green Oihtuent. — Honey and bees'-wax, each J lb. ; spirits of turpentine, 1 oz. ; wintergreen oil and laudanum, each 2 oz. ; ver- digris, finely pulverized, i oz. ; lard, IJ lb. ; mix by a stove fire, ia a copper kettle, heating slowly. Mead's Salt-Rheum Ointment. — Aquafortis, 1 oz.; quicksilver, 1 oz. ; good hard soap, dissolved so as to mix readily, 1 oz. ; pre- pared chalk, 1 oz. ; mixed with 1 lb. of lard ; incorporate the above bj' putting the aquafortis and quicksilver into an earthen vesse\^ and when done efFervescing, mix with the other ingredients, put. ting the chalk in last ; add a little spirits of turpentine, say ^ table- spoon. Itch Ointment. — Unsalted butter, 1 lb. ; burgundy pitch, 2 oz. ; spirits of turpentine, 2 oz. ; red precipitate, pulverized, U oz. ; melt the pitch and add the butter, stirring well together ; then re- move from the fire, and when a little cool add the spirits of tur- pentine, and lastly the precipitate, and stu- until cold. Magnetic Ointment. — Said to be Trask's. — Hard raisins cut 'A pieces, and fine-cut tobacco, equal weights ; simmer well together, then strain, and press out all from the dregs. Jaundice. — In its Worst Forms. — Red iodide of mercury, 7 grs. iodide of potassium, 9 grs. ; aqua dis. (distilled water) 1 oz. ; mix. Commence by giving 6 drops 3 or 4 times a day, increasing 1 drop a day until 12 or 15 drops are given at a dose. Give in a little water, immediately after meals. If it causes a griping sensation in the bowels, and fulness in the head, when you get up to 12 or 15 drops, go back to 6 drops, and up again as before. 54: druggist's receipts. t Inflajijjatouy Rheciiatism. — Sulphur and saltpetre, of each 1 L.oz. ; gum guaiac, i oz. ; colchicum root, or seed, and nutmegs, of ^eaeh J oz. ; all to be pulverized and mixed with simple syrup, or molasses, 2 oz. Dose, one teaspoon every 2 hours until it moves the bowels rather freely; then 3 or 4 times daily until cured. ■Remsq^ J?9b Rheumatism and Stiff Joints. — Strong camphor ■ispiribs, 1 pt. ; neat's-foot, coon, bear, or skunk's oil, 1 pt. ; spirits of turpentine, ^ pt^ Shake the bottle when used, and apuly 3 times daily, by pouring on a little at a time, and rubbing in all you can for 20 01 30 min^tss. AsTiijiA REMBDms. — Elecampane, angelica, comfrey, and spike- nard roots wUh hoarhound tops, of each 1 oz. ; bruise and steep in honey, 1 pt. Dose, a tablespoon, taken hot every few minutes, until relief js obtained, then several times daily until a cur« is effected. ANOTHEE.---0il of tar, 1 dr. ; tincture of veratrum viride, 2 drs. ; simple syrup, 2 drs. ; mix. Dose, for adults, 15 drops 3 or 4 limes daily. Iodide of potassium has cured a bad case of asthma by taking 5 gr. doses 3 times daily. Take j oz. and put it into a phial, and add 32 teaspoons of water ; then 1 teaspoon of it will contain the 5 grs., which put into J gill more water, and drink before «ieals. Composition Powder — Thompson's. — Bayberry bark, 2 lbs. ; hem- lock bark, 1 lb. ; giuger root, 1 lb.; cayenne pepper, 2 oz. ; cloves^2 oz. ; all liuely pulverized and well mixed. Dose, i a teaspoon of it, and a spoon of sugar ; put them into a tea-cup, and pour it half full of boiling water ; let it stand a few minutes, and fill the cup with mdk, and drink freely. If no milk is to he obtained, fill up the »up with hot water. Frekch Remedy fob Chronic Rheumatism.— Dr. Bonnet, of Graul- betjlFrance, states in a letter to the" Abeille Medicale," that lie lias been long in the habit of prescribing " the essential oil of turpentine by friction for rheumatism ; and that he has used it himself with perfect success, having almost instantaneously got rid of rheumatic pains in both knees and in the left shoulder." Diuretics — Pills, Duors, Decoction, &c. — Solidified copaiba, 2 parts ; alcoholic extract of cubebs, 1 part ; formed into i)ills with a little oil of juniper. Dose, 1 or 2 pills 3 or 4 times daily. This pill lias been found very valuable iuafTectious of the kidneys, bladder, and urethra, as mllammatiou from gravel, gonorrhoea, gleet, whites, leiioorrhaea, common inflammations, &c. For giving them a sugar coat, see that heading, if desired. Dwiiicvw Diu)i'8. — Oil of cubebs, i or,.; sweet spirits of nitre, J oz.; balsam of eopaiba, 1 oz. ; Harlem oil, 1 bottle ; oil of lavender, 20 drops ; spirit*, of turpentine, 20 drops ; mix. Dose, 10 to 25 droi)S, as tiie stomuch -will bear, three times daily. It may be used in any of the above diseases with great satisfac- tion. Diuretic Tincture. — Green or growing spearmint mashed, put into a l)ollle, and covered witli gin, is an excellent diuretic. DiunEric for Childrbn. — Spirits of nitre — a few di-oj)s in a little Hpeannint te.-i — is all sufficient. For very young children, jjumpkiu-secd, or watcr-mcloo seed tea is perhaps the best. ; druggist's receipts. 54vav and French lavender of e.ich 2 oz druggist's receipts. 5'5 Dropsy. — Syrup and Pills. — Queen-of-the-meadow root dwarf- elder tlowers, berries, or inner bark, juniper berries, horse-radish root, pod milkweed, or silkwced, often called, root of each, 4 oz. ; prickly-ash bark or berries, mandrake root, bittersweet bark, of the root of «ach, 2 oz. ; white-mustard seed, 1 oz. ; Holland gin, 1 pt. Pour boiling water upon all except the gin, and keep hot for 12 hours ; then boil and pour off twice, and boil down to 3 qls., and strain, adding 3 lbs. of sugar, and lastly the gin. Dose, take all the stomach will bear, say a wine glass a day, or more. Dropsy Pills. — Jalap, 50 grs. ; gamboge, 30 grs. ; podophyllin,^ 20 grs. ; elatarium, 12 grs. ; aloes, 30 grs. ; cayenne, 35 grs. ; Castile soap, shaved and pulverized, 20 grs. ; crotou oil, 90 drops ; powder all finely, and mix thoroughly ; then form into pill mass, by using a thick mucilage made of equal parts of gum arable and gum tragacauth, and divide in three-grain pills. Dose, 1 pill every 2 da3's for the first Aveek ; then every 3 or 4 days, until the wat^r is evacuated by the combined aid of the pill with the alum syrup. This is a powerful medicine, and will thoroughly accomplish its Avork. Liver Pill. — Leptandrin, 40 grs. ; podophyllin and cayenne, 30 grs. each ; sanguinarin, iridin, and ipecac, 15 grs. each ; see that ull are pulverized and well mixed ; then form into pill mass by using i dr. of the soft extract of mandrake and a few drops of anise oil, then roll out into three- grain pills. Dose, 2 pills taken at bed-time will generally operate by morning ; but some persons- require 3. Irritating Plaster. — Extensively Used by Eclectics. — Tar, 1 lb. ; burgundy pitch, ^ oz. ; white-jjiue turpentine, 1 oz. ; resin, 2 oz. Boil the tar, resin, and gum together a short time, remove from the fire, and stir in fiaely pulverized mandrake root, blood root, poke root, and Indian turnip, of eachj, 1 oz. Pills. — To Sugar Coat. — Pills to be sugar coated must be very dry, otherwise they will shrink away from the coating, and leave it a shell easilj' crushed off. When they are dry, you will take starchj gum arable, and white sugar, equal parts, rubbing them very fine in a marble mortar, and if damp, they must be dried before rubbing together ; then put the powder into a suitable pan, or box, for shaking; now i)ut a few pills into a small tin box having a cover, and pour on to them just a little simple syrup, shakmg well to moisten the surface only ; then throw into the box of powdei", and keep in motion until completely coated, dry, and smooth. If you are not very careful, you will get too much syrup upon the pills ; if you do, put in more, and be quick about it to prevent moistening the pill too much, getting them into the powder as soon us possible. Positive Cure for Hydrophobia. — The dried root of elecampane, pulverize it, and measure out 9 heaping Ltablespuoufuls, and mix it with 2 or 3 teaspoonfuls of pulverized gum arable ; then divide into 9 equal portions. When a person is bitten by a rabid animal, is.ke one of these portions, &nd steep it in 1 pt. of new milk, until nearly half the quantity of milk is evaporated ; then strain, and drink it in the morning, fasting for 4 or 5 hours after. The same 5G druggist's receipts. dose is to be repeated 3 ruorQiugs in succession, then skip 3, and so on, until the 9 doses are taken. The patient must avoid getting wet, or the heat of the sun, and abstain from high-seasoned diet, or hard exercise, and, if costive, take a dose of salts. The above quantity is for an adult ; children Avill take less according to age. E\'E Preparatio.vs. — Eye \Vater. — Table salt and white vitriol, of each I tablespoon; heat them upon copperplates or in earthea Avare until dry; the hcuiiug drives off the acrid water, called the Avater of crystallization, making ihem much milder in their action; now add to them soft Avater i pi. ; putting in white sugar^ 1 table- .spoon ; blue vitriol, a jjiece the size of a common pea. If it should jirove too strong in any case, add a little more soft water to a phial of it. Api)ly it to the eyes 3 or 4 times daily. India Pkescription for Sore Eyes. — Sulphate of zinc, 3 grs. ; titicture of opium (laudanum), 1 dr. ; rose water, 2 oz. ; mii. Put a drop or two in the eye, 2 or 3 times daily. Axotuer. — Sulphate of zinc, acetate of lead, and rock salt, of each ^ oz. ; loaf sugar, 1 oz. ; soft water, 12 oz. ; mil without heat, and use as other ej^e waters. If sore eyes shed mucli water, put a little of the oxide of zinc into a phial of water, and use it rather freely. This will soon effect a cure. Copperas and water has cured sore eyes of long standing ; and used quite strong, it makes an excellent application in erysipelas. I.\DiA.\ Eye Water. — Soft water, 1 pt. ; gum arable, I oz. ; white vitriol, 1 oz. ; tine salt, I teaspoon ; put all into a bottle, and shake until dissolved. Put into the eye just as you retire to bed. Black Oil. — Best alcohol, tincture of arnica, British oil, and oil of tar, of each 2 oz. ; and slow/;/ add suli)huric acid, i oz. These black oils are getting into e.vtensive use as a liniment, and arc indeed valuable, especially in cases atteuded with much inflam- mation. Vermifuge Loze.nges. — Santonin. 60 grs. ; pulverized sugar, 5 oz.; mucilage of gum iragacaulh, sutlicient to make into a thick paste, worked carefully together, that the Siiutonia shall be evenly mixeu throughout the whole mass; then, if not in too great a hurry, cover uj) tlie mortar in which you have rubbed them, and let stand from 12 to 24 hours to temper; at which time they will roll out better than if done immediately ; divide into 120 lozenges. Dose, for a child 1 year old, 1 lozenge, night and morning ; of 2 years, 2 lozenges; oT 4 years, 3 ; of 8 years, 4; of lo years or more, 5 to 7 lozenges ; in all cases, to be taken twice daily, and continuing unlil the worms start on a voyage of discovery. IIarlkm Oil or Welsh .Medicame.stim. — Sulilinied or flowers of siiljihur and oil of amber, of each 2 oz. ; linseed oil, 1 lb. ; spirits of turi>entine siiflieienl to reduce all to the consistence of thin molasses. Boil the sulphur in the linseed oil until it is dissolved, tiien add the oil of amber and turiientiuc. Dose, from 15 to 25 dropH, morning and evening. Amongst the Wehh ami Germans it is extensively used for Bfrengllieiiing the stomach, kidnVys, liver, and lungs; for asthma, Bhorlue.s.j of breath, C(jugh, inward or outward sores, dropsy, druggist's receipts. 57 worms, gravel, fevers, palpitation of the heart, giddiness, head- ache, &c., by taking it internally ; and for ulcers, malignant sores, cankers, &c., anointing externally, and wetting linen with it, and applying to burns. Egyptian "Cure for Cholera. — Best Jamaica ginger root, bruis- ed, 1 oz. ; cayenne, 2 teaspoons ; boil all in 1 qt. of water to ^ pt., and add "loaf sugar to form a thick syrup. Dose, 1 table- spoon every 15 minutes, until vomiting and purging ceases ; then lollow up with a blackberry tea. Indian Prescription for Cholera. — First dissolve gum camphor, J oz., in 1^ oz. of alcohol; second, give a teaspoon of spirits of hartshorn in a wine glass of water, and follovi^ it every 5 minutes with 15 drops of the camphor in a teaspoon of water, tor 3 doses; then wait 15 minutes, and commence again as befor« ; and con- tinue the camphor for 30 minutes, unless there is returning heat. Should this be the case, give one more dose, and the cure is effect- ed ; let them perspire freely (which the medicine is designed to cause), as upon this the life depends, but add no additional clothing. Isthmus Cholera Tincture.— Tincture of rhubarb, cayenne, opium, and spirits of camphor, with essence of peppermint, equal parts of each, and each as strong as can be made. Dose, from 5 to 30 drops, or even to GO, and repeat, until relief is obtained, every 5 to 30 minutes. King of Oils, for Xeuralsia and RHEtraiATisM. — Burning fluid, 1 pt. ; oils of cedar, hemlock, sassafras, aad origanum, of each 2 oz. ; carbonate of ammonia, pulverized, 1 oz. ; mix. Directions. — Apply freely to the nerve and gums around the tooth ; and to the face, "in neuralgic pains, by wetting brown paper and laying on the parts, not too long, for fear of blistering, — to the nerves of teeth by lint. Neuralgia. — Internal Remedy. — Sal-ammoniac, J dr., dissolve in water, 1 oz. Dose, one tablespoon every 3 minutes, for 20 minutes, at the end of which time, if not before, the pain will have disappeared. Artificial Skin. — For Burns. Bruises, Abrasions, &c. — Proof AGAINST Water. — Take gun cotton and Venice turpentine, equal parts of each, and dissolve them in 20 times as much sulphuric ether, dissolving the cotton first, then adding the turpentine ; keep it corked tightly. AVater does not affect it, hence its value for cracked nipples, chapped hands, surface bruises, &c., &c. Indian Balsam. — Clear, pale rosin, 3 lbs., and melt it, adding spirits of turpentine, 1 qt. , balsam of tolu, 1 oz. ; balsam of fir, 4 oz. ; oil of hemlock, origanum, with Venice turpentine, of each, 1 oz. ; strained honev, 4 oz. ; mix well, and bottle. Dose, 6 to 12 droj)s ; for a child of six, 3 to 5 drops, on a little sugar. The dose can be varied according to the ability of the stomach to bear it, and the necessity of the case. It is a valuable preparation for coughs, internal pains, or strains, and works benignly upon the kidneys. Wens — To Cure. — Dissolve copperas in water to make it very strong ; now take a pin, needle, or sharp knife, and prick, or cut the wen in about a dozen places, just sufficient to cause it to 58 druggist's receipts. bleed ; then Mvet it thoroughly ■with the copperas -water, once daily. BaoscHOCELB. — E>LABGED Neck. — To CcRE.— lodldc of potassium (often called hydriodate of potash), 2 drs. ; iodme, I dr. ; walcr. 2 J oz. ; mix and shake a few minutes, and pom- a little into u pliial for internal use. Dose, 5 to 10 drops before each meal, to be taken in a little -water. External AprLicATiox.— With a feather, -wet the enlarged neck, from the other bottle, night and morning until -well. It will cause the scarf skin to peel off several times before the cure is perfect, leaving it tender, but do not omit the application more than one day at most, and you may rest assured of a cure, if a cure can be peribrmed by any means -whatever. Dalbv's CAiiiiixATivE.— Magnesia, 2 drs. ; oil peppermint, 3 drops ; oil nutmeg, 7 drops; oil anise, 9 drops; tincl. of castor, li drs.; tinct. of assafoetida, 45 drops ; tinct. of opium, 18 drops ; essence I)enqy-royal, 50 drops; tinct. of cardamoms, 05 drops ; peppermint water, 7 oz. : mix. Positive Cl-re for Diarrh(ea. — Take 2 -wine glasses of vinegar, and one tablespoonful of salt. Mix the -svhole thoroughly to dissolve the salt. Add 7 to 10 drops of laudanum, according to the age or strength of the i)atient, and give the whole at one dosn. Cure FOR Ague. — Cut three lemons into thin slices and jiouud them with a mallet, then take enough coffee to make a quart, boil it down to a pint and pour it while quite hot over the lemonj. Let it stand till cold, then strain through a cloth, and take the -whole at one dose, immediately after the chill is over, and beJoi'S the fever comes on. To Imi'hon-e the Voice. — Beeswax, 2 drs. ; copaiba balsam, 3 drs. ; ])0wder of liquorice root, 4 drs. ; melt the copaiba balsam with the wax in a new earthen pipkin ; when melted, remove them from the fire, and mix in the jiowder ; make the i)ills of 3 grs. each. Two of these pills to be taken occasionally, 3 or 4 times a day. A'ery best known. jSi(?ns of Disease in Children. — In the case of a baby not yet able to talk, it must cry when it is ill. The colic makes a baby cry loud, long, and passionately, and shed tears — stoi>ping for u moment and beginning again. If the chest is affected, it gives one sharp cry, breaking offimme- diately, as if crying hurt it. If the head is affected, it cries, in sharp, pierciny shrieks, with low moans and wails beliceen. Or there may be quiet dozing, and slart- iugs between. It is easy enough to perceive, where a child is attacTted by dis- ease, that there is some cliange taking ])lace ; for either its skin will be dry and hot, its up|)elite gone ; it is stupidly sleepy, or fretful and crying; it is thirsty, or i)ale and languid, or in some way betrays that something is wrong. When a child vomits, or has a d.arrLtua, or is costive and feverish, it is owing to some derangement, and needs attention. But these various symptoms may continue lor a day or two before the nature of the di.'sense can be determined. A wanii butd, warm drinks, etc., can do no harm, and may help to delermiut; the case. Uu coming out of the bath, and being well druggist's receipts. 59 rubbed with the hand, the ckiu will show symptoms of rash, if it is a skin disease which has commenced. By the appearance of the rash, the nature of the disease can be learned. Measles are in j)atches, dark red, and come out first about the face. If scarlet fever is impending, the skin will look a deep pink all over the body, though most so about the neck and face. Chicken-pox shows fever, but not so much running at the nose, and appearances of cold, us in measles, nor is there as much of a cough. Besides, the spots are smaller, and do not run much together, and are more dififused over the whole surface of the skin ; and enlarge into little blisters in a day or two. Let the room where the child is sick be shady, quiet, and cool. Be careful not to speak so suddenly as to startle the half-sleeping jiatient, and handle it with the greatest tenderness when it is neces- tary to move it. If it is the lungs that suflfer, have the little patient somewhat elevated upon the pillows for easier breathing, aud do everything to soothe and make it comfortable, so as not to have it cry, and thus distress its inflamed lungs. If the child is very \\ eak, do not move it too suddenly, as it may be startled into con- vulsions. In administering a bath, the greatest pains must be taken not to frighten the child. It should be put in so gradually,- and so amused by something placed in the water on purpose as to forget its fear ; keep up a good supply of fresh air, at a tempera- ture of about 60*^ Fah. If-a hu'cd nurse must be had, select if possi- ble a woman of intelligence, gentle and loving disposition, kind and amiable manners, and of a most pacific, um-ufHed, and even temper. If a being can be got possessed of these angelic qualities, aud we believe there are many such, you will be quite safe in intrusting to her care the management of your sick child, or j'ourself either, in case of sickness. She should not be under twenty-five nor over fifty -five, as between these two ages she will, if healthy, be in her full strength and capacity. Hooping Cough. — To empty the child's stomach by a lobelia emetic, is the first step. After this make a syrup of sugar, ginger- root, a little water, and enough lobelia tincture to produce a slight nausea. This, given two or tlirec times a day, will loosen the cough very much. For croup remedy, see '• Lock jaw cure," and " Croup cure." DiAREHCEA. — Nothing is better for looseness of the bowels than tea made of ground bavberry. Sweeten it well, and give a half- teacupfui once in two lioiirs, tmtil the child is better. Bathing Inust not be neglected. Colic. — This can be cured with warm injections, of simple soap- tuds, or warm water Avith a warming tincture in it. A little warm tea may be given at the same time, and the bowels rubbed. Every lamiiy should have a small aud large syringe. Nothing is oftenec needed, particularlj- in the care of children. Fever. — Where a child has a simple fever from teething, or any other cause not connected with acute disease, give a teaspoonful cf syrup of rhubarb, a warm injection, and sponge-baths. These will generally be all that is needed. Rickets and Scrofula.— If children have either of these, or both these diseases, » good, nutritive diet is a great essential. k 60 druggist's RECEinS. Then the alkaline-bath, a little lime-water, say a teaspoon- ful three times a day, and out-door exercise, are the chief remedies. Fits — Spasms — "When these are brought on by indigestion, placo the child in a wai"m bath immediately, give warm water, or a lobelia emetic, rub the skin briskly, etc., to get up an action. lu brain disease the warm water is ecju.illy useful. In fact, unless the lit is constitutional, the warm bath will relieve the patient by drawing the blood to the surface. Enlargement op the Brain. — This chiefly affects children, and consists in an unnatural growth of the brain. The skull may grow with it, and there be no symptoms of disease, though children with this large brain are apt to die of some brain disease. The fjimploms of enlargement of the brain are, dullness of intellect, indiflerence to external objects, irritable temper, inordinate appetite, giddiness, and habitual headache. Sometimes there are aonvulsions, epileptic fits, and idiocy. There is also a peculiar projection of the parietal bones iu this disease. Treatment. — As much as possible, repress all exercise of the mind. Do not sufler the child to go to school ; but put it to the most active and muscular exercise in the open air. The moment there is any heat in the top of the head, apply cold water, icv-, or cold evaporating lotions. The diet should be very simple, bread and milk only, if, us the child grows up, the signs of disease i.icrease. Water in the Head. — Another disease of children, and especially of scrofulous children. It is inflammatory, and should be early noticed. Si/mptoms. — Capricious appetite, a foul tongue, offensive breath, enlarged, and sometimes tender belly, torpid boweLs, stools light- colored from having no bile, or dark from vitiated bile, fetid, sour- Bmelling, slimy and lumpy. The cliild grows i)ale and thin : and is heavy, languid, dejected ; it is fretful, irritable, uneasy, and apt to be tottering in its gait. The disease may begin, after these symptoms, by pains in the head, becoming more severe and frequent, sharj) and shooting, causmg the child to wakei and shriek out. As the drowsy state advance.*, the slirieking gives jduce to moaning. There is great stiffness in the back of the ne<;k, pain in the limbs, tenderness in the scalp, vomiting, sighing, intolerance of liglit, knitting of ttie brows, and increased disturbance of the stomacliand bowels. This may ia.st from ten to fourteen days, the patient growing more weak and peevish. Another form of attack is marked by acute pain in the bend, high fever, convulsions, flushed face, brilliant i-yes, intolerance of light iuid sound, pain and tenderness in the belly, stupor, great irritabi- lity of slomacli, causing retching and vomiting on every attem[)t to sit u|). The third mode of attack is very insidious — the early symptoms being Ku mild as liardly to l)e noticed. In tliis case, the convulsions or palsy eorui; suddfiily, witiioul ncjlice, bringing swift and uue.x- pccti'd de.-*! ruction. In the Wv^i stage of the disea.se there is in- crcttsed bcusibilityi iu the accoud, decreased sensibility; iu tU« druggist's receipts. 61 third, palsy, convulsions, squinting of the eyes, rolling of the head, stupor, and a rapid, thread-like pulse. Treatment. — lu the first stage, purging is very important, and must bj continued for three or four days. An excellent purgative is this : pulverized scammony, six grains ; croton oil, four drops ; pulverized loaf sugar, sixteen teaspoonfuls. Rub well together 111 a mortar. Give one teaspoonful every hour or two, till it operates. Apply cold water or ice to the head. In the second stage put blisters upon the back of the neck, and one on the bowels, if very tender. In the third stage use the warm bath, also alteratives and diuretics. For an alterative, use iodide of potas- sium, one dram ; water, half an ounce ; mix. Thirty drops to a child seven years old every hour. For a diuretic, use tincture of digitalis, one ounce ; syrup of squills, one ounce ; mix. Ten drops for a child seven years old every four hours. The patient should be kept in a dark room, away from all noise and excitement, and should lie upon a hair mattress, with his head somewhat elevated. The diet in the first stage should be nothing more than gruel ; after that, more nourishing, but easy of digestion, such as beef-tea, plain chicken-broth, animal-jellies, etc. At the same time the pa- tient should be supported by the cautious use of wine-whey, vale- rian, or ten drops of aromatic spuits of ammonia every four hours. Mumps. — This disease, most common among children, begins with soreness and stiffness in the side of the neck. Soon a swel-. ling of the paratoid gland takes place, which is painful and con- tinues to increase for four or five days, sometimes making it difB- cult to swallow, or open the mouth. The swelling sometimes comes on one side at a time, but commonly upon both. There is often heat and sometimes fever, with a dry skin, quick pulse, furred tongue, constipated bowels, and scanty and iiigh-colored urine. The disease is contagious. Treatment. — Keep the face and neck warm, and avoid taking cold. Drink warm herb-teas, and if the symptoms are severe, 4 to 6 grs. of Dover's powder; or if there is costiveness, a slight physic, and observe a very simple diet. If the disease is aggravated by taking cold, and is very severe, or is translated to other glands, physic must be used freely, leeches applied to the swelling, or cool- ing lotions and poultices Sweating must be resorted to in this •ase. Scarlet Fever is an acute inflammation of the skin, both exter- nal and internal, and connected with an infectious fever. Symptovis. — The fever shows itself between two and ten days after exposure. On the second day of the fever the eruption comes out in minute pimples, which are either clustered together, or spread over the surface in a general bright scarlet color. The disease begins with langour, pains in the head, back, and limbs, drowsiness, nausea and chills, followed by heat and thirst. Wlien the redness appears the pulse is quick, and the patient is restless, anxious and often delirious. The eyes are red, the face swollen, and the tongue covered in the middle with white mucus, through which are seen elevated points of extreme redness. The tonsils are swollen, and Itie tbroat is red. By the evening of the third or fourth day the 62 druggist's receipts. redness has reached its height, and the skin becomes moist, whea the scarf-skin begins to come off in scales. In this fever the flesh puffs up so as to distend the fingers, and disfigure the face. As it progresses the coating suddenly comes off the tongue, leaving it and the whole mouth raw and tender. The throat is very much swollen and inflamed, and ulcers form on the tonsils. The eustachian tube which extends up to the ear, the glands under the ear and jaw, sometimes inflame and break ; and the abscesses formed in the ear frequently occasion deafness more or less difficult to cure. The symptoms of this disease may be distinguished from that of measles by the absence of cough ; by the finer rash ; by its scarlet color ; by the rash appearing on the second instead of the fourth day ; and by the ulceration of the throat. Treatment. — In ordinary cases the treatment required is very simple. The room where the patient lies should be kept cool, and the bed-covering light. The whole body should be sponged with cool water as often as it becomes hot and dry, and cooling drinks should be administered. A few drops of belladonna, night and morning, is all that is needed. If there is much fever and soreness of throat, give the following tincture of hellebore often enough to keep down the pulse : — Tincture of American hellebore, 1 dr. ; tincture of black cohosh, 2 oz. ; mix. Take one teaspoonful 3 to 6 times a day. It would also be useful to commence treatment with an emetic; and to soak the feet and hands in hot water containing a little mustard or cayenne pepper ; continuing this bath 20 miiutes, twice a day, for 2 or 3 days. The cold stage being passed, and the fever having set in, warm water may be used without the mustard or pepper. If the head is affected, put drafts upon the feet ; and if the bowels be costive, give a mild physic. Solid food should not be allowed ; but when the fever sets in, cooling drinks, such as lemonade, tamarind-water, rice-water, flaxseed tea, then gruel, or cold water may be given in reasonable quantities. To stimulato the skin, muriatic acid, 45 drops in a tumbler filled with water and sweetened, and given in doses of a teaspoonful, is a good remedy. Where the disease is very violent, and the patient inclines to sink immediately ; where typhoid symptoms a|)pear and there is great jjrostration ; the eruption strikes in ; the skin changes to a mahogany color : the tongue is a deep red, or has on it a dark brown fur, and tlie ulcers in the throat become putrid, the treat- meat must be different from the above. In this case it must bo tonic. Quinia must be given freely; and wine whey, rai.xcd with toast-water, will be useful. Quiuia is made as follows : — Sulphate of quinine, I scruple ; alcohol, 4 ozs. ; sulphuric acid, 6 drops ; -Madeira wine, 1 quart ; mix. Two wine-glassfuls a day. Tincture of cayenne, in sweetened water, may be given in small doses. Gargles are also necessary. A good one is made of pulvi-rized <-ayenne, 1 dram ; salt, one dram; boiling water, 1 gill. Mix, and let tlicm stand 15 minutes. Then add 1 gill vinegar. Let it stand an hour and strain. Put a teaspoonful in the child's mouth once in an hour. A warm bath should be used daily as soon as the druggist's BBCEIPTS. 63 skin begins to peel oflF, to prevent dropsy. If drops j sets in, the bath once in 3 days is suflScient, and sweating should be promot^ed by giving the tincture of Virginia snake-root and similar articles ; a generous diet should be allowed at the same time, to bring up the child's strength. Measles is an acute inflammation of the skin, internal and exter- nal, combined with an infectious fever. Symptoms. Chills succeeded bj great heat, langour, and drowsi- ness, pains in the head, back and limbs, quick pulse, soreness of throat, thirst, nausea and vomiting, a dry cough, and high colored urine. These symptoms increase in violence for four days. The eyes are inflamed and weak, and the nose pours fourth a watery secre- tion, with frequent sneezing. There is considerable inflammation in the larynx, wind-pipe and bronchial tubes, with soreness of the breast and hoarseness. About the fourth day the skin is covered with a breaking out which produces heal and itching, and is red in spots, upon the face first, gradually spreading over the whole body. It goes off in the same way, from the face first and then from the body, and the hoarseness and other symptoms decliav. with it j at last the outside skin peels off in scales. Treatment. In a mild form, nothing is required but a light diet, slightly acid drinks, and flax seed or slippery elm tea. Warm herb teas, and frequent sponge baths with tepid water, serve to allay the fever : care should be taken not to let the patient take cold. K the fever is very high, and prevents the rash coming out, a slight dose of salts, or a nauseating dose of ipecac, lobelia, or hive-syrup should be given, and followed by teaspoonful doses of compound tincture of Virginia snake-root until the fever is allayed. If the patient from any derangement takes on a low typhoid type of fever, and the rash does not come out until the seventh day, and is then Oi" a dark and livid color, tonics and stimulants must be given, and expectoration promoted by some suitable remedy. There is always danger of the lungs being left in an inflamed state after the rneasles, unless the greatest care is taken not to suffer the pa- tient to take cold. Should there be much soreness or pain, and a severe cough, this must be treated as a separate disease, with other remedies. Symptoms. Typhoid Fever is generally preceded by several days of languor, low spirits, and indisposition to exertion. There is also, usually, some pain in the back and head, loss of appetite, and drowsiness, though not rest. The disease shows itself by a chill. During the first week there is increased heat of the surface, fre- quent pulse, furred tongue, restlessness, sleeplessness, headache and pain in the back ; sometimes diarrhoea and swelling of the belly, and sometimes nausea and vomiting. The second week is often distinguished by small, rose-colored spots on the belly, and a crop of little watery pimples on the neck and chest, having the appearance of minute drops of sweat ; the tongue is dry and black, or red and sore ; the teeth are foul ; there maybe delirium, and dullness of hearing ; and the symptoms every way are more serious than during the first week. Occasion- ally, the bowels are at this period perforated or ate through by ulceration, and the patient suddenly sinks. If the disease pro- 64 GRGCEfiS AND CONFECTIONERS RECEIPTS. ceeds unfavorably into the third week, there is low, muttering delirium ; great exhaustion ; sliding down of the patient toward the foot of the bed; twitching of the muscles; bleediug from the bowels ; and red or purple spots upon the skr . If, on the other hand, the patient improves, the countenance brightens up, the pulse moderates, the tongue cleans, and the dis- charges look healthy. Treatment. Give the patient good air, and frequent spongings with water, cold or tepid, as most agreeable. Keep the bowels in order, and be more afraid of diarrhoea than costiveness. Diarrhoea should be restrained by a little brandy, or by repeated doses nf Dover's powder. For costiveness, give mild injections, made slightly loosening by castor oil, or common molasses. To keep down the fever, and produce perspiration, give tincture of vera- trura viride, 10 drops every hour. If the bowels are swelled, re- lieve them by hot fomentations of hops and vinegar. If the pain in the head is very severe and constant, let the huir be cut short, and the head bathed frequently with cold water. Give light nourishment, and if the debility is great, broth and wine will be needed. Cleanse the mouth with ver}' weak tea — old hyson. If the fever runs a low course, and the patient is very weak, quinine may be given from the beginning. Constant care and good nurs- ing are very important. Tijphus fever is distinguished from typhoid by there being no marked disease of the bowels in typhus. GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. Cheap Vinegar. — Mix 25 gals, of warm rain water with 7 gals, molasses and 5 gals, yeast, and let it ferment, you will soon Imve the best of vinegar, keep auding these articles in these proportions as the stock is sold. For Grocers' Sales — Take three barrels ; let one of them be your vinegar barrel ; fill this last up before it is quite empty, with molasses, 2 gals. ; soft water, 11 gals. ; yeast, 1 qt. ; keeping these proportions in fiUiug up the whole three barrels ; sell the vinegar out of your old vinegar barrel as soon as it is ready, which will be in a short time ; \\\\ii\i nearly empty, fill it up with the fluid as before, and pass on to sell out 3f ,he next barrel ; by the time it is disposed of go on to the last; then a'cback to the first, filling up your barrels in every case when nearly empty, and you will always keep a stock of good vinegar on liand unless your ."(ales are very large ; in which case, follow the next process. Have the bung-holes open in the barrels to admit air. Vi.sEOAU i.\ TiiHKE I)av.s. — Get a quantity of maple, beech, or basswood chips or shavings, and soak these in cood vinecar fur two or three days. With tliese chips you will fill a barrel, which has been pierced with a large number of inch holes all around the sides tor the free admission of air amoi ^ the chips (the more holes io the barrel the better, for the "lore :.i-- the sooner the vinegar GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS 65 will be made) ; cut another barrel in two halves, place one half below the barrel with the chips and the other half above it. The top tub must have its bottom pierced with a number of gimlet holes, in which are placed several threads of twine, to conduct the vinegar evenly over the chips. The liquid drains down slowly through the chips and out of a faucet near the bottom of the bar- rel into the lower tub. It should run through every four hours, and then be baled or pumped back. Directions to make vinegar from sugar : Use 1^ lb. to each gal. of water ; of the dregs of molasses barrels, use 2 lbs. to each gal. water ; small beer, lager beer, ale, &c., which have become sour, make good vinegar by being reduced with water ; small beer needs but little water, lager beer as much water as beer ; to 2 gals, cider add J gal. of water ; you can also make excellent vinegar out of the artificial cider men- tioned below. Use, in every case, soft water to make vinegar, and use 2 qts. yeast to every barrel. It makes much quicker if the fluid is slightly lukewarm. Leach either of these preparations through the shavings.' This process should be attended to during warm weather, or in a room where a pretty high temperature is kept up, as it will not work otherwise. Excellent Vikegar, Cheap. — Acetic acid, 5 lbs. ; molasses, 1 gal. ; yeast, 2 qts. ; put them into a forty-gal. cask, and fill it up with rain water ; stir it up, and let it stand one to three weeks, letting it have all the air possible, and you will have good vinegar. If wanted stronger, add more molasses. Should you at any time have weak vinegar on hand, put molasses into it to set it working. This will soon correct it. White Wine Vixegak. — Mash up 20 lbs. raisins, and add 10 gals, water ; let it stand in a warm place for one month, and you will have pure white wine vinegar. The raisins may be used a second time the same way. To PiiESEHVE Eggs. — To each patent pailful of water, add 1 pt. of fresh slacked lime, and 1 pt. of common salt ; mix well. Fill your barrel half full with this fluid, put your eggs down in it any time after June, and they will keep two years if desired. Liquid Mccilage. — Fine clean glue, I lb. ; gum arabic, 10 oz. ; water, 1 qt. ; ntelt by heat in a glue kettle or water bath ; when entirely melted, add slowly 10 oz. strong nitric acid, set off to cool. Then bottle, adding a couple of cloves to each bottle. Baking Powders, very healthy. — Baking soda, 6 lbs. ; cream of tartar, 8 lbs Dry each kind separately and thoroughly then mix all together and put up in damp proof packages, glass or tin is best, to be used in the proportion of 1 teaspoonful to each qt. of flour, mix up with cold water and put in the oven immediately. Candied Lemon Peel.— Take lemon peels and boil them in syrup; then take thom out, and dry. Transparent Soap.— Slice 6 lbs. nice yellow har-soap into shav- ings ; put into a brass, tin or copper kettle, with alcohol, § gal. heating gradually over a slow fire, stirring till all is dissolved ; then add 1 oz. sassafras essence, and stir until all is mixed; now pour into pans about 1^ inches deep, and when cold cut into square bars the length or width of the pan, as desired. 6^ GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. English Bae-Soap. — Six gals, soft water ; C lbs. good stone lime j 20 lbs. sal-soda; 4 oz. borax; 15 lbs. fat (tallow is best) ; 10 lbs. p ulverized resin, and 4 oz. bees'-wax ; put the water in a kettle on the fire, and when nearly boiling add the lime and soda; when these are dissolved, add the borax ; boil gently, and stir until all is dissolved ; then add the fat, resin, and bees-wax ; boil all gently until it shows flaky on the stick, then pour into moulds. Best Soft Soap' — Mix 10 lbs. potash in 10 gals, warm soft water over night ; in the morning boil it, adding 6 ibs. grease ; then put all in a bairel, adding 15 gals, soft water. Soap without Lye op. (jrease. — In a clean pot put i ib. home- made hard or mush soap, and ^ lb. sal-soda, and 5 pts. of soft vvaier. Boil the mixture 15 minutes, and you will have 5 lbs. good soap for 7J cents. Hard Soap. — Take 5 lbs. hard soap, or 7 lbs. soft soap, and 4 lbs. sal-soda, and 2 oz. borax, and 1 oz. hartshorn ; boil one quarter hour with 22 qts. water ; add, to harden, ^ lb. resin. German Yellow Soap. — Tallow and sal-soda, of each 112 lbs., resin, 56 lbs. ; stone lime, 28 lbs. ^ palm oil, 8 oz. ; -oft water, 28 gals. Put soda, lime, and water into a kettle and boil, stirring well ; then let it settle, and jiuur off the lye. In another kettle, melt the tallow, resin, and palm oil ; having it hot, the lye being also boiling hot, mix all together, stirring and the work is done. For small Quantities. — Tallow and sal-soda, each, 1 lb. ; resin, 7 oz. ; stone lime, 4 oz. ; palm oil, 1 oz. ; soft water, 1 q^. Hard Soap with Lard. — Sal-soda and lard, each U lbs. ; stone lime, 3 lbs.; soft water, 4 gals.; dissolve the|lime and soda iu the water by boiling, stirring, settling, and pouring ofl"; then return to the kettle (brass or copper), and add the lurd, and boil it till it becomes soap ; then pour into a dish or moulds ; and, when cold, cut into bars, and drj- it. White Hard Soap with Tallow. — Fresh slacked lime, sal-soda, and tallow, of each, 2 lbs. ; dissolve the soda in 1 gal. boiling soft water; now mix in the lime, stirring occasionally for a few hours ; after which, let it settle, i>ouring off the clear liquor, and boiling the tallow therein until it is all dissolved ; cool ir in a flat box or pan, cut into bars or cakes as desired. It may be perfumed with sassafras oil or any other perfume desired, stirring it in when cool. One Hundred Pounds Soap, very cuxap. — Potash, C lbs. ; lard, 4 lbs. ■^ resin, i lb. Beat up the resin, mix all together, and set aside for hve dajs ; then put the whole into a lo-gal. cask of water, and stir twice a day for ten days, when it is ready for use. Solid Candles from Laud. — Dissolve i lb. alum and J Ib. salt- petre in J pt. water on a slow fire ; then tjike 3 lbs. of lard cut into small pieces, and pnt into the pot with this solution, stirring it con- stantly over a very moderate fire until the lard is all dissolved; then let it simmer until all steam ceases to rise and remove it at once from the lire. If you leave it too long it will get discolored. These candles are harder and better than tallow. Tallow — To ('leanse and Bleach. — Dissolve alnm, 5 lbs. in water, 10 gala, by boiling; and when it is alldi38ol/ed,add tallow, GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. Bt 20 lbs. ; continue the boiling for an hour, constantly stirring and skimming ; when suflBciently cool to allow it, strain through thicL" muslin ; then set aside to harden ; when taken from the water, lay it by for a short time to drip. Imitation Wax Candles.— Purify melted tallow by throwing in powdered quick lime, then add two parts wax to one of tallow, and a mosi beautiful article of candle, resembling wax, will be the result. Dip the wicks in lime water and saltpetre on making. To a gallon ot water add 2 oz. saltpetre and ^ lb. of lime ; it improves the light, and prevents the tallow from running. Adamantine Candles from Tallow. — Melt together 10 oz. mut- ton tallow ; camphor, i oz. : bees-wax, 4 oz. : alum, 2 oz. Very hard and durable, burning with a clear, steady light. Teas. — The names of the different kinds of tea relate to the time of their being gathered, or to some peculiarity in their manufacture. It is a general rule, that all tea is fine in proportion to the tender- ness and immaturity of the leaves. The quality and value of the different kinds diminish as they are gathered later in the season. Black Teas. — As soon as the leaf-bud begins to expand, it is gathered to make Pekoe. A few days' later growth produces black leaved Pekoe. The next picking is called Souchong ; as the leaves grow larger and more mature, they form Cougou ; and the last pick- ing is Boliea. Bohea is called by the Chinese, Ta-cha (large tea), on account of the maturity and size of the leaves ; it contains a larger propor- tion of woody fibre than other teas, and its infusion is of a darker color and coarser flavor Congou, the next higher kind, is named from a corruption of the Chinese Koong-foa (great care, or assiduity). This forms the bulk of the black tea imported, and is mostly valued for its strength. Souchong — Seaoa-choong (small scarce sort), is the finest of the strongest black tea, with a leaf that is generally entire and curly. It is much esteemed for its fragrance and fine flavor. Fekoe is a corruption of the Canton name, Pak-ho (white down), being the first sprouts of the leaf-buds ; they are covered with a white silky down. It is a delicate tea, rather deficient in strength, and is principally used for flavoring other teas. Grkbn Teas.— The following are the principal kinds Twankay^ Hyson-Skin, Hyson, Gunpoivder, and I'oung Hyson. Young Hyson is a delicate young leaf, called in the original lan- guage, Fur-tsien (before the rains), because gathered in the early spring. Hyson, from the Chinese word Ee-fchune, which means, flourish- ing spring. This fine tea is gathered early in the season, and pre- pared with great care and labor. Each leaf is picked separately, and nipped off above the footstalks ; and every separate leaf is rolled in the hand. It is much esteemed for its flavor. Gunpowder Tea is only Hyson rolled and rounded to give it the granular appearance whence it derives its name. The Chinese call it Choo-cha (pearl tea). Hyson-Skin is so named from the Chinese term, in which con- neetioa akin means the refuse, or inferior portion. In preparing 68 GROCERY AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. Hjson, all leaves that are of a coarse yellow, or imperfectly twisted appearance, are separated, and sold as skin-tea, at an inferior price. Ticankay is the last picking of green tea, and the leaf is not rolled or twisted as much as the dearer descriptions. There is altogether less trouble bestowed on the preparation. Coffees. — Java Coffee. — Use of the imported article, 20 lbs.; dried dandelion root, 7 lbs. ; chiccory, 13 lbs. Roast and grind well together. For West India, use rye roasted with a little butter, and ground very fine. For Turkey Coffee, use rice or wheat roasted with a little butter, 7 lbs. ; chiccory, 3 lbs. ; grind. Essence of Coffee is made by boiling down molasses till hard ; grind to a powder ; add \ lb. of good Java coffee to every 4 lbs. of the mixture. Put up for sale in round tin cans or air-tight paper packages. Coffee for Por.xD Packages. — Best Java coffee, 1 lb. ; rye, 3 lbs. ; carefully clean the rye from all bad grains, wash to remove dust, drain off the water, and put the grain into your roaster, carefully stirring to brown it evenly. Brown the rye and coffee separately, grind, and put up in tight packages to preserve the aroma. Manufactitring and Flavoring Tobacco. — After the tobacco is properly cured and sweated, you will, preparatory to pressing, proceed to flavor it as follows : Take 1 oz. tonqua beans ; 6 oz. liquorice, 1 lb. sugar ; pulverize each completely ; add the ingre- dients to 1 gallon water. Macerate and rummage up for a few days till the aromatic flavor is properly imparted to the liquid. Then spread out some tobacco leaves, and slightly sprinkle them with the above fluid till enough is absorbed to render them pliable. Then roll them up in round packages of such a size tliat ten will make 1 lb. ; then reduce them into flat plugs in a powerful jiress. A large number of such plugs are subsequently pressed into blocks, when they are ready for the market at once. The strength oi the above liquid may be increased or diluR!€ aS desired by the manufacturer, and extract of vanilla may be sHbstJ^uaeei for the tonqua bean. Flavor for Cigar Makers. — Take 2 ozs. tonqua beans and 1 oz. cinnamon ; bruise and pulverize them to a jiowder, and put them into 1 pint of Santa Cruz rum ; let it stand for a few days to macerate ; stir all together, and with this liquid sj)riitkle youc common or inferior tobacco. Dry out of tiie sun, and the flavor will be unequalled. To Cure Bltter.— Take 2 parts of fine salt; 1 part loaf sugar; 1 part salt])ctre ; mix coinpletelv. Use 1 oz. of this mixture to each jjound of butter ; work well. Bury your butter lirkius in the earth in your cellar l)Ottom, tops nearly level with the ground, or store away in a very cool j)lace, covering the butter with a clean cloth and a strong brine on the top, and it will keep two years if desired U.NEiiHiNO Testb Fon GooD Floub. — Oood flour is white, with a yellowish or straw-colored tint, tiqueeze some of the flour in your Lund ; if good, it will retain the shajje given by pressure. GKOOERS AND CONPEOTIOLEBS' REOEiPTSi 6D Knead a little between your fingers ; if it works soft and sticky, it is poor. Throw a little against a dry perpendicular surface j if it fall like powder, it is bad. To Correct Musty Floctr. — Carbonate of magnesia, 3 lbs. ; flour, 765 lbs. ; mix. This improves bad flour, causing it to be- come more wholesome, producing lighter and better bread thaa when alum is used, and aborbs and dissipates the musty smell. .Crated Bread. — 1 lb. flour, 100 grs. carb. of soda ; 60 grs. com- mMi salt ; 1 teaspoon powderea sugar ; 120 grs. muriatic acid, more or less according to its strength ; 1 wine pt. of water, inferior flour will require less. Well mix the flour, soda, salt, and sugar in an earthen vessel, then add the acid mixed with the water, stir with a wooden spoon. Bake in one loaf about 1 hour. Bake in tin or iron pans, but avoid the use of metallic vessels or spoons while mixing. Patent Self-Raising Flocr. — Kiln-dried flour, 1 cwt. ; tartaric acid, lOj oz. ; mix thoroughly. After 2 or 3 days, add, of bicarb, soda, 12 oz. ; lump sugar, ^ lb.; common salt, 1^ lb. Mix, and pass through the " dressing-machine." Have all the articles per- fectly dry, and separately reduce to fine powder before adding to the flour. Mix with cold water, and bake at once. It produces light and porous bread. Tomato Catsup. — Boil 1 bushel of tomatoes till they are soft ; squeeze them through a fine wire sieve; add li pts. salt, 2 oz. cayenne pepper, and 5 heads of onions, skinned 'and separated ; mix together, and boil till reduced one half ; then bottle. The Northern -Light Burning Fluid. — Get good deodorized ben- zine, 60 to 65 gravity, and to each brl. of 42 gals, add 2 lbs. pul- verized alum, 3^ oz. gum camphor, and 3i oz. oil of sassafras, or 2 oz. oil bergamot ; stir up and mixthorougnl^- together, and it will soon be ready for use. N.B. — As this fluid creates a much larger volume of light and flame than carbon oil, it is necessary to use either a high burner, such as the sun burner, to elevate the flame away from the lamp, in order to keep it cool, or instead thereof, to use a burner provided with a tube for the escape of the gas gener- ated from the fluid, such, for instance, aa the meridan burner. Test for Burning Oil. — Heat water in a pot on the fire to 120* Fahr. Take a tin and put in it a tablespoonful of the oil you wish to test, place the tin containing the oil in the hot water, let it cool down to 112° Fahr. ; when at this point, approach a light very cau- tiously towards the oil, and if it takes fire before the light touches it you will be safe in rejecting it. Tabac Perfumee aux Fleurs is made by putting orange flowers, jasmines, tube roses, musk roses, or common roses, to snufF in a close chest or jar, gifting them out after 24 hours, a-^*^ .•epeating if necessary. Maccaboy Snuff is imitated by moistening th, tobacco with a mixture of treacle and water, and allowing it to ferment. Spanish Snuff is made from unsifted Havana snuff, reduced by adding ground Spanish nutsheUs,Hpnnkling the mixture with treacle water, and allowing it to sweat for some days before packing. Yellow Sndff is prepared from ordinary pale snuff, moistened with a mixture of yellow ochre diffused in water, to which a few spoonfuls of thin mueilage has been added. to GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. PEKFtTMES FOR Sndff. — Tonqua beans, essence of ditto, ambergris^ musk civet, leaves of orchis f usca and essence of orris root, essence or oils of bergamot, cedra, cloves, lavender, petit grain, neroli and roses, as well as several others, either alone or compounded. Preserved or Solidified Milk. — 1. Fresh-skimmed milk, 1 gal.; sesquicarbonate of soda (in powder), 1 J dr. Mix ; evaporate to J part by heat of a steam or water-bath, with constant agitation ; then add of powdered sugar 6^ lbs. and complete the evaporation at a reduced temperature. Reduce the dry mass to powder, add the cream well drained, which was taken from the milk. After thorough admixture, put the whole into well-stopped bottles or tins, and hermetically seal. 2. Carbonate of soda, i dr. ; water. I fluid oz,; dissolve ; add of fresh milk, 1 qt. ; sugar, 1 lb. ; reduce by heat to the consistence of a syrup, and finish the evaporation oa plates by exposure, in an oven. Observe — About 1 oz. or the powder agitated with 1 pt. of water forms an agreeable substitute for milk. Sealing-wax, Red. — Shellac (very pale), 4 oz. : cautiously melt in a bright copper pan over a clear charcoal nre; when fused, add Venice turpentine, li oz. Mix, and further add vermilion, 3 oz. ; remove the pan from the fire, and pour into mould. For a black color, use ivory black, or lampblack, instead of the vermilion ; for a blue color, use Prussian blue instead of tho vermilion, same quantity. Each color must be well mixed with the composition ; of the lampblack, use only sufficient to color. Horticultural Ink. — Copper, 1 part ; dissolve in nitric acid, 10 parts, and add water, 10 parts ; used to write on zinc or tin labels. Bottle Wax — Black. — Black resin, 6j lbs. ; beeswax, J lb. ; finely powdered ivory black, Ij lbs. Melt together. Red, as the last, but substitute Venetian' red, or red lead, for the ivory black. Gold-colored Sealing-wax. — Bleached shellac, 3 lbs.; Venice turpentine, 1 lb. ; Dutch leaf ground fine, 1 lb., or less. The leaf should be ground or powdered sufficiently fine, without being reduced to dust. Mix with a gentle heat, and pour into moulds. Lithographic Ink. — Venice turpentine 1 part, lampblack 2 parts, hard tallow soap 6 parts, mastic in tears, 8 parts, shellae I'J parts, wax 16 parts ; melt, stir, and pour it out on a slab. Fine Black writing Ink. — To 2 gals, of a strong decoction of logwood, well strained, add IJ lbs. blue galls in coarse powder a ozs. sulphate of iron, 1 oz. acetate of copper, 6 ozs. of well ground sugar, and 8 oz. gum arabic. Set the above on the fire until it begins to boil ; strain, and then set it away until it has acquired the desired black. Grekn Ink. — Cream of tartar 1 part, verdigris 2 parts, water 8 parts. Boil till reduced to the proper color. Bluk Ink. — Take sulphate of indigo, dilute it with water till it produces the recjuirea color. Violet Ink is made by dissolving some violet aniline in water to which some alcohol has been added; it takes very little Aniline to make a large quantity of the ink. GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS/ 71 Gold Ink. — Mosaic gold, two parts, gum arable, one part, rubbed up to a proper condition. Silver Ink. — Triturate iTi a mortar equal parts of silver foil and sulphate of potassa, until reduced to a fine powder, then wash the s' Allow the whole to macerate, with frequent agitation, for two weeks, then further add green copperas, 5 lb., dissolved in 7 pt. water. Again mix well, and agitate the whole daily for two or three weeks. Extra good Black Ink. — Bruised galls, 2 lb., logwood chips, green copperas and gum, of each, 1 lb. ; water, 7 gal. Boil 2 hours and strain. Product, 5 gal. Brown Ink. — A strong decoction of catechu. The shade may be varied by the cautious addition of a little wea ksolution of bichro- mate of potash. Indelible Ink. — Nitrate of silver, i oz. ; water, | oz. Dissolve, add as much of the strongest liquor of ammonia as will dissolve the precipitate formed on its first addition ; then add of mucilage 1^ dr., and a little sap green, syrup of buckthorn, or finely pow- dered indigo, to color. Turns black on being held near the fire, or touched with a hot iron. LiDELiBLE Ink for Glass or Metal. — Borax, 1 oz ; shellac, 2 oz. ; water, 18 fluid oz. ; boil in a covered vessel, add of thick mucilage, 1 oz. ; triturate it with levigated indigo and lampblack q. s., to give it a good color. After 2 hours' repose, decant from the dregs and bottle for use. It may be bronzed after being applied. Resists moisture, chlorine, and acids. Common Ink — To 1 gal. boiling soft water, add | oz. extract log- wood ; boil two minutes ; remove from the fire, and stir in 48 grains bichromate of potash, and 8 grains prussiate of potash ; for 10 gal. use 65 oz. logwoode xtract; 1 oz. bichromate of potash, and 80 grains prussiate of potash ; strain. Black Copying Ink, or Writing fluid. — Take 2 gal. rain water and put into it gum arabic, | lb. ; brown sugar, ^ lb.; clean cop- peras, 5 lb. ; powdered nutgalls, 5 lb. ; mix, and shake occasionally; for tea days and strain ; if needed sooner, let it stand in an iron kettle until the strength is obtained. This ink will stand the action of the atmosphere for centuries, if required. Red Ink. — In an ounce phial put 1 teaspoonful of aqua- ammo- nia ; gum arabic, size of two or three peas ; and 6 grains of No. 40 carmine ; fill up with soft water, and it is soon ready for use. Liquid Blacking. — Ivory black, 2 lbs. ; molasses, 2 lbs. ; sweet oil, 1 lb. ; rub together till well mixed ; then add oil Titriol> f lb. j 72 GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. add coarse sugar, I lb. ; and dilute with beer bottoms ; this carri'-t be excelled. TiCKETixG Ink for Gkocers, &c. — Dissolve 1 oz. of gum arabic in 6 oz. water, and strain ; this is the mucilage ; for black color, use drop-black, powdered, and ground with the mucilage to ex- treme fineness ; for blue, ultra-marine is used in the same manner ; for ffreen, emerald green ; for ivhite, flake white ; for red, vermil- ion, lake, or carmine ; for yelloiv, chrome yellow. When ground too thick, they are thinned with a little water. Apply to the cards with a small brush. The cords may be sized with a thin glue, and afterwards varnished, if it is desired to preserve them. BuHNG FOR Clothes. — Take 1 oz. of soft Prussian blue, powder it, and put in a bottle with 1 quart of clear rain water, and add i oz. of pulverized oxalic acid. A tablespoonful is sufficient for a large washing. Premium Method of keeping Hams, &c.— To 4 gal. water, add 8 lbs. coarse salt; i oz. ])Otash ; 2 oz. saltpetre; 2 lbs. brown sugar. Boil together, skim when cold, put on the above quantity to 100 lbs. meat ; hams to remain in eight weeks, beef, three weeks. Let the hams dry several days before smoking. Meat of all kinds, salmon and other fish, lobsters, &c., may be preserved for years by alight application of pyrol igneous acid applied with a brush, seal- ing up in cans as usual. It imparts a splendid flavor to the meat, is very cheap, and an effectual preservative against loss. To pbeserat: Meats, Salmon, Lorsters, &c., hermetically SEALED. — The meat to be preserved is first parboiled or somewhat more, and freed from bones. It is then put into tin cases or canisters, which are quite filled up with a rich gravy. A tin cover, with a small aperture, is then carefully fixed on by solder; and, while the vessel is perfectly full, it is placed in boiling water, and undergoes the remainder of the cooking. The small hole in the cover is completely closed up by soldering while the whole is yet hot. The canister, with its ingredients, is now allowed to cool, in conse- quence of which these contract, and the sides of the vessel are slightly forced inward by atmospheric pressure, and become a little concave. The vessel being thus hermetically sealed, and nil access of air prevented, it may be sent iiito any climate without fear of putrefaction ; and the most delicate food of one country may be used in another in all its original perfection months and years after its preparation. Lobsters should be boiled longer than meats, and the scales removed jirevious to i)Utting into the canis- ters. Salmon put up by this jtrocess is most delicious. By the French process, the meat is Ijoiled till it is three-quarters done, when two-thirds of it are taken out, the remaining one-third is boiled into a concentrated sunj), and the meat previously taken out is put i'lto the canisters, which are then filled up with the soup ; the tin cover with aperture is soldered on, and tlie canister with its contents submitted to a further boiling in hot water, when the aperture is closed, as above stated, and the canisters laid away in store. To preserve Frcits without Scoar.— Fill some stone wide- mouthed bottles with the fruit carefully picked, and set them in a copper or large kettle ; then fill the kettle with cold water nwirly GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS* RECEIPTS. 73 up to the mouths of the bottles. Corks should be prepared to fit the bottles, and a cloth should be put under the bottoms of the bottles to prevent their cracking with the heat. Light the fire un- der the kettle, and heat the water to 160° or 170". This heat should be continued for lalf an hour, when the fruit will be sufficiently scalded ; after that, fill up the bottles with boiling water to within an inch of the cork, and cork them tightly. Lay the bottles on their sides ; change the position of the bottles once or twioe a week during the first two months, turning them round to prevent any fermentation that might take place. Fruits could also be kept by the process mentioned above for meats, remembering that they are to be scalded only, not boiled, as is the case with meats. Another Method. — After paring and coring, put amongst them sutficient sugar to make them palatable for present eating, about 3 or 4 lbs. only to each bushel ; let them stand awhile to dissolve the sugar, not using any water : then heat to a boil, and continue the boiling with care for 20 to 30 minutes, or sufficiently long to heat them through, which expels the air. Have ready a kettle of hot water, into which dip the can or bottle long enough to heat it ; then fill in the fruit while hot, corking it immediately, dipping the end of the cork into the bottle-wax preparation described else- where. WoRCESTEESHiRE Saitce. — Port winc and mushroom ketchup, of each 1 qt. ; old ale and strong vinegar, of each, J pt. ; walnut pickle, 1 pt. ; soy, 5 pt. ; pounded anchovies, i lb. ; fresh lemon peel, minced shallots, and scraped horse-radish, of each, 2 oz. ; allspice and black pepper (bruised), of each, 1 oz. ; curry powder, 3 oz. Digest 14 days ; strain and bottle. Gherkins. — Take small euciimbers (not yotmg), steep for a week in very strong brine ; it is then poured off, heated to the boiling point, and again poured on the fruit. The next day, the gherkins are drained on a sieve, wiped dry, put into bottles or jars, with some spice, ginger, pepper, or cayenne, and at once covered with strong piakling vinegar. Mixed Pickles from cauliflowers, white cabbage, French beans, ouions, cucumbers, &c , are treated as gherkins, with raw ginger, capsicum, mustard-seed, and long pepper, added to each bottle. A little coarsely-bruised turmeric improves both the color and flavor. Indian Pickle. — Piccalilli. — Take one hard white cabbage (sliced), 2 cauliflowers, pulled to pieces, 20 French beans, 1 stick of horse-radish, sliced fine, 2 doz. small white onions, and 1 doz. gherkins. Cover these with boiling brine ; next day, drain the whole on a sieve, put it into a jar, add of curry powder, or tur- meric, 2 oz. ; garlic, ginger, and mustard-seed, of each 1 oz. ; cap- sicum, h oz. Fill up the vessel with hot pickling vinegar ; bung it up close, and let it stand for a month, with occasional agitation every week. To Preshrve Fritxt JmcE without Heat. — Ingredients : 10 lbs. of fresh-gathered, picked, ripe red currants, or other fruit, 2 qts. cold water, 5 oz. tartaric acid, 6 lbs. of coarse-sifted sugar. Put the fruit into a large earthen pan, pour the water with the tartaric acid dissolved in it over the fruit, cover the pan with some kind of 74 GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. lid, and allow the whole to steep for 24 hours in a cold place, and it would be all tlie better if the pan coutainiag the fruit could be immersed in rough ice. Next, pour the steeped fruit into a sus- pended stout flaunel bag, and when all the juice has run through, tie up the open end of the bag, and place it on a large earthen dish, with another dish upon it ; place a half-hundred weight upon this, to press out all the remaining juice, and then mix it with the other juice. You now put the sifted sugar into the juice, and stir both together occasionally, until the sugar is dissolved, and then bottle up the syrup, cork, and tie down tlie bottles with wire, and keep them in the ice well or in a cold cellar, in a reclining position. To RESTORE Lnjured Meat. — When the brine sours and taints the meat, pour it off; boil it, skim it well, tlien pour it back again on the meat boiling hot ; this will restore it, even wben miich injured. If tainted meat is injured, dip it in the solution of chlo- ride of lime prescribed for rancid butter ; it will restore it. Fly- blown meat can be completely restored by immersing it for a few hours in a vessel containing a small quantity of beer; but it will taint and impart a putrid smell to the liquor. Fresh meat, hams, fish, &c., can be preserved for an indefinite length of time without salt, by a light application of pyroligneous acid applied with a brush ; it imparts a fine smoky fiavor to the meat, and is an effect- ual preservative. But pure acetic acid may be used instead. Meihod of cuniNa bad Tub Bdi'tbh. — A quantity of tub-butter was brought to market in the West Indies, which, on opening, was found to be very bad, and almost stinking. A native of Pennsyl- vania undertook to cure it, which he did in the following man- ner : — lie started the tubs of butter in a large quantity of hot water, which soon melted the butter ; he llien skimmed it off as clean as possible, and worked it over again in a churn, and, with the addi- tion of salt and fine sugar, the butter was sweet. To RESTORE Rancid Butter. — Use 1 pt. water to each lb. of but- ter, previously adding 20 grs. chloride of lime to each pt. of water: wash well the butter in this mixture, afterward re-wash in cold water and salt ; or melt the butler in a water bath with animal charcoal, coar.'scly powdered and previously well sifted to free it from dust; skim, remove, anfl strain through flannel ; then salt. Fresh .Meat — to keep a Week or Two in >Su.M.MEa. — Farmers or others living at a distance from butchers can keej) fresh meat very nicely for a week or two, by [lutting it into sour milk, or but- ter milk, placing it in a cool cellar. The bone or fat need not be removed. Rinse well when used. Milkman's Pkockss. — To give a body to diluted milk use the following nutritive and healtiiv compound at the rale of 8 oz. to every 5 gals., stirring it u\) in the milk, till all is dissolved : arrow- root, G oz. ; magnesia, (J oz. ; starch, 1 lb. , floiu', \ lb. ; white sugar in powder, 1 lb. ; mix all intimately together, and keep in a dry place for use. CusTAun Powders. — Sago meal and flour, I lb. each, color with turmeric to a cream color. Flavor with essential oil of almonds, 1 dr.; ess. of kuKja, 2 drs. Use with aweuteiicd milk to form ex- temporaneous cusiurda. GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS, 76 Curry Powder. — Turmeric and coriander seeds, of each, 4 oe. ; black pepper, 2^ oz. ; ginger, 14 drs. ; cinnamon, mace, and cloves, each, I oz. ; cardamom seeds, 1 oz. ; cummin seeds, 2 drs. ; cayenne pepper, 1 oz. ; powder and mix. Napoleon's Camp Sauce.— Old strong beer, 2 qts., white wine, 1 qt., anchovies 4 ounces : mix ; boil for ten minutes ; remove it from the fire, and add of peeled shallots, 3 ounces; macerate for 14 days, aud bottle. Pickled Onions. — Choose small round onions, remove the skins, steep them in strong brine for a week in a stone vessel, pour it off' and heat till it boils ; then pour on the onions, boiling hot ; after 24 hours, drain on a sieve, then put them in bottles, fill up over them with strong spiced vinegar, boiling hot, cork down imme- diately, and wax over the cork. In a similar manner are pickled mushrooms, cauliflowers, samphires, peas, beans, green gooseberries, walnuts, red cabbages (without salt, with cold vinegar). Observe that the soft and more delicate articles do not require so long soaking in brine as the harder and coarser kinds, and may be often kept by simply pouring very strong pickling vinegar on them with- out the application of heat. For peaches^ select ripe but not soft ones ; rub with a dry cloth ; put four cloves, free from their heads, in each large peach, and two in small ones ; to one gallon vinegar, put 6 lb. good brown sugar ; put the peaches in a jar, and put the vinegar (diluted with water, if too strong) and sugar in a preserv- ing kettle over the fire ; boil and skim it ; pour it boiling hot over the peaches, covering them closely ; repeat the operation three times ; then seal them tightly in cans or bottles. French Patent Mustard. — Flour of mustard, 8 lbs. ; wheaten flour, 8 lbs. ; bay salt, 2 lbs. ; cayenne pepper, 4 oz. ; vinegar to mix. Common Mustard. — Flour of mustard, 28 lbs. ; wheat flour, 28 lbs.; cayenne pepper, 12 oz., or as required; common salt, 10 lbs. ; rape oil, 3 lbs. ; turmeric to color ; mix well, and pass through a fine sieve. Starch PolisHi — White wax, 1 oz. ; spermaceti, 2 oz. ; melt them together with a gentle heat. When you have prepared a sufficient amount of starch, in the usual way, for a dozen pieces, put into it a piece of the polish the size of a large pea ; more or less, accord- ing to large or small washings. Or thick gum solution (made by pouring boiling water upon gum arable), one tablespoon to a piut of starch, gives clothes a beautiful gloss. Fire Kindlers. — To make very nice fire kindlers, take resin, any quantity, and melt it, putting in for each pound being used, from 2 to 3 oz. of tallow, and when all is hot, stir va. pine sawdust to make very thick; and, while yet hot, spread it out about 1 inch thick, upon boards which have fine sawdust sprinkled upon them, to prevent it from slicking. When cold, break up into lumps about 1 inch square. But if for sale, take a thin board and press upon it, while yet warm, to lay it otf into 1 inch squares : this makes it break regularly, if you press the crease sufficiently deep, greasing the marked board to prevent it from sticking. To keep Cider sweet, and sweeten Sodr Cider. — To keep cider perfect, take a keg and bore holes in the bottom of it ; spread * 76 GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. piece of woollen cloth at the bottom ; then fill with clean sand closely packed ; draw your cider from a barrel just as fast as it will run through the sand ; after this, put it in clean barrels which have had a piece of cotton or linen cloth 2 by 7 inches dipped in melted sulphur and burned inside of them, thereby absorbing the sulphur fumes (this process will also sweeten sour cider) ; then keep it in a cellar or room where there is no fire, and add J lb. white mustard /Seed to each barrel. If cider is long made, or souring when you get it, about 1 qt. of hickory ashes (or a little more of other hard wood ashes) stirred into each barrel will sweeten and clarify it nearly equal to rectifying it as above ; but if it is not rectified, it must be racked off to get clear of the pomace, as with this in it, it will sour. Oil or whisky barrels are best lo put cider in, or J pint sweet oil to a barrel, or a gallon of whisky to a barrel, or both, may be added, with decidedly good effects ; isinglass, 4 oz. to each barrel, helps to clarify and settle cider that is not going to be rectified. Ginger Wine. — Water, 10 gals., lump sugar, 20 lbs., bruised ginger, 8 oz. ; 3 or 4 eggs. Boil well and skim ; then pour hot on six or seven lemons cut in slices, macerate for 2 hours ; then rack and ferment; next add spirit, 2 qts., and afterwards finings, 1 pint; rummage well. To make the color, boil ^ oz. saleratus and J oz. alum in 1 pint of water till you get a bright red color. Toe Cream. — Have rich, sweet cream, and a half-pound of loaf sugar to each quart of cream or milk. If you cajmot get cream, the best imitation is to boil a soft custard, 6 eggs to each quart of milk (eggs well beat). Or another is made as follows: boil 1 per as will lie on a half J.ime ; 2 hard eggs, chopped fine, a lump of butter as large as an egg, a tea cup of water. Let it boil a minute or two ; cold veal will do, if liver is not liked. Mutton Harrioot. — Take a loin of mutton, cut it into small chops, season it with ground jK-jiper, allspice and salt, let if stand a nignt, and then fry it. Have good gravy well seasoned with fir)ur, butter, catsup 'and pcpiier, if necessary. Boil turnips and carrot.a, cut them small, aiiour 1 qt. of boiling water to each gal. Let the mixture stam! 2'l hours, stirring occa- ■ionally : then strain and measure into a keg, adding 2 lbs. sugar, and good rye wliisky 1 ]iint, or best alcohol, j pint to each gal. Cork tight, and jmtaway for use. The best wine that can be made. GROCEES AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. 81 Lemon Syrup. — Havana sugar, 1 lb., boil in waterdown to a quart, drop in the white of 1 egg, and strain it. Add i oz. tartaric acid ; let it stand 2 days ; shake often ; 12 drops essence of lemon will much improve it. Sdpekior Eaisin Wine. — Take 30 lbs. of chopped raisins free from stems and dust ; put them in a large keg, and add to them 10 gals, soft water ; let them stand two weeks unbunged, shaking occa- sionally (warm place in winter), then strain through woollen, or 'filter ; color with burnt sugar ; bottle and cork wel! for use. The more raisins the better the wine, not exceeding 5 lbs. to each gal- lon. Raisin Wine equal to Sherry. — Boil the proper quantity of water and let it stand till cold. To each gal. of this water add 4 lbs. of chopped raisins, previously well washed, and freed from stalks ; let the whole stand for 1 month, stirring frequently ; then remove the raisins, and bung up closely for 1 month more ; then rack into another vessel, leaving all sediment behind, which must be repeated till it becomes fine ; thep to every 10 gals, add 6 lbs. of • fine sugar, and 1 doz. of good oranges, the rinds being pared very ihin, and infused in 2 qts. of brandy, which should be added to the liquor at its last racking. Let the whole stand three months in the cask, then bottle. It should remain bottled twelve months. To give it the flavor of Madeira, when it is in the cask, put in a couple of green citrons, and let them remain till the wine is bottled. Port Wine. — Worked cider, 42 gals. ; good port wine, 12 gals. ; good brandy, 3 gals. ; pure spirits, 6 gals ; mix. Elderberries and sloes, and the fruit of the black haws, make a fine purple color for Avines, or use burnt sugar. American Champagne. — Good cider (crab-apple cider is the best), 7 gals. ; best fourth-proof brandy, 1 qt. ; genuine champagne wine, 5 qts. ; milk, 1 gal. ; bitartrate of potassa, 2 oz. Mix, and let Btaud a short time ; bottle while fermenting. An excellent imita- tion. British Champagne. — Loaf-sugar, 56 lbs. ; brown sugar (pale), 48 lbs.; water (warm i, 45 gals.; white tartar, 4 oz. ; mix, and at a proper temperature add yeast, 1 qt. ; afterwards sweet cider, 5 gals.; bruised wild cherries, 14 or 15 oz. ; pale spirits, 1 gal. ; orris-powder, ^ oz. Bottle while fermenting. British Madeira.— Pale malt. 1 bushel; boiling water, 12 gals.; mash and strain; then add white sugar, 4 lbs.; yeasl, 1 lb. Ferment, next add raisin or C-ipe wine, 3 qts. ; brandy, 3 qts. ; sherry, 2 qts. ; port, 2 qts. ; bung down. The malt may be mashed again for bottle beer. Currant and other Fruit Wines. — To every gallon of expressed juice, add 2 gals, soft water, 6 lbs. brown sugar, cream tartar, 1 ^ oz. ; and qt. brandy to every 6 gals. ; some prefer it without brandy. After fermentation, take 4 oz. isinglass dissolved in 1 pt. of the wine, and put to each barrel, which will fine and clear it; when it must be drawn into clean casks, or bottled, which is preferable. Blackberry and Strawberry Wines are made by taking the above wine when made with port wine^ and for everj 10 gals. 82 GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. from 4 to 6 ats. of the fresh fruit, bruised and strained, are added, and let stand four days till the flavor is extracted ; when bottling add 3 or four broken raisins to each bottle. ' MoRELLA Wine.— To each quart of the expressed juice of the mor- ella, or tame cherries, add 3 qts. water, and 4 lbs. of coarse brown sugar; let them ferment, and skim till worked clear; then draw off, avoiding the sediment at the bottom. Bung up, or bottle, which is best for all wines, letting the bottles lie always on the side, either for wines or beers. London Sherry.— Chopped raisins, 400 lbs.; soft water, 100 gals.: sugar, 45 lbs. ; white tartar, 1 lb. ; cider, IG gals. Let them stand together in a close vessel one month ; stir frequently. Then add of spirits, 8 gals. ; wild cherries bruised, 8 lbs. Let them stand one month longer, and fine with isinglass. English Patent Wine from KHunARB.— To each gal. of juice, add 1 gal. soft water, in which 7 lbs. brown sugar have been dissolved ; fill a keg or barrel with this proportion, leaving the bung out, and keep it filled with sweetened water as it works off, until clear. Any other vegetable extract may be used if this is not liked : then bung down or bottle as you please. The stalks will yield 5 their weight in juice ; fine and settle with isinglass as above. This wine will not lead to intemperance. Various Wines.— To 28 gals, clarified cider add good brandy, 1 gal. ; crude tartar (this is what is deposited by grape wines), milk to settle it, 1 pt. ; draw off 36 hours after thoroughly mixing. Ginger Wine. — Put one oz. of good ginger-root bruised in 1 qt. 95 per. cent, alcohol; let it stand nine days, and strain; add 4 qts." water, and 1 lb. white sugar dissolved in hot water, color with tincture of Sanders to suit For bar-purposes add 1 pt. port wine. Another.— To 1 qt. 95 per cent, alcohol add 1 oz. best ginger- root (bruised but not ground), 5 grs. capsicum, and I dr. tartaric- acid. Let it stand one Aveek and filter ; now add 1 gal. water in which 1 lb. of crushed sugar has been boiled. Mix when cold. To make the color, boil i oz. cochineal, I oz. cream tartar, i oz. sale- ratus, and i oz. alum, in one pt. of water till you get a bright-red color. To rb.store Flat Wine.— Add 4 or 5 gals, of sugar, honey, or bruised raisins to every 100 gals., aud bung close ; a little spirit may be added, to roughen; take bruised sloes, or powdered catechu, and add to the wine in suitable proportions, or add a small quantity of bruised berrie.s of the mountain ash, to allay inordinate flatness. Let it stand 2 hours aud bottle, using yeast, of course as before. White Wines are generally fined by isinglass in the proportion or U oz. (dissolved in Ij pts. of water, and thinned with some of the wine) to the hogshead. Jied Wines are generally fined with the whites of eggs, in the proportion of 12 to 18 to each pipe ; fhoymust bo well beaten to a froth with about 1 pt. of water, and afterwards mixed with a little of the wine, before adding them to the liquor. Rummage well. (JnAMi'AONE CiDBR.— Good pale cider, 1 hhd. ; spirit, 3 gals. : sugar, 20 lbs. ; mix, and let it stand one fortoight ; then fine witli.pkimmed milk, j gal. ; thia will be very pale, and a iimilar article, rilen pro- GEOCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. 83 Eerly bottled and labelled, opens so brisk, that even good judges ave mistaken it for genuine champagne. Berlin Carraway Cordial. — Take 8 gals, spirit, 50 per cent. ; 1 oz. oil of carraway, which you dissolve in spirit 95 per cf-nt. ; 8 lbs. sugar ; 8 lbs. water. Dissolve your sugar in the water ; mix, stir and filter. Stomach Bitters Equal to Hostetters'. — European gentian root, Is oz. ; orange peel, 2^ oz. ; cinnamon, i oz. ; anise seed, ^ oz. ; coriander seed, ^ oz. ; cardamom seed, | oz. ; unground Peruvian bark, ^ oz. ; gum kino, i oz. ; bruise all these articles, and put them Into the best alcohol, 1 pt. ; let it stand a week, and pour off the clear tincture ; then boil the dregs a few minutes in 1 qt. of water, strain, and press out all the strength ; now dissolve loaf sugar, 1 lb., in the hot liquid, adding 3 qts. cold water, and mix with the spirit tincture first poured oflf, or you can add these, and let it stand on the dregs if preferred. BoKERs Bitters. — Rasped quassia, 1^ oz. ; calamus, 1^ oz. ; pow- dered catechu, 1^ oz. ; cardamom, 1 oz. ; dried orange peel, 2 oz. ; macerate the above ten days in J gal. strong whisky, and then fil- ter, and add 2 gals, water; color with mallow or malva flowers. CuRACOA Cordial, 40 Gals. — Essence of bitter oranges, 2 oz. ; ess. neroli, 2 oz. ; ess. of cinnamon, 5 oz. ; 3 drs. mace, infused in alco- hol. Dissolve the above essences in 1 gal. alcohol, 95 per cent, j then put in a clean barrel 13 gals, alcohol, 85 per cent. ; 26 gals, sugar syrup, 30 degrees Baume ; and add 1 gal. perfumed spirit as above. Color with saffron or turmeric. CuEACOA d'Hollande, 20 Gals. — Curacoa orange-peel, 2 lbs ; ^ lb. Ceylon cinnamon. Let them soak in water ; boil them for five minutes with the juice of 32 oranges and 14 gals, of plain white syrup ; then add 6 gals, alcohol, 95 per cent. ; strain, filter ; color dark yellow with sugar coloring. Anisette Cordial, 40 Gals. — Put in a barrel 13 gals, alcohol, 75 per cent. Dissolve 3j oz. essence of green anise-seed in 1 gal. 95 per cent, alcohol, and add ^ gal. orange-flower water ; 8 or ten drops infusion of mace, and 5 drops essence of cinnamon. Then put in the barrel 26 gals, sugar syrup, 25 degrees Baume ; stir fifteen minutes, and let it rest four or five days ; then filter. Add 2 or 3 sheets of filtering paper. Ratafia. — Ratafia may be made with the juice of any fruit. Take 3 gals, cherry- juice, and 4 lbs. sugar, which you dissolve in the juice ; steep in 2i gals, brandy ten days ; 2 drs. cinnamon, 24 cloves; 16 oz. peach-leaves ; 8 oz. bruised cherry kernels. Filter, mix both liquids, and filter again. Arrack Punch Syrdp. — 53J lbs. sugar ; 31 gals, water. Boil up well ; then add 1§ gals, lemon-juice to the boiling sugar, and stir till the liquid is clear ; pour it in a clean tub, and when nearly cool, add 5 gals. Batavia arrack , then filter. Simple Syrup. — To 8 lbs. best white sugar add 2 qts. water, and the whites of 2 eggs ; stir until all the sugar is dissolved ; simmer for two or three minutes : skim well, and strain through a fine flan- nel bag. Sarbaparilla Syrup.— To simple syrup add 10 drops oil of anise, 20 drops oil of wintergreen, 20 drops oil of sassafras, and 6 oz. of caramel or coloring to the gallon. Before the oils are added to the 84 GROCERS AND OONFEOTIONERS' RECEIPTS. syrup, they should be cut by grinding them in a mortar with as much sugar as they will moisten, or mix with a small quantity ot alcohol. Vanilla Syrup. — To simple syrup, add i oz. of ext. of vanilla to the gallon. Ginger Syrup. — Bruised Jamaica ginger, 1 oz. ; boiling water, 1 pt. ; macerate for four hours ; add fine white sugar, 2 lbs. ; and strain through a fine flannel bag. Ginger syrup may also be made by ad- ding 2 oz. of the ext. of ginger to 1 gal. of simple syrup. Strawberry Syrup without Strawberries. — Add to 1 gal. simple syrup 2 teaspoons of essence of strawberry, and i oz. tartaric acid; color with coloring made as follows : boil 1 oz. of cochineal with half a teaspoonful of cream tartar. Strawberry Syrup. — Inclose fresh strawberries in a coarse bag, press out the juice, and to each qt. add 1 pt. water and 6 lbs. white sugar ; dissolve by raising it to the boiling point, and strain ; bottle and cork hot, and keep in a cool place. Blackberry Syrup is made as directed for strawberry, adding to each qt. 1 oz. best French brandy. Wild Cherry Syrup. — Steep 4()z. wild cherry bark, well bruised in 1 pt. of cold water, for thirty-six hours; press out the infusion; let it stand till clear, decant and add IJ lbs. fine white sugar ; mix and strain. Nectar Syrup. — Add to orgeat syrup 1 pt. of best port wine, and I oz. extract of vanilla to the gal. ; or flavor 1 gal. simple syrup with I teaspoonful ext. of nectar. Orgeat Syrup. — Take 3 oz. of sweet almonds, and J oz. bitter almonds ; gum arabic, in powder, J oz. ; sugar in powder, 3 oz. ; rub together in a mortar, adding water from time to time until the mixture measures 1 qt. Strain through a cloth, and mbc with 1 gal. of simple syrup. Orange Flower Syrup. — Add to 1 gal. of simple syrup, J oz. ext. of orange flowers. Orange Syrup. — Grate off the outside yellow peel of fresh and ripe oranges; cut them and express the juice : tu each qt. add 1 {)t. water and G lbs. sugar, previously well mixed with the grated peel. Dissolve by gentle heat, then strain. Pine Apple Syrup. — Pare and mash the fruit in a marble or por- celain mortar, with a small quantity ot sugar ; express the juice, and, for each qt. take IJ pts. of water and 6 lbs. fine sugar; boil the sugar and water ; then add the juice ; remove from Uie fire ; skim and strain. Or make it with the essence directed for strawberry. Pear S\'Rnp. — Make as directed for pine apple syrup ; or use the essence of pear, bj* adding to each gallon of simple syrup, 2 tea- tipoonfiils of essence of pear, and i oz. tartaric acid. Hanana Syrup. — .Make as directed for pine apple syrup, or with the appropriate essence and acid as above. Apple Syuup. — Make as directed for ])ine apple syrup, or with the appropriate fruit and essences as above. CitE.\M SvKL'P. — Fresh cream, 1 j)t. ; fresh milk, 1 pt. ; fine pow- dered sugar, 3 U)a.; beat the sugar witli the milk, and the whites of '2 eggs; then mix with the cream.'i Flavor with liuion, vanilla, or strawberry. Keep in a cool place, well bottled. GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. 85 BnxTRid Ethkb i3 mnch used to impart a pine apple flavor to rum. Dissolved in 8 or 10 parts of alcohol, it forms the pine apple essence. From 20 to 25 drops of this essence, added to 1 lb. sugar, containing a little citric acid, imparts to the mixture a strong taste of pine apple. Amtxo-Acetic Ether is a preparation of frmt-oil and other ingredients, and, when diluted with alcohoL it is sold as essence of Jargonelle pear, and is used for flavoring difi^rent liquors. Fifteen parts amylo-acetic ether, with half a part of acetic ether, dissolved in 100 parts of alcohol, form what may be called the Bergamot- pear essence, which, when employed to flavor sugar, acidulated with a little citric acid, imparts the odor of the IBeEgamot pear, and a fruity, refreshing taste. Pelargonatb or Ethtlic Ether fpelargonic ether) has the agreeable odor of the quince, and, when dissolved in alcohol in due proportion, forms the quince essence. Acetate op Amylic Ether (same as amylo ether), mixed with butyric ether, forms in alcoholic solution the banana essence. Valerianate of Amtlic Ether. — An alcoholic solution of this ether in the proportion of 1 part to 6 or 8 of alcohol, forms a flavor- ing liquid under the name of apple essence. Milk PrNCH. — One tablespoonful of fine white sugar, 2 ditto of water, I wine glass of Cognac brandy, I ditto Santa Cruz rum, ^ tumblerful of shaved ice ; fill with milk. Shake the ingredients well together, and grate a little nutmeg on top. To make it hot, use hot milk and no ice. Glasgow Punch. — Melt lump-sugar in cold water, with the juice of a couple of lemons, passed through a fine wire strainer ; this is sherbet, and most be will mingled. Then add old Jamaica rum, one part of rum to five of sherbet. Cut a couple of lemons in two, and run each section rapidly around the edge of the jug or bowl, gently squeezing in some of the delicate acid, when all is ready. Mint Jclep. — One tablespoonful of white pulverized sugar, 2J ditto water ; mix well with a spoon. Take 3 or 4 sprigs of fresh mint, press them well in the sugar and water, add 1 J wine glasses of Cognac brandy, and fill the glass with shaved ice, then draw out the sprigs of mint, and insert them in the ice with the stems downwards, so that the leaves will be above in the shape of a bou- quet ; arrange berries and small pieces of sliced orange on top in a tasty manner, dash with Jamaica rum, and sprinkle sugar on top. Sip with a glass tube or straw. Cider Nectar. — One qt. cider, 1 bottle soda water, 1 glass sherry, 1 small glass brandy, juice of half a lemon, peel of ^ of a lemon, sugar and nutmeg to taste. Flavor it with extract of pine apple, strain, and ice it all well. Half and Half. — In London, this drink is made by mixing half porter and half ale ; in America, it is made by mixing half new and half old ale. Apple Toddy. — One tablespoonful of fine white sugar, 1 wine- glass of cider brandy, | of a baked apple. Fill the glass two- thirds full of boiling water, and grate a little nutmeg on top. t Apple Ponch.— Lay in a china bowl slices of apples and lemons alternately, each layer being tUckly strewed with cowdered sugar. 86 GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. ~^~ Pour over the fruit, -when the bowl is half filled, a bottle of claret ; cover, and let it stand for 6 hours. Then pour it through a mus- lin bag, and it is all ready. Old Man's Milk. — One wine-glass of port wine, 1 teaspoonful of sugar. Fill the tumbler one third full of hot milk. Perfect Love.— One tablespoonful sugar, 1 piece each of orange and lemon peel. Fill the tumbler one-third full of shaved ^ce, and fill balance with wine ; ornament in a tasty manner with berries in eeason ; sip through a straw. Molasses Candy. — West-Indian molasses, 1 gallon ; brown sugar, 2 lbs. ; boil the molasses and sugar in a preserving kettle over a flow fire ; when done enough it will cease boiling ; stir frequently, tmd, when nearly done, stir in the juice of four lemons, or two tea- spoonfuls of essence of lemon ; afterwards butter a pan, and pour out. f"* oNFECTioNERs' CoLORs. — Red, cochincal, 1 oz. ; boil 5 minutes in half pint water ; then add cream tartar, 1 oz. ; pounded alum, J cz. ; boil 10 minutes longer, add sugar, 2 oz. ; and bottle for use. Blue, put a little warm water on a plate, and rub in indigo till the required color is got. Tcllow, rub with some water a little yellow gamboge on a plate, or infuse the heart of a yellow-lily flower with milk-warm water. Green, boil the leaves of spinach about 1 ninute in a little water, and, when strained, bottle for use. To Candy Sugar. — Dissolve 2 parts of double refined sugar in 1 of water. Great care must be taken that the syrup does not boil over, and that the sugar is not burnt. The first degree is called the thread, which is subdivided into the little and great thread ; if you dip your finger in the syrup, and apply it to the thumb, the tenacity of the syrup will, on "separating the finger and thumb, af- ford a thread which shortly breaks, this is the little thread ; if the tiireid admits of a greater extension of finger and thumb, it is called the great thread ; by longer boiling you obtain the pearl, which admits of being drawn without breaking by the utmost ex- tension of finger and thumb ; this makes candied sugar : by further boiling you obtain the blue, which is known by dipping a skimmer with holes in the syrup, and blowing through them ; if bubbles are perceived, you have got the blow. Th&featlier implies more numer- ous bubbles, and then the sugar will fly off like flakes while the skimmer is being tossed. By boiling longer^ you obtain the crack ; it will crack when broken, and does not stick to the teeth ; dip a teaspoon into the sugar, and let it drop to the bottom of a pan of cold water. If the sugar remains hara, it has attained the degree termed crack. Fia Candv. — Take 1 lb. of sugar and 1 pint of water: set over a slow fire. When done, add a few drops of vinegar ana a lump of butter, and pour into pans in which split figs are laid. Raisin Candv can be made in the same manner, substituting stoned raisins for the figs. Common molasseg candy is very nice with all kinds of nuts added. iScoTCH BnTTER Candy. — Take 1 lb. of sugar and 1 pint of water ; dissolve, and boil. When done, add one tablespoonful of butter, and euough lemon juice and oil of lemon to flavor. Common Lemon Candy. — Take 3 Ib-t. of coarse brown sugar ; add to it three leacupfuls of water, and set over a slow fire for half GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS* RECEIPTS, 87 an hour ; put to it a little gum arabic dissolved in hot water; this is to clear it. Continue to take off the scum as long as any rises. When perfectly clear, try it by dipping a pipe-stem tirst into it and then into cold water, or by taking a spoonful of it into a saucer ; if done, it will snap like glass. Flavor with essence of lemon and cut it into sticks. Peppermint, Rose, or Hoarhocnd Candy. — They may be made as lemon candy. Flavor with essence of rose or peppermint or finely powdered hoarhound. Pour it out in a buttered paper, placed in a square tin pan. Popped Corn, dipped in boiling molasses, and stuck together, forms an excellent candy. Rock Candy. — To make fine rock candy, clarify double refined white sugar, filter it, and boil it till it is ready to crystallize, or boiled to a blister. The boiling sugar must measure 35° on the syrup weight, a degree more or less prevents its crystallization. Then take a brass kettle, of about 16 or 18 inches diameter and from 6 to 8 inches deep, smooth and polished on the inside. Make 8 or 10 small holes at equal distances from each other in a circle around the sides of the kettle, about 2 inches from the bottom ; pass threads through these from one side to the other, and stop the holes on the outside with paste or paper to prevent the syrup from running out. Having thus prepared the kettle, pour in the syrup, till it rises about an inch above the threads ; then place it in a stove moderately heated, and leave it to crystallize, agitating it from time to time. The crystallization will take place in six or seven days. As soon as the crystals are formed, pour oif the remaining syrup, and throw in a little water to wash the crystals that are left at the bottom of the vessel. So soon as the mass is thoroughly drained set it in a very hot stove, leave it for two days, when it is fit for use. Strmv-coloured rock candy is made by substituting brown for loaf sugar. The syrup must be boiled over a very hot fire in order to render the candy perfectly white. The sides of the kettle should be sponged repeatedly during the boiling process, to prevent the sugar from adhering and burning. Orange Rock Candy is made by flavoring the syrup with a couple of teaspoonfuls of orange flower water, and coloring with saffron, just as the syrup is about to be taken from the fire. Rose Rock Candy it flavored with rose water, and colored with clarified carmine lake. Vanilla Rock Candy is perfumed with vanilla, and colored with liquid violet. The degree of coloring may be tested by dropping a little of the colored syrup on a sheet of white paper. Ginger Candy. — Dissolve 1 lb. double-refined sugar in J pint of spring water ; set it over a clear fire, and let it boil to a thin syrup. Have ready a teaspoonful of powdered ginger, mix it smoothly with 2 or 3 spoonfuls of the syrup, then stir it gradually into the whole. Boil the mixture into a flake, watching it care- fully, that it may not exceed this point ; then add the freshly grated rind of a large lemon, and stir the sugar constantly and rapidly until it fall in a mass from the spoon, without sinking when dropped upon a plate. If boiled for a moment beyond this point, \\. will fall into a powder. Should this happen by mistake, add ^ 88 GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS, little water, and boil to the proper consistency. Dip the candy from the kettle, and drop it in small cakes upon buttered pans, then set it away to cool. CRiSAM Candy. — To 3 lbs. loaf sugar add i pt. water, and set it over a slow fire for half an hour; then add a teaspoonful of gum arabic dissolved, and a tablespoonful of vinegar. Boil it till it is brittle, then take it off, and flavor with vanilla, rose, or orange. Rub the hands with sweet butter, and pull the candy till it is white ; then twist or break it, or stretch it out into thin white strips, and cut it off. Red Verdun Sugared Almonds. — Dry the almonda in a stove by a slow fire. When dry enough to snap between the teeth, put them into a swinging basin and gum them by throwing over them a little gum arabic solution, cold ; swing them constantly till dry ; then give them another coating of gum arabic mixed with 4 oz. sugar, and swing them again till dry, using no fire. When they arc thoroughly dry, set them over a moderate fire. Dissolve some sugar in orange or rose water, not too thin, set it over the fire 2 or 3 minutes, strain it through a sieve, and pour it over the almonds in the basin. Swing them till they are thoroughly coated and dried ; then add another coating, composed of 2 parts of. carmine, one part of gum, and one part of sugar, and proceed as before. If the almonds are not perfectly covered, give them a coating in which there is considerable gum ; and when thoroughly moistened, throw on them some sifted sugar, stir till the mixture ia all absorbed, then add successive coatings of sugar till they are large enough, and put them into the stove to remain till the next day, when in order to tvhiten them, you will proceed to boil 6 or 7 lbs. of fine clariiiod sugar to a blister, add I lb. of starch after taking it from the fire, stirring it constantly till a paste is formed a little thicker than that used for pastilles; a few drops of blue lake may be added to produce a pearl white. Put the almonds, warm, into the swinging basin, add enough of the prepared sugar to coat them, swing the basin till they arc nearly dry, then set on the fire to finish the drying, then take the basin off tbe fire, heap them up in the middle, so as to allow the bottom of the vessel to cool ; then add the coating of sugar, swing and dry them as before, ana continue the process until 4 successive coatings of equal thickness have been given ; then heat them well in the basin, put them into pans, and set them in the stove to remain over niglit. You will then proceed to poliah them by giving them a coat of the prepared sugar and starch, and shake them violently until they are quite dry ; give them another coating anro- p»red is to be rolled out with fme sugar dredged over the slab to GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. 93 the thickness of two penny pieces, then if you possess a ribbed rolling-pin, use it to roll the paste again in cross directions, so as to imprint on its whole surface a small lozenge or diamond pattern. You now use your tin cutter to stamp out the lozenges, and as you do so place them on sugar powdered baking sheets to dry in the screen. Ginger Lozenges. — Proceed as in the foregoing ; use a tables spoonful of essence of ginger, or 1 oz. of ground ginger to flavor, and a few drops of thick wet gamboge to color the paste. Hoar- hound Lozenges. Ingredients ; 1 oz. of gum dragon soaked in a gill of very strong extract of hoarhound, 1^ lb. of fine icing sugar. Proceed as for the peppermint lozenges. Cinnamon Lozenges are pre- pared in the same manner as ginger or peppermint lozenges, with this difiFerence only; a dessert-spoonful of essence of cinnamon is to be used in the flavoring of them, a few drops of thick, ground, wet-burnt umber should be used with a pinch of carmine to give the paste the tinge of cinnamon color. Clove Lozenges. The same as peppermint lozenges, using essence of cloves for flavoring, and burnt umber to color the paste. Orange Lozenges. Ingredients ; I oz. prepared gum, l\ lb. sugar, 2 oz. of orange-sugar, the gum to be soaked in 2 oz. of orange flower water. Proceed as for peppermint lozenges. Lemon Lozenges. Ingredients; 1 oz. prepared gum, IJ lb. of icing sugar, 2 oz. of lemon sugar, and a few drops of acetic acid. CoWs/oot Lozenges. Ingredients ; I oz. of gum dragon soaked in 2 oz. of orange flower water, 1^ lb. of fine icing sugar, and I oz of essence of colt's foot. Proceed as for peppermint lozenges. Cayenne and Catechu Lozenges. Ingredients; 1 oz. of gum dragon soaked in 2 oz. of water, 2 lbs. fine icing sugar, \ oz. essence of cayenne, and^ oz. of prepared catechu. Proceed as for peppermint lozenges. Gum Pastilles, or Jujubes. — Ingredients ; 1 lb. of picked gum arabic, 14 oz. of the finest sugar pounded and sifted, J gill of double orange flower water, and 1 pt. tepid water to soak the gum in, which is afterwards to be strained off clean. Put the soaked and strained gum into a sugar boiler with the sugar, and use a clean spoon to stir it over a very moderate fire, while it boils and reduces to the small pearl degree ; then add the orange flower water, stir all together on the tire, remove the preparation from the stove, skim ofi" the froth, and use the mixture to cast the jujubes in levelled layers of starch powder contained in a flat box. Spanish Licorice Jujubes. — Ingredients : 1 lb. picked gum arabic, 14 oz. of sugar, and 2 oz. of Spanish licorice dissolved in a gill of hot watei-, and afterwards strained clean. First prepare the gum and boil it with the sugar as directed in the preceding article, and when reduced by boiling to the small pearl degree, incorporate the prepared Spanish licorice with it, remove the scum from the surface, and finish the jujubes in the manner indicated above. Raspberry Jujubes. Ingredients : 1 lb. picked gum arabic soaked in a pint of hot water and afterwards strained, 14 oz. of sugar, 1 gill of filtered raspberry juice, and a few drops of cochineal. Proceed as directed in the foregoing case, adding the raspberry and coloring last. Black Currant Jujubes. Proceed in all respects as indicated for raspberry 94 anocERS AND confectioners' receipts. 3ujube3, omittinff tho cochineal, hlack ciirrant juice being used. Red Currant Jvjubes. The same as black currant jujubes, red currant juice being used and a few drops of cochineal. Ordinary Jujubes. Ingredients ; 1 lb. gum arabic soaked in 1 pt. of hot water and afterwards strained, 14 oz. sugar, \ oz. essence of roses, and a few drops of prepared cochineal. Let the mixture be prepared as for other jujubes, but instead of casting them in impressions made in starch-powder, when the preparation is ready, pour it into a very clean smooth tinned baking sheet to the depth of a quarter of an inch, and set it to dry in the screen, or hot closet (moderate heat) ; when sulEciently dried, so that on pressing the surface it proves somewhat elastic to the touch, remove it from the heat, and allow it to become cold ; the sheet of jujube may then be easily detached, and is to be cut up with scissors in the shape of diamonds. Stick Apple Sugar. — Boil the sugar to caramel, flavor with apple juice together with tartaric or other acid, pour it on a marble slab, draw it into sticks, cut them of equal length, then roll them on the slab till they are perfectly cold ; when finished, wrap them in tissue-paper and put them in fancT envelopes. CcERA.vT AND RASPBERRY Paste Drops. — Ingredients : 1 lb. of pulp (the currants and raspberries in equal proportions boiled, and afterwards rubbed through a sieve), 1 lb. of sifted sugar. Stir both together in a copper sugar-boiler or preserving pan over a brisk fire, until the paste becomes sufficiently reduced to show the bottom of the preserving pan as you draw the spoon across it; then proceed to lay out the drops about the size of a tlorin, using a spputed sugar boiler for the purpose. The drops should then be placed in the screen to dry, at a low heat for an hour or so. When the drops are dry, use a thin knife to remove them from tb". 'jin sheet on which you laid them out, and put them away between sheets of paper in closed boxes, in a dry place. Damson 2'aste Drops. Ingredients : 1 lb. of damson thick pulp, 1 lb. bruised sugar. Stir the pulp and sugar on the fire until reduced to a thick paste, then proceed to lay out the drops on square sheets of polished tin ; dry them in the screen (moderate heat), and remove them in the manner aforesaid. These drops may be prepared with all kinds of plums and also with gooseberries. J'ear Paste Drops. Use 1 lb. pear pulp (made by peeling the pears, and boiling them to a pulp with J pt. of cider or perry, ami rubbing this through a coarse sieve), 1 lb. of bruised sugar. Proceed as for damson paste. Apple Da^te Drops. Use 1 lb. of apple pulp (made by peeling, slicing and boiling the apples with i pt. cider), 1 lb. of bruised sugar. Proceed as in the foregoing cases, auding a few drops of cochineal to half of the jiaste for the sako tif variety. J'lne Apple Paste Drops. Use 1 lb. of pine apple juilp (made by first peeling, and then grating the pine-a))ple on a dish, tising a clean coarse tin grater for the purpose), 1 lb. of bruised sugar. Proceed as in the former cases. Vases, Baskets, Fku'res, Ani.mals, &c., iv Graixed Scoar. — The sugar being boiled to the ball degree, add a few drops of acetic acid, and work the sugar with the back part of the bowl of a silver tablespoon up against the side of the sugar boiler. GROCERS AND CONFECTIONERS' RECEIPTS. 9T> fetchine: up the whole in turns, so that every portion maj acquire aaopalized or whitish color. As soon as the sugar has beenworked up to this state, which constitutes " graining," pour it imme- diately into the ready prepared mould ; and when it has become perfectly set firm in the centre, you may turn the vase, basket, animal, or whatever the object may be, out of its mould, and place it in the screen or hot closet to dry, at a very moderate heat. Af- terwards they may be painted in colors to imitate nature. EvERTO>f Taffee.— To make this favorite and wholesome candy, take li pounds of moist sugar, 3 ounces of butter, a teacup and a half of water, and one lemon. Boil the sugar, butter, water, and half the rind ot the lemon together ; and, when done, — which will be known by dropping into cold water, when it should be quite crisp,— let it stand aside till the boiling has ceased, and then stir in the juice of the lemon. Butter a dish, and pour it in about a quarter of an inch in thickness. The fire must be quick, and the taffee stirred all the time. Candy Fruit.— Take one pound of the best loaf sugar; dip each lump into a bowl of water, and put the sugar into your preservmg kettle. Boil it down, and skim it until perfectly clear, and in a candying state. When sufficiently boiled, have ready the fruits you wish to preserve. Large white grapes, oranges separated into small pieces, or preserved fruits, taken out of their syrup and dried, are very nice. Dip the fruits into the prepared sugar while it is hot ; put them in a cold place ; they will soon become hard. Jellies without Fruit. — To 1 pint of water put ^ oz. alum • boil a minute or two ; then add 4 lbs. white sugar ; continue the boiling a little ; strain wbile hot; and, when cold, put in half a twenty-five cent bottle of extract of vanilla, strawberry, lemon or any o'her flavor you desire for jelly. Prize Honey.— Good common sugar, 5 lbs. ; water, 2 lbs. ; bring gradually to a boil, skimming when cool ; add 1 lb. bees' honey and 4 drops essence of peppermint. If you desire a better article, use white sugar, and ^ lb. less water, \ Ib.more honey. Another.— Coflee sugar, 10 lbs. ; water, 3 lbs. ; cream tartar, 2 oz. ; strong vinegar, 2 tablespoons ; white of an egg well beaten ; bees' honey, \ lb. ; Lubin's extract of honeysuckle, 10 drops. Put on the sugar and water in a suitable kettle on the fire ; when luke- warm, stir in the cream tartar and vinegar ; add the egg • when the sugar is nearly melted put in the honey, and stir till it'comes to a boil ; take it off, let it stand a few minutes ; strain, then add the extract of honeysuckle last ; stand over night, and it is ready for use. Another.— Common sugar, 4 lbs. ; water, 1 pt. ; let them come to a boil, and skim. Then add pulverized alum, I oz. ; remove from the fire, and stir in cream of tartar, ^ oz., and water, or extract of rose, 1 tablespoonful, and it is fit for use. To Keep Fruits Fresh.— Rosin, 2 lbs. ; tallow, 2 oz. ; bees' -wax 2 oz. Melt slowly over the fire in an iron pot, but don't boil! Take the fruit separately, and rub it over with pulverized chalk or whiting (to prevent the coating from adhering to the fruit) then dip it into the solution once, and hold it np a moment to set the coating, then pack away carefully in barrels, boxes, or on shelves 96 LEATHER WORKERS, &C., RECEIPTS. ia a cool place. Unequalled for preserving apples, pears, lemons, oranges, &c. Acid Drops. — Pound and sift into a clean pan 8 ozs. of double refined sugar, add slowly as much water as will render the sugar sufficiently moist not to stick to the stirring spoon, place the pan on a small stove or slow fire, and stir till it nearly boils, remove from the fire and stir in | oz. tartaric acid. Place it on the fire for half a minute, then dip out small quantities from the pan, and let it fall in small drops on a clean tin plate ; remove the drops in 2 hours with a knife. Ready for sale in 24 hours. TANNERS, CURRIERS, BOOT, SHOE AND HARNESS MAKERS, MARBLE WORKERS, &c. Best Color for Boot, Shoe, and Harness Edge. — Alcohol, 1 pint; tincture of iron, II oz. ; extract logwood, 1 oz. ; pulverized uutgalls, 1 cz. ; soft water, ^ pint ; sweet oil, ^ oz. ; put this last into the alcohol before adding the water. Nothing can exceed the beautiful finish imparted to the leather by this preparation. The only objection is the cost. Cheap Color for the Edge. — Soft water, 1 gallon ; extract log- wood, 1 oz. ; boil till the extract is dissolved ; remove from the tire, add copperas, 2 oz., bichromate of potash and gum arable, of each J oz. ; all to be pulverized. Superior Edge Blacking. — Soft water, 5 gallons ; bring to a boil, and add 8 oz. logwood extract, pulverized ; boil -i minutes, remove from the fire, and stir in 2^ oz. gum arable, 1 oz. bichro- mate of potash, and 80 grains prussiatc of potash. For a small quantity of this, use water, 2 quarts ; extract of log- wood, ^ oz. ; gum arable, 90 grains ; bichromate of potash, 48 grains ; prussiate of potash, 8 grains. Boil the extract in the water 2 minutes ; remove from the fire and stir in the others, and it is ready fur use. For tanners' surface blacking, which is not required to take on a higii polish, the gum arable may be omiited. Sizing FOR Boots and Shoes in Trekino Out. -Water, 1 quart; dis- solve in it, by heat, isinglass, 1 oz. ; adding more water to re|ilace glass, by evaporation ; when dissolved, add starch,!; oz. ; extract of logwood, bees'-wax, and tallow, ofeacli, 2 oz. Rub thestarcli up first by pouring on suflicicnt boiling water for that purj)ose. It makes boots and shoes soft and pliable, and gives a splendid appearance to old stock on the shelves. Black Varnish for the Edge. — Take 98 per cent, alcohol, I pint; shellac, 3 oz. ; rosin, 2 oz. ; pine turpentine, 1 oz. ; lampblack, i oz. ; mix ; and when the gums are all cut, it is reaiiy for use. Tliis preparation makes a most splendid appearance when applied) to boot, shoe, or harness edge, and is equally applicable to cloth or wood, where a gloss is required after being i)ainted. LEATHER WORiCERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 97 Best Harness Varnish Extant.— Alcohol, 1 gallon ; whit© turpentine, 1 J Ibg. ; gum shellac, 1^ lbs. ; Venice turpentine, 1 gill. Let them stand by the stove till the gums are dissolved, then add sweet oil, 1 gill ; and color if you wish it with lampblack, 2 oz. This will not crack like the old varnish. Harness oil.— Neat's-foot oil, 1 gal., lampblack, 4 oz. Mix well. Brilliant French Varnish for Leather.— Spirit of wine, J pint ; vinegar, 5 pints ; gum Senegal in powder, ^ lb. ; loaf sugar, 6 oz. ; powdered galls, 2 oz. ; green copperas, 4 oz. Dissolve the gum and sugar in the water ; strain, and put on a slow fire, but don't boil ; now put in the galls, copperas, and the alcohol ; stir well for five minutes; set off; and when nearly cool, strain through flannel, and bottle for use. It is applied with a pencil brush. Most superior. Liquid Japan for Leather.— Molasses, 8 lbs. ; lampblack. 1 lb. ; sweet oil, 1 lb. ; gum arable, 1 lb. ; isinglass, 1 lb. Mix well in 32 lbs. water ; apply heat ; when cool, add 1 quart alcohol ; an ox's gall will improve it. Waterproof OH-Blacking, Camphene, 1 pint ; add all the India-rubber it will dissolve ; currier's oil, 1 pint ; tallow, 7 lbs. ; lampblack, 2 oz. Mix thoroughly by heat. Shoemakers' Heel Balls.— Bees' -wax, 8 oz. ; tallow, 1 oz. ; melt, and add powdertd gum arable, 1 oz., and lampblack to color. Cement for Leather or Rubber Soles and Leather Belting. — Gutta percha, 1 lb. ; India-rubber, 4 oz. ; pitch, 2 oz. ; shellac, 1 oz. ; oil, 2 oz. ; melt, and use hot. _ Oil Paste Blacking.— Ivory black, 4 lbs. ; molasses, 3 lbs. ; sweet oil, 1 lb. ; oil vitriol, 3 lbs. ; mix, and put in tins. To Dye Leather Blue, Red, or Purple.— For rerf, steep it in alum water, then put it in a warm decoction of Brazil wood ; blue, steep it in an indigo vat; purple, steep the skins in alum water, then put it in a warm decoction of logwood. Gold Varnish. — Turmeric, 1 dram ; gamboge, 1 dram ; turpen- tine, 2 pints ; shellac, 5 oz. ; sandarach, 5 oz. ; dragon's blood, 8 drams; thin mastic varnish, 8 oz. ; digest with occasional agitation for fourteen days ; then set aside to fine, and pour off the clear. Grain Black for Harness Leather. — First stain in tallow ; then take spirits turpentine, 1 pint ; cream of tartar, ] oz. ; soda, 1 oz. ; gum shellac, | oz. ; thick paste, reduced thin, 2 quarts. Mix well. This will finish 12 sides. Stains for Wood and Leather. — Red. — Brazil wood, 11 parts: alum, 4 parts ; water, 85 parts. Boil. Blue.— Logwood, 7 parts ; blue vitriol, 1 part ; water, 22 parts. Boil. Black.— Logwood, 9 parts ; sulphate of iron, 1 part ; water, 25 parts. Boil. Green. — Verdigris, 1 part ; vinegar, 3 parts. Dissolve. Yellow.— French berries, 7 parts ; water, 10 parts ; alum, 1 part. Purple.— Logwood, 11 parts ; alum, 3 parts ; water, 29 parts. Boil. Deer Skins. — Tanning and Buffing for Glov'^-' — For each skin, take a bucket of water, and put into it one qt. of hine ; let the skin or skins lie ia from 3 to 4 days ; then rinse in clean water, hair, aad 9 98 LEATHER WORKERS, &C., RECEIPTS. grain ■ then soak Ihem in cold water to get out the glue ; now scour or pound in good soap-suds for half an hour; after which take ■white vitriol, alum, and salt, 1 tablespoon of each to a skin; these will be dissolved in sufficient water to cover the skin, and remain in it for 24 hours ; wring out as dry as convenient, and spread on with a brush ^ pt. of currier's oil, and haug in the sun about 2 days ; after -which you will scour out the oil with soap-suds, and hang out again until perfectly dry; then pull and work them until they are soft; and if a reasonable time dues not make them soft, scour out in suds again as before, until complete. The oil may be saved by pouring or taking it from the top of the suds, if left standing a short time. The bufPcolor is given by spreading yellow ochre evenly over the surface of the skm, when finished, rubbing it in well with a brush. Tanxixo with Acid.— After having removed the hair, scouring, soaking, and pounding in the suds, &c., as in the last recipe, in place of the white vitriol, alum, and salt, as there meutioned, take oil of vitriol (sulphixric acid), and water, equal parts of each, and thorou"-hly wet the flesh-side of the skin with it, by means of a sponge^r cloth upon a stick ; then folding up the skin, letting it lie for 20 minutes only, having ready a solution of sal-soda and water say 1 lb. to a bucket of water, and soak the skin or skins in that for two hours, when you will wash in clean water, and apply a little dry salt, letting lie in the salt over night, or that length of time ■ then remove the flesh with a blunt kuife, or, if doing busi- ness on a large scale, by means of the regular beam and flesh-knife; when dry, or nearly so, soften by pulling and rubbing with the hands, and also with a piece of pumice-stone. This, of course, is the quickest way of tanning, and by only wetting the skins with the acid, and soaking out in 20 minutes, they are not rotted. Another Method. — Oil of vitriol, i oz. ; salt, 1 teacup ; milk sufficient to handsomely cover the skin, not exceeding 3 qts. ; warm the milk, then add the salt and vitriol; stir the skin in the liquid 40 minutes, keeping it warm ; then dry. and Avork it as directed in the ahovpi Liquid Red.— Uhannellers will find that no better or richer color for their purposes can be got than the red ink described under the Grocers' Department, diluted to the required shade. For color for the bottoms of shoes use tincture of red sanders. Bridle Stain. — Skimmed milk, 1 pt. : spirits of salts, i oz. ; spts. of red lavender, \ oz. ; gum arabic, 1 oz. ; and the juice of 2 lemons; mix well together, and cork for use ; apply with a sponge ; when dry, polish with a brush or apiece of flannel. If wished paler, put in less red lavender. New Tanning Composition. — For harness leather, 4 lbs. catechu, .3 i)ts. common lye, 3 oz. of alum. For wax leather, (s^)lit leather) 3 lbs. catechu, 3 pts. common lye, 3 oz. alum. For ca/J-xkins, 2 lbs. "catechu, 1 pt. lye, 2 oz. alum. Por sheef>-skin.i, 1 lb. catechu, 1 pt. lye, I oz. alum. The calecliu by itself will make the leather hard and brittle, the lye will soften it ; the alum, being (mly used for color- ing can be dispensed with, or other matter used in its place. The mixture is in every case boiled, and the leather is then immersed in It long enough to be thoroughly tanueil, for which purpose th» liwruess leather should be steeped from 18 to 20 daya, wax leather LEATHER, WORKERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 99 from 12 to 14 days, calf-skin from 7 to 9 days, and sheep-skin from 2 to 4 days. Pkocess of Tanning Calf, Kip, and Harness Leather in prom 6 TO 30 Davs. — For a 12-lb. calt'-sJiin, take 3 lbs. of terra japonica, common salt, 2 lbs. ; alum, 1 lb. ; put them into a copper kettle -with sufficient water to dissolve the whole by boiling. The skin will be limed, haired, and treated every way as for the old process, when it will be put into a vessel with sufiBcient water to cover it, at which time you will put in 1 pint of the composition, stirring it well, add- ing the same amount each night and morning for three days, when you will add the whole, handling 2 or 3 times daily all the lime tanning ; you can continue to use the tanning liquid by add- ing half the quantity each time, by keeping these proportions for any amount. If you desire to give a bark color to the leather, you will put in 1 lb. of Sicily sumac; kip skins will require about 20 days, light house bides for harness 30 days, calf-skins from 6 to 10 da.ys at most. To Tan Raw Hide. — When taken from the animal, spread it flesh side up ; then put 2 parts of salt, 2 parts of saltpetre and alum com- bined, make it fine, sprinkle it evenly over the surface, roll it up, let it alone a few days till dissolved ; then take off what flesh remains, and nail the skin to the side of a barn in the sun, stretch tight, to make it soft like harness leather, put neat's-foot oil on it, fasten it up in the sun again ; then rub out all the oil you can with a wedge- shaped stick, and it is tanned with the hair on. French Finish for Leather. — Take a common wooden pailful of scraps (the legs and pates of calf-skins are best), and put a handful each of salt and alum upon them, and let them stand three days ; then boil them until they get a thick paste ; in using, 3'ou will warm it, and in the first application put a little tallow wi{h it, and for a second time a little soft soap, and use it in the regular way of finishing, and your leather will be soft and pliable, like French leather. French PatJint Leather. — Work into the skin with appropriate tools 3 or 4 successive coatings of drying varnish, made by boiling linseed oil with white lead and litharge, in the proportion of one pound of each of the latter to one gallon of the former, and adding a portion of chalk or ochre, each coatmg being thoroughly dried before the application of the rest. Ivory black is then substituted for the chalk or ochre, the varnish thinned with spirits wf turpen- tine, and five additional applications made in the same manner as before, except that it is put on thin and not worked in. The leath- er is rubbed down with pumice-stone, in powder, and then placed in a room at 90 degrees, out of the way of dust. The last varnish is prepared by boiling i lb. of asphaltum with 10 lbs. of the drying oil ust d in the first stage of the process, and then stirring in 5 lbs. copal varnish and 10 lbs. of turpentine. It must have 1 month's age before using it. Cheap Tanning without Bark or Mineral Astringents. — The astringent liquor is composed of water, 17 gals. ; Aleppo galls, J lb.; Bengal catechu, 1| oz. and 5 lbs. of tormentil, or septtbil root. Powder the ingredients, and boil in the water 1 hour ; ■\vhen cooi, put iu tht skins (which must be prepared by being 100 LEATHER \V0IIKERS, &C., RECEIPTS. plunged into a preparation of bran and water for 2 days pre- viously) ; handle them frequently during the first 3 days, let thera alone the next 3 days, then handle three or four times in one day ; let them lie undisturbed for 25 days more, when the process will be complete. Canadian Prockss. — The Canadians make four liquors in using the japonica. The FIRST liquor is made by dissolving, for 20 sides of upper, 15 lbs. of terra japonica in sufficient water to cover the upper, being tanned. The second liquor contains the same amount of japonica, and 8 lbs. ot saltpetre also. The third contains 20 lbs. of japonica, and 4^ lbs. of alum. The fourth liquor contaiis only 15 lbs. of japonica, and U lbs. of sulphuric acid ; and the leather remains 4 days in each liquor for upper ; and for sole the. quantities and time are both doubled. They count 50 calf-skins in place ot 20 sides of upper, but let them lie in each liquor only 3 days. Fifty Dollar Recii>e for Tanning Fur and other Skins. — Remove the legs and useless parts, soak the skin soft, aud then remove the fleshy substances, and soak it in warm water 1 hour. iS'ow take for each skin bora.x, saltpetre, and Glauber-salt, of each ^ oz., and dissolve or wet with soft water sufficient to allow it to be spread on the flesh side of the skin. Put it on with a brush thickest in the centre or thickest part of the skin, and double the skin together, flesh side in ; keeping it in a cool place for 24 hours, not allowing it to freeze. Then wash the skin clean, and take sal-soda, 1 oz., borax, ^ oz. ; refined soap, 2 oz. ; melt them slowly together, being careful not to allow them to boil, and apply the mixture to the flesh side as at first. Boil up again, and keep in a warm place for 24 hours ; then wash the skin clean again, as above, and have saleratus, 2 oz., dissolved in hot rain water suffi- cient to well saturate the skin ; take alum, 4 oz. ; salt, 8 oz. ; and dissolve also in hot rain water ; when sufficiently cool to allow the handling ot it without scalding, j)ut in the skin for 12 hours ; then wring out the water and hang up for 12 hours more to dry. Repeat this last soaking aud drying 2 or 3 times, according to the desired softness of the skin when finished. Lastly finish, by pulling and working, and finally by rubbing with a piece of pumice-stone and fine sand-paper. This works like a charm on sheep-skins, fur skins, dog, wolf, bfear-skins, &c. FuENCit Polish or Diiessino for Leather. — .Mix 2 pts. best vinegar with 1 pt. soft water ; stir into it ,1 lb. glue, broken up, Ji lb. logwood-chips, i oz. of finely powdered indigo, \ oz. of the Rest soft soap, | oz. of isinglass ; put the mi.xture over the fire, and let it boil ten minutes or more ; then strain, bottle, and cork. When cold, it is fit for iLse. Ap|ily with a sponge. CuRuiEUs' Size. — Take of sizing, 1 qt. ; soft soap, 1 gill ; stuff- ing, 1 gill ; sweet milk, ^ pt. ; boil the sizing in water to a proper consistence, strain, and add the other ingredients ; and when thoroughly mixed, it is ready for use. Curriers' Paste. — First Coat. — Take of water, 2 qts. ; flour. ^ pint ; Castile soap, 1 oz. ; make into paste. Second Coat. — TaKc of first paste, i pt. ; gum tragacanth, 1 gi.'. ; water, 1 pt. ; mix uU together. This will finish la sidco of u[)per. LEATHER WORKERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 101 CpRRiERa' Skirting.— This is for finishing skirting and the flesh of harness leather, in imitation of oak tanning. Take of chrome yellow, ^ lb. ; yellow ochre, 1 lb. ; cream of tartar, 1 oz. ; soda, ^ oz. ; paste, 5 qts. ; mix well. This will finish twelve sides. Skirting. — For the grain to imitate oak tan. Take of chrome yellow, 5 lb. ; yelloT*>^^hre, ^ lb. ; cream of tartar, 1 oz. ; soda, I oz. ; paste, 2 qts. ; sp.-its of turpentine, 1 pt. ; mix well. This will finish twelve sides. Dyes for Leather. — Ulue. — For each skin, take 1 oz. of indigo, put it into boiling water, and let it stand one night ; then warm it a little, and with a brush smear the skin twice over, and finish the same as the red. Bed. — After the skin has been properly prepared with sheep, pigs' dung, &c., then take strong alum water, and sponge over your skin ; when dry, boil a strong gall liquor fit cannot be too strong) ; then boil a strong Brazil wood liquor (the stronger the better); take a sponge, dip it into your liquor, and sponge it over your skin; repeat this till it comes to a full red. To finish your skin, take the white of eggs, and a little gum dragon, mix the two together in half a gill of water, sponge over your skin, and, when dry, palish oft". Yellow. — 1. Infu.se quercitron bark in vinegar, in which put a little alum, and brush over your skins with the infusion ; finish the same as the red. 2. Take 1 pt. of whisky; 4 oz. turmeric; mix them well together ; when settled, sponge your skins over, and finish as above. Black. — Put your skin on a clean board, sponge it over with gall and sumach liquors, strong ; then take a strong logwood liquor, sponge it over three or four times : then take a little copperas, mix it in the logwood liquor ; sponge it over your skin, and finish it same as the red. Purple. — First sponge with the alum liquor strong, then with log- wood liquor strong; or mix them both, and boil them, and sponge with the liquor ; finish the same as the red. The pleasing hues of yellow, brown, or tan color, are readily imparted to leather by the following simple process : steep saffron in boiling water for a, number of hours, wet a sponge or soft brush in the liquor, and with it smear the leather. The quantity of saffron, as well as of water, will of course depend on how much dye may be wanted, and their relative proportions to the depth of color required. To Marble Books or Paper. — Marbling of books or paper is performed thus : Dissolve 4 ounces of gum arable in 2 quarts of fair water ; then provide several colors mixed with water in pots or shells, and with pencils peculiar to each color ; sprinkle them by way of intermixture upon the gum water, which must be put into a trough, or some broad vessel ; then, with a stick, curl them, or draw them out in streaks to as much \rariety as may be done. H.iving done this, hold your b ^ok or books close together, and only dip the edges in, on the top of the water and colors, very lightly; Avhich done, take them oft', and the plain impression of the colors in mixture will be upon the leaves ; doing as well the ends as the .front of the books in like manner, and afterwards glazing the colors. Bookbinders' Varnish. — Shellac, 8 parts ; gum benzoine, 3 parts ; gum mastic, 2 parts • >>--"ise, and digest in alcohol, 48 parts ; oil of lavender, 4 part. Or, digest shellac, 4 parts ; gum mastic, 102 LEATHER WORKERS, &C., RECEiPTSi 2 parts ; gum dammer and white turpentine, of each, 1 part ; with alcohol C95 per cent.), 28 parts. Red Sprinkle for Bookbinders' Use. — Brazil wood (ground), 4 parts ; alum, 1 part ; vinegar, 4 parts ; water, 4 parts. Boil until reduced to 7 parts, then add a quantity of loaf sugar and gum ; bottle for use. Blue. — Strong sulphuric acid, 8 oz. ; Spanish in- digo, powdered, 2 oz. ; mix iu a bottle that will hold a quart, and place it in a warm bath to promote solution. For use, dilute a little to the required color in a tea-cup. Black. — No better black can be procured than that made by the receipt for edge black- ing, in this work, which see. Orange co/o/-.— Ground Brazil wood, 16 parts ; annotto, 4 parts ; alum, sugar, and gum arabic, each 1 part; water, 70 parts, boil, strain, aud bottle. Purple. — Logwood chips, 4 parts ; powdered alum, 1 part; soft water, 24 parts ; boil until reduced to 16 parts, and bottle for use. Green. — French berries, 1 part ; soft water, 8 parts. Boil, and add a little pow- dered alum ; then bring it to the required shade of green, by add- ing liquid blue. Brown. — Logwood chips, 1 part ; aunotto, I part ; boil in water, 6 parts ; if too light, add a piece of copperas the size of a pea. Tree-Marble. — A marble in the form of trees may be done by bending the boards a little on the centre, using the same method as the common marble, having the covers previously prepared. The end of a candle may be rubbed on different parts of the board to form knots. Rice-Marble. — Color the cover with spirits of wine and turmeric, then place on rice in a regular manner, throw on a very fine sprinkle of copperas water till the cover is nearly black, and let it remain till dry. The cover may be spotted with the red liquid or potash-water, very freely, before the rice is thrown off tho boards. Spotted Marble for Books^ etc. — After the fore-edge of the book is cut, let it remain in the press, and throw on linseeds in a regular manner, sprinkle the edge with any dark color till tho paper is covered, them shake oft' the seeds. Various colors may be used; the edge may be colored with yellow or red before throwing on the seeds, and sprinkling with blue. Tho seeds will make a tino fancy edge when placed very thick on different part^, with a few slightly thrown on the spaces between. Japan (Jolorimjfor Leather^ Book-covers, etc. — After the booK is covered and dry, color tho cover with potash-water mixed with a little paste : give 2 good coats of Brazil wash, and glaze it ; put the book between the hands, allowing the boards to slope a little ; dash on copperas-water, then with a sponge full of red liquid press out on the back and ou diffe- rent parts large droi)S, which will run down each board and make a-fiae shaded red ; when the cover is dry, wash it over 2 or three times with Brazil wash to give it a brighter color. (&e the various dyes for leather.) Gold Sprinkle for Books.— Put in a marble mortar * oz. pure honey and one book of gold loaf, rub thcui well together until they are very fine, add J pint clear water, and mix well together when tho water clears, pour it off, and put in more till the honey is all_ extracted, and nothing remains but tho gold ; mix one grain of corrosito sublimate in a teaspoonful of .r over 1 07.. of j)owdercd extract of logwood, and, when the solution is ettected, 1 dr. of yellow ciiromate of jiotash is added, and the whole well stirred. It is then ready for use us a wood-stain, or for CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 107 ■writing ink. When rubbed on wood, it produces a pure black. Repeat with 2, 3, or 4 applications, till a deep black is produced, which acquires the highest beauty when polished or stained. Imitation op Mahogany. — Let the first coat of paialing be white lead, the second, orange, and the last, burnt umber or sienna: imilating the veins according to j'our taste and practica. To Imitate Wainscot. — Let the first coat be white ;,the second, half white and halt yellow ochre; and the third, yellow ochre only ; shadow with umber or sienna. To Imitate Satin Wood. — Take white for your first coating, light blue for the second, and dark blue or dark green for the third. Rosewood Satin, very Beight Shade. — Used Cold. — Take al- cohol. I gal. ; camwood, 2 oz. ; set them in a warm place 24 hours ; then add extract of logwood, .3 oz. ; aquafortis, 1 oz. ; and when dissolved; it is ready for use ; it makes a very bright ground like the most beautiful rosewood ; 1, 2, or more coats as you desire, over the whole surface. Varnish for Frames, etc.— Lay the frames over witn tin or silver foil by means of plaster of Paris, glue or cement of some kind, that the foil may be perfectly adherent to the wood ; then apply your gold lacquer varnish, which is made as follows : Ground turmeric, 1 lb ; powdered gamboge, U ounces; powdered sandarach, 3i lbs ; powdered shellac, | lbs. ; spirits of wine, 2 gals. ; dissolve aud strain ; then add turpentine varnish, 1 pt. ; and it is ready tor use. Cherry Stain.— Rain water, 3 qts. ; annotto, 4 oz. ; boil in a copper kettle till the annotto is dissolved, then put in a piece of potash the size of a walnut ; keep it on the fire about half an hoar longer, and it is ready to bottle for use. Rosewood Stain, Light Shade. — Equal parts of logwood and red-wood chips , boil well in water sufficient to make a strong stain ; apply it to the furniture while hot ; 2 or 3 coats according to the depth of color desired. Rose Pink Stain and Varnish.— Put 1 oz. of potash in 1 qt. water, with red sanders, 1^ oz.; extract the color from the wood and strain; then add gum shellac, ^ lb., dissolve it by a brisk fire. Used upon logwood stain for rosewood imitation. Blue Stain for Wood. — 1. Dissolve copper filings in aquafortis, brush the wood with it, and then go over the work with a hot so- lution of pearlash (2 oz.to 1 pt. of water) till it assumes a perfectly blue color. 2. Boil 1 lb. of indigo, 2 lbs. wood, and 3 oz. alum, in i gal. water, brush well over until thoroughly stained. Imitation of Botany-Bav Wood.— Boil i lb. French berries (the unripe Derries ot the Rhamnus infectornis) in 2 qts. water till of a deep yellow, and while boiling hot, give 2 or 3 coats to the work. If a deeper color is desired, give a coat of logwood decoction over the yellovN When nearly dry, form the grain with No. 8, black ii'itn, used hot, and, when dry, rust and varnish. Mahogany Color— Dark.— 1. Boil f lb. of madder and 2 oz. log- wood-ciups in a gallon ot water, and brush well over while hot ; when dry go over the whole with pearlash solution, 2 drs. to the quart. 2 Put 2 oz. dragon s blood, bruised, into a quart of oil of 108 CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. turpentine; let the bottle stand in a warm place, shake frequently, and, when dissolved, steep the work in the mixture. Box-Wood Brown Staix.— Hold your work to the fire, that it may receive a gentle warmth ; then take aquafortis, and, with a feather, pass it over the work till you find it change to a fine brown (always keeping it near the fire) , you maj- then varnish or polish it. Light Red Brown. — Boil ^ lb. madder and i lb. fustic in 1 gal. water ;'brush over the work, when boiling hot, until properly stain- ed. 2. the surface of the work being quite smooth, brush over with a weak solution of aquafortis, ^ oz. to the pint ; then finisb with the following : — Put 44 oz. dragon's blood and 1 oz.soda, both well bruised, to 3 pts spirits of wine, let it stand in a warm place, shake frequently, strain and hiy on with a soft brush, repeating until of a proper color ; polish with linseed oil or varnish. Purple. — Brush the work several times with the logwood decoc- tion used for i\'o. 6, Black ; and, when dry, give a coat of pearlash solution, 1 dr to a quart • lay it on evenly. Red. — 1. Boil I lb. Brazil wood and 1 oz. pearlasli in a gal. of water; and, while hot, brush over the work until of a jiroper color. Dissolve 2 oz. alum in 1 qt. water, and brush the solution over the work before it dries. 2. Take a gallon of the above stain, add 2 oz. more pearlash ; use hot, and brush over with the alum solution. 3. Use a cold solution of archil, and brush over with the pearlash solution for iVo. 1, Dark mahogany. Mahogany Stain on Wood. — Take nitric acid, dilute with 10 parts of water, and wash the wood with it. To produce roseicood finish, glaze the same with carmine or Municli lake. As[)haltLm, thinned with turpentine, forms an excellent mahogany color on new work. Beactifcl Varnish for Violins, &c. — Rectified spirits of wine, k gal. ; add 6 oz. gum sandarach, 3 oz. jum mastic, and h pt. turpen- tine varnish ; put the above in a tin can by the stove, frequently shaking till well dissolved : strain and keep for use. If yoa find it harder than you wish, thin with more turpentine varnisii Another. — Heat together at a low temperature 2 qts. of alcohol, i pt. turpentine varnish, and 1 lb. clean gum mastic ; when the hitter is thoroughly dissolved, strain through a cloth. Crimson Stain for Musical Ixstru.ments. — Ground Brazil wood, 1 lb.; water, 3 qts. ; cochineal, ^ ounce; boil the Brazil with the water for an hour, strain, add the cochineal: boil gently for half an hour, -when it will be fit for u.se. If you wish a acarlet hnt, l)oil ail ounce of saffron in a quart of water, and pass over the work before you stain it. Purple Stain. — Chipped logwood, 1 lb. ; wafer, 3 qts. ; pearhi.''h, 4 ounces; powdered indigo, 2 ounces. Boil tlie logwood in tiie water half an hour, add the pearlash and indigo, and when dis- solved, you will have a beautiful purple. Green Stain.— Strong vinegar, 3 pts. ; best verdigris, 4 ounces, ground fine; sap green, S ounce: mix to.uether. Black Stains for Wood. — I. Drop a little sulphuric acid into a small quantity of water ; brush over the wood and hold it to the t' re. it will he a fine black and receive a (rooil polish. 2 For a beaut fal black, on wood, uotliiug can exceed the black Ja[)an mentioned ^ CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 1U9 under Tinsmith's Department. Apply two coats ; after which, var- nish and polish it. 3. To I gal vinegar, add a quarter of a pound of iron rust; let it stand for a week ; then add a pound of dry lampblack, and three-quarters of a pound copperas ; stir it up for a couple of days. Lay on hve or six coats with a sponge, allowing it to dry between each j polish with linseed-oil and a soft woollen rag, and it will look like ebony. Incomparable for iron work, ships' guns, shot, &c 4. Vinegar, ^ gal. ; dry lampblack, ^ lb , iron-rust sifted, 3 lbs. ; mix and let stand for a week. Lay three coats of this on hot, and then rub with linseed oil, and you will have a fine deep black. 5. Add to the above stain, nut-galls, 1 oz. ; logwood-chips, J lb. ; copperas, 5 lb. , lay on three coats ; oil well, and you will have a black stain that will stand any kind of wea- ther, and is well adapted for ships' combings, &c 6 Logwood- chips, 5 lb. ; Brazil-wood, j lb ; boil for H hours in 1 gal. water Brush the wood with this decoction while hot ; make a decoction of nut-galls, by simmering gently, for three or four days, a quarter of a pound of the galls in 3 qts. water; give the wood three coats, and, while wet, lay on a solution of sulphate of iron ,2 oz to a quart>, and, when dry, oil or varnish 7 Give three coats with a solution of copper filings in aquafortis, and repeatedly brush over with the logwood decoction until the greenness of the copper is destroyed. 8. Boil j lb logwood-chip in 2 quarts water, add an ounce of pearlash, and apply hot with a brush. Then take 2 qts. of the logwood decoction, and ^ oz. of verdigriS: and the same of copperas ; strain, and throw in | lb of iron rust. Brush the work well with this, and oil. iMiscELLAXEocs SxAiNS. — Tellow IS produced by diluted nitric acid. Red is produced by a solution of dragon's blood in spirits of wine Black is produced by a strong solution of nitric acid. Green 13 produced by a solution of verdigris m nitric acid ; then, dipped in a hot solution of pearlash produces a Blue stain Purple is produced by a solution of sal-ammoniac in nitric acid Finishing with One Goat of Y xb^w&b.— Valuable Process — Give the furniture a coat of boiled linseed oil, then immediately sprinkle dry whiting upon it, and rub it m well with your hand or a stiff brush, all over the surface ; the whiting absorbs the oil, and fills the pores of the wood completely For black walnut, add a little burned umber to the whiting ; for cherry, a little Venetian red, &c , according to the color of the wood Turned work can have it applied while in motion in the lathe. Furniture can afterwards be finished with only one coat of varnish. Mahogany Stain on .Maple. — Dragon's blood, ^ oz. ; alkanet, ^ oz. ; aloes, 1 dr. ; spirits of wine, 16 oz. ; apply it with a sponge or brush. To Polish Wood. — Take a piece of pumice-stone and water, and pass repeatedly over the work until the rising of the grain is cut down Then take powdered tripoli and boiled linseed oil, and polish the work to a bright surface. Clock Case and Picture FaAiiE Finish. — Copal varnish, 2 lbs.; linseed oii varnish, J oz. ; mix well, shake often, and place in a warm spot The wood to be varnished is prepared with a thin coat c-f glue-water, and rubbed down with hue pumice-stone or some- 110 CABI.NETMAKEllS, PAINTERS, iC, RECEIPTS. thing equivalent. In light-colored •wood, a light pigment, such as c'r.alk, is added to the glue-water ; iu clark wood, a dnr k pigmen is added When ready, the articles ar.i varnished wth the above mixture, and, after drying, rubbed with a solution of wax in eiber, thereby receiving a high polish Fa.n":y FiGUEiis ON Wood — Slack pome lime in stale urine, fup a brush in it, and form on the wood liguivo to suit your far; j. When dry, rub it well with a riud ot pork Black Walnut Polish. — Take pulverized aspbaltum ; put ii i a iar or bottle, jjoar over it about twice its bulk of turpenuni .>r benzole, put in a warm place, and shake occasionally ; wh u <'ii- solved, strain, and apply it to the woud with a cloth or stiff bru-.h ; should it prove too dark, dilute with turpentine or benzole. If le- sired to bring out the grain still more apply a mixture of boded ' oil and turpentine ; this is better than oil alo'ie When the ol is dry. the wood can be polished with the following Shellac varnisli, 2 parts boiled od, 1 part, shake it well before Uimg Apply with a cloth, rubbing briskly Polishes. — 1 Caivers' Polish. — White resin, 2 oz, seed lac, 2 oz.; spirits ot wine, 1 pt. Dissolve It should be laid on warm. Avoid moisture aud dampuess when iis"d, 2 French PnlL'!. — Gum shellac, 1 oz , gum arable, \ oz ; gum copal, \ oz. Powder-, aud s:ft through a piece of musiiu ; put theui in a closf'ly corked bo tie ■with 1 pt. spirits of wuie. in a very warm situation, shaking every (/a// till the gums are dissolved- then strain through muslin, auli cork for use. 3 Poliah Jot Dark-colored Woods. — Seedlac, 1 < z. ; gam guaiacum, 2 ilrs ; dragon's blood, 2 drs. ; gum mastic, 2 drs. ; put in a bottle with I pt spirits of wine, cork close, expose i>ly it with. CABINETMAKERS, PAINTEBS, &C., RECEIPTS. Ill Polish for Turners' Work.— Dissolve sandarach, 1 oz., in spirit of wiDe, ^ pt.; next shave bees'-wax, 1 oz. ; and dissolve it in a sufiB- cient quantity of spirits of turpentine to make it into a paste; add the former mixture by degrees to it, then with a woollen cloth apply it to the work while it is in motion in the lathe, and with a soft linen rag polish it. It will appear as if highlv varnished. FuR.viTURE Polish. — Bees'-wax, * lb., and | of an oz. of alkanet root ; melt together in a pipkin until the former is well colored. Then add linseed oil and spirits of turpentine, of each half a gill ; strain through a piece of coarse muslin. French Polishes.— 1. Shellac, 3 lbs. ; wood naphtha, 3 pts. ; dis- solve. 2. Shellac, 2 lbs. ; powdered mastic and sandarach, of each 1 oz. ; copal-varnish, ^ pint ; spirits of wine, 1 gal. Digest in the cold till dissolved. Oil Fi.\ish.—1. Linseed oil, 16 oz. ; black rosin, 4oz.; vinegar,4 oe. rectified spirits, 3oz. ; butter of antimony, 10 oz. ; spirit of salts, 2 oz. ; melt the rosin, add the oil, take it otf the fire, and stir in the vinegar ; let it boil for a few minutes, stirring it; when cool, put it into a bottle, add the other ingredients, shaking all together. 2. Linseed oil, 1 pt. ; oil of turpentine, ^ pt. ; rectified spirit, 4 ozs.: jiowdered rosin, 1^ oz. ; rose pink, ^ oz.; mix. Ftrxitcbe Pastes.— 1. Bees'-wax, spirits of turpentine, and lin- seed oil, equal parts ; melt and cool. 2.. Bees'-wax, four ounces ; turpentine, 10 oz. ; alkanet root, to color ; melt and strain. 3. Bees'-wax, 1 lb. ; linseed oil, 5 oz. ; alkanet root, | oz. ; melt, and add 5 oz. of turpentine ; strain and cool .4. Bees'-wax, 4 oz. ; resin 1 oz. ; oil of turpentine, 2 oz. ; Venetian red, to color. ' FuRNiTrRE Paste.— 1. Turpentine, 1 pt. ; alkanet root, i oz. ; di- gest until sufficiently colored, then add bees'-wax, scraped small 4 c^z. ; put the vessel into hot water, and stir till dissolved, 'if wanted pale, the alkanet root should be omitted. 2. ( White.) White wax, 1 lb. ; liquor of potassa, I gal. ; boil to a proper consistence. S. Bees'-wax, 1 lb. ; soap, i lb. ; pearlash, 3 oz. (dissolved in water i gal., and strained) ; boil as last. 4. Yellow wax, 18 parts ; resin ' 1 part; alkanet root, 1 part; turpentine, 6 parts ; linseed oil, 6 parts. First steep the alkanet in the oil with heat, and, when well colored, pour off the clear on the other ingredients, and again heat till all are dissolved. Furniture Cream.— Bees'-wax, 1 lb. ; soap, 4 oz. ; pearlash, 2 oz. ; soft water, 1 gal. ; boil together until mixed. Furniture Oils.— 1. Acetic acid, 2 drs. ; oil of lavender, i dr • rectified spirit, 1 dr.; linseed oil, 4 oz. 2. Linseed oil, 1 pt. ; al- kanet root, 2 oz. : heat, strain, and add lac varnish, 1 oz. 3. Lin- seed oil, 1 pt. ; rectified spirit, 2 oz. ; butter of antimony, 4 oz. 4 Linseed oil, 1 gal. ; alkanet-root, 3 oz. ; rose pink, 1 oz. Boil them together ten minutes, and strain so that the oil be quite clear. ■\VooD-FiLLiNG COMPOSITION.— Boiled linseed oil, 1 qt. ; turpentine 3 qts. ; corn starch, 5 lbs. ; Japan, 1 qt. ; calcined magnesia, 2 oz! Mix thoroughly. Improved Wood-fillinq Composition.— Whitening, 6 ox. ; Jap»n, i pt. ; boiled linseed oil, i pt. ; turpentine, i pt. ; corn starch 1 02. Mix li-eu together and apply to the woo3. On walnut weo(i 112 CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. add a little burned umber, on cherry a little Venetian red, to the above mixture. Dyes for Veneers. — A fine Black. — Put 6 lbs. of logwood chips into your copper, with as many veneers as it will hold without pressing too tight, fill it with water, let it boil slowly for about 3 'hours, then add i lb. of powdered verdigris, ^ lb. copperas, bruised gall-nutS; 4 oz. ; fill the copper up with vinegar as the water evapo- rates ; let it boil gently 2 hours each day till the wood is dyed through. A fine Blue. — Put oil of vitriol, 1 lb., and 4 oz. of the best powdered indigo, in a glass bottle. Set it in a glaaed earthen pan, as it will ferment. Now put your veneers mto a copper or stone trough ; fill it rather more than one-third with water, and add as much of the vitriol and indigo (stirring it about) as will make fine blue, testing it with apiece of white paper or wood. Let [the veneers remain till the dye has struck through. Keep the solution of indigo a few weeks before using it ; this improves the color. Fine Yellow. — Reduce 4 lbs. cf the root of barberry to dust by sawing, which put in a copper or brass trough ; add turmeric, 4 oz.; water, 4 gals. ; then put in as many white holly veneers as the liquor will cover. Boil them together for 3 hours, often turning them. When cool, add aquafortis, 2 oz., and the dye will strike through much sooner. \Brigld Green. — Proceed as in the previous receipt to produce a yellow ; but, instead of aquafortis, add as much of the vitriolated indigo (see above, under blue dyej as will produce the desired color. Bright Red. — Brazil dust, 2 lbs. ; add water, 4 gals. Put in as many veneers as the liquid will cover ; boil them for 3 hours, then add alum, 2 oz., aquafortis, 2 oz. ; and keep it hike- warm until it has struck through. Purple. — To 2 lbs. of chip logwood and ^ lb. Brazil dust, add 4 gals, of water ; and after putting in your veneers, boil for 3 hours ; then add pearlash, 6 oz., and alum, 2 oz. ; let them boil for 2 or 3 hours every day till the color has struck through. Orange. — Take the veneers out of the above yellow dye, and while still wet and saturated, transfer them to the bright red dye till the color penetrates throughout. To IMPROVE THE CoLOR OP Stains. — Nitric acid, 1 oz. ; muriatic acid, I teaspoonful ; grain tin, i oz. ; raiu water, 2 oz. Mix it at least 2 days before using, and keep your bottle well corked. Strong Glue for Inlaying or Veneering. — Select the best light brown glue, free from clouds and streaks. Dissolve this in water, and to every pint add half a gill of the best vinegar and \ oz. of isinglass. Inlaid Mother of Pearl Work, on sewing machines and other fancy work, is performed by selecting the thin scales of the shell and cementing them to the surface of the material ; the rest of the surface is covered with successive coats of Ja])au varnish, gene- rally black being subjected to a baking i)rocess after each appli- <;ation. When the varnish is as thick as the shell, it is polished, the gilding and painting added, and a flowing coat of varnish put over the whole. Another Method. — Prepare the job with a heavy coat of black Jai)an ; then, before it is dry, procure some flakes of i>earl and lay them on the black surface, pressing them into the Japan until they fXH level with the eurfucc ; then with colors form vines and flowers, CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. lT3 ■lllowing the pearl to form the body of the flower or leaf, and shade up all nicely. CoMPODND Colors. — Light Gray is made by mixing white lead with lamp black, using more or less of each material, as you wish to obtain a lighter or darker shade. Buff is made from yellow ochre and white lead. Silver or Pearl Gray. — Mix white lead, Prussian blue, and a very slight portion of black, regulating the quantities you wish to obtain. Flaxen Gray is obtained by a mix- ture of white lead and Prussian blue, with a small quantity of lake. Brick Color. — Yellow ochre and red lead, with a little white. Oak Wood Color. — I white lead and i part umber and yellow ochre, proportions of the last two ingredients being determined by the desired tints. Walnut-tree Color. — § white lead, and J red ochre, yellow ochre, and umber, mixed according to the shade sought. If veining is required, use difierent shades of the same mixture, and for the deepest places, black. Jonquil. — Yellow, pink, and white lead. This color is only proper for distemper. Lemon Yellow. — Realgar and orpiment. The same color can be obtained by mixing yellow pink with Naples yellow ; but it is then onlj- fit for distem- per. Orange Color. — Red lead and yellow ochre. Violet Color. — Vermilion, or red lead, mixed with black or blue, and a small por- tion of white. Vermilion is preferable to red lead in mixing this color. Purple. — Dark-red mixed with violet color. Carnation. — Lake and white. Gold Color. — Massicot, or Naples yellow, with a small quantity of realgar, and a very little Spanish white. Olive Color may be obtained by black and a little blue, mixed with yel- low. Yellow-pink, with a little verdigris and lampblack ; also ochre and a small quantity of white will produce an olive color. For distemper, indigo and yellow-pink, mixed with white lead or Spanish white, must be used. If veined , it must be done with umber. Lead Color. — Prussian blue and white. Chestnut Color. — Red ochre and black, for a dark chestnut. To make it lighter, employ a mix- ture of yellow ochre. Light Timber Color — Spruce ochre, white, and a little umber. Flesh Color. — Lake, white lead, and a little vermilion. Light Willoiv Green. — White, mixed with verdigris. Grass Green. — Yellow-pink, mixed with verdigris. Stone Color. — ^Vhite, with a little spruce ochre. Dark Lead Color — Black and white, with a little Prussian blue. Fawn Color. — "White lead, stone ochre, with a little vermilion. Chocolate Color. — Lampblack and Spanish brown. On account of the fatness of lampblack, mix some litharge and red lead. Portland Stone Color. — Umber, yellow ochre, and white lead. Rose Color. — White lead and carmine or lake. Salmon Color. — White lead and blue, yellow, and red. Pearl Color. — White lead, Prussian blue, and red. Slate Color. — White lead, black, red and blue. Pea Green. — White lead and chrome, or Paris green. Cream Color. — White lead, yellow and red. Stratv Color. — White lead and yellow. Peach Blossom Color. — White lead and vermilion. Brown. — Venetian red and lampblack. Park Green. — Lampblack and chrome green. Olive Color. — Red, green, or black, yellow and red. Snuff Color. — Yellow, sienna, and red, Prussian Blue. — 1st. Take nitric acid, any quantity, and as much iron shavings from the lathe as the acid will dissolve ; heat the iron as hot as can be handled with the hand; then add it to the H 1T4 CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, AC, RECEIPTS. cacid in small quantities as long as the acicl -will dissolve it ; then slowly add double the quantity of soft water that there was of acid, and put in iron again as long as the acid will dissolve it. 2d, Take prussiate of potash, dissolve it in the hot water to make a strong solution, and make sufficient of it with the first to give the depth of tint desired, and the blue is made. Another Method. — A very passable Prussian blue is made by taking sulphate of iron (copperas) and prussiate of potash, equal parts of each ; and dissolving each separately in water, then mix- ing the two waters. Chrome Yellow. — 1st. Take sugar of lead and Paris white, of each 5 lbs. ; dissolve them in hot water. 2d. Take bichromate of Eotash, 6^ oz. ; and dissolve it in hot water also ; each article to e dissolved separately ; then mix all together, putting in the bi- chromate last. Let stand twenty-four hours. Chrome GREEN.-^Take Paris white, 6i- lbs. ; sugar of lead, and blue vitriol, of each 3^ lbs. ; alum, 10^ oz. ; best soft Prussian blue and chrome yellow, of each 3i lbs. Mix thoroughly while in fine powder, and add water, 1 gal., stirring well, and let stand three or four hours. CrREEN, Durable and Cheap. — Take spruce yellow, and color it with a solution of chrome yellow and Prussian blue, until you give it the shade you wish. Another Method. — Blue vitriol, 5 lbs. ; sugar of lead, 6J lbs. ; arsenic, 2^ lbs. ; bichromate of potash, li oz. ; mix them thoroughly in fine powder, and add water 3 parts, mixing well again, and let stand three or four hours. Pea Brown. — 1st. Take sulphate of copper any q.uantity, and dissolve it in hot water. 2d. Take prussiate of potash, dissolve it in hot water to make a strong solution; mix of the two solutions, as in the blue, and the color is made. Rose Pink. — Brazil wood, 1 lb., and boil it for two hours, having 1 gal. of water at the end ; then strain it, and boil alum, 1 lb., in the same water until dissolved ; when sulficiently cool to admit the hand, add muriate of tin, ^ oz. Now have Paris white, 12^ lb. ; moisten up to a salvy consistence, and when the first is cool, stir them thoroughly together. Let stand twenty-four hours. Patent Yellow. — Common salt, 100 lbs., and litharge, 400 lbs., are ground together with water, and for some time in a gentle heat, water being added to supply the loss by evaporation ; the car- bonate of soda is tlien washed out with more water, and the white resido-um heated till it acquires a fine yellow color. Naples Yellow. — No. 1. Metallic antimony, 12 lbs. ; red lead, 8 lbs. ; oxide of zinc, 4 lbs. Mix, calcine, triturate well together, and fii.se in a crucible: the fused mass must be ground and elu- triated to a fine powder. Chkap Yellow Paint. — Whiting, .T cwt. ; orlire, 2 cwt. ; ground white lead, 25 lbs. Factitious linseed oil to grind. Stone-Color Paint. — Road-dust, 2 cwt. ; ground i^hite lead, J cwt.; whiting, 1 cwt. ; ground umber, 14 lbs. ; lime water, gals. Factitious linseed oil to grinil. Glazier's Putty. — Whiting, 70 lbs. ; boiled oil, 30 lbs. Mix; if too thin, add more whiting ; if too thick, add more oil. CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 114c6 CoiffotTXD Colors.— i?^M^.— Grind Prussian blue in turps, other blue, very fine in linseed oil ; mix with white paint to the color required. Straw. — A mixture of chrome yellow and white lead, oil and turps. Steel. — Mix ceruse, Prussian blue, fine lac, and ver- milion, with oil and turps. Purple. — White lead, Prussian blue and vermilion, with oil and turps. French Grey. — White lead and Prussian blue, tinged with vermilion, and for the last coat substi- tuie carmine or lake for vermilion. Drab. — White lead with a little Prussian blue and French yellow, linseed oil and turps. An- other Drab. — White lead with a little Prussian blue and lampblack, linseed oil and turps. DarkRed,for common purposes. — Mix Eng- lish .'enetian red, in boiled oil, with a little red lead and litharge, to give a drying quality. Lighter Red. — Mix together equal parts of Venetian red and red lead, in boiled oil and turps. Imitation of Vermilion. — Grind together, m oil, red lead and rose pink. Deep Red. — Mix, in oil, vermilion with a dust of Venetian red, or red lead. Unfading Orange. — This is a mixture of orange lead (orpi- ment) and French or stone yellow, oil and turps. Bright Yellow, for floors. — White lead and linseed oil, mixed with some French yellow, and a little chrome yellow to heighten it, some red lead, burnt white vitriol and litharge, added, to give it a drying quality. This color mixed with equal parts of boiled oil and turpentine, and used very thui. \)ark Yelloiv. — Mix French yellow in boiled oil, ftdding to it a little red lead or litharge to give the paint a drying quality. Light Yellow. — This is a mixture of French yellow and white lead,withoiland turpentine. Another. — French yellow, white leadand red lead. Another. — This is a mixture of Prussian blue, French yellow, a small portion of Turkey umber, and a little burnt vitriol. Ground the same way. Anotfier, in oil. — Mix Prussian blue and chrome yellow. Ground the same. Another Shade. — A mix- ture of Prussian blue and French yellow, with a small quantity of white lead and Turkey umber; add burnt white vitriol, ground the same. Another, light. — White mixed with verdigris. A variety of shadej may be obtained by using blue and yellow with white lead. Another,olive. — Black and "blue mixed with yellow, in such quantities as to obtain the colors or shades required. For distemper, use indigo and yellow pink mixed with whiting or white lead powder. Free- stone color. — A mixture of red lead, Venetian red, French yellow and lampblack, (varying the shade according to taste,) with linseed oil and turpentine. Olive Green. — Grind, separately, Prussian blue and French yellow, in boiled oil, then mix to the tints required with a little burnt white vitriol to act as a dryer. A cheap and handsome color for outside work, such as doors, carts, waggons, railings, &c. Lead Color for Iron. — Take litharge and place it over a fire in a ladle ; sprinkle over it flour of brimstone, to turn it dark ; grind it in oil. It dries quick, and stands well in any weather. A Good Imitation of Gold. — Mix white lead, chrome yellow and burnt sienna until the proper shade is obtained. A Beautiful White PAiNX.-For inside work,which ceases to smell, and dries in a few hours. Add 1 lb. of frankincense to 2 quarts oi spirits of turpentine ; dissolve it over a clear fire, strain it, and Il4i CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, AC, RECEIPTS. bottle it for use ; then add 1 pint of this mixture to 4 pints of bleached linseed oil, shake them well together, grind white lead in spirits of turpentine, and strain it ; then add sufiBcient of the lead to make it proper for painting ; if too thick in using, thin with turpentine, it being suitable for the best internal work on account of its superiority and expense. For a pure White Paint. — Nut-oil is the best ; if linseed oil is used, add one-third of turpentine. To MIX Common White Paint. — Mix or grind white lead in linseed oil to the consistency of paste ; add turpentine in the proportion of one quart to the gallon of oil ; but these proportions must be varied according to circumstances. Remember to strain your color for the better sorts of work. If the work is exposed to the sun, use more turpentine for the ground-color, to prevent its blistering. [N\asiBLE Green for Outside Work. — Mix lampblack and French yellow with burnt white vitriol. These colors mix in boiled oil. Burnt vitriol is the best drier for greens,as it is powerful and color- less, and, consequently, will not injure the color. Bright Varnish Green, for Inside Blinds, Fenders, &c. — The work must first be painted over with a light lead color, and, when dry, grind some white lead in spirits of turpentine; afterwards take about J in bulk of verdigris, which has been ground stiS in linseed oil ; then mix them botli together, and put into a little resin varnish, sufficient only to bind the color. When this is hard, which will be the case in 15 minutes, pour into the color some resin to give it a good gloss. Then go over the work h. second time, and, if required, a third time. Thus you will have a cneaj) and beautiful green, witli a higli ])olish. It possesses very diying quality, as tlie worlc may be completed in a few hours. The tint may be varied according to taste, by substituting mineral green for verdigris ; and if a bright grass-green is required, add a little Dutch i)ink to the mixture. N.B.— This color must be used when quite warm,to give the var- nish an uniform extension. Compound Greens. — This is a mixture of whiting, indigo and Dutch ])ink, the intensity of which may be increased or diminished by the addition of blue or yellow. These mixtures will not admit of any fixed rules in regard to the quantities of the matters used in their composition. They must dejjcnd on the taste of the artist and the tone he is desirous of giving to tlie color. Pea Green. — Take one pound of genuine mineral green, one pound of the precijjitate of copper, one pound and a half of blue verditer, three pounds of white lead, three ounces of sugar of lead, and tliree ounces of burnt wliite vitriol. Mix the whole of these ingredients in linseed oil, and grind tliem quite fine. It will ]>roduce a hright mineral pea-green i)aiut, preserve a blue tint and keep any length of time in any climate, without injiiry, by putting water over it. To use this color for house or ship jjuinting, take one pound of the green paint with some pale boiled oil, mix them well together, and this will produce a strong pea-green paint. Tlie tint may be altered at jjleasure, by adding a proportionate quantity of white lead to the green, which may be ground in linseed oil, I CABINETMAKERS; PAINTERS, &C. RECEIPTS, 114c and thinned with spirits of turpentine for use. It may also be used for painting Venetian window blinds, by adding white lead and mixing the color with boiled oil. For all the aforesaid pre- parations it will retain a blue tint, which is very desirable. For Knotting. — One pint of vegetable naptha, 1 teaspoonful of red lead, I pint of japanners gold size, 7 ozs. of orange shellac, mix all together, set in a warm place to dissolve, and frequently shake. Another. — Mix white lead, or red lead powder, in strong glue size, and apply it warm. Beautiful Color for Carriages, Coaches, &c. — Mix Victoria lake with black japan. White Lead. — The most usual method of manufacturing white lead is that known as the Dutch method. It consists in exposing lead, cast in thin gratings, to the combined action of acetic acid moist air and carbonic acid gas. The gratings are supported a little above the bottom of earthen pots, similar to flower pots, in each of which a small quantity of weak acetic acid is placed. The pots are built up in alternate layers with spent tanners' bark, - until a stack is formed, each layer of pots being covered with a board. Fermentation soon takes place in the tan, and serves the double purpose of generating heat and supplying carbonic acid. After the lapse of six or eight weeks, the metallic lead is found converted into white masses of carbonate mixed with hydrated oxide. It is then levigated, washed, dried, and ground with oil. To Cure Damp Walls. — Boil 2 ozs. of grease with 2 quarts of tar, for nearly twenty minutes, in an iron vessel, and having ready pounded glass, 1 lb. ; slacked lime, 2 lbs. ; well dried in an iron pot and sifted through a flour seive; add some of the lime to the tar and glass, to make it the thickness of thin paste, sufficient to cover a square foot at a time, as it hardens so quick," Apply it about an eighth of an inch thick. To Protect Wood and Brick work from Damp Weather. — Take 3 pecks of lime, slacked in the air, 2 pecks of wood ashes, and 1 peck of white sand. Sift them fine, and add linseed oil suffi- cient to use with a paint brush; thin the first coat ; use it as thick as it will work for the second coat, grind it fine, or beat it in a trough, and it is a good composition. Putty for Repairing Broken Walls, — The bes', putty for walls is composed of equal parts of whiting and plaster ot Paris, as it quickly hardens. The walls may be immediately colored upon it. Some painters use whiting mixed with size ; but this is not good, as it rises above the surface of the walls, and shows in patchep when the work is finished. Lime must not be used as a putty to ""pair walls, as it will destroy almost every color it comes in con- tact with. Instructions for Sign Writing, with the Colors to be used for the Ground and Letters. — On an oak ground, ornamental letters, in ultramarine blue, filled in with gold and silver leaf, blocked up and shaded with burnt sienna. Another. — Gold letters on a white marble ground, blocked up and shaded with a transpa- rent brown or burnt sieuna. On fflass.— Gold letters, shaded with tlid CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. burnt sienna. Another.— Gold letters, shaded with black, on a scarlet or chocolate ground. On a rich blue ground, gold letters, double shaded, black and white. White letters on a blue ground, shaded with black, look very well. On a purple ground, pink let- ters shaded with white. Mix ultramarine and vermilion for a ground color, white letters shaded with a light grey. Vermilion ground, chrome yellow, stained with vermilion and lake, for the letters, shaded black. A substitute for the above colors : Rose pink and red lead ; and for the letters, stone yellow, white lead and Venetian red. A good substitute l'.)r gold is obtained by grinding white lead, chrome yellow, and a dust of vermilion to- gether. Mix your colors for writing in boiled oil, and use for drier gold size. Other good grounds for gold letters are : blues, vermi- lion, lake, and f^axon. When your sign is ready for gilding, follow, the directions given under the head of "To Gild Letters on Wood." To Give Lustke to a Light Blue Ground. — After the letters are written and dry, paint the ground over again, between the let- ters, with the same color, and while wet take pulverized Prussian blue nnd sift over the surface; glass, frost, or smalts may be used instead of or with the blue. When dry, brush off the loose par- ticles. To Remove Old Paint. — Sal soda, 2 lbs. ; lime, J lb. ; hot water, 1 gaL ; rummage all together and apply to the old paint while ■warm, It will soon loosen the paint so that you can easily remove it. Another simple method is to sponge over your old paint with benzine, set it on fire, and you can then flake off the paint a8 quick as you like. Do not attempt to go over too much surface at a time, otherwise you might get more to do than you can attend to. Refuse Paint and Paint Skins. — Dissolve sal soda, J lb., in rain water, 1 gal.; cover the refuse paint for 2 days, then heat it, adding oil to reduce it to a proper consistence for painting and straining. Soluble Glass can be made on a small scale by fusing together in a crucible, 15 jjarts of sand with 8 parts carbonate of soda and 1 part charcoal, not soluljle in cold water, but dissolves in boiling ■water, yielding a strongly alkaline liquor. Black Walnut Stain. — Sjjirits of turpentine, 1 gal.; pulverized nsi»iialtum, 2 lbs. ; dissolve in an iron kettle on a stove, stirring constantly. Can be used over a red stain to imitate rosewood. To niak' a perfect black add a little lampblack. The addition of a little vj.rnish with the turpentine improves it. Cry-stal Varnish, for Maps, &c.— Canada balsam, 1 oz. ; spirits of turpentine, 2 ozs. ; mix together. Before sipjilying this varnish to a drawing or colored jtrint, the juiper should be placed on u stretcher, and si/.ed with a thin solution of isinglass in water, and dried. Apply with a soft camels-hair brush. To EiioNizK Wood. — Mix ui) a strong stain of coi)i)era3 and log- wood, to which add powdeieaint llie work twice over. When the ground is ly deep rich reds in patches, tilling up the intermediate spaces with brown and white mixed in oil ; then blend them together ; if in quick drying colors, use about hall' turps and gold size. When dry, varnish ; and while the varnish is wet, put in a multitude of fine white threadSj crossing the whole work in all directions, as the wet varnish brmgs the pencil to a fine point. Jasper Marble. — Put on a white ground lightly tinged with blue ; then put on patches of rich rods or rose pink, leaving spaces of the white grounds ; then partly cover those spaces with various browns to form fossils, in places running veins ; then put in a few spots of white in the centre of some of the red patches, and leaving in places musses nearly all while. When dry, use the clearest var- nish. Blub and Gold Marblk. — For the ground put on a light blue ; thcii lake blue, with a small piece of white lead and some dark common blue, and dab on the ground on patches, leaving portions of the ground to shine between ; then blend the edges together with a duster or softener; afterwards draw on some white veins in every direction, leaving large open spaces to be filled up with a pale yellow or gold-paint ; fi:iish with some fine white run- ning threads, and a coat of varnish at last. To IMITATK Gkanite. — For the ground color, stain your wliite luad to a light lead color, with lamp black and a little rose pink. Tlirow on black s[)ots, with a graniiing machine, a pale red, and fill up with white before the ground is dry. Anothku. — A black ground, when half dry, throw in vermilion, a deep yellow and wliite spots. Tv IMITATE JIaih Wood. — For the ground-color, take wliite lead and tliirrii witJi turpentine, and slightly stain it with equal quan- tities uf Prussian blue and lamp black. For the graining color, grind in ale a mixture of Prussian blue and raw sienna ; when the ground is dry, spread a transiiarent coat of the graining color on tiie surface of the work, and soften ; tlien with the cork, mottle by rubbing it to an quarts through a fine sieve. Now to this quantity add 1 quart of coarse salt, and 1 gallon of water ; boil the mixture, and skim it clear To every 5 gallons of this skimmed mixture, add 1 lb. alum ; h lb copperas ; and by slow degrees 5 lb. potash, and 4 quarts sifted ashes or fine sand ; add any coloring desired. A more durar bh- liaint was never made. 116 CABINETMAKERS,, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS, Greev PAi-NT FOR GARDEN STANDS, Bldtos, ETC.— Takc mineral green, and white lead ground in turpentine; mix up the quantity you ■wish with a small quantity of turpentine varnish. This serves for the first coat. For the second, put as much varnish in 3'our mix- ture as Till produce a good gloss. If you desire a brighter green, add a little Prussian blue, which will much improve the color. Milk Paint, for Barns, any Color. — Mix water lime with skim milk, to a proper consistence to apply with a brush, and it is ready to use. It will adhere well to wood, whether smooth or rougli, to brick, mortar, or stone, where oil has not been used (in which case it cleaves to some extent), and forms a very hard substance, as durable as the best oil paint. It is too cheap to estimate, and anyone can put it on who can use a brush. Any color may be given to it, by using colors of the tinge desired. If a red is preferred, mix Venetian-red with milk, not using any lime. It looks well for fifteen years. Paint. — To Make without Lead or Oil. — Whiting, 5 lbs. 5 skimmed milk, 2 qts. ; fresh slacked lime, 2 oz. Put the lime into a stoneware vessel, pour upon it a sufficient quantity of the milk to make a mixture resembling cream ; the balance of the millc is then to be added ; and lastly, the whiting is to be crumbled upon the surface of the fiuid, in which it gradually sinks. At this period it must be well stirred in or ground, as you would other paint, and it is fit for use. Transparent Painting on Window Shades. — The muslin is spread on a frame and secured tightly witli tacks, then sized with a mixture of fine flour paste, white gluo, and white bar soap; the soap renders the muslin plial)le and soft. A thin coat is applied, which is nearly invisible wlien dry. A coat of i)Ure linseed oil, diluted with spirits of turpentine, is then applied to the whole, or a part, as desired ; lay it on quickly and smootlily, to ensure an even transparent surface. The colors used are, ivcTiy black, ultramarine, Paris green, sienna, umber, verdigris, asphaltum, or other suitable colors. An outline of the design is drawn with a small pencil with black or umber, after which the colors may be applied, more or less diluted, as more or less transparency is desired. In general, the brightest colors should be applied first, and the darker shades over them. These colors must be laid evenly and smoothly with soft brushe.i, and should any part be made too dark, the best way is to scrape off with a stick before the color gets too dry. Tiicbest designs for shades consist of landscape views, and should always be designed to accommodate the form and position of tiie ground on which they are drawn. Stencils will be found useful on this work, in makiag corners or stripes for borders. To L'.SE Smalts. — For a gold lettered sign, lay out on a lead color or white surface the line of letters, and roughly size the sha])c of each letter with fat oil, size. This must be allowed at least 12 hours to get tacky and ready for gilding. After the gold leaf ia laid and perfectlj'^ dry, mix up (for blue smalts) Prussian blue and keg lead with oil, adding a little dryer. Outline carefully around the letters, and fill up all the outside with blue paint ; then with a small sieve sift on the smalts, allowing the sign to lay horizon- tally. Cover every part with plenty of smalts, and allow it to CABINETMAKERS, PAlNTERSj &C., RECEIPTS. 117 remain unmolested until the paint is dry. Then carefully shake off the surplus smalts, and the work is done. To Paint Magic Lantern Slides. — Transparent colo.s only are used for this work, such as lakes, sap-green, ultramarine, verdigris, gamboge, asphaltum^ &c., mixed in oil, and tempered with light colored varnish (white Demar). Draw on the paper the design desired, and stick it to the glass with water or gum ; then with a fine pencil put the outlines on the opposite side of the glass with the pro'^ier colors ; then shade or fill up with black or Vandyke brown, as "you find best. Silver Polish Kalsomine. — Take 7 lbs. of Paris white and i lb. of light colored glue. Set the glue in a tin vessel contaiting 3 pts. of water ; let it stand overnight to soak. Then put it in a kettle of boiling water over the fire, stirring till it is well dissolved and quite thin. Then, after putting the Paris white into a large water- pail, pour on hot water and stir it till it appears like thick milk. Now mingle the glue liquid with the whiting, stir it thoroughly and apply with a whitewash-brush, or a large paint brusu. Marine Paint for Metals in Salt Water. — Red lead, 5t) parts ; ■quicksilver, 30 parts; thick turpentine, 7 parts. Mix wit^ boiled ■linseed oil to the proper consistency. The quicksilver must be thoroughly amalgamated with the thick turpentine by grinding or rubbing, and this mixture must be ground with the ixd lead and more boiled oil. As little oil as is necessary to make the paint lay "well must be used. To make the paint adhere more firmly, a previous coat of oxide of iron paint may be used. To Imitate Tortoise Shell. — Paint a ground of salmon color ; then when dry and smoothed off, coat it over with rose pink, mixed in varnish and turpentine ; then with a flat piece of glass, press on the surface, and remove the glass quickly, being careful not to push it over the paints so as to disturb the curious figures which the "^pressure will form thereon. Varnish when dry, and you will iind you have a beautiful ii^iitation of tortoise shell. "Banner Painting. — Lay out the letters very accurately with charcoal or crayon, then saturate the cloth with water to render the painting easy. On large work a stencil will be found useful. Take a piece of tin, lay the straight edge to the mark, brush over with a sash tool, and by this means you will make a very clean-edged letter. Use stiff bristle pencils in painting on canvas. Oil Cloth Painting. — To paint canvas for floors, the canvas should first be saturated with glue-water or flour paste, and allowed to dry first. Then paint it with any color aesired. To put in the figures, cut out designs in tin plates or stiff paper, and stencil them on in various colors. To Imitate Marble. — For white marble, get up a pure white ground, then hold a lighted candle near the surface, and allow the smoke to form the shades and various tints desired. This will make a very handsome imitation. Black marble imitation is made by streaking a black surface with colors, using a feather and pencil. Another plan is to get up a smooth black surface ; then take the colors, green, yellow, red, white, &c., ground thick in gold size, and streak the surface with a stick or pencil. Allow it to dry, and appl7 a beavj' coat of lampblack and yellow ochre, mixed with 118 CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, AC, RECIEPTS. rough stuff. "When all is hard, rub down to a level Burface with lump pumice stone, varnish, and a beautiful variegated marble will be the result. Gilding and Ornamenting Carriages.— English gold size is the best for this purpose. If you cannot get it ready prepared, make a substitute by using English varnish and japan in equal parts. If the gilding is for striping, you should mix a little chrome yellow with iij to be able to see the lines the better, but for lettering no coloring is required. Rub your job down smoothly, take a piece of muslin and tie up in it a little whitening to form a " pounce bag;" with this dust over every part of the work where the gold leaf is to be put, to prevent the leaf sticking to the surface not covered by the size, or wash the job over with stareh water, or rub it overwith the raw surface of a potatoe cut in halves ; the juice of the potatoe soon dries, and leaves a thin film to which the gold will not adhere. Either ot the above methods will do, and the coating will wash off when the gilding is dry. The surface prepared, take the size and put on the stripes, figures, or ornaments, and allow it to dry just enough to enable you to pass your finger over it without sticking, but if it is "tacky" when you placo your finger upon it, it is ready for the gold leaf, which is to be applied in the way directed for gilding letters on wood. The gold letters may be shaded with ultramarine, carmine, asphaltum, lake, Paris green verdigris, &c. to suit the taste. Bronzing. — Gold bronze is used on carriage parts for striping and ornamenting, using the same size as that used for gold leat. For taking up and applying the bronze, take a piece of plush or velvet and make a " pounce bag, "by tying up a wad of cotton, rubbing the bronze gently over the size. To vary th« appearance, a mixture of copper, gold, and silver bronze may be apjilied. For fancy work in bronze,cui out any desired pattern on thin sheet brass, pasteboard, or paper, and apply it to any nearly dry viiruishea surface ; rub the bronze on through the apertures in the pat- tern. Good Colors for Bcstness Waggons. — No. 1. ^orfy.— Chrome ereen ; frame or ribs, black, striped with white or cream color. Running fjcar. — Cream color, striped with red, blue or dark green, or black, and red fine line. No. 2. Body. — Yellow ; frame black, striped with Ijlue or white. Running gear. — Light vermilion, striped witu black and white. No. 3. Body. — Carmine glaze over Indian red. Running gear. — Vermilion. No. 4. Body. — Deep vermilion. Running gear. — Light vermilion. Mixture to remove old Paint. — Dissolve 1 lb. potash in 3 pts. water over the fire, then add yellow ochre or some common dry paint until it is as thick as rough stuff; spread tliis over your old paint, and after a little it will come off quite easily, then wash the wood with soap and water to remove all the potash, dry off and sand-paper, then give a coat of clean raw oil. Another method is to heat c heavy piece of iron and ajiply to the paint, which will cause it to become loose and soft, so that it may be scraped otl' with a knife. Still another method is to direct the Hame of a si)irit lamp (which may bo constructed for the purpose) ou the old paint, BCraping It ofl'as it softens. CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 119 To Bleach Oil. — Pour as much linseed oil into a shallow earthen Tessel as will stand one inch deep, then pour in 6 inches ct water, cover with a fine cloth, and let the whole stand in the sun for a few weeks until the liquid becomes thicli, when it should be poured into a phial and submitted to a gentle heat ; after which the clear is to be poured off and strained through a flannel cloth. To Copy an Ornament. — Place the paper or other article containing the ornament against a pane of glass; then laying a (jVeet of thin paper over it, _\ ou can copy it exactly with a lead ii'ncil. Ornaments, in the shape of decalcomine or other gilded pic- tures, may be easily transferred to carriages ■ -r coaches by following the directions given in transftTring pictures to glass. Vermilion.— To prevent vermilion from fading, add to the dry cokir, before mixing, ^ part of flour of sulphur. Light English vermilion is used for striping, ornameiiting or lettering ; the deep verHiilion having less bod.», will not cover good. English vermi- lion gives the best coloro;; iRir'age work when mixed with rubbing varnish and oil. American vf rmilion should not be ground ns the pro- cess would change it to an orange color ; while green, Ir.nibn red, chrome-yellow, and all heavy body colors are all the better for being ground as fine as possible. Raw oil is preferable to boiled, as it is more volatile, and penetrates and fills the pores of the wood better. Priming for Carkiage Work. — J'irst coat of lead. Mijs v. iiite Jead with raw oil, 2 parts^ japan, 1 f)art, to make it proper foi i thick coat, adding a very little turpentine to make it work ••hsiily For carriage parts add a little Indian black, but not for bou.-H Second coat of lead. Mix white lead with 1 part raw oil and 2 par'.a japan, and a little turpentine, as before, adding laaipbi'ack for car- riage parts, but none for the body. Third and/ourth coat. J\Iix whi^e lead into a thick paste with turpentine, add a little oil. japan and rubbing varnish to bind the paint well ; add, for the carriage parts, n little lampblack and a little red lead. Hard dryino Putty. — For rarrmqe work. — Mix dry white lead with Jai^an and rubbing varnish equal vans, to the proper <'oi.'sist- ency, beating it with a small mallet to bruise the lumps. Keep it, when not in use, in water, to prevent i' drj'ing. Rough Stuff. — For carriage loork. — Take 3 parts of English filling (ground state), 2 parts dry white lead, 1 part white lead in oil. Mix with japan, 2 parts, rubbing varnish, 1 part. Mix and crush thoroughly by running all through the mill together. Facing Lead for Carriage Wore. — Mix dry whit^lead with 2 parts japan, 1 part rubbing varnish, and thin with spirits of turpen- tine, adding a little lampblack to make a clean lead color, and run all through the mill. Coach Painting.— The panels of such work are generally painted in color, while the pillars, top strip, quarters, deck, &c., are always black ; umber colors, lakes, greens, and blues are some of the best colors used on this work. To prepare the body for any of these colors, a ground color is used in the place of lampblack on black work. The following are a few approved grounds. ZflA-e.— Indian red and vermilion mixed to a dark brown, but some prefer a black ground for lake.' Ultramarine' — Mix a medium blue with M'hitelead 120 CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. and Prussian blue. Vermilion, — A light pink color is generally used as a ground for vermilion, (ireen. — Green and all heavy-bodied colors will cover well on the lead colors without any ground color. Fish-Oil Paints. — Dissolve white vitriol and litharge, of each 11 lbs., in vinegar, 32 gals. ; add whale, seal, or cod oil, 1 tun, and boil to dryness, continually stirring during the ebullition. The next day, decant the clear portion ; add linseed oil, 12 gals. ; oil of turpentine, 3 gals., and mix well together. The sediment left in well agitated with half its quantity of lime-water, used for somii inferior paints under the name of " jjrepared residue oil." This oil is used for various common purposes, as a substitute for linseed oil, of which the following paints are examples: — Pale Green.-o Lime-water, G gals. ; whiting and road-dust, of each, 1 cwt. :, blue-black, 30 lbs. ; yellow ochre, 28 lbs. ; wet blue (previously ground in prepared residue oil), 20 lbs. ; grind well together. For use, thin with equal parts of prejxired residue oil and linseed-oil. 2. Bright Green. — Yellow ochre and wet blue, of each, 1 cwt. ; road-dust, Is cwt.; blue-black, 10 lbs.; lime water, 6 gals. ; prepared fish-oil, 4 gals. ; prepared residue and linseed oils, of each, 7^ gals. 3. Lead Color. — Whiting, 1 cwt.; blue black, 7 lbs.; white lead (ground in oil), 28 lbs.; road-dust, 5ti lbs.; lime water, 5 gals. ; prepared residue oil, 2^ gals. 4. Reddish Brown. — Lime-waler, 8 gals. ; Spanish-brown, 1 cwt. ; road-dust, 2 cwt. ; prepared fish, i)repared residue andJinseed oils, of each, 4 gals._ 5. I'eUoxv. — Substitute ochre for Spanish-brown in the last receipt. 6. jS/«cA. — Substitute lamp or blue black for Spanish-brown in No. 4. 7, Stone Co/or. — Lime-water, 4 gals,; whiting, 1 cwt.: white-lead (ground in oil), 28 lbs, ; road-dust, 56 lbs. ; prepared fish, linseed, and prepared residue oils, of each, 3 gals. 8. Choco- late. — No. 4 and 6 mixed together so as to form a chocolate-color. Remarks.— AW the above paints require a little "drier." They are well fitted, by their cheapness, hardness, and durability, for com- mon out-door work. PoiiCELAiN Finish, very Hard and White, for Parlors. — To prepare the wood for the finish, if it be pine, give one or two coats of the" Varnish — Transparent for Wood," which prevents the pitch from oozing out, causing the finish to turn yellow; next, give the room at least four coats of piu'c zinc, which may be ground in only sufficient oil to enable it to grind properly ; then mix to a proper consistence with turpentine or nai>htha. CJiveeach coat tune to dry. When it is dry and bard, sand-paper it to a perfectly smooth sur- face, when it is ready to receive the finish, which consists of two coats of French zinc ground in, and thinned with Demar-varaish, until it works jjrojjerly under the l)rusii. Japan Dhieu, Hest Quality.— Take linseed oil, 1 gnl. ; put info it gum shellac, '? lb.; litiiarge and burned Turkey umber, each i^ lb. ; red lead, \ lb. ; sugar of lead, G oz. Boil in the oil till all are dis" Holved, whichwdl re([uire about four hours ; remove from the fire, and stir in spirits of turpentine, 1 gal., ami it is done. A.-fOTHEK. — Linseed oil, T) gals.; add red lead and litharge, each 3J lb,-(. ; raw umber, U lbs.; sugar of lead and sulphate of zinc, earh, ^ II). ; pidvcrize all the articles t({gcther, and hoil in tin- oil till dissolved ; when a little coAlNTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 127 (shave-grass) the patts to be yellowed, to make them softer. 8. iellow with yellow ochre carefully ground in water, and mLxed with transparent colorless size. Use the thinner part of the mixture with a fine brush. 9. Next rub the work with shave-grass to remove any granular appearance. 10. Gold water size consists of Armenian bole, 1 lb. ; bloodstone {hematite). 2 oz. ; and as much galena, each separately ground in water. Then mix all together with a spoonful of olive-oil. This is tempered with a white sheep- skin glue, clear and well strained. Heat, and apply three coats with a fine long-haired brush. 11. Rub with a clean dry linen doth, except the parts to be burnished, which are to receive other 2 coats of the gold size, tempered with glue. 12. The surface, damped with cold water (iced in summer), has then the ^oW ^ea/ applied to it. Gild the holloiv ground before the more prominent parts ; water being dexterously applied by a soft brush, immedi- ately behind the gold leaf, before laying it down ; removing any excess of water with a dry brush. 13. Burnish with bloodstone. 14. Next pass a thin coat of glue, slightly warmed, over the parts that are not to be burnished. 15. Next moisten any broken points with a brush, and apply bits of gold leaf to them. 16. Apply the vermeil coat- very lightly over the gold leaf with a soft brush. It gives lustre and fire to the gold, and is made as follows : annotto, 2 oz. : gamboge, 1 oz. ; vermilion, 1 oz. ; dragon's-blood, ^ oz. ; salt of tartar, 2 oz. ; saffron, 18 grs. ; boil in 2 English pints of water, over a slow fire, till it is reduced to a fourth ; then pass the whole through a silk or muslin sieve. 17. Next pass over the dead surfaces a second coat of deadening glue, hotter than the first. This finishes the work, and gives it strengtli. Bronzing or Gilding Wood. — Pipeclay, 2 oz. ; Prussian blue, patent yellow, raw umber, lampblack, of each^ 1 oz. ; grind separa- tely with water on a stone, and as much of them as will make a good color put into a small vessel % full of size. The wood, being pre- viously cleaned and smoothed, and coated with a mixture of clean size and lampblack, receives a new coating twice successively with the above compound, having allowed the first to dry. After- wards the bronze powder is to be laid on with a pencil, and the whole burnished or cleaned anew, observing to repair the parts which may be injured by this operation ; next the wcrk must be coated over with a thin layer of Castile soap, which will take the glare off the burnishing, and afterwards be carefully rubbed with a woollen cloth. The superfluous powder may be rubbed off when dry. Bronze Powder of a pale gold color is produced from an alloy of 13| parts of copper and 21 parts zinc, of a crimson metallic lustre, from copper, of a, paler color, copper, and a very little zinc ; green bronze with a proportion of verdigris, of a fine orange color, by 14J parts copper and 1^ zinc; another orange color, 13J parts copper and 2\ zinc. The alloy is laminated into very fine leaves with careful annealing, and these are levigated into impalpable powders, along with a film of fine oil, to prevent oxidizement, and to favor the levigation. Reviver for Gilt Frames. — White of eggs, 2 oz. ; chloride of potash or soda, 1 oz. ; mix well ; blow off thy dust from the frames ; 128 CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, AC, RECEIPTS. then go over them with a S6ft brush dipped ia the mixture, and they will appear equal to new. Gilding on Wood. — To gild in oil, the wood, after being properly smoothed, is covered with a coat of gold size, made of drying linseed oil mixed with yellow ochre ; when this has become so dry as to adhere to the fingers without soiling them, the gold leaf is laid on with great care and dexterity, and pressed down with cotton wool ; places that have been missed are covered with small pieces of gold leaf, and when the whole is dry, the ragged bits are rubbed off with the cotton. This is by far the easiest mode of gilding : any other metallic leaves may be applied in a similar manner. Pale leaf gold has a greenish yellow color, and is an alloy of gold with silver. Dutch gold leaf is only copper leaf colored with the fumes of zinc ; being much cheaper than true gold leaf, it is very useful when large quantities of gilding are required in places where it can be defended from the weather, as it changes color if exposed to moisture ; and it should be covered with varnish. Silver leaf is prepared every way the same as gold leaf; but when applied, should be kept well covered with varnish, otlierwise it is liable to tarnish ; a transparent yellow varnish will give it the appearance of gold. Whenever gold is fixed by means of linseed oil, it will bear washing ofl", which burnished gold will not. To Eemove Old Pcttty. — Apply nitric or muriatic acid. Glass and Porcelain Gilding. — Dissolve in boiled linseed oil an equal weight either of copal or amber; add as much oil of tur- pentine as will enable you to apply the compound or size thus formed, as thin as possible, to the parts of the glass intended to be gilt. The glass is to be ])laced in a stove till it will almost burn the fingers when liandled : at this temperature the size becomes adhe- sive, and a piece of gold-leaf, applied in the usual way, will imme- diately stick. Sweep off the superfluous portions of the leaf, and when quite cold it may be burnished; taking care to interpose a piece of India paper between the gold and the burnislier. Soluble Glass. — 1 . Silica, 1 ])art ; carbonate of soda. 2 parts; /use together. 2. Carbonate of soda (dry), 54 parts; dry carbonate of potassa, 70 parts ; silica, 102 parts ; soluble in boiling water, yielding a fine, transparent, semi-elastic varnish. 3. Carbonate of potassa (dry), 10 parts; powdered quartz (or sand, free from iron or alumina), 15 parts ; charcoal, 1 part ; all fused together. Solu- ble in 5 or 6 times its weight of hoiling water. The filtered solu- tion, evaporated to dryness, yields a transparent glass, permanent in the a'r. Etching on Glass. — Druggists' bottle.?, bar-tumblerj, signs, and glassware of every description, can bci lettered in a beautiful style of art, by simply giving the article to be engraved, or etchecl, a thin coat of the engraver's varnish (see next receipt), and tlic ajipli- cation of lluoric acid. Heforc doing so, the ghis'^ must be thorough- ly cleaned and lieated, so that it can iiardly be held. Tlie varnish is then to be ai)plied liglitly over, and matle smooth by dabbing it with a small ball of silk, filled with cotton. When dry and even, the lines may be traced on it by a sharp steel, cutting clear through the varnish to the glass. The varnish rau8t bo removed CABNIETMAKERS, JPAINTERS, &C., RECEIPfS. If9 clean from each letter, otherwise it will be an imperfect job. When all is ready, pour on or apply the fluoric acid with a feather, fill- ing each letter. Let it remain until it etches to the required depth, then wash off with water, and remove the varnish. Etching Vaenish. — Take of virgin wax and asphaltum, each 2 ©z. ; of black pitch and Burgundy pitch, each ^ oz. ; melt the wax and pitch in a new earthenware glazed pot, and add* to them, by degrees, the asphaltum, finely powdered. Let the whole boil, sim- mering gradually, till such time as, taking a drop upon a plate, it will break when it is cold, on bending it double two or three times betwixt the fingers. The varnish, being then boiled enough, must be taken off the fire, and, after it cools a little, must be pourec! into warm water that it may work the more easily with the hands, so as to be formed into balls, which must be kneaded, aud put into a piece of taffetj^ for use. Fluoric Acid, to Make for Etching Purposes. — You can make your own fluoric (sometimes called hydro-fluoric) acid, by getting the fluor or Derbyshire spar, pulverizing it, and putting all of it into sulphuric acid which the acid will cut or dissolve. Inasmuch as fluoric acid is destructive to glass, it cannot be kept in common bottles, but must be kept in lead or gutta percba bottles. Glass-Grinding for Signs, Shades, &c. — After you have etched a name or other design upon iincolored glass, and wish to have it show off to better advantage by permitting the light to pass only through the letters, you can do so by taking a piece of flat brass sufficiently large not to dip into the "letters, but pass over them when gliding upon the surface of the glass ; then, with flour of emery, and keeping it wet, you can grind the whole surface, very quickly, to look like the ground-glass globes often seen upon lamps, except the letter, which is eaten below the general surface. To Drill and Ornament Glass. — Glass can be easily drilled by a steel drill, hardened but not drawn, and driven at a high velo- city. Holes of any size, from the 16th of an inch upwards, can be drilled, by using spirits of turpentine as a drip ; and, easier still, by using'camphor with the turpentine. Do not press the glass very hard against the drill. If you require to ornament glass by turning in a lathe, tise a good mill file and the turpentine and cam- jjhor drip, and you will find it an easy matter to produce any shape you choose. Gilding Glass Signs, &c. — Cut a piece of thin paper to the size of your glass, draw out your design correctly in black lead-pencil on the paper, then prick through the outline of the letters with a fine needle ; tie up a little dry white lead in a piece of rag ; this is a pounce-bag. Place your design upon the glass, right side up, dust it with the pounce-bag ; and, after taking the paper off, the design will appear in white dots upon the glass ; these will guide you in laying on the gold on the opposite side, which must he well c/ecf;!e(/ preparatory to laying on the gold. Preparing the size. — Boil perfectly clean water in an enamelled saucepan, and while boiling, add 2 or 3 shreds of best selected isinglass ; after a few minutes strain it through a clean linen rag ; when cool, it is ready for use. Clean the glass perfectly. — When this is done, use a flat camel's-hair brush for laying on th^ si?e ; and let it drain off when 13D CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. you put the gold on. When the gold is laid on and perfectly dry, take a ball of the fiuest cotton wool and gently rub or polish the gold ; you can then lay on another coat of gold if desirable ; it is now ready for writing. In doing this, mix a little of the best veget- able black with black japan; thin ^rith turpeniine to proper work- ing consistency ; apply this when tliorouglily dry ; wash oif the superfluous gold, and shade as in sign-writing. Glass Gilding, Another Method. — Clean and dry the glass thoroughly, then lay out tiie lines for the letters with a piece of hard scented soap, then paint the letters on the right side of the glass with lampblack mixed with oil, in order io form a guide for the work, then on the inside lay on a coat of the size mentioned in the preceding receipt, using a camel's-hair brush, covering the whole of the letters; next lay on the gold leaf with a tip, until every part of the letters is covered well. Let the leaf remain until the size is dry, when you will find that the letters on the front side can be easily seen and traced. This is done with quick drying black, mixed with a little varnish. Paint over the whole directly on the gold ; allow it to dry ; then wipe off with soap and water the lampblack letters from the front side, with pure cold water and a clean sponge ; wash the superfluous gold leaf and size from the back, and you will have a splendid gold letter on the glass; next, shade your letters to suit the taste, always remembering to shade to the edge of the gold, for then yon have only one edge to make straight. The other edge may be left rough, and when dry may be straightened by scraping with a knife. Ornamental Designs on Glass. — In making scrolls, eagles, &c., on glass, some painters i)ut on the outlines and shades first, and then lay the gold leaf over all; another good way is to scratch the shades into the gold leaf after it is dry, and put the colors on the back of the gold. Silver leaf may be used in the same manner as gold, but it will not wear as well. A very pretty letter may be made by incorporating silver with gold ; take paper and cut any fancy design to fit the parts of the letter ; slick it on the size before lay- ing the leaf, and then lay the leaf, allowing it to dry, and wash off as before ; then witli a i)enknife raise the paper ligiire, and tiie exact shape or form of the figure will be foniiale yellow can be made by mixing sulphuret of silvfr with glass of antimony and yellow ochre, previously calcined to a red brown tint. Workall these powders together, and jiaint on the back of the glass. Or silver luniime, melted with suli)hur and glass of antimony, thrown into cold water and afterwards ground to jjowdcr, adbrd a yellow. A ;"(■''■ r/ellow may be made with 111" jiowder resnltiiig from bniss, sul])liur, and f^lass of antimony, calcined togctlur in (Vfrucible till they cease to smoke, a'ld then niixed with a little burnt yellow ochre. Thc.///ii? yellow of M. Meraud IS prepared from chloride of silver, oxide of zinc, and rust of iron. Tills mixture, sunjily ground, is afiplied on the glass. Ih-anyr color. — Take part of silver iiowcier, us i)reci])itated from the nitrate of CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C , RECEIPTS. 133 that metal, by plates of copper, and washed ; mix with 1 part of red ochre, and 1 of yellow, by carelul trituration ; grind into a thin pap, with oil of turpentine or lavender ; apply this with a brush, and burn in. !SiLVERi\G Lookixg-Glasses with Pure Sil\ter.— Prepare a mix- ture of 3 grs. of ammonia, 60 grs. nitrate of silver, 90 minims of spirits of wine, 90 mmims of water ; when the nitrate of silver is dissolved, filter the liquid, and add a small quantity of sugar,) 15 grs.), dissolved in 1| oz. of water and 1^ oz. spirits of wine. Put the glass into this mixture, having one side covered with varnish, gum, or some substance to prevent the silver being attached to it. Let it remain for a few days, and you have a most elegant looking- glass ; yet it is far more costly than the quicksilver. Another Method.— A sheet of tin-foil corresponding to the size of the plate of glass is evenly spread on a perfectly smooth and solid marble table, and every wrinkle on its surface is carefully rubbed down with a brush : a portion of mercury is then poured on, and rubbed over the foil with a clean piece of soft woollen stuff, after which, two rules are applied to the edges, and mercury poured on to the depth of a crown piece ; when any oxide on tlie surface is carefully removed, and the sheet of glass, perfectly clean and dry, is slid along over the surf ice of the liquid metal, so that no air, dirt, or oxide can possibly either remain or get between them. When the glass has arrived at its proper position, gentle pressure is applied, and the table sloped a little to carry off the waste mercury; after which it is covered with flannel, and loaded with heavy weights ; in twenty-four hours it is removed to another table, and further slanted, and this position is progressively in- creased during a month, till it becomes perpendicular. Porcelain Colors.— The following are some of the colors used m the celebrated porcelain manufactory of Sevres, and the propor- tions in which they are compounded. Though intended for porce- lain painting, nearly all are applicable to painting on glass. Flux No. 1 minium or red lead, 3 parts ; white sand, washed, 1 part. This mixture is melted, by which it is converted into a greenish- coloured glass Flux No. 2. Gray flux.— Of No. 1, 8 parts ; fused borax in powder, 1 part. This mixture is melted. Flax No. 3. For carmines and greens. —Melt together fused borax, 5 parts ; calcined flint, 3 parts ; pure minium, 1 part. No. 1. Indiffo blue.— Oxide of cobalt. 1 part; flux No. 3, 2 parts. ^iZ'ee/) azure blue.— Oxide of cobalt, 1 part , oxide of zinc, 2 parts ; flux No. 3, 5 parts. No. 2. Emerald Green.— Oxide of copper, I part ; antimonic acid, 10 parts; flux Xo. 1, 30 parts. Pulverize together, and melt. No. 3. Grass c/reen.-Green oxide of chromium^l part; flux No. 3, 3 parts. Tri- turate and melt. No. 4 yellow.J-Antimomc acid, 1 part; subsul- phate of the peroxide of iron, 8 parts ; oxide of zinc, 4 parts ; flux No. 1, 36 parts Rub up together and melt. If this color is too deep the salt of iron is diminished No. 5. Fixed yellow/or touches. —No. 4, 1 part ; white enamel of c immerce, 2 parts. Melt and pour out ; if not sufficiently fixed, a 1 ttle sand may be added. No. 6 Deep Nankin yellow.— S\Ibsulph&te of iron, 1 part ; oxide of zinc, 2 parts ; flux No. 2, 8 parts. Triturate without melting No. 7. Deep rerf.— Subsulphate of iron, calcined m a muflae until it be- 134 CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C„ RECEIPTS^ comes of a beautiful capucine red, 1 part ; flux No. 2, 3 partg. Mix without melting. No. 8. Liver brow7i.—Ox\Ae. of iron made of a red brown, and mixed with three times its weight of flux No. 2. A tenth of sienna earth is added to it, if it is not deep enough. No. 9. White. — The white enamel of commerce, in cakes. No. 10. J)eep tZacA;.— Oxide of cobalt, 2 parts ; copper, 2 parts ; oxide of manganese, 1 part ; flux No, 1, 6 parts ; fused borax, J part. Melt, and add oxide of manganese, 1 part ; oxide of copper, 2 parts. Triturate without melting. The Application.— FoWovf the general directions given in anether part of this worli, in relation to stain- ing glass. How TO "Write os Glass in the Sun.— Dissolve chalk in aqua- fortis to the consistency of milk, and add to that a strong dissolu- tion of silver. Keep this in a glass decantei well stopped. Then cut out from a paper the letters you would have appear, and paste the paper on the! decanter or jar, which you are to place in the sun in such a manner that its rays may pass through the spaces cut out of the paper, and fall on the surface of the liquor. The part of the glass through which the rays pass will turn black, whilst that under the paper will remain white. Do not shake the bottle during the operation. Used for lettering jars. To Transfer Prints, etc., to Glass or Wood. — Take of gum sandarach, 4 oz. ; mastic, 1 oz. ; Venice turpentine, 1 oz. •, alcohol, 15 oz. Digest in a bottle, frequently shaking, and it is readj^ for use. Directions ; use, if possible, good plate glass of the size ot the pic- ture to be transferred, go over it with the above varnish, beginning at one side, press down the picture firmly and evenly as you pro- ceed, so that no air can possibly lodge between ; put aside, and let dry perfectly, then moisten the paper cautiously with water, and remove it piecemeal by rubbing carefully with the fingers; if managed nicely, a complete transfoi' of the picture to the glass will be effected. Bottle Glass.— No. 1. Dark Green.— Fns&i glauber-salts, 11 lbs.: soaper salts, 12 lbs.; waste soap-ashes, ^ bush.; silicious sand, i cwt. ; glass-skimmings, 22 lbs. broken green glass, 1 cwt. to li cwt.; basalt, 25 lbs. to i cwt. No. 2. Pale Green.— Pale sanrl, 100 lbs. ; kelp, 35 lbs. ; lixiviated wood ashes, IJ cwt. ; fresh do., 40 lbs. ; pipe-clay, I cwt. ; cullet, or broken glass, 1 cwt. No. 3. Yellow or white sand, 120 parts ; wood-ashes, 80 parts ; pearl- ashes, 20 parts; common salt, 15 parts; white arsenic, 1 part; very pale. Crystal Glass.— No. 1. Refined potashes, 60 lbs.; sand, 120 lbs. ; cbolk, 24 lbs. ; nitre and white arsenic, of each 2 lbs. ; oxide of manganese, 1 to 2 oz. No. 2. "Pure white sand, 120 parts ; re- fined ashes, 70 parts; saltpetre, 10 parts; white arsenic, i part; oxide of manganese, J part. No. 3. Sand, 120 parts; red-lead, 50 parts ; purified pearlash, 40 parts ; nitre^ 20 parts ; manganese, i part. Flask Glass (o/ St. Etien7ie).—Fine silicious sand, CI parts ; potash, 3J parts; lime, 21 parts; heavy spar, 2 parts; oxide of manganese, q. s. . , a- ^ Bkht (iEUMAN Crystal Glass.- Take 120 lbs. of calcined flints or wliite sand ; bust pearlash, 70 lbs. \ saltpetre, 10 lbs. ; arsenic, CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 135 ^Ib. ; and 5 oz. magnesia. No. 2. {Cheaper.') Sand or flint, 120 lbs. ; pearlash, 46 lbs. ; nitre, 7 lbs. ; arsenic, 6 lbs. ; magnesia, 5 oz. This will require a long continuance in the furnace, as do all others when much of the arsenic is used. Plate Glass.— No. 1. Pure sand, 40 parts ; dry carbonate of soda, 26J parts; lime, 4 parts ; nitre, 1^ parts ; broken plate glass, 25 parts. No. 2. Ure''s. — Quartz-sand, 100 parts ; calcined sul- phate of soda, 24 parts; lime, 20 parts; cullet of soda-glass, 12 parts. No. 3. Vienna. — Sand, 100 parts ; calcined sulphate of soda, 50 parts; lime, 20 parts; charcoal, 2j parts. No. 4:. French. — White quartz sand and cullet, of each 300 parts ; dry carbonate of soda, 100 parts ; slacked lime, 43 parts. Crown Glass. — No. 1. Sand, 300 lbs. ; soda-ash, 200 lbs. ; lime, 30 to 35 lbs. ; 200 to 300 lbs. of broken glass. 'No. 2. (Bohemian.) — Pure silicious sand, 63 parts ; potash, 22 parts ; lime, 12 parts; oxide of manganese, 1 part. No. 3. {Frof.Schweigger.) Pure sand, 100 lbs. ; dry sulphate of soda, 50 parts ; dry quicklime in powder, 17 to 20 parts ; charcoal, 4 parts. Product, white and good. Best Window-Glass. — No. 1. Take of white sand, 60 lbs. ; puri- fied pearlashes, 30 lbs. ; of saltpetre, 15 lbs. ; of borax, 1 lb. ; of arsenic, J lb. This will be very clear and colorless if the ingre- dients be good, and will not be very dear. No. 2. {Cheaper.) White sand, 60 lbs. ; unpurified pearl-ashes, 25 lbs. ; of common salt, 10 lbs. ; nitre, 5 lbs. ; arsenic, 2 lbs. ; magnesia, 1| oz. No. 3. Common green window-glass. — White sand, 60 lbs. ; unpurified pearlashes, 30 lbs. ; common salt, 10 lbs.; arsenic, 2 lbs.; mag- nesia, 2 oz. Lookinq-Glass Plate. — No. 1. Cleansed white sand, 60 lbs.; pearlashes, purified, 25 lbs. ; saltpetre, 15 lbs. ; borax, 7 lbs. This composition should be continued long in the tire, which should be Bometimes strong and afterwards more moderate, that the glass may be entirely free from bubbles before it be worked. No. 2. White sand, 60 lbs.; pearlashes, 20 lbs.; common salt, 10 lbs.; nitre, 7 lbs. ; borax, 1 lb. This glass will run with as little heat as the former ; but it will be more brittle, and refract the rays of light in a greater degree. No. 3. Washed white sand, 60 lbs. ; purified pearlashes, 25 lbs. ; nitre, 15 lbs. ; borax, 7 lbs. If jiroperly man- aged, this glass will be colorless. Window Glass. — No. 1. Dried sulphate of soda, 11 lbs. ; soaper salts, 10 lbs. ; lixiviated soap waste, \ bush. ; sand, 50 to 60 lbs. ; glass-pot skimmings, 22 lbs. ; broken pa^e green glass, 1 cwt. No. 2. {Paler). White sand, 60 lbs. ; pearl-ashes, 30 lbs. ; common salt, 10 lbs. ; arsenic, 10 lbs. ; oxide of manganese, 2 to 4 oz. No. 3. ( 'Very Pale.) White sand, 60 lbs. ; good pot ashes, 25 lbs. ; common salt, 10 lbs. ; nitre, 5 lbs. ; arsenic, 2 lbs. ; magnanese, 2 to 4 oz. as re- quired; broken ^aZe window glass, 14 lbs. Colored Glass. — Fine Blue. To 10 lbs. of flint glass, previously melted and cast into water, add zafiFer, 6 drs., J oz. of calcined cop- per, prepared by putting sheet copper into a crucible, and expos- ing it to the action of a fire not strong enough to melt the copper, and you will have the copper in scales, which you pound. Bright Purple. — Use 10 lbs. flint glass as before; zaflfer, 5 drs., precipitate of calcium, 1 dr. Gold Yellow. Twenty-eight pounds flint glass^ 136 CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. and a quarter pound of the tartar which is found in urine ; purify by putting it in a crucible in the fire till^it smoke no more ; add 2 ozs. of manganese. Paper for Photographing — Wash the paper with a solution of nitrate of silver, 6 grains ; distilled water, n oz. ; dry the paper, and wish it with iodide of potassium, 5 grains ; distilled water, ^ oz ; dry with gentle heat; repeat the wash with the silver solution; and when dry, the paper is ready for use. The sensitive surface is an iodide for silver, and is easily affected b}- light. Colored Potters' Glazings. — White: prepare an intimate mix- ture of 4 parts ot massicot, 2 of tin ashes, 3 fragments of crystal glass, and | part of sea salt. The mixture is suffered to melt in earthenware vessels, when the liquid flux may be used Yellow ; take equal parts ot massicot, red lead and sulphuret of antimony, calcine the mixture, and reduce it again to powder, add then 2 parts of pure sand, and Ij parts of salt ; melt the whole. Green , 2 parts of sand, 3 parts massicot, 1 part of salt and copper scales, accord- ing to the shade to be produced : melt and use. l^iolei ; 1 {lart mas- sicot, 3 parts sand, 1 of smalt, ^ part of black oxide of manganese ; melt. Blue; white sand and massicot, equal parts; blue smalt. J part: melt. Black; black oxide of manganese, 2 parts; smalt, 1 part; burned quartz, 1 part; massicot, H parts; melt. Broivn , green bottle glass, 1 part ; manganese, I part ; lead, 2 parts ; melt. To Print a Picture from the Print Itself. — The page or pic- ture IS soaked in a solution, first of potassa, and then of tartaric acid. This produces a perfect diffusion of crystals of bitartarate of potassa through the texture of the unprinted part of the paper. As this salt resists oil, the ink roller may now be passed over the surface, without transferring any part of its contents except to the ps'inted part. To Clean Old Oil-Paintings. — Dissolve a small quantity of salt in stale urine ; dip a woollen cloth in the mixture, and rub the ji.iintings over with it till they are clean; then wash them with a sponge and clean water; dry them gradually, and rub them over with a clean cloth. Should the dirt not be easily removed by the above preparation, add a small quantity of soft soap. Be very care- ful not to rub the paintings too hard. To Renew Old Oil-Paintings. — The blackened lights of old pic- tures m.ay be instantly restored to their original hue by touching them withdeutoxide of hydrogen diluted with six or eight times its weight ot water The i)art must be afterwards washed with a clean sponge and water. Cast Engravings. — Take the engraved plate you wish to copy, and arrange a support of suitable materials round it : then pour on it the following alloy in a state of perfect fusion ; tin, 1 part ; lead. 04 parts ; antimony, 12 jiarts. These " cast pi ites" maybe worked off on a common printing iiress, and offer a ready mode of procur- ing cheap cojues of the works of our celebrated artists. iMagic Paper. — Take lard oil, or sweet oil, mixed to the consist- ence of cream, with cither of the following paints, the color ot which 13 desired: Prussian blue, Ininphlack, Venetian red, or fhrome green, either of which should be rublu-d with a knife on a plate or stone until smooth. Use rather thin but fir»i paper; put CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 137 on with a sponge, and wipe off as dry as convenient ; then lay them between uncolored paper, or between newspap.ers, and press by lapng books or some other flat substance upon them until the surplus oil is absorbed, when it is ready for use. To Make Grindstones from Common Sand. — River sanfi, *j tbs, i shellac, 10 parts ; powdered glass, 2 parts ; melt m an iroj* pot, and cast into moulds. To Cast Figures in imitation of Ivory. — Make isinglass and brandy into a paste with powdered egg-shells very finely ground You may give it what color you choose ; but cast it warm into your mould which you previously oil over ; leave the figure in the mould till dry. and you will find on taking it out that it bears a veiy strong resemblance to ivory. To TAKE A Plaster of Paris Cast from a Person's Face. — The person must lie on his back, and his hair be tied behind ; into each nostril put a conical piece of paper, open at each end, to allow ot breathing The face is to be lightly oiled over, and the plaster, being properly prepared, is to be poured over the face, taking particular care that the eyes are shut, till it is a quarter of an inch thick. In a few minutes the plaster may be removed In this a mould is to be formed, from which a second cast is to be taken, that will furnish casts exactly libe the original. To ATTACH Glass or Metal Letters to Plate Glass. — Copal varuish, 15 parts ; drying oil, 5 parts ; turpentine, 3 parts ; oil of tur- pentine, 2 parts ; liquified glue, 5 parts. Melt in a water bath, and add 10 parts of slacked lime. Turner's Cement — Bees' wax- I oz. ; resin, ^ oz, ; pitch, ^ oz ; melt, and stir in fine brick dust. Banknote Glue, — Dissolve 1 lb. of fine glue or gelatine in water ; evaporate it till most ot the water is expelled; add 4 lb. of brown sugar, and pour it into moulds. * • Cement for Electrical Machines and Galvanic Troughs. — Melt together 5 lbs of resin and 1 lb. of bees-wax, and stir in 1 lb ot red ochre (highly dried and still warm) and 4 oz. of plaster of Pans, continuing the heat a little above 212® , and stirring con- sttntly till all frothing ceases, or (for troughs) rosin, 6 lbs. ; dried ic-d ochre, lib, calcined plaster of Pans, ^ lb., linseed oil, I lb. Hydraulic Cement.— Powdered clay, 3 lbs. ; oxide of iron, lib. ; >.n boiled fell to form a stiff paste Engineers Cement. — Equal parts of red and white lead, with drying oil, spread on tow or canvas. An admirable composition for uniting large stones ir> cisterns. 3tone Cement — River sand, 20 parts ; litharge, 2 parts ; quick- lime, 1 part ; mix with Imseed oil. Best Cement for Aquaria. — It is the same as that used in con- structing the tanks of the Zoological Gardens, London. One part, by measure, say a giU of litharge ; 1 gill of plaster of Paris ; 1 gill of dry, white sand : i a gill of finely powdered resin. Sift, and keep corked tight until required for use, when it is to be made into a putty by mixing in boiled oil (linseed) with a little patent drier added Never use it after it has been mixed (that is, with the oil) over fifteen hours This cement can be used for marine s^ well as fresn water aquaria as it resists the action of salt water. Thy 138 CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C., RECEIPTS. tank can be used immediately, but it is best to give it three or four hours to dry. Common Paste. — To a tablespoonful of flour add gradually J pt. of cold water, and mix till quite smooth ; add a pinch of powdered alum, some add a small pinch of powdered rosin, and boil for a few minutes, stirring constantly. The addition of a little brown sugar and a few grains of corrosive sublimate, will preserve it for years. For LdtE; or cement for closing joints of apparatus, mix Paria plaster with water to a soft paste, and apply it immediately. It bears nearly a red heat. To render it impervious, rub it over with wax and oil. Roman Cement. — Slacked lime, 1 bush., green copperas, 3J lbs., fine gravel sand, i bush. Dissolve the copperas in hot water, and mix all together "to the proper consistency for use; use the same day it is mixed, and keep stirring it continually with a stick while in use. Vicat's Hydraiilic Cejhint is prepared by stirring into water a mi.xture of 4 parts chalk and 1 jjart clay ; mix with a vertical wheel in a circular trough, letting it run out in a large receiver. A deposit soon takes place which is formed into small bricks, which, after being dried in the sun, are moderately calcined. It enlarges about f when mixed with water. Glue.— Powdered chalk added to common glue strengthens it. A glue which will resist the action of water is made by boiling 1 lb. of glue in 2 qts. of skimmed milk. Cheap Waterproof Glue. — Melt common glue with the smallest possible quantity of water ; add, by degrees, linseed oil, rendered drying by boiling it with litharge. While the oil is being added, the ingredients must be well stirred, to incorporate them thoroughly. FUE AND Wateui'Rooi;' Glue. — Mix a handful of quick-lime with 4 oz. of iinseed oil ; thoroughly lixiviate the mixture ; boil it to a 'good thickness, and spread it on tin plates in tlie shade: it will become very iiard, but can be dissolved over a lire, like common glue, and is then ht for use. Prepared Liquid Glue. — Take of best white glue, 16 oz. ; white- lead, dry, 4 oz. ; rain-water, 2 pts. ; alcohol, 4 oz. With constant stirring, dissolve the glue and lead in the water, by means of a water-bath. Add the alcohol, and continue tiie heat for a few minutes. Lastly, pour into bottles, while it is still hot. .Mastic Cement for Coverino the Fronts of Houses. — Fifty parts, '•y measure, of clean dry sand, 50 of limestone (not burned) reduced to grains like sand, or marble dust, and 10 parts of red lead, mixed v.'ith as much boiled linseed oil as will make it slightly moist. The bricks, to receive it, sliould be covered with tiiree coats of boiled oil, laid on with a brush, and gutfered to dry Ix-fure the mastic is put on. It is laid on with a trowel like plaster, but it is not so moist. It ))econie3 hard as stone in a few mouths. Care must bo exercisea tint to use too much oil. Cement for Tilk-Kdofs. — Equal parts of whiting and dry sand, and 25 per cent, of litharge, made into theconsistency of putty with linseed oil. It is not liable to crack when cold, nor melt, lik^ ybal-tar and asphalt, with the heat of the sun. CABINETMAKERS, PAINTERS, &C,, RECEIPTS. 139 Cement for Outside op Brick "Walls. — Cement for the outside of brick walls, to imitate stone, is made of clean sand, 90 parts ; litharge, 5 parts ; plaster of Paris, 5 parts ; moistened with boiled linseed oil. The bricks should receive two or three coats of oil be- fore the cement is applied. Excellent Cheap Roopino. — Shingles Superseded. — Have your roof stiff, rafters made of stuff 1 J by 8 inches, well supported and 6 feet apart, with ribs 1 inch by 2 inches, set edgeways, well nailed to the rafters, about 18 inches apart. The boards may be thin, but must be well seasoned, and nailed close together ; this done, lay down and cover the roof with thin, soft, spongy straw paper used in making paper-boxes, which comes in rolls, and comes very low. Lay in courses up and down the roof, and lap over, nailing down with common No. 6 tacks, with leather under the heads like carpet- tacks. Then spread on several coatings of the following composi- tion, previously boiled, stirred, and mixed together : good clean tar, 8 gals. ; Roman cement, 2 gals, (or in its place very fine, clean sand may be used) ; resin, 5 lbs. ; tallow, 3 lbs. ; apply hot ; and let a hand follow, and sift on sharp grit sand, pressing it into the tar composition. If wished fire-proof, go over the above with the fol- lowing preparation : slake stone lime under cover with hot water till it falls into a fine powder, sift and mix 6 qts. of this with 1 qt. salt, add 2 gals, water, boil and skim. To 5 gals, of this add 1 lb. of alum, and 1^ lb. of copperas, slowly, while boiling, IJ lbs. potash, and 4 qts. of clean, sharp sand, a\jd any coloring desired. Apply a thick coat with a brush, and you have a roof which no fire can injure from the outside. Water Ldie at fifty Cents per Barrel. — Fine, clean sand, 100 lbs. ; quick-lime in powder, 28 lbs. • bone ashes, 14 lbs. ] for use, beat up with water, and use as quick as possible. Cement for Seams in Roofs. — Take equal quantities of white lead and white sand, and as much oil as will make it into the consist- ence of putty. It will in a few weeks become as hard us stone. To MAKE Door Plates. — Cut your glass the right size, and make it perfectly clean with alcohol or soap ; then cut a strip of tin-foil sufficiently long and wide for the name, and with a piece of ivory or other burnisher rub it lengthwise to make it smooth ; now wet the glass with the tongue (as saliva is the best sticking substance), or if the glass is very large, use a weak solution of gum arable, or the white of an egg in half a pint of water, and lay on the foil, rubbing it down to the glass with a bit of cloth, then also with the burnisher ; the more it is burnished the better will it look ; now mark the width on the foil which is to be the height of the letter, and put on a straight edge, and hold it firmly to the foil, and with a sharp knife cut the foil, and take off the superflu- ous edges; then either lay out the letters on the back of the foil (so they shall read correctly on the front) by your own judgment, or by means of pattern letters, which can be purchased for that purpose ; cut with the knife, carefully holding down the pattern or straight edge, whichever you use ; then rub down the edge of all the letters with the back of the knife, or edge of the burnisher,' which prevents the black paint or japan, which you next put over the back of the plate, from getting under the foil ; having put (^ 140 WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, AC, RECEIPTS. ', V line above and one below the name, or a border around the whole plate or not, as you bargain for the job. The japan is made by dissolving asphaltum in just enough turpentine to cut it ; apply Avith a brush, as other paint, over the back of the letters, and over the glass forming a background. This is used on the iron plate of the frame also, putting it on when the plate is a little hot, and as soon as it cools, it is dry. A little lampblack may bo rubbed into it if you 'desire it any blacker than it is without it. Soluble Glass. — Powdered quartz, 15 parts ; potash, 10 parts ; charcoal, 1 part; these are melted together, worked in cold water, and then boiled with 5 parts water, in which thej'entirolj' dissolve. It is then applied to wood-work, or any other required substances. To BENDER Wood Indestructible. — Jioblnns's Process. This seems to be a process of inestimable value, and destined to produce very important results. The apparatus used consists of a retort or still, which can be made of. any size or form, in which resin, coal tar, or other oleaginous substances, together with water, are placed in order to subject them to the action of the heat. Fire being applied beneath the retort containing the coal tar, &c., oleagi- nous vapor commences to rise, and pass out through a connecting pipe into a large iron tank or chamber (wbich can also be built of any size), containing the timber, To TELL WHEN TUB Lbver IS ov PROPER LENOTn. — You may readily learn whether or not a lever is of proper length, by measur- ing from tho guard point to tho pallet atair, and tlion comparing 'with lho£ollcr or ruby-pin tabic ; tho diameter of the table should WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &0., RECIIPTS: 143" always be just half the length measured on the lever. The rule will work both ways, and may be useful in cases where a new ruby- pin table has to be supplied. To CHANGE Depth op Lever Escapejient. — If you are operating on a fine watch, the best plan is to put a new staff into the lever, cutting its pivots a little to one side, just as far as you desire to change the escapement. Common watches will not, of course, justify so much trouble. The usual process in their case is to knoclc out the staff, and with a small file cut the hole cblong in a direction opposite to that in which you desire to move your pallets ; then replace the staff, wedge it to the required position, and secure by soft soldering. In instances where tha staff is put in with a screw, you will have to proceed diflerently. Take out the staff, prize the pallets ft-om the lever, file the- pin holes to slant in the direction you would move the pallets, without changing their size on the other side of the lever. Connect the pieces as they were before, and, with the lever resting on some solid substance, you may strike lightly with your hammer until the bending of the pins will allow the pallets to pass into position. To tell when the Lever Pallets are of proper Size. — The clear space between the pallets should correspond with the outside measure, on the points of three teeth of the scape wheel. The usual mode of measuring for new pallets is to set the wheel as close as possible to free itself when in motion. You can arrange it in your depthing tool, after which a measurement between the pivot holes ot the two pieces, on the pillar plate, will show you exactly what is required. To lengthen Levers op Anchor-escapement Watches with- out Hammering or Soldering. — Cut square across with a screw- head file, a little back from the potnt above the fork, and, when you have thus cut into it to a sufficient depth, bend forwaril the desired distance the piece thus partially detached. In the event of the piece snapping off while bending— which, however, rarely happens — file down the point level with the fork, and Insert a pin, English lever style. To temper Case and other Springs op Watches. — Draw the temper from the spring, and f5t it properly in its place in the watch; then take it out and temper it hard in rain-water (the ad- dition of a little table-salt to the water will, be an improvement) ; after which place it in a small sheet-iron ladle or cup, and barely cover it with linseed-oil ; then hold the ladle over a lighted lamp until the oil ignites ; let it burn until the oil is nearly, not quite consumed ; then re-cover with oil and burn down as before ; and so a third time; at the end of which, plunge it again info water. Main and hair-springs may, in like manner, be tempered by the same process ; first draw the temper, and properly coil and clamp to keep iq position, and then proceed the same as with case-springs. To MAKE Red Watch Hands.— 1 oz. carmine, 1 oz. muriate of silver, i oz. tinner's japan ; mis together in an earthen vessel, and hold over a spirit-lamp until formed into a paste. Apply thia to the watch hand, and then lay it on a copper plate, face 144 WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. side up, and heat the plate sufficiently to produce the color desired. To Drill into Hard Steel. — Make your drill oval in form, instead of tlje usual pointed shape, and temper as hard as it will bear with- out breaking; then roughen the surface where you desire to drill with a little diluted muriatic acid, and, instead of oil, use turpen- tine orkerosene, in which a little gum camphor has been dissolved, with your drill. In oper»ting, keep the pressure on j-our drill firm and steady; and if the bottom of the hole should chance to become burnished, so that the drill will not act, as sometimes happens, again roughen with diluted acid as before : then clean out the hole carefully, and proceed again. To Case-harden Iron. — If you desire to harden to any consider- able depth, put the article into a crucible with cyanide of potash, cover over and heat altogether, then plunge into water. This process will harden perfectly to the depth of one or two inches. To Put Teeth in Watch or Clock Wheels withodt Dove- tailing OR Soldering.— Drill a hole somewhat wider than the tooth, square through the plate, a little below the base of the tooth ; cut from the edge of the wheel square down to the hole already drilled ; then flatten a piece of wire so as to fit snugly into the cut of the saw, and with a light hammer form a head on it like the head of a pin. When thus prepared, press the wire or pin into po.->ition in the wheel, the head filling the hole drilled through the plate, and the end projecting out so as to form the tooth: then with a sharp pointed graver cut a small groove each siae of the pin from the edge of the wheel down to the hole, and with a blow of your hammer spread the face of the pin so as to fill the grooves just cut. Repeat the same operation on the other side of the wheel, and finish off in the usual way. The tooth will be found perfectly riveted in on every side, and a3 strong as the original one, while in appear- ance it will be equal to the best dovetailing. To tighten a Cannon Pinion on the Centre Arbor when TOO loose. — Grasp the arbor lightly with a pair of cutting nip- pers, and, by a single turn of the nip"per3 around the arbor, cut or rai.se a small thread thereon. To Frost Watch Movements. — Sink that part of the article to be frosted for a short time in a compound of nitric acid, muriatic acid and table salt, one ounce of each. On removing from the acid, place it in a shallow vessel containing enough sour beer to merely cover it, then with a fine scratch brush scour thoroughly, letting it remain under the beer during the operation. Next wash off, first in pure water and then in alcohol. Gild or silver in accord.ance with auy recipe in tho plating departineut. Rule for determining the correct Diambter of a Pinwn by MEASURING TeETH OF THE WlIEEL THAT MATCHES INTO IT. — The term full, as us'mI below, indicates full measure from outside to outside of the teeth named, and the term centre, the measure from centre of one tooth to centre of the other tooth named, inclusive. For diameter of a pinion of I.') leaves measure, with calipers, ft shade less than 6 teeth of the wheel, /uU WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, AC, RECEIPTS. 145 For diameter of a pinion of 14 leaves measure, with calipers, a shade less than 6 teeth of the wheel, centre. For diameter of a pinion of 12 leaves measure, with calipers, 5 teeth of the wheel, centre. For diameter of a pinion of 10 leaves measure, with calipers, 4 teeth of the wheel, full. For diameter of a pinion of 9 leaves measure, with calipers, a little less than 4 teeth of the wheel, full. _ J'or diameter of a pinion of 8 leaves measure, with calipers, a little less than 4 teeth of the wheel, centre. For diameter of a pinion of 7 leaves measure, with calipers, a little less than 3 teeth of the wheel, full. For diameter of a pinion of 6 leaves measure, with calipers, 3 teeth of the wheel, centre. For diameter of a pinion of 5 leaves measure, with calipers, 3 teeth of the wheel, centre. For diameter of a pinion of 4 leaves measure, with calipers, one half of one space over 2 teeth of the wheelj/w/^. As a general rule, pinions that lead, as in the hour wheel, should he somewhat larger than those that drive, and pinions of clocks should generally be somewhat larger proportionally than those of watches. To Polish Wheels perfectly without injury. — Take a flat burnishing file, warm it over a spirit lamp, and coat it lightly with bees'- wax. When cold, wipe off as much of the wax as can be readily removed, and with your file thus prepared, polish the wheel, resting the wheel while polishing on a piece of cork. The finish produced will be quite equal to the finest buff polish, while there will be no clogging, and the edges of the arms and teeth will remain perfectly square. RULKS FOR DETERMINING THE CORRECT LeNGTH OF THE LeVER, SIZE OP Ruby-Pin Table, size op the Pallets, and depth of Escapement OF Lever Watches. — A lever, from the guard point to the pallet staff, should correspond in length with twice the diameter of the ruby-pin table, and when a table is accidentally lost, the correct size thereof may be known by measuring half the length of the lever between the points above named. For correct size of pallet, the clear space between the pallets should correspond with the outside measure on the points of three teeth of the escapement wheel. The only rule that can be given, without the use of diagrams, for correct depth of the escapements, is to set it close as it will bear, and still free itself perfectly when in motion. This may be done by first placing the escapement in your depthing tool, and then setting it to the correct depth. Then by measuring tine distance between the pivots of the lever staff and escapement wheel, as now set, and the corresponding pivot holes in the watch, you determine correctly how much the depth of the escapement requires to be altered. To REMOVE rust FROM Iron OR Steel, &c. — For cleaning pur- poses, &c., kerosene oil or benzine are probably the best things known. When articles have become pitted by rust, however, these can of course, only be removed by mechanical means, such as Bcouring with fine powder, or flour of emery and oil, or with very K 146 WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. fine emery paper. To prevent steel from rusting, rub it with a mix- ture of lime and oil, or with mercurial ointment, either of which will ba found valuable. To Pot Watches in Beat.— If a cylinder escapement, or a detached lever, put the balance into a position, then turn the regu- lator so that it will point directly to the pivot-hole of the pallet staff, if a lever, or of the scape-wheel, if a cylinder. Then lift out the balance with its bridge or clock, turn it over and set the ruby-pin directly in line with the regulator, or the square cut of the cylinder at right angles with it. Your watch will then be in perfect beat. In case of an American or an English lever, when the regulator is placed upon the plate, you will have to proceed differently. Fix the balance into its place, cut off the connection of the train, if the mainspring is not entirely down, by slipping a fine broach into one of the wheels, look between the plates and ascertain how the lever stands. If the end farthest from the balance is equidistant between the two brass pins, it is all right; if not, change the hair-spring till it becomes so. If dealing with a duplex watch, you must see that the roller notch, when the balance is at rest, is exactly between the locking tooth and the line of centre ; that is, a line drawn from the centre of the roller to the centre of the scape-wheel. The balance must st'irt from its rest and move through an arc of about ten degrees before bringing the locking tooth into action. To Prevent a Chain Runnino off the Fcsee. — In the first place, you must look and ascertain the cause of the difficulty. If it results from the chain being too large, the only remedy is a new chain. If it is not too large, and yet runs off without any appa- rent cause, change it end for end — that will generally make it go all right. In cases where the channel in the fusee has been damaged and is rough, you will be under the necessity of dressing it over with a file the proper size and shape. Sometimes you find the chain naturally inclined to work away from the body of the fnsee. The best way to remedy a difficulty of this kind is to file off a very little from the outer lower edge of the chain the entire length; this, as you can see, will incline it to work on instead of off. Some workmen, when they have a bad case and a common watch, change the standing of the fusee so as to cause the winding end of its arbor to incline a little from the barrel. This, of course, cannot do otherwise than make the chain run to its place. To Weaken tiibIIair-Sprino. — This is often effected by grinding the spring down. You remove the spring from the coTlet. and place it upon a piece of pivot wood cut to fit the centre coil A piece of soft steel wire, flattened so as to pa-ss freely between tho colls, and armed with a little pulverize(l oil-stono and oil, will serve as your grinder, and with it you may soon reduce tho strength of tho spring. Your operations will,of course, bo confined to the centre coil, for no other part of the spring will rest sufli- cicntly against tho wood toenablo you to grind it, but this will generally suffice. Tho effect will bo more rapid than one would Bupposc, therefore it will stand you in hand to bo careful, or you may get tho eprmg too weak boforo you suspect it. 146a WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS LIST OF TRAINS OF WATCHES. BH0WIX6 THE NUMBBR OF TUETH IN THE WHEELS, LEAVES IN THE PINIONS BEATS IN A MINUTE, AND TIME THE FOURTH WHEEL REVOLVES IN. Trains^, for Seven Teeth in the Escapeiuent ^Vheel. No. of Teeth in the Centre Wheel. Leaves Leaves Teeth in the Escape- ment Wheel. Leaves in the xVo. of Seconds Teeth in in 3d T eethln In 4th Escape- No. of Beats in the 4th 3a Wheel. Wheel « 1 Wheel Wheel ment one minute. Wliee, Pinion. Pinion. Wlieel Pinion. revol- ves in. 72 66 6 58 6 7 6 298— 27 66 64 6 64 6 7 6 292-- 31 66 64 6 6a 6 7 6 287-- 31 66 63 6 63 6 7 6 283— 31 66 63 6 62 6 7 6 278-t- 31 66 (i3 6 61 6 7 6 274- 31 66 63 6 60 6 7 6 269-t- 31 Trains, for Nine Teeth in the Escapement Wheel. 63 60 6 57 6 9 6 299-h 34 66 60 6 54 6 9 6 297 33 63 60 6 56 6 9 6 294 34 66 60 6 53 6 9 6 291-f 33 63 60 6 55 6 9 6 289— 34 66 60 6 52 6 9 6 286 33 63 60 6 54 6 9 6 2834- 34 66 60 6 51 6 9 6 280-- 3J a'? 60 6 53 6 9 6 278-- 34 66 60 6 50 6 9 6 275 U 63 60 6 52 6 9 6 273 31 Trains, for Eleven Teeth in the Escapement Wheel. 60 60' 6 49 6 11 6 300— 36 60 . 51 6 54 6 11 6 297 40 60 56 6 52 6 11 6 230— 30 6t 62 6 52 6 11 6 294— 30 58 56 6 53 6 11 6 292-f 40 60 54 6 53 6 11 6 291+ 40 62 54 6 51 6 11 6 290— 39 58 54 6 54 6 11 6 287-1- 41 58 55 6 53 6 11 6 287 41 59 . 51 6 53 6 11 6 286-f 41 60 5t 6 52 6 11 6 286 40 60 65 6 51 6 11 6 286— 39 61 55 6 50 6 11 6 285- 39 63 55 6 48 6 11 6 282-- 38 59 54 6 52 6 11 6 281-^ 41 60 54 6 51 6 11 6 281- 40 61 51 6 50 6 11 6 280— 39 56 51 6 54 6 11 6 277^ - 43 60 60 6 48 6 11 6 293 J - 36 62 54 6 52 6 11 6 295- - 39 63 54 6 50 6 11 6 289— 38 63 48 6 56 6 11 6 287-- 43 70 70 7 56 7 11 7 293-- 36 70 70 7 48 7 11 6 293-- 36 70 60 7 48 6 11 6 293+ 36 WATCHMAKER, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 1466 No. of 'IVeth Leaves Leave.s Teeth in the Escape- ment Wheel. Leaves in the ±\i}. of Seconds Teeth in in 3d Teeth In in Ith Escape- No. of Beats in the 4tli Con t re 3d Wheel. "Wheel 4th Wheel Wheel ment one Minute. Wheel Wheel. Pinion. Pinion. Wheel revol- 70 Pinion. ves in. 60 6 48 7 6 293-t- 36 63 60 6 56 7 11 6 287+ 40 63 63 6 50 7 6 289— 33 80 80 8 64 8 8 293-f 86 80 80 8 56 8 7 293-h 36 80 80 8 48 8 6 293+ SO 8L 70 8 55 7 7 293 + 36 a 70 8 48 7 6 293+ 36 80 60 8 48 6 6 293+ 36 70 80 7 56 8 7 293+ 36 70 80 •7 48 8 6 293+ 36 ■60 80 6 48 8 6 293+ 36 84 72 8 50 8 6 289— 38 84 63 8 50 7 6 289- 38 84 54 8 50 6 6 289- 38 '63 72 6 50 8 6 289- 33 63 63 6 50 7 6 289- 38 '84 64 8 56 8 6 287+ 40 84 56 8 56 7 6 287+ 40 84 48 8 56 6 6 287+ 40 63 64 6 66 8 6 287+ 40 •■€3 56 6 56 7 6 287+ 40 Trains, for Tliirteoii Teeth in the Escapement liTheel, 54 53 6 52 6 13 6 298+ 45 56 53 6 60 6 13 6 298- 44 59 51 6 49 6 13 6 296— 43 60 61 6 48 6 13 6 294+ 42 54 53 6 61 6 13 6 293- 45 56 53 6 49 6 13 6 292— 44 66 54 6 '48 6 13 6 291 + 44 67 63 6 48 6 13 6 291— 43 64 62 6 61 6 13 6 2874- 46 64 43 6 60 6 13 6 287-- 46 50 61 6 50 6 13 6 2S6-- 45 51 52 6 60 6 13 6 282— 46 56 51 6 49 6 13 6 281- 45 57 51 6 48 6 13 6 280— 44 52 62 6 61 6 13 6 277- 48 53 52 6 60 6 13 6 276+ 46 62 52 6 52 6 13 6 293- 46 65 51 6 51 6 13 6 287 46 66 50 6 61 6 13 6 280J _ 46 66 62 6 48 6 13 6 280J . 44 f6 52 6 50 6 13 6 292- _ 44 60 48 6 48 6 13 6 277- - 45 60 60 6 48 6 13 6 289- 43 60 64 6 60 8 13 6 292+ 287+ 63 CO 68 7 56 7 13 C 61 60 60 8 64 6 13 6 300 44 62 66 7 56 7 13 6 296+ 47 63 62 7 51 6 13 6 285 <:o 63 60 7 60 7 13 6 290 60 64 80 7 CO 7 13 6 285 60 72 70 8 68 8 13 6 280 60 74 68 8 68 8 13 6 286+ 60 146c WATCHMAKER,' JEWELLEBS, AC, RECEIPTS. Trains, for Fifteen Teeth in the Escapement Wheel. No. of Teerh Leaves Leaves Teeth in the Escape- ment Wheel. Leaves in the No. of •■ econdi In the Centre Teeth in in 3d Teeth in in 4th Escape- No. of Beats in the 4tl- 3d Wheel. WTieel 4th Wheel Wheel ment ■ one ilinute. Wheel Wheel. Pinion. Pinion. Wheel revol- Pinion. ves in. 54 50 6 48 6 15 6 286 48 68 48 6 46 6 15 6 290 50 48 45 6 59 6 15 6 291— 60 48 45 6 58 6 15 6 300 62 48 45 6 57 6 15 6 288 62 48 45 6 56 6 15 6 288 50 56 48 6 46 , 6 15 6 289— 50 63 56 7 56 7 15 7 288 50 60 56 8 68 7 15 6 288 50 62 60 8 60 8 15 6 288 50 72 64 8 50 8 15 6 288 50 72 64 8 56 8 15 7 288 50 72 64 8 64 8 15 8 288 50 52 50 6 48 6 15 6 288 50 64 48 6 48 6 15 6 288 50 72 64 8 48 8 16 6 288 50 72 80 8 64 10 15 8 288 50 72 80 8 56 10 15 7 288 50 72 80 8 48 10 15 6 288 50 63 80 7 64 10 15 8 288 50 63 80 T * 56 10 15 7 288 50 63 80 7 48 10 15 6 288 50 Trains, for Seventeen Teeth In the Escapement Wheel. 64 80 8 48 10 17 6 299-1- 63 54 48 6 44 6 17 6 299-- 50 51 48 6 45 6 17 6 295-- 53 64 48 6 43 6 17 6 292-t- 50 48 48 6 48 6 17 6 290-f 53 61 48 6 45 6 17 6 289 53 64 48 6 42 6 17 6 286- 53 48 48 6 47 6 17 6 284-F 53 51 48 6 44 6 17 6 283— 53 48 48 6 46 6 17 6. 278 53 48 48 6 45 6 17 6 272 53 64 64 8 64 8 17 8 290-f- 50 72 64 8 56 8 17 8 286- 60 64 64 8 60 8 17 8 289— 53 56 56 7 58 7 17 7 290-(- 53 63 56 7 49 7 17 7 286- 50 64 56 8 48 7 17 6 290-f- 53 80 80 10 64 10 17 8 290-f- 53 80 64 10 64 8 17 8 290-f 63 80 64 10 56 8 17 7 290+ bo 80 64 10 48 8 17 6 290-1- 53 80 56 10 56 7 17 7 290-1- 53 80 56 10 48 7 17 6 290-1- 63 64 80 8 64 10 17 8 290+ 63 64 80 - 8 56 10 17 7 290+ 63 To Remove Soft Solder from Gold. — Place the work in spirits of salts, or remove as much as possible with the scraper, using a gentle heat to enable you to get off the solder more easily. Very useful to be known where hard soldering is required, either iu bright or colored work. WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 146cZ Trains , for Third "Wheel and Patent Seconds • No. of Teeth in the Cen'.re Wheel Lpaves Leaves Teeth in the Escape- ment Wheel. Leaves in the No. of .^econda Teeth In in 3d Teeth in in 4th Escape- No. of Beats in the 4th 3d Wheel. Wheel 4th Wheel Wheel ment one Minute. Wheel Pinion. Pinion. Wheel Pinion. revol- ves in. 60 72 6 60 12 6 300 60 60 60 6 60 10 6 300 60 60 48 6 60 8 6 3 60 48 60 6 60 8 6 300 60 60 72 6 54 12 6 270 60 60 60 6 54 10 6 270 60 48 60 6 54 8 6 270 60 60 72 6 48 12 6 240 60 60 60 6 48 10 6 240 60 48 60 6 48 8 6 240 60 Trains, for Fonrtlt Wlieel Seconds, \»itli Eleven TeetU In the Escapement Wheel. 48 45 71 6 11 G 260 -r 60 48 45 6 74 6 11 6 271-1- 60 48 45 6 76 6 11 6 279- 60 48 45 6 78 6 11 6 286 60 60 49 7 74 i 11 6 271f 60 60 49 1 76 1 11 6 279- 60 60 49 7 78 t 11 6 286 60 45 56 6 74 7 11 6 271-f- 60 45 66 6 76 1 11 6 279- 60 45 56 6 78 7 11 6 286 60 64 60 8 74 8 11 6 271+ 60 64 60 8 76 8 11 5 279- 60 64 60 8 78 8 11 6 286 60 60 56 8 74 7 11 6 271+ 60 60 56 8 76 7 11 6 279- 60 60 66 8 78 7 11 6 28G 60 60 48 8 74 6 11 6 271+ 60 48 48 8 78 6 11 6 286 60 48 60 6 74 8 11 C 271+ 60 48 60 6 78 8 11 6 286 60 56 60 7 74 8 11 6 271+ 60 Trains, for Fourth AVheel Seconds, ^vith Thirteen Teeth in ilic Escapement At Ik eel. 64 60 8 66 8 13 6 286 60 64 60 8 67 8 IS 6 290+ ■ 60 64 60 8 68 8 13 6 295— 60 64 60 8 69 8 13 6 299 60 60 49 7 77 7 13 7 286 60 60 49 7 66 1 12 6 280 60 60 49 7 67 1 13 6 290+ 60 48 45 6 66 6 13 6 286 60 48 46 6 67 6 13 6 290+ 60 48 45 6 68 6 13 6 264— 60 48 45 6 69 6 13 6 299 60 60 66 8 66 7 13 6 280 60 80 60 10 66 8 13 6 286 60 64 75 8 66 10 13 6 286 60 48 60 6 66 8 13 6 286 60 48 76 6 66 10 13 6 286 60 45 56 6 66 1 13 6 286 60 66 76 7 68 10 13 6 296- 60 146e WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS, Trains, for Fourth "Wheel Seeonds, wttli Fifteen Teeth in Escapement Wheel, No. of Teeth 111 the C«ntre VNTieel. Leaves Leaves Teeth in the Escape- Leaves in the No. of Seconds Teeth In in 3d Teeth in in 4th Escape- No. of Beats in the 4th 3il 'nTieel. Wheel 4th Wheel AVheel ment on; Minute. Wheel Pinion. Pinion. ment Wheel. Wheel revol- 6: 70 Pinion. ves in. 64 8 8 15 7 300 60 64 60 , 8 60 8 15 6 300 60 64 45 '8 60 6 15 6 300 60 60 56 8 60 7 15 6 300 6U 48 60 6 60 8 15 6 300 60 60 70 7 70 7 15 7 300 60 60 49 7 60 7 15 6 300 60 48 49 6 60 6 15 6 300 60 80 45 10 70 8 15 7 300 60 75 60 10 60 8 15 6 300 60 64 64 8 70 10 15 7 3-0 60 64 75 8 60 10 15 6 300 60 56 76 7 70 10 15 7 3.)0 60 66 75 7 60 10 15 6 800 60 64 75 8 ■ 54 8 15 6 270 60 60 60 8 54 7 15 6 270 60 64 56 8 54 6 15 6 270 60 48 45 6 54 8 15 6 270 60 60 60 7 63 7 15 7 270 60 60 49 7 54 7 15 6 270 60 48 49 6 54 6 15 6 270 60 64 45 8 48 8 15 6 240 60 60 60 8 48 7 15 6 240 60 48 60 6 48 8 15 6 240 60 64 60 8 48 6 15 6 240 60 60 45 7 56 7 15 7 240 69 eo 49 7 48 7 15 6 240 60 48 45 6 48 6 15 6 240 60 60 56 8 48 7 15 6 240 60 Trains, for Fonrth Wheel Seconds, ^vlth Seventeen Teeth in Escapement Wheel. 64 60 8 61 8 17 6 289 60 64 60 8 50 8 17 6 283+ 50 60 56 8 51 7 17 6 289 60 80 60 10 50 8 17 6 283+- 60 75 64 10 50 8 17 6 283-1- 60 75 56 10 68 17 8 289 0) 75 68 10 68 8 17 8 289 t J 80 75 10 68 10 17 8 289 6 Train of the American W^atch company's Watch. 64 60 8 64 8 15 300 13 Note.— By use nf the foregoing set of Trains, and the rule for sizes ol pinions, on page 1 '4, all difficulty of calculating is obviated ; and at one view, in case of the accidental loss of a wheel and pinion, may be known the correct size arid count of the pinion, and number of teeth in tbg wheel lost. WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 146/ Valdable Receipts for Goldsmiths.— Standard Gold is coni- pounded of 440 grains of fine gold, and 40 grains (Troy weight, to the oz. allov ; therefore, when you judge how much gold a piece of work will take, compound it to the standard weight by the fol- lowing directions : Assay Weight. The weight of gold is a pound, which IS divided into 12 ozs. each oz. into 24 carats, each carat into 4 grains, and, lastly, each grain into 4 quarters ; then you see the assay quarter-grain, is in reality l\ grain Troy. , i QUANTITY OF STANDARD GOLD TO COMPOUND AN OZ. OP ANY OF THE FOLLOWING ALLOYS CALCULATED TO THE i OP A GRAIN, AS FOLLOWS. Dwts. Grs. grs. 19 2 2 18 4 4 17 6 6 IG 8 8 15 10 10 14 13 1 13 15 3 12 17 5 11 19 7 10 21 9 10 9 2 2 8 4 4 7 6 6 6 8 8 5 10 IC 4 13 1 3 16 3 2 17 6 1 19 7 21 9 Steulino Gold Alloy, 78s. per oz.— 1. Fine gold, 18 dwt., 12 grs., fine silver, 1 dwt., fine copper, 12 grs. 2. Dry Colored Gold Alloys. 17 Carat. Fine gold,^15 dwts., fine silver, 1 dwt. 10 grs., fine copper, 4 dwts. 17 grs. 3. Another, 18 Carat. Fine gold, I oz., fine silver 4 dwts. 10 grs., fine copner, 2 dwts. 5 grs. 4. Another, 18 Carat. Fine gold, 15 dwts., fine" silver, 2 dwts. 4 grs., fine copper, 2 dwts. 19 grs. 5. Another, 18 Carat. Fine gold, 18 dwts., fine silver, 2 dwts. 18 grs., fine copper, 3 dwts. ]8 grs. Q. Another .\^ Carat. Fine gold, 1 oz., fine silver, 2 dwts. (J grs., fine copper, 3 dwts. 12 grs. 7. Another, 20 Carat Fine gold, 1 oz , fine silver, 2 dwts., fine copper, 2 dwts. 4 grs. 8. Anot/ter, 22 Carat. Fine gold, 18 dwts., fine silver, 12 grs., fine copper, 1 dwt. 3 grs. 9. Gold solder for thejforeyoing Alloys Take of the alloyed gold you are using, 1 dwt., fine silver, C grs. 10. Alloy for Dry Colored Kinys. Fine gold, 1 oz., fire silver, 4 dwts. 6 grs., fine copper, 4 dwts. G grs. 11. Solder for ditto. Scrap gold, 2 ozs., fine silver, 3 dwts , fine copper, 3 dwts. 12. Dry Colored IScrup reduced to 35s. Gold. Colored sciap, loz. 9 dwts. 12 grs., fine silver, 2 dwts., fine copper, 17 dwts. 12 grs., spilter, 4 dwts. DuYCoLOUiNa FOR THE FouEOOiNO. — Polish your work well and fur every 2 ozs. take saltpetre, H ozs., alum, 4 ozs., salt, 4 ozs., melt uU toilet lif.r in a black lead pot, stirrinK with a thin iron bar 14% WATCHIIAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. when dissolving. Use the fire on a forge and urge it well with the bellows, as you can not make it too hot. Your polished work being well cleaned with soda, soap, and hot water, is dried in box sawdust, is afterwai-ds covered with a thin layer of borax ; annealed and boiled out, and again dried in bos sawdust, and finally hung on platiuum or silver wke. Wnen the " color " in the pot assumes a brown yellow flame, the work is dipped in for two or three seconds, and quenched with hot wa.cer diluted with muriatic acid which removes any " color " that may adhere to the work. This' ought to produce the desired color, but if it does not, repeat the process, previously drying the work before re-immersion in the "color." The color-pot must be emptied immediately upon the forge, so that it may be reatiy for future use. Wet Colored Alloys. — 1. Fine gold, 1 oz., fine silver, 3 dwts. 12 grs., fine jsopper, 9 dwts. 2. Fine gold, 1 oz., fine silver, 4 dwts. 12 grs., fine copper, 10 dwts. 3. Fine gold, 1 oz., fine silver, 4 dwts. 12 grs., fine copper, 10 dwts. 12 grs. 4. Fine Gold, 1 oz fine silver, 4 dwts., fine copper, 9 dwts. 12 grs. 5. Green Gold for Fauci/ Work. Fine gold, 1 oz., iine silver, 6 dwts. 16 grs. 6. Another Green Gold. Fine gold, 5 dwts., fine silver, 1 dwt. 12 grs. 7. An-^ other Green Gold. Fine gold, 10 dwts., fine silver, 2 dwts. 2 grs. 8. Red Gold, far Jancy tbork. Fine gold, 5 dwts., fine copper, 2 dwts. 12 grs. 9. Another Red Gold. Fine gold, 5 dwts., fine copper, 1 dwt. 6 grs. 10. Gola solders for the foregoing Alloys. Take of the alloyed gold you are using 1 dwt., fine silver, 6 grs., or, 5 grs. silver and 1 gr. copper may be used. 11. Solder for Repairing. Gold al- loyed, 1 dwt., fine silver, 5 grs., pin brass, 1 gr.l2. Wet Colored Solder. Wet colored scrap, 3 ozs., fine silver, 10 dwts., fine copper, 5 dwts. 13. Gold, 15 carat, cost 56s. or Sl4 /jer oz. Fine gold, 1 oz. 18 dwts , fine silver, 12 dwts. 12 grs., fine copper, 10 dwts. 14. Fine gold, 1 oz. fine silver, 8 dwts. fine copper, 4 dwts. 14. Fine gold, 1 oz., fine silver, 3 dwts., fine copper, 4 dwts. 15. Fine gold, 1 oz., fine silver, 6 dwts., fine copper, 8 dwts. 16. Gold solder for the last. Gold scrap, 1 oz., fine silver, 5 dwts. 17. Gold, good color. Fine gold, 1 oz., fine silver, 6 dwts., fine cop- per, 4 dwts. 18. Gol 1 cost 60s. or $15, good color. Fine gold, 1 dwt. fine silver, 6 dwts., fine copper, 4 dwts. 19. Wet colored solder. Scrap gold, 4 ozs., fine silver, 13 dwts , fine copper, 6 dwts. 16 grs. 20. To reduce; 22 carat into Wet colored Gold. Gold coins, 4 ozs, 8 dwts., fine silver, 13 dwts., fine copper, 1 oz. 13 dwts. 21. Tore- dace 22 carat to ordinary wet co'ored Go'd ivith scrap. Coins 1 oz.. fine gold, 3 ozs., fine silver, 17 dwts. 12 grs., fine copper, 2 ozs, i dwt. 12 grains., scrap, 3 ozs. 1 dwt. 22. Another zvay, ivith scrap. Corns, 3 ozs. 1 dwt. 6 grs , fine gold, 2 ozs., fine silver, 1 oz. 1 dwt., tine copper, 2 ozs. 11 dwts., scrap, 1 oz. 6 dwts. 18 grs. 23. An- other tvxy with scrap. Coins, 2 oz^., fine gold, 3 ozs. 3 dwts. 8 grs,, fine silver, 1 oz. 1 dwt 4 grs., fiae copper, 2 ozs. 10 dwts. 12 grs., scrap, 1 oz. 5 dwts. 24. To reduce 22 carat to ordinary ivet colored Gold, ivithout scrap. Coins, 1 oz., fine gold, 8 ozs., fine silver, 2 ozs., fine copper, 4 ozs. 14 dwts. 25. Another way, without scrap. Coins, 1 oz„ fine gold, 2 ozs., fine silver, 13 dwts , fine copper, 1 oz., 11 dwts. 26. Another way, ivithout scrap. Coins, 2 ozs., fine gold, 6 ozs., fine silver, 1 oz. 14 dwts., fine copper, 4 ozs. 2 dwts. ^ATCHIIAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C.. RECEIPTS. 1467l To Wet-Color the fo3bgoi.,g Alloys. — For 5 ozs. ot worii ta^e Saltpetre, 16 ozs., alum, 8 ozs., salt. 8 ozs., all pulverized aad muriatic :acid, 2 0Z3., dissolve the ingredieats gradually in a black lead pot. When it boils up, add the acid, aad stir the whole with a wooden spoon. Having annealed your work and made it perfectly clean, tie in small parcels with platinum or fine silver wire, and when the color boils up immerse it therein for four minutes, moving it about to ensure a perfect contact with all parts of the surface. Then take it out and rinse it well in boiling wa,ter, then immerse in tae color again for IJ minutes and rinse well once mire in fresh hot water. Now add 2 ozs. of fresh hot water to the color in the pot, which will cause it to sink. When it rises put in your work for 1 minute, rinsing in fresh hot water again, when it will begin to brighten. Now immerse your work for half a minute longer, and rinse for the last time in clean hot water, when it Avill appear of a most beauti- ful color. OaOINiRY WET COLORED GOLD.— TABLE SHOWING THE PKOPORTIOX9 OP ALLOr WITH FROM ONE OZ. UP TO TEN OZ. OP FINE GOLD. Fine Gold. Fine Silver. Fine Copper. Total. Oz. Dwts. Grs. Oz. Dwts. Grs. Oz. Dwts. Grs. Oz. Dwts. Grs. 10 4 12 10 . 12 1 15 2 9 110 3 10 3 13 12 1 11 12 6 5 I 4 18 2 2 7 5 1 2 12 2 12 12 8 15 6 17 3 3 10 10 7 1 11 12 3 13 12 12 6 8 1 16 4 4 14 a 2 12 4 14 12 15 15 10 2 5 5 6 17 10 Ordinary bright gold, table suowinq the pROPoaTioN of allov, WITH FRO.M 1 oz. UP TO 6 OZ, OF FINE GOLD. Fine Gold. Fine Silver. Oz. Dwts. Grs. 6 10 15 1 15 1 10 Composition. Oz. Dwts. Grs. 1 C 2 16 4 4 6 12 7 8 Total. Oz. Dwts. Grs. 10 2 3 4 5 6 Oz. Dwts 2 13 5 6 7 19 10 12 13 5 15 18 Grs. Composition foe the above. — Fine Copper 44 ozs. spelter 8 ozs. Table of alloy.s for different qualities of gold. Quality. Fine Gold. Composi tion. Total. 9 Carati. Oz. Dwts. Grs. Oi. Dwts . Grs. Oz. Dwis. Grs. 12 7 12 12 12 1 15 10 10 1 18 " 12 12 7 12 1 22 " 15 5 1 1 18 18 1 6 1 1464 TwATCHJlAKras;' JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPf^ ' COMPOSITION FOR THE ABOVE. — Fine Silver, 3 0Z3. 5 dwts. li grs. fiae copper 8 oz. 12 dwt3. 12 grs. Spelter 1 oz. IS dwts. 6 grs. . | Alloys, coNTiNnED. 1. Pale gold for colorinq, Enamelling^ or Lipping — Fine Gold 1 oz., fine silver 9 dwts., fine copper 2 dwts., 12 grs. 2. Anotlier ditto — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 9 dwts., fine copper 3 dwts., 12 grs. 3. Another ditto — Fine gold 1 oz., fine sil- ver 10 dwts., fiae copper 3 dwts., 12 grs. 4. Enamelling Gold No. 1 — ^Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 1 dwt., 12 grs., fine copper 2 dwts., 12 grs. 5. Enamelling Goldfrom Sterling — Sterling 1 oz., fine silver .'8 grs., fine copper 2 dwts. 6. Enamelling Gold Solder — Gold illoyed, 1 dwt., fine silver 4 grs. 7. Another ditto, costASs. stg., or ^I0.15per oz. — Fine gold 12 dwts., fine silver 7 dwts., 3 grs., fine copper 6 dwts. 8. Enamelling Gold No. 2. cost 5Qs. stg. per oz. — Fine goldloz., finesilver9 dwts., 12 grs., fine copper 7 dwts., 12 grs. 9. Enamelling Gold No. 3. — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 14 dwts., fine coppers dwts. 10. Enamelling Gold No. 4:. — Fine gold 2 ozs., 5 dwts., fine silver 1 oz., 6 dwts., fine copper 1 oz., pin brass 5 dwts. 11. Enamelling Gold No. 5. — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 12 dwts., fine copper 6 dwts. 12. Enamelling Gold No. Q.for trans- parent enamelling — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 14 dwts. fine copper 6 dwts. 13. Gold solder for enamelled xoork — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 1 oz., fine copper 10 dwts,, silver solder 8 dwts., 8 grs. 14. Pale Gold alloys for polishing, Sfc., No. 1. — Fine gold 1 oz., fine Silver 8 dwts., fine copper 3 dwts., 12 grs. 15. Another, No. 2. — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 1 dwt., 20 grs., fine copper Idwt., 4 grs. 16. Fale 18 Carat Gold — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 4 dwts., fine copper2dwt3.,15 grs. 17. Another Pale IS Carat Gold — Finegold 1 oz., 12 grs., fine silver 3 dwts., 8 grs., fine copper 3 dwts., 8 grs. 18. Pale Gold Solder — Gold alloyed 1 dwt., 6 grs., fine silver 1 dwt. 19. Alloy for best Pens — Finegold 1 oz., fine silver 5 dwts., fine cop- per 7 dwts., 18 grs., spelter 1 dwt. , 6 grs. 20. Solder for ditto — Fine gold 12 dwts., fine silver 7 dwts., 3 grs., fine copper 6 dwts. 21. Medium quality pens — Fine gold 1 oz.. Composition 1 oz., 13 dwts. 22. Composition for the last — Fine silver 1 oz., 17 dwts., fine copper 5 ozs. , 15 dwts., spelter 18 dwts., 20 grs. 23. Solder for ditto — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 2 ozs., pin-brass 1 oz. 24. Gold for common pens — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 2 ozs., fine copper 1 oz. 25. Sol- der for ditto— Y'lXiQ gold 1 oz., fine silver 2 ozs., pin brass 1 oz. 26. Alloys of Gold with Brass, No. 1. — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 5 dwts., C grs., fine copper 3 dwts., 12 grs., pin brass 18 dwts. 27. Another ditto, No. 2. — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 4 dwts., fine cop- per 4 dwts., pin brass 16 dwts. 28. Another ditto, No. 3. — Fine gold 1 oz„ fine silver 5 dwts., 12 grs., fine copper 3 dwts., 12 grs ,pin brass 19 dwts., 6 grs. 29 Another alloy— Fiae gold 1 oz., fine sil- ver 3 clwts., 21 grs., fine copper 9 dwts., 3 grs. compositions dwts. 6 grs. 30. Another ditto — Fine gold 15 dwts., 9 grs., fine silver 5 dwts. 19 grs. fine copper 3 dwts. 21 grs. composition 15 dwts. 31. Composition for the last two alloys — Finest copper 1 oz., spelter 5 dwts. 32. Solder for foregoing alloys — Gold alloyed 1 dwt., fine cilver 12 grs. 33. Imitation Gold costs 8Tc per oz. — Fine silver 2 ozs., 5 dwts., fine copper 1 oz. composition 1 oz., keeps its color very well. 34. Composition for ditto — Fine copper 11 ozs , spelter 2 0Z8. 35. « California" Gold— FiuQ gold 5 ozs., 12 dwts. compo- WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 146/ sition 7 ozs., ITdwts. 36. Composition for " California" — Fine sil- ver 7 ozs., 17 dwts. fine copper 33 ozg. 12 dwta., spelter 5 ozs., 12 dwts. 37. Medium Gold —Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 12 dwts. fine copper 13 dwts. 38. Bright Gold— Tine gold 1 oz., fine silver 7 d-wts. conaposition marked No. 34, 1 dwt. 6 grs. 39. Common Gold, No. 1. — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 8 dwts. composition No. 34. 1 oz., 12 dwts. 41. Common Gold, No. 2.— Fine gold 5 dwts. fine sil- ver 3 dwts. 6 grs. fine copper 6 dwts. 12 grs. 42. Gold for Pins— Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 5 dwts. fine copper 1 oz., spelter 5 dwts. 43. Ury Colored Scrajj reduced to 35s. or §8.75 Gold — Colored scrap loz., 9 dwts., 12 grs., fine silver 2 dwts., fine copper 17 dwts. 12 grs., spelter 4dwts. 44. Alloy Jor Gold Chains.— Fine gold 11 dwts., 6 grs., fine silver 2 dwts., 5 grs., fine copper 6 dwts., 13 grs. 45. Another ditto — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 9 dwts., fine copper 8 dwts 46. Gold worth 45s. stg. or $11.25 — Fine gold 1 oz., compo- sition (see No. 22) 1 oz. 47. Solder for ditto — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 15 dwts., fine copper 15 dwts. 48. 12 Carat Gold — Fine gold 1 oz., fine silver 10 dwts., fine copper 9 dwts., 6 grs. 49. Common Gold from " California" — " California," (see No. 35.) 8 ozs. fine sil- ver 13 0Z3., 16 dwts , fine copper 6oz3., 16 dwts. 50. 29s. o;-i$7.25 Gold — Fine gold 1 oz., 13 dwts., 6 grs., fine silver 1 oz., 12 dwts., 12 grs., fine copper loz., 16 dwts., 6.' grs., spelter 4 dwts. Stands nitric acid very well. OBDINAEY BBIOHT GOLD WIBB, TABLE SHOWING THK PROPORTIONS OF ALLOT FROM 1 OZ. TP TO 21 OZ. Fine Gold. Fine Silver. Fine Copper. Total. Oz. Dwte. Grs. Oz. Dwts. Grs. Oz. Dwts) Grs, Oz. Dwts. Grs. 5 21 6 6 6 21 1 11 18 14 12 13 18 2 17 15 1 1 18 1 15 3 1 15 6 2 3 12 2 1 6 6 2 12 21 3 5 6 2 1 21 9 3 10 12 4 7 4 2 12 12 4 8 3 6 8 13 5 8 3 15 5 4 18 6 10 12 6 3 18 18 6 3 8 7 12 6 2 4 9 21 To Recoveh the Gold lost ix Coloring. — Dissolve a handful of sulphate of iron in boiling water, then add this to your "color" water, it precipitates the small particles of gold. Now draw off the water, being very careful not to disturb the auriferous sediment at the bottom. You will now proceed to wash the sediment from all trace of acid with plenty of boiling water; it will require 3 or 4 separate washings, with sufficient time between each to allow the water to cool and the sediment to settle, before pouring ilie water off. Then dry in an iron vessel by the fire and finally fuse in a covered skittle pot with a flux as directed on page 244. See " To Fuse Gold JJust." For Silversmiths Compositions. See pag<; 284 WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 147 To TiGHTEK A Uttby Pin. — Set the ruby pin in aspbaltum var- tiish. It will become hard in a few minutes, and be much firmer and better than gum shellac, as generally used. To Temper Brass, oe to Draw its Temper. — Brass is rendered bard by hammering or rolling ; therefore, when you make a thing of brass necessary to be in temper, you must prepare the material before shaping the article. Temper may be drawn from brass by heating it to a cherry red, and then simply plunging it into water, the same as though you were going to temper steel. To Temper Drills. — Select none but the finest and best steel for four drills. In making them, never heat higher than z cherry red, ftnd always hammer till nearly cold. Do all your hammering in one way, for if, after you have flattened your piece out, you attempt to hammer it back to a square or a round, you spoil it. VThen your drill is in proper shape, heat :t to a cherry red, and_ thrust it into a piece of resin or into quicksilver. Some use a solu- tion of cyanuret potassa and rain-water for tempering their drills, but, for my part, I have always found the resin or quicksilver to work best. To Temper Gravers. — Gravers, and other instruments larger ihan drills, may be tempered in quicksilver as above ; or you may ise lead instead of quicksilver. C ut down into the lead, say half an inch ; then, having heated your instrument to a light cherry red, press it firmly into the cut. The lead will melt around it, and an excellent temper will be imparted. Other Methods to Temper Case Springs. — Having fitted the spring into the case according to your liking, temper it hard by heating and plunging into water. Next polish the small end so that you may be able to see when the color changes ; lay it on a piece of copper or b/ass plate, and hold it over your lamp, with the blaze directly under the largest part of the spring. Watcti the pol= ished part of the steel closely, and when you see it turn blue, remove the plate from the lamp, letting all cool gradually together. When cool enough to handle, polish the end of the spring again, place it on the plate, and hold it over the lamp as before. The third bluing of the polished end will leave the spring in proper temper. Any steel article to which you desire to give a spring temper may be treated in the same way. Another process, said to be good, is to temper the spring as in the first instance ; then put it into a small iron ladle, cover it with linseed oil, and hold over a lamp till the oil takes fire. Remove the ladle, but let the oil continue to burn until nearly all consumed^ when blow out, re-cover with oil, and hold over the lamp as before. The third burning out of the oil will leave the spring in the right temper. To Temper Clicks, Ratchets, &c.— Clicks, ratchets, or other steel articles requiring a similar degree of hardness, should be tem- pered in mercurial ointment. The process consists in simply heat- ing to a cherry red and plunging into the ointment. No other mode will combine toughness and hardness to such an extent. I To Draw the Temper from Delicate Steel Pieces without I Springing them. — Place the articles from which you desire to draw I the temper into a common iron clock key. Fill around it with 148 WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. brass or iron filings, and then plug up the open end with a steel, iron, or brass plug, made to fit closely. Take the handle of the key with your pliers and hold its pipe into the blaze of a lamp till near hot, then let it cool gradually. When sufficiently cold to handle, remove the plug, and you will find the article with its temper fully drawn, but in all other respects just as it was before. You will understand the reason for having the article thus plugged up while passing it through the heating and cooling process, when I tell yoa that springing always results from the action of changeable currents of atmosphere. The temper may be drawn from cylinders, staffs, pinions, or any other delicate pieces, by thi3 mode with perfect safety. To Temper Staffs, Cylinders, or Pinions, without Springing THEM. — Prepare the articles as in the preceding process, using a steel plug. Having heated the ke^-pipe to a cherry red, plunge it into water ; -khen polish the end ot your steel plug, place the key upon a plate of brass or copper, and hold it over your lamp with the blaze immediately under the pipe till the polished part becomes blue. Let cool gradually, then polish again. Blue and cool a second time, and the work will be done. To Draw the Temper from part of a Small Steel Article.— Hold the part from which you wish to draw the temper with a pair of tweezers, and with your blow-pipe direct the flame upon them— not the article— till sufficient heat is communicated to the article to produce the desired effect. To Blue Screws Eveklt.— Take an old watch barrel and drill as many holes into the head of it as you desire to blue screws at a time. Fill it about one-fourth full of brass or iron filings, put in the head, and then fit a wire, long enough to bend over for a handle, into the arbor holes — head of the barrel upwards. Brighten the heads of your screws, set them "point downwards, into the holes already drilled, and expose the bottoni of the barrel to your lamp till the screws assume the color you wish. To Remove Bluing prom Steel.— Immerse in a pickle composed of equal parts muriatic acid and elixir vitrei. Rinse in pure water, and dry in tissue paper. To JIake Diamond Broaches. — Make your broaches of brass the size and shape you desire; then, having oiled them slightly, roll their points into fine diamond dust till entirely covered. Hold them then on the face of your anvil, and tap with a light hammer till the grains disappear in the brass. Great caution will be necessary in this operation. Do not tap heavy enough to flatten the broach. Very light blows are all that will be required ; the grains will be driven in much sooner than one would imagine, bome roll the broach between two smooth pieces of steel to imbed the diamond dust. It is a very good way, but somewhat more wasteful of the dust. Broaches made on this plan are used for dressing out jewels. . i • i Jkwelli.no.— In using the broaches.press but lightly mto the jewel hole, and turn the broach rapidly with the fingers. For polishing use a bone or ivory point, lightly coated with the finest diamond dust and oil, and while using it with the one hand, accompany the motion with a slight oscillating motion of the other hand, in which WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 149 the jewel is held. This will ensure a more even polish to the hole, with less liability to press the jewel out of its place in the plate, than if held linn and steady. To MAKE PoLisHLNG Broaches. — These 316 usually naade of ivory, and used with diamond dust, loose, instead of having been driven in. You oil the broach lightly, dip it into the finest diamond dust, and proceed to work it into the jewel the same as you do the brass broach. Unfortunately, too many watchmakers fail to attach Bufiicient importance to the polishing broach. The sluggish motion of watches now-a-days is more often attributable to rough jewels than to any other cause. To MAKE Diamond Files. — Shape your file of brass, and charge with diamond dust, as in case of the mill. Grade the dust in accordance with the coarse or fine character of the file desired. To MAKE Pivot Files — Dress up a piece of wood file-fashion, about an inch broad, and glue a piece of fine emery paper upon it. Shape your file then, as you wish it, of the best cast steel, and before tempering pass your emery paper heavily across it several times, diagonally. Temper by heating to a cherry red, and plunging into linseed oil. Old worn pivot files may be dressed over and made new by this process. At first thought one would be led to regard them 'too slightly cut to work well, but not so. They dress a pivot more rapidly than any other file. To MAKE BuRKiSHERs. — Procecd the same as in making pivot files, with the exception that you are to use fine flour of emery on a slip of oiled brass or copper, instead of the emery paper. Bur- nishers which have become too smooth may be improved vastly with the flour of emery as above with-^ut drawing the temper. To Peeparh a Burnisher for Polishing. — Melt a little bees'- wax on the^face of your burnisher. Its effect then on brass or other finer metals, will be equal to the best buS". A small bur- nisher prepared in this way is the verj' thing with which to polish up watch wheels. Rest them on a piece of pith while polishing. To Make a Diamond Mill. — Make a brass chuck or wheel, suit- able for use on a foot-lathe, with a flat even surface or face of about 1^ or 2 inches in diameter; then place a number of the coarsest pieces of your diamond-dust on different parts of its fiice, and with a smooth-faced steel hammer drive the pieces of dust all evenly into the brass to nearly or quite level with the surface. Your mill, thus prepared, is now used for making pallet jewels or for grinding stone and glass of any kind. For polishing, use a bone or boxwood chuck or wheel, of similar form to your mill, and coat it lightly with the finest grade of your diamond-dust and oil ; with this a beautiful polish may be given to the hardest stone. To make Diamond Dust. — Place a few small pieces of common or cheap diamond on a block of hard polished steel, in a suitable vessel, and cover it with water to prevent flying or scattering, then place a fiat steel punch on each piece separately, and strike the punch with a mallet or hammer, with sufiicient force to crush the diamond. When reduced sufTiciently fine in this way, the dust mny be collected and dried for use ; after drying, it may be gra- duated for different purposes, by mixing it with a little watch oil ; when agitated, the finest particles will float near the surface, while 150 WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. the coarsest pieces will sink at once to the bottom ; and thus by decanting the oil in which the dust floats, as many grades of fine- ness as desired mav be obtained. The dust may be separated from the oil by pouring on a piece of smooth clean paper; the paper will absorb the oil, or allow it to filter through, while the dust will remain on the surface ; but to prevent waste, the better way is to leaye it in the oil, and use it directly therefrom as required, or the oil may be washed out of the dust with alcohol. To Polish Steel. — Take crocus or oxide of tin and graduate it m the same way as in preparing diamond dust, and apply it to the steel by means of a piece of soft iron or bell metal, made pro- per form, and prepared with flour of emery, same as for pivot bur- nishers ; use the coarsest of the cocus first, and finish off with the finest. To iron or soft steel a better finish may be given by bur- nishing than can be imparted by the use of polishing powder of any kind whatever. To Determine the Exact Focal Distamce of Spectacle Glasses. — Place the end of a measure of thirty or forty inches in length against a smooth wall, or other suitable ground, in plain view of some well-defined object a few rods distant, as for instance a building or window on the opposite side of the street. Then place the edge of your lens on the measure, and move it backward or forward until a spectrum is formed, or, in other words, until a clear and distinct outline of the distant object is produced on the ground against which your measure rests. This point will repre- sent sufficiently near, for all practical purposes, the exact focal dis- tance of the lens, and will correspond in inches with the number on all i)roperly marked convex spectacles. For mending fine steel spectacle frames, use the best gold in preference to silver or brass solder. To WITHDRAW MaGVKTISM PROM StEEL AND QUICKSILVER FROM Mktals. — A degree of lieat, considerably below a red heat, will expel quicksilver from metals in the form of vapor. To withdraw magnetism from steel, iece of green ap[)le or potatoe. This will obviate all danger from heat during the process of mending. A light coat of dampened plaster of Paris will, if [iroperly applied, also protect fine Etruscan jewellery, &c., from change of color while mending. To Frost Watch Plate.s. — ^\Vatch plates are frosted by meana of fine brass wire scratch brushes fixed in a latlie, and made to revolve at great sf)eed, tiic end of the wire brushes striking the l)latc producing a beautiful fr(jsted appearance. To PREVENT Watches lohino Time fko.m Action of Pendulum Sr-uiNfi. — Pin the jieudnluni spring into the stud, so that that part, tlie iiart of the eye inmu'diately emerging from the collet, and the c<-ntre of the collet, arc in a line; then you will have the spring pinneil in, in equal terms, as it is called by those who are verged WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 151 m the higher branches of springing. Bring the watch to time by- adding to or taking tiom ibe balance, and poise it ; try the watch wuh the 12 up tor 2 hours, then with the 6 up for 2 hours, then lying down for the same time ; the trials here described will be suffi- cient if the watch has seconds ; keep the curb pins close so as to allow the spring only a little play ; the vibration of the balance should be II turn or Ig Ijing. To RESTORE Watch" Dials. — If the dial be painted, clean the figure off with spirits of wine, or anything else that will render the dial perfectly clean ; then heat it to a bright red, and plunge It into a strong solution of cyanide of potassium, then wash ia soap and water, and dry in box dust. Repeat if not a good color. Indian ink. ground with gum water, will do for the figures. To MAKE A Watch Keep good Time whex the Cyllvder edges ARE WORN off, BY ALTERING THE EsCAPEMENT WITHOUT PUTTING A NEW Cylinder in. — Look at the cylinder, and see if there is room, either above or below the old wears, to shift the action of the wheel. If the wheel holes are brass, making one a little deeper, and putting a shallower one on the other side, will perhaps be suflS- cient. This must be done according as you want your whet- 1 up or down. If the holes are stone, shift j-our wheel on the pinion by a new collet, or turning away more of the old one, as the case may require. If you raise your wheel see that it works free of plate and top of cylinder, and that the web of wheel clears the top of passage. This last fault may be altered by polishing passage a little wider, it rub be slight. It shitted downwards, see to freedom at bottom ot cylinder, &c. Poising Watch Balance. — This may be done with sufiBcient accu- racy by scraping one arm of the callipers with a file when the balance is set in motion. This will cause the heaviest part to settle down- wards with certainty, observing always that the pivots are nicely rounded and formed at the ends. In some cases it becomes neces- sary to put a balance out of poise, in order to make the watch go equally in various positions. The rule for this is : to make the watch gam, the balance should be heaviest on the lower side when hanging up ; to make it lose, the reverse. CiCKOo Clocks. — The sound is produced by a wire acting on a small bellows which is connected with two small pipes, like organ pipes. To PRESERVE Pinions or Bearings from Corrosion andRdst. — In case of the lower centre bearing under the cannon pinion corroding or rusting, when you clean the watch, be particular to take the central wheel off. Clean it thoroughly : if the pivot is scratched, polish it, then make a little hollow in the top hole ; put good fresh oil on It, and the pivot will not corrode or rust for two or three years. As to the other pivots in the watch, they should all be thoroughly cleaned, and old oil cleaned out ; then if no dust gets in, and no accident happens the watch, it will run for years. The German method op Polishing Steel is performed by the use of crocus on a buff wheel. Nothing can exceed the surpassing beauty imparted to steel or even cast iron by this process. To Clean a Clock. — Take the movement of the clock " to pieces.'' Brush the wheels and pinions thoroughly with a stiff 152 WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. coarse brush ; also the plates into which the trains work. Clean the pivots ■well by turning in a piece of cotton cloth held tightly between your thumb and finger. The pivot holes in the plat'S are generally cleansed by turning a piece of wood into them, but I have always found a strip of cloth or a soft cord drawn tightly through them to act the best. If you use two cords, the first one slightly oiled, and the next dry, to clean the oil out, all the better. Do not use salt or acid to clean your clock — it can do no good, but may do a great deal of harm. Boiling the movement iu water, as is the practice of some, is also foolishness. To BcsH. — The hole through which the great arbors, or winding axles, work, are the only one^ that usuall}' require bushing. When thej-^ have become too much worn, the great wheel on the axle before named strikes too deeply into the pinions above it, and stops the clock. To remedy this, bushing is necessary, of course. The most common Avay of doing it is to drive a steel point or punch into the plate just above the axle hole, thus forcing the brass down- wards until the hole is reduced to its original size. Another mode is to solder a piece of brass upon the i)late in such a position as to hold the axle down to its proper place. If you simply wish your clock to run, and have no ambition to produce a bush that will look workmanlike, about as good a way as any is to fit a piece of hard wood between the post which comes through the top of the plate and the axle. Make it long enough to hold the axle to its proper place, so that the axle will run on the end of the grain. Cut notches where the pivots come through, and secure by wrapping around it and the plate a piece of small wire, or a thread. I have known clocks to run well on this kind of bushing, botchified as it may appear, for ten years. lo Kkmedy Wohn Pi.vions. — Turn the leaves or rollers, so the worn places upon them will be towards the arbor or shaft, aud fasten tliem in that position. If they are " rolling pinions," and you cannot secure them otherwise, you had better do it with a little soft solder. To Oil Properly. — Oil only, and very lightly, the pallets of the verge, the steel pin upon wliich the verge works, and tlie jioint where the loop of the verge wire works over the pendulum wire. Use none but the best watch oil. Though you might be working constantly at the clock-repairing business, a bottle costing you but twenty-five cents would last you two years at least. You can buy it at any watch-furnishing establishment. To Make the Clock Stkikb Cokuectlv. — If not very cautious in putting up your clock, you will get some of the striking-train Aviieels in wrong, and thus i)roduce a derangement in the striking. If this siiould hupjien, prize tlie j)late8 ajjart on the striking side, slii» the ]>ivots of the ui)])er wheels out, and having disconnected them from the train, turn them jiart around and i)ut them back. If still not light, lejieat llie exjieriment. A few cfiForts at most will get tiiein to worlving jiroperl}'. A Dekect to look AKTEit. — Always examine the i)endulum-\vire at the point where the loop of tlie verge wire works over it. You will getieraliy find a Hmall notch, or at least a rough place worn tbere. Dress it out perfectly smooth, or your clock will not le WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 153 likely to work -well. Small as this defect may seem, it stops & large number of clocks. Figures on Gold and Silver Dials. — Hold a small piece of cop- per over a gas flame for a few minutes till it is coated with soot; clear this off on to a piece of finely ground glass, add fat oil and a small quantity of oil of spike lavender, and grind up ; paint with a small camel hair pencil. Gold. — To find the number of carats of gold in an object, first weigh the gold and mix with seven times its weight in silver. This alloy is beaten into thin leaves, and nitric acid is added ; this dissolves the silver and copper. The remainder (gold) is then fused and weighed ; by comparing the first and last weights the number of carats of pure gold is found. This operation is always repeated several times, and if any difference occurs in the result, all is done o^er again. Je\vellers' Alloys. — Eigfiteen-carat gold for rings. — Gold coin, ] 9 J gr. ; pure copper, 3 gr. ; pure silver, 1 \ gr. Cheap gold, twelve-carat. — Gold coin, 25 gr. ; pure copper, 13^ gr. ; pure silver, 7J gr. Very cheap four-carat gold. — Copper, 18 parts ; gold, 4 parts: silver, 2 parts. Imitations of gold. — 1. Platina, 4 dwt. ; pure copper, 21 dwt.; sheet-zinc, 1 dwt.; block-tin, 1| dwt.; pure lead, li dwt. If this should be found too hard or brittle for practical use, re-melting the composition with a little sal-ammoniac will generally render it malleable as desired. 2. Platina, 2 parts ; sil- ver, 1 part ; copper, 3 parts. These compositions, when properly prepared, so nearly resemble pure gold that it is very diificult to distinguish them therefrom. A little powdered charcoal, mixed with metals while melting, will be found of service. Best oroide of gold. — Pure copper, 4 oz. ; sheet-zinc, 11 oz. ; magnesia, | oz. ; sal-ammonia, ^^ oz., quick-lime, -3% oz. ; cream tartar, | oz. First melt the copper at as low a temperature as it will melt ; then add the line, and afterwards the other articles, in powder, in the order named. Use a charcoal fire to melt these metals. BcsHiNG Alloy for Pivot-holes, &c. — Gold coin, 3 dwt. ; silver, 1 dwt. 20 gr. ; copper, 3 dwt. 20 gr. ; palladium, 1 dwt. The best composition known for the purpose named. Gold Solder for Fourteen to Sixteen-carat Work. — Gold coin, 1 dwt. ; pure silver, 9 gr. ; pure copper, 6 gr. ; brass, 3 gr. Darker solder. — Gold coin, 1 dwt. ; pure copper, 8 gr. ; pure silver, 5 gr. ; brass, 2 gr. ; melt together in charcoal fire. Solders, FOR Gold. — Gold, 6 dwts. ; silver, 1 dwt. copper, 2 dwts. Soft Gold Solder. — Gold, 4 parts ; silver, 1 part ; cop- per, 1 part. Solders for Sil^tir. — (For the use of jewellers.) — Fine silver, 19 dwts. ; copper, 1 dwt. ; sheet brass, 10 dwts. White Solder for Sil\-er. — Silver, 1 oz. ; tin, 1 oz. Silver Solder, for Placed Metal. — Fine silver, 1 oz. ; brass, 10 dwts. Solders. — For Steel Joints. Silver, 19 parts ; copper, 1 part ; brass, 2 parts ; melt all together. Hard Solder. — Copper, 2 parts ; zinc, 1 part ; melt together. For Gold. — 1. Silver, 7 parts ; cop- per, 1 part, with borax. 2. Gold, 2 parts; silver, 1 part; copper, 1 part. 3. Gold, 3 parts ; silver, 3 parts ; copper, 1 part ; zinc, i 151 -WATCHMAKERS, JEWELLERS, kC, RECEIPTS. part. For Stiver. — Silver, 2 parts ; brass, 1 part, with borax ; or, silver, 4 parts ; brass, 3 parts ; zinc, ]\ part, with borax For jSrass.— Copper, 3 parts ; zinc, 1 part, with borax For Flatina. — Gold, with borax. For Iron. — The best solder for iron is good tougli brass, with a little borax. For Copper.— Bt&ss, 6 parts ; zinc, 1 part ; tin, 1 part ; melt all together, mix well, and pour out to cool. Cold Solders. — 1. Copper, 24.24 parts ; silver, 27.57 parts ; gold, 48.19 parts. 2. Enamel Solder. — Copper, 25 parts ; silver, 7.07 parts ; gold, 67.93 parts. 3. Copper, 26.25 parts ; zinc, 625 parts; silver, 31.25 parts; gold, 36.25 parts. 4. Fnamel Solder. — Silver, 19.57 parts ; gold, 80.43 parts. Solder. — For 22 carat gold. — Gold of 22 carats, 1 dwt. ; silver, 2 gr. ; copper, 1 gr. For 18 carat gold. — Gold, of 18 carats, I dwt \ silver, 2 gr. ; copper, 1 gr. For cheaj/er gold. — Gold, 1 dwt. ; silver, 10 gr. ; copper, 8 gr. Cheaper still. — Fine gold, 1 dwt. ; silver, 1 dwt. ; copper, 1 dwt. Silver Solders — 1. {hard.) Copper, 30 parts; zinc, 12.85 parts ; silver, 57.15 parts. 2 Copper, 23.33 parts; zinc, 10.00 parts; silver. 66.67 parts, 4. Copper, 26.66 parts; zinc, 10,00 parts; silver, 63.34 parts. 4 (so/?.) Copper, 14.75 parts; zinc, 8.20 parts; silver, 77.05 parts. 5 Copper, 22.34 parts; zinc, 10.48 parts; sil- ver, 67.18 parts. 6. Tin, 63.00 parts ; lead, 37 parts. Colored Gold. — 1. Full red gold. — Gold, 5 dwt. ; copper, 5 dwt. 2. Fed gold. — Gold, 10 dwt. ; silver, 1 dwt. ; copper. 4 dwt. 3. (rreen Gold. — Gold, 5 dwt.; silver, 21 gr. 4. Gray gold. — Gold, 3 dwt. 15 gr. ; silver, 1 dwt. 9 gr. 5. Blue gold. — Gold, 5 dwt. ; steel filingr), 5 dwt. 6, Atitigue gold, greenish-yellow color. — Gold, 18 dwt. 9 gr. ; silver, 21 gr. ; copper, 18 gr. These all require to be submitted to the process of wet-coloring. 7. Factitious gold, very bright.— Confer, 16 parts; platina, 7 parts ; zinc, 1 part; fused together. Alloys for Gold. — 1. Red gold — Copper, 66.67 parts; gold, 33.33 parts. 2. Yellow ^oW.— Copper, 12.50 parts; silver, 37.50 parts; gold, 50 parts. 3. Gretn gold.— Silver, 25 parts; gold, 75 parts. 4. Yellow gold.— SWycr, 66.67 parts ; gold, 33.33 parts. 5. Gray gold. — Silver, 5.89 parts ; go'd, 88.23 parts ; iron, 5.89 parts. 6. Dentistif gold. — Silver, 8.34 parts ; platinum, 66.67 parts ; gold, 24.29 parts. 7. English gold coin. — Copper, 8.34 parts ; gold, 91.66 parts. American gold coin. — Copper, 10 parts; gold, 90 parts. French gold coin same as American. Alloys for Silver Coin and Plate. — 1 Engli.ih standardx.—' Copper, 7.50 parts; silver, 92.50 parts. 2. American ditto. — Cop- per, 10 parts ; silver, 90 parts. French, the .same. Gilding Metal for common jew.;llery is made by mixing 4 parts copper with one of calamine brads. Sometimes 1 lb. copper, with 6 oz. of brass. Dentihts' Plate. — No. 1 Gold, 20 dwts. ; silver, 1 dwt. ; copper, 2 dwts. 2. Gold, 21 , silver, 2; copper, 1. Jewellkhs' Soldekinu Fli'id. — .Muriatic acid, J pt. ; grain zinc, 1^ oz. Dissolve, and add a little common solder anl 8al-ammhinged into cold water ; this gives them a beautiful high color. Different hues may be had by a variation in the mixture. For Red Gold. — To 4 oz. melted 3ellow wax, add, in fine powder, 1^ oz. of red ochre ; li oz. verdigris, calcined till it yields no fumes ; and ^ oz. of calcined borax. Mix them well together. Dissolve either of above mixtures in water, as the color is wanted, and use as required. Gold is taken from the surface of silver by spreading over it a paste made of powdered sal-ammoniac, with aquafortis, and heat- ing it till the matter smokes, and it is nearly dry ; when the gold may be separated by rubbing it with a scratch brush. Moulds and Dies. — Copper, zinc, and silver in equal proportions; melt together under a coat of powdered charcoal, and mould into the form you desire. Bring them to nearly a white heat, and lay on the thing you would take the impression of, press with sufficient force, and you will get a perfect and beautiful impression. Polishing Powder for Gold and Silver. — Rock alum burnt and finely powdered, 5 parts ; levigated chalk, 1 part. Mix ; apply with a dry brush. Silver-Plating Flcid. — Dissolve 1 ounce of nitrate of silver, in crystals, in 12 ounces of soft water ; then dissolve in the water 2 oz. cynnuret of potash ; shake the whole together, and let it stand till it becomes clear. Have ready some half-ounce vials, and fill half full of Paris white, or fine whiting ; and then fill up the bottles with the liquor, and it is ready for use. Tlie whiting does not increase the coating powder ; it only helps to clean the articles, and save the silver fluid by half filling the bottles. Jewellers' Armenian Cement. — Isinglass soaked in water and dissolved in spirit, 2 oz. (thick) ; dissolve in this 10 grs. of very pale gum ammonia (in tears) by rubbing them together ; then adii 6 large tears of gum mastic, dissolved in the least possible quantity of rectified spirit. When carefully made, this cement resists moisture and dries colorless. Keep in a closely stopj)ed phial. Jevvkllehs' Turkish Cesient. — Put into a bottle 2 oz. of isinglass and 1 oz. of the best gum arable; cover them with proof s[iirits, cork loos«ly, and place the bottle in a vessel of water, and boil it till a thorough solution is effected ; then strain for use ; best cement known. Revh'b for Old Jewellery. — Dissolve sal-ammoniac in urine and put the jewellery in it for a short time ; then take it out, and rub with chamois leather, and it will appear equal to new To Recover Gold from Gilt Metal. — Take a solution of borax water, apply to the gilt surface, and s[irinkle over it some finely powdered sulphur; make tlie article red hot, and (piench it in water ; then scrape off the gold, and recover it by means of lead. To Separate Gtolu and Silver from Lace, &c. — Cut in jiicces the gold or siItit lace, tie it tightly, and boil it m soap lye till tho size ajipears diminished ; take the cloth out of the li, RECEIPTS. Kcstitien's Metal for Tinninr.— Malleable iron, 1 lb . beat to ■whiteness ; add 5 oz. regulus of antimony, and Molucca tin, 24 lbs Galvanizing Iron— The iron plates are first immersed in a cleansing bath ot equal parts of sulphuric or muriatic acid and water used warm ; they are then scrubbed with emery or sand to clean them thoroughly and detach all scales if any are left; after ■which they are immersed in a " preparing bath" of equal parts of saturated solutions of chloride of zinc and chloride of ammonium, from which bath they are directly transferred to the fluid " metal- he bath," consisting, bv weight, of 340 lbs. zinc to 106 lbs. of mer- cury to which are added from 5 to 6 oz. of sodium. As soon as the iron has attained the temperature of this hot fluid bath, which is 680 ® Fahr it may be removed, and will then be found tho- roughly coated with zinc. A little tallow on the surface of the metallic bath will prevent oxidation. Paste for Cleaning Metals.— Take oxalic and, 1 part; rotten- stone, 6 parts ; mix, with equal parts of tram oil and spirits of tur- pentine, to a paste. . To Prevent Iron or Steel from Rusting.— Warm your iron or steel till you cannot bear your hand on it without burning your- self then rub it with new and clean white wax. Put it again to the 'fire till it has soaked in the wax. When done, rub it over with a piece of serge. This prevents the metal from rusting afterwards. Bronzing Liqctds for Tin Castings.— Wash them over, after being well cleaned and wiped, with a solution of 1 part of sulphate ofirSnand 1 of sulphate of copper, in 20 parts of water • after- wards, with a solution of 4 parts verdigris in 11 of distilled vine- gar ; leave for an hour to dry and then polish with a soft brush and colcothar. ^. , . , i v-* /• j Fancy Colors'on Metals.— 1 . Dissolve 4 oz. hypo-sulphite of soda in U pts of water, and then add a solution of 1 oz. acetate of lead in l"oz of water. Articles to be colored are placed in the mixture, Avhich is then gradually heated to the boiling point. This will give iron the color of blue steel, zinc becomes bronze, and copper or brass becomes, successively, yellowish, red, scarlet, deep blue, light blue, bluish white, and finally white, with a tinge of rose. 2. By replacing the acetate of lead in the solution by sulphate of cop- per, brass becomes, first, of a fine rosy tint, then green, and lastly, of an irridcscent brown color. mu .• i„„ * Coating Iron Castings with Gold on Silver.— The articles to be elided are well cleaned and boiled in a porcelain vessel, together with 12 parts of mercury, 1 of zinc. 2 of iron vitriol, 1^ of muriatic acid of 1.2 specific gravity, and 12 parts of water ; la a -hort time a layer of mercury will deposit upon the iron, and upon ■his the gold amalgam maybe uniformly distributed. Iron to be 'ilvered 13 first provided with a coating of copper, upon W'hich the silver is api)licd either by means of amalgam or silver leaf. BiuNswicK Black for Guates, &c.-AsphaUum 5 lbs. ; melt, and add boiled oil, 2 lbs. ; spirits ot turpentine, 1 gal. Mix. HuoNZE Paint kor Iron —Ivory black, 1 oz. ; chrome vollow, 1 oz. ; chrome green, 2 Ib.s. ; mix with raw linseed oil, addmg a lillle japan to dry it, and you have a very nice bronze green, li desired, gold bronze may be put on the i-romnien' parts, as on the MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, AC, RECEIPTS. 187 tips or edges of an iroa railing, when the paint is «o< quit* dry, using a piece of velvet or plush to rub on the bronze. Bluing on Revolvers and Gdn Barrels is performed by simply lieating the piece to be blued m powdered charcoal over afire Until the desired color is obtained. Browning for Gdn Barrels.— Spirits of nitre, 1 lb. ; alcohol, 1 lb. ; corrosive sublimate, 1 oz. ; mix in a bottle, and cork for use. Directions : polish the barrel perfect ; then rub it with quick lime with a cloth, which removes grease and dirt; now apply the browning fluid with a clean white cloth, apply one coat, and set it in a warm dark place for from 10 to 20 hours, until a red rust forms on It; then card it down with a gunmaker's card, and rub off with a clean cloth. Repeat the process if you wish a dark shade. Browning for Twist Barrels. — Spiritc of nitre, | oz. ; tincture of steel, I oz. ; or use the unmedicated tincture of iron if the tinc- ture of steel cannot be obtained ; black brimstone, i oz. : blue vitriol, i oz., corrosive sublimate, J oz. ; nitric acid, 1 dram; copperas, i oz ; mis with IJ pints rain water, and bottle for use This is to be applietl the same as the first ; it causes the twist of the barrel to be visible after application, a quality which the other liquid does not possess. Browning Compositions for Gdn Barrels. — 1. Blue vitriol, 4 oz ; tincture of muriate of iron, 2 oz. ; water, 1 qt. ; dissolve, and add aquafortis and sweet spirits of nitre, of each, 1 oz. 2. Blue vitriol and sweet spirits of nitre, of each 1 oz. ; aquafortis, I oz. ; water, 1 pint. To be used in the same manner as previously described in this work. Varnish and Polish for Gcn Stocks. — Gum shellac, 10 oz. ; gum sandarach, 1 oz. ; Venice turpentine, 1 dr. ; 98 percent, alcohol, 1 gal. ; shake the jug occasionally for a day or two, and it is ready for use. Apply a few coats of this to your gun stocks, polish by rubbing smooth, and your work is complete. Brass for Heavy Castings. — Copper, 6 to 7 parts; tin, 1 part; zinc, 1 part. Yellow Brass (/or casting). — 1. Copper, 61.6 parts ; zinc, 35.3 parts; lead, 2.9 parts; tin, 0.2 parts. 2. Brass of Jemappes. — Copper, 64.6 parts; zinc, 33.7 parts; lead, 1.4 parts; tin, 0.2 parts. 3. Sheet Brass oj Slolberg near Aix la Chapelle. — Copper, 64.8 parts ; zinc, 32. S parts ; lead, 2.0 parts ; tin, 0.4 parts. 4. D'Arcets Brass for Gilding. — Copper, 63 70 parts ; zinc, 33.55 parts ; lead, 0.25 parte; tin, 2.50 parts. 5. Another. — Copper, 64.45 parts ; zinc, 32.4^ parte ; lead, 2.86 parts ; tin, 0.25 parts. 6. Sheet Brass of Romilhj. — Copper, 70.1 parts ; zinc, 29.9 parts. 7. English Brass TFjre.— Copper, 70.29 parts; zinc, 29.26 parts; lead, 0.28 parts; tin, O.l? parts. 8. Augsburg Brass Wire. — Copper, 71.89 parts; zinc, 27.63 parts, tin, 0.85 parts. Red Brass, for Gilt Articles. — 1. Copper, 82.0 parts; zinc, 18.0 parts; lead, l.fi parts; tin, 3.0 parts. 2. Another. — Copper, 82 i^arts; zinc, 18 parts; lead, C pr.rt: ; tin, 1 part. 3. Another. — Copper, 82.3 parts; zinC; 17.j parts; tin, 0.2 parts. 4. French Tombac Jor Sword Handles. — Copper, 80 parts; zinc, 17 parts; tin, fi parte. 5. For Parisian Ornaments.— CopY>^t, 85 parts ; zinc, 15 parte J tiD; a trace. 6. Used for German Ornaments.— Co^'ptr^ 85,3 188 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, AC, RECEIPTS. parts ; ziuc, 14.7 parts. 7. Chrysochalk.— Cop-par, 90.0 parts ; ziac, 7.9 parts; lead, 1.6 parts. 8. Red Tombac from Paris. — Copper, 92 parts ; zinc, 8 parts. Compositions. — 1. For strong pumps, ^-c. — Copper. 1 lb. ; zinc, ^ oz. ; tin, 1^ oz. 2. For toothed icheels. — Copper, 1 lb. ; brass, 2 oz. ; tin, 2 oz. 3. Copper, 1 lb. ; brass, 2 oz. ; tin, Ij oz. 4. For turn- ing work. — Copper, 1 lb.; brass, 1^ oz. ; tin, 2 oz. 5. For nuts of coarse threads and bearings. — Copper, 1 lb. ; brass, 1^ oz, ; tin, 2{ oz. 6. For bearings to sustain great weights. — Copper, 1 lb. ; zinc, ^ oz.; tin, 2i oz. 7. Pewterers' temper. — Tin, 2 lbs. ; copper, 1 lb. Used to add in small quantities to tin. 8. llard bearings for machinery. — Copper, 1 lb, \ tin, 2 oz. 9. Very hard rfi«o.— Copper, 1 lb.: tin, 2 J oz. ANTi-t RicTioN Metal. — 1. Copper, 4 lbs. ; regains of antimony, 8 lbs. ; Banca tin, 96 lbs. 2. Grain zinc, Ih lbs. ; ])iirifipd zinc, 1% lbs.; antimony, 1 lb. 3. Zinc, 17 parts; copper, 1 part; anti- mony, \h parts. This possesses unsurpassable anti-friction quali- ties, and does not require the protection of outer casings of a harder fnetal. 4. Block tin, 8 lbs, ; antimony, 2 lbs. ; coi)per, 1 lb. If the metal be too hard, it may be softened by adding some lead. 5, The best alloy for journal boxes is composed of copper, 24 lbs, ; tin, 24 lbs, ; and antimony, Bibs, Melt the copper tirst, then add the tin, and lastly the antimony. It should be first run into ingots, then melted, and cast in the form required for the bo.^es. 6. Mell in a crucible 1^ lbs. of copper, and, while the cojiper is melting melt in a ladle 25 lbs. of tin and 3 of antimony, nearly red hot, pour the two together, and stV until nearly cool. This m;ikes the finest kind of lining metal. 7. Very cheap Lead, 100 lbs.; anti- mony, 15 lbs. This costs about 10 cents per lb. Yellow Brass for Turning. -(Common article.)-Copper, 20 lbs. ; zinc, 10 lbs. ; lead, 4 oz. Red Brass, free, for Turning. — Copper, 160 lbs. ; zinc, 50 lbs. ; lead, 10 lbs. ; antimony, 44 oz. Another Brass fob Turning. — Copper, 32 lbs.; zinc, 10 lbs.; lead, 1 lb. Best Red Brass, for Fine Castings. — Copper, 24 lbs. ; zinc, 5 lbs. ; bismuth, 1 oz. Put in the bismuth Inst before pouring off. Bronze Metal. — Cojjper, 7 lbs ; zinc, 3 lbs.; tin, 2 lbs. Bronze Metal. — Copper, 1 lb ; zinc, 12 lbs. ; tin, 8 lbs. Bell Mktal, FOR LARflB Bells. — Copper, 100 lbs.; tin, from 20 to 25 lbs. Bell Metal for small Bells.— Copper, 3 Ibg. ; tin, 1 lb. Cock Mktal. — Copper, 20 lbs. ; lead, 8 lbs. ; litharge, 1 oz. ; an- timony, 3 oz. Hardening fop. Britannia.— fTo be mixed separately from the other ingredients.) — (Jopper, 2 lbs. ; tin, 1 lb. Good Britannia Mktal.— Tin, 150 lbs. ; copper, 3 lbs. ; anti- mony, 10 lbs Britannia Metal, 2d qialitt.— Tin, 140 lbs.; copper, Slbs. ; antimony, 9 lbs. Britannia Metal, FOR Casting.- Tin, 210 lbs.; copper, 4 lbs,; Hjitimoiiy, 12 lbs. MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 189 BSitannia Metal, for Spinning. — Tin, 100 lbs. ; Britannia har- dening, 4 lbs. ; antimony, 4 lbs. White Solder, for raised Britannia Ware.— Tin, 100 lbs. ; copper, 3 oz., to make it free ; and lead, 3 oz. Britannia Metal, for Registers. — Tin, 100 lbs. ; hardening, 8 lbs. ; antimony, 8 lbs. Best Britannia for Spouts. — Tin, 140 lbs. ; copper, 3 lbs. ; anti- mony, 6 lbs. Best Britannia for Spoons. — Tin, 100 lbs. ; hardening, 5 lbs. ; antimony, 10 lbs. Best Britannia for Handles. — Tin, 140 lbs. ; copper, 2 lbs. ; an- timony, 5 lbs. BestBritannia, FOR Lamps, Pillars, AND Spouts. — Tin, 300 lbs.; copper, 4 lbs. ; antimony, 15 lbs. Casting. — Tin, 100 lbs. ; hardening, 5 lbs. ; antimony, 5 lbs. Lining Metal for Boxes of Railroad Cars. — Mix tin, 24 lbs. ; copper, 4 lbs. ; antimony, 8 lbs. ; (for a hardening), then add tin, 72 lbs. Fine Silver Colored Metal. — Tin, 100 lbs. ; antimony, 8 lbs. copper, 4 lbs. ; bismuth, 1 lb. German Silver, First Quality, for Casting. — Copper, 50 lbs. zinc, 25 lbs. ; nickel, 25 lbs. German Sil\'er, Second Quality, for Casting. — Copper, 50 lbs. zinc, 20 lbs. ; nickel (best pulverized), 10 lbs. German Silver, for Rolling.— Copper, 60 lbs. ; zinc, 20 lbs. nickel, 25 lbs. German Silver, for Bells, and other Castings. — Copper, 60 jbs. ; zinc, 20 lbs. ; nickel, 20 lbs. ; lead, 3 lbs. ; iron (that oi tin ,'>late being best), 2 lbs. Imitation of Silver. — Tin, 3 oz. ; copper, 4 lbs. Pinchbeck. — Copper, 5 lbs. ; zinc, 1 lb. Tombac. — Copper, 16 lbs. ; tin, lib. ; zinc, 1 lb. Red Tombac. — Copper, 10 lbs. ; zinc. 1 lb.' Hard White Metal. — Sheet brass, 32 oz. ; lead, 2 oz. ; tin, 2 oz. ; zinc, 1 oz. JIetal for taking Impressions. — Lead, 3 lbs. ; tin, 2 lbs. ; bis- muth, 5 lbs. Spanish Tutania. — Iron or steel, 8 oz. ; antimony, 16 oz. ; nitre, 3 oz. Melt and harden 8 oz. tin with 1 oz. of the above com- pound. Rivet Metal. — Copper, 32 oz. ; tin, 2 oz. ; zinc, 1 oz. HivET Metal, for Hose. — Tin, 64 lbs. ; copper, 1 lb. Fusible Alloy. — (Which melts in boiling water.) — Bismuth, 8 oz. ; tin, 3 oz. ; lead, 5 oz. Fusible Alloy, for Sil\tering Glass. — Tin, 6 oz. ; lead, 10 oz. ; bitmuth, 21 oz. ; mercury, a small quantity. Best Soft Solder, for Cast Britannia Ware. — Tin, 8 lbs.; lead, 5 lbs. Brass Solder.— 1. Copper, 61.25 parts ; zinc, 38.75 parts ; 2. (Yellow and easily fusible) copper, 45 parts ; zinc, 55 parts ; 3. (White) copper, 57.41 parts; tin, 14.60 parts; zinc, 27.99 parts, Si-ELiER Solder. Equal parts copper and zinc. Solder for Copper. — Copper, 10 lbs. ; zinc, 9 lbs. 190 MACHI^■ISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. Yellow Solder, FOR Brass ok eToppBR.— Copjier, 32 lbs. ; »inc, 29 lbs.; tin, 1 lb. . ^ ,v * o Black Solder.— Copper, 2 lbs. ; zmc, 3_lbs ; tin, 2 oz. Black Solder.— Sheet brass, 20 lbs. ; tin, 6 lbs ; zinc, lib. Pewterers' Soft Solders.— 1. Bismuth, 2 ; lead, 4 ; tin, 3 parts. 2. Bismuth, 1 ; lead, 1 ; tin, 2 parts Plumbers' Solder.— Lead, 3 parts ; tin, 1 part „ ., , . ^ Solder —For lead, the solder is one part tin, 1 to 2 of lead ; for tin 1 to 2 parts tin to one of lead ; for zmc, 1 part tin to 1 to 2 of lead ; fox pewter, 1 part tin to 1 of lead, and 1 to 2 parts ot bis- ™ The surfaces to be joined are made perfectly clean and smooth, and then covered with sal-ammoniac, or resin, or both ; the solder is then applied, being melted in, and smoothed over by the solder- ^°?'o'"s°oldbr Iron to steel, or either to Brass.— Tin 3 parts ; copper, 39i parts ; zinc, 7^ parts. When applied ma molten state it will firmly unite the metals first named to each other. Coppersmiths' SoLDBR.-Tin, 2 parts; lead, 1 part. When the copper is thick, heat it by a naked fire ; if thin, use a tinned cop- ner tool Use muriate or chloride of zmc, or resin, as a flux The same solder will do for iron, cast iron, or steel; if thicS, heat by a naked fire, or immerse in the solder. Cold Brazing, without a fire or Lamp.-FIuohc acid, i oz^; oxy- TTinriatic acid i oz. ; mix in a lead bottle. Put a chalk mark each S where you want to braze. This mixture will keep about 6 ""pLOMBrRS^So^LDER'-Bismuth, 1 part; lead, 5 parts ; tin. 3 parts is a first class composition. ,, , • i Cold Soldering without fire or ^amp.-Bismuth, i oz. ; quick- silver, i oz.; block tin filings, 1 oz. ; spirits salts, 1 oz., mixed together New AND BEAUTIFUL ALLOYS.-Copper, 69^8 parts ; nickel, 19,8 Darts • zinc 5.5 parts ; cadmium, 4.7 parts ; used for spoons, forks, &c. Another Copper, 89.3 parts ; aluminum, 10.5 parts. Oreiderexem- uTngGold Govyk 79.7 parts ; zinc, 83.05 parts ; nickel, 6.09 parts, with a trace of iron and tin. ■ i i o, c ^\r.^ot^±. Chinese White Coi-PER.-Copper, 40.4; nickel, 31.6 ; zmc, 25.4; and iron, 2.6 parts. . . « x Bath Metal.— Brass, 32 parts ; zinc, 9 parts. Speculum METAL.-Copper, 6 ; tin, 2 ; and arsemc, 1 part. Or, ^Tr^^aSnia fe\L^°Bra;s,?,Ss ; tin, 4 parts ; when fused add bifmuth, 4 ; and antimony, 4 parts. This composition is added at discretion to melted tin. oq ik= Superior Bell METAL.-Copper, 100 lbs. ; tin, 23 lbs. Electrum -Copper, 8; nickel, 4; zinc, 4 I'^rts. This compound is unS'irpas" ed for ease of work^anship and beauty of appearance. TiNMANs' Solder.— Lead, 1 ; tm, 1 part. Pkwteherh' Solder— Tin, 2; lead, 1 part. Common Pewter.— Tin, 4 : lead, 1 part. Best PEwxER.-Tin, 100; antimony, 17 parts. Queen's Metal.-TIu, 9 ; antimony, 1 ; bismuth, 1 , lead, 1 part, WATgu-MAKKUB' BK'Asa.— Copper, 1 part ; zmc, 2 paria. MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 19l A. Metal that expands in Cooling.— Lead, 9 ; antimony, 2 , bismuth, 1 part. This metal is very useful in filling small defects in iron eastings, &«. German Brass. — Copper, 1 part ; zinc, 1 part. Albata Metal. — Nickel, 3 to 4 parts ; copper, 20 parts ; zinc, 16 parts. Used for plated goods. British Plate. — Nickel, 5 to 6 parts ; copper, 20 parts ; zinc, 8 to 10 parts. Used for plated goods. Chantey's Hard Allot. — Copper, 1 lb. ; zinc, 2J oz. ; tin, 2J oz. Razors as hard as tempered steel have been made from this alloy. Hard White Metal fob Buttons. — Brass, 1 lb. ; zinc, 2 oz. ; tin, 1 oz. Birmingham Platin. — Copper, 8 parts ; zinc, 5 parts. German Silver. — 1. Copper, 40.62 parts ; zinc, 43.76 parts ; nickel, 15.62 parts. 2. Copper, 41.47 parts ; zinc, 26.08 parts ; nickel, 32.45 parts. 3. Copper, 55.55 parts ; zinc, 5.55 parts ; nickel, 38.90 parts. 4. Copper, 53.40 parts; zinc, 29.10 parts; nickel, 17.50 parts. 5. (^Alfenide contains a trace of iron) — Copper, 59.60 parts ; zinc, 30.30 parts ; nickel, 10.10 parts. Britannia Metal. — 1. Copper 0.30 parts; tin, 89.70 parts ; zinc, 0.30 parts ; antimony, 9.70 parts. 2. Copper, 1.85 parts; tin, 81.64 parts ; antimony, 16.51 parts. 3. Copper, 0.91 parts ; tin, 89,97 parts; antimony, 9.12 parts. 4. Tin, 90.00 parts; antimony, 10 ])arts. 5. Copper, 1.78 parts ; tin, 89.30 parts ; antimony, 7.14 ])arts ; bismuth, 1.78 parts. Gun Metal. — Copper, 90 parts ; tin, 10 parts. Melting Point of Metals. — Iron fuses at 2787° Fahr. ; gold at '2016=*; silver, 1873"=; copper, 1996°; zinc, 773°; antimony, 809 ® ; bismuth, 476 to 507 ■= ; nickel, 630 ® ; tin, 442 ® ; lead, 334=' ; mercury volatilizes at 670 ° . Cknese Gong Metal. — Copper, 78.00 parts ; tin, 22.00. Alloy for Gun Mountings. — Copper, 80 parts ; tin, 3 ; zinc, 17. White Metal for Table Bells. — Copper, 2.06 parts; tin, 97.31 parts; bismuth, 0.63 parts. Clock Bell Metal. — Copper, 75.19 parts, tin, 24.81 parts. Socket Metal for Locomotive Axle-trees. — 1. Copper, 86.03; tin, 13.97 ; 2. (French) Copper, 82 parts ; tin, 10 parts ; zinc, 8 parts ; 3. {Stephe7ison^s) Copper, 79 parts ; tin, 8 parts ; zinc, 5 parts; lead, 8 parts; 4. {Belgian) Copper, 89.02 parts; tin, 2.44 parts ; zinc, 7.76 parts ; iron, 0.78 parts; 5. (English) Copper, 73.96 parts ; tin, 9.49 parts ; zinc, 9.03 parts ; lead, 7.09 parts ; iron, 0.43 parts. Brass. — 1. Coppei-, 73 parts ; zinc, 27 parts ; 2. Copper, 65 parts; zinc, 35 parts ; 3. Copper, 70 parts ; zinc, 30 parts. Alloy for Mechanical Instruments. — Copper, 1 lb. ; tin, 1 oz. Malleable Brass.— 1. Copper, 70.10 parts ; zinc, 29.90 parts ; 2i (Superior) Copper, 60 parts; zinc; 40 parts. Button Makers' Metal.— 1. Copper, 43 parts ; zinc, 67 parts ; 2. Copper, 62.22 parts; tin, 2.78, parts ; zinc, 35 parts; 3. Copper, 58.94 parts ; tin, 5.28 parts ; zinc, 35.78 parts. Metal for Sliding Levers of Locomotives. — 1. Copper, 85.25 parts; tin, 12.75 parts; zinc, 2.00 parts ; 2. (Fenion's) Copper, 5.50 parts : tin. 14.50 parts \ zinc. 80 parts. 1S2 Machinists, engineers, &c., receipts. Alloy for Cylinders of Locomotives.— Copper, 88.63 parta ; tin, 2.38 parts ; zinc, 6.99 parts. Alloy for Stuffing Boxes of Locomotives.— Copper, 90.06 parts ; tin, 3.56 parts ; zinc, 6.38 parts. Amalgam for Mirrors.— 1. Tin, 70 parts ; mercury, 30 parts ; 2. {For curved mirrors) Tin, 80 parts ; mercury, 20 parts ; 3. Tin, 8.33 parts; lead, 8.34 parts; bismuth, 8.33 parts; mercury, 75 parts; 4. {For spherical mirrors) Bismutli, 80 parts ; mercury, 26 parts. Reflector Metal.— 1. (Duppler's)Zmc, 20 parts ; silver, 80 parts; 2. Copper, 66.22 parts ; tin, 33.11 parts ; arsenic, 0.67 parts ; 3. (Cooper's) Copper, 57.86 parts; tin, 27.28 parts; zinc, 3.30 parts ; arsenic, 1.65 parts; platinum, 9.91 parts; 4. Copper, 64 parts; tin, 32.00 parts; arsenic, 4.00 parts; 5. Copper, 82.18 parts; lead, 9.22 parts ; antimony, 8.60 parts ; 6. (Little's) Copper, 69.01 parts ; tin, 30.82 parts ; zinc, 2.44 parts ; arsenic, 1.83 parts. Metal for Gilt Wares.— 1. Copper, 78.47 parts ; (la, 2.87 parts; zinc, 17.23 parts; lead, 1.43 parts; 2. Copper, 64.43 parts; tin, 0.25 parts; zinc, 32.44 parts; lead, 2.86 parts ; 3. Copper, 72.43 parts; tin, 1.87 parts; zinc, 22.75 parts; lead, 2.96 parts; 4. Cop- per, 70.90 parts ; tin, 2.00 parts ; zinc, 24.05 parts ; lead, 3.05. SpcRions Silver Leaf.— Tin, 90.09 parts; zinc, 9.91 parts. Shot Metal.— 1. Lead, 97.06 parts ; arsenic, 2.93 parts; 2. Lead, 99.60 parts ; arsenic, 0.40 parts. BiSMDTH Solder.— Tin, 33.33 parts ; lead, 33.33 parts ; bismuth 33.34 parts. Glaziers' Solder.— Tin, 3 parts ; lead, 1 part. Amalgam for Electrical Machines.— 1. Tin, 25 parts; zinc, 25 parts ; mercury, 50 parts. 2. Tin, 11.11 parts ; zinc, 22.22 parts ; mercury, 66.07 parts. Type Metal. — 1. For sviallest and most brittle types. — Lead, 3 parts ; antimony, 1 part. 2. For small, hard, brittle types.— Lc&d, 4 parts ; antimony, 1 part. 3. For types of viedium size. — Lead, 5 parts ; antimony, 1 part. 4. For large types. — Lead, 6 parts ; anti- mony, 1 part. 5. For largest a?id softest types. — Lead, 7 parts ; antimonv, 1 part. In addition to lead and antimony, type metal also contains 4 to 8 per cent, of tin, and sometimes 1 to 2 percent. of copper. Stereotype, plates are made of lead, 20 parts ; anti- monv, 4 parts; tin, 1 part. Brass for Wire.— Copper, 34 parts ; calamine, 56 parts : mix. Britannia Metal.— 1. Tin, 82 parts; lead, 18 parts; brass, 5 parts; antimony, 5 parts; mix. 2. Brass, 1 part; antimony, 4 parts ; tin, 20 parts : mix. 3. Plate-brass, tin, bismuth, and anti- mony, of each equal parts. Add this mixtaire to melted tin until it acquires the proper color and linrdness. Bronze.- 1. Copper, S3 parts; zinc, 11 parts; tin, 4 parts; lead, 2 parts; mix. 2. C()pi>er, 14 jiarts ; melt, and add zinc, 6 parts; tin 4 parts ; mix. Ancient Bronze.— Copper, 100 parts ; lead and tin, each, 7 parts : mix. ' Alloy for Bronze Ornaments.— Copper, 82 parts; zinc, 18 parts ; tin, 3 parts ; lead, 3 parts ; mix. Beautiful Red Bhonzk Powder.- Sulphate of copper, 100 parts ; carbountc of tioda, 60 parts ; apply heat until they unite into a mass ; MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C,, RECEIPTS. 193 then cool, and add copper filings, 15 parts. Well mix, and keep them at a white beat for 20 minutes ; then cool, powder, wash, and dry. Bronzing Fluid for Guns. — Nitric acid, sp. gr. 1. 2 parts ; nitric ether, alcohol, muriate of iron, each 1 part : mix, then add sulphate of copper, 2 parts, dissolved in water, 10 parts. Cannon Metal. — Take tin, 10 parts ; copper, 90 parts : melt. Statuary Bronze. — 1. Copper, 88 parts; tin, 9 parts; zinc, 2 parts ; lead, 1 part. 2. Copper, 82^ parts ; tin, 5 parts ; zinc, 10^ parts; lead, 2 parts. 3. Copper, 90 parts; tin, 9 parts ; lead, I part. Bronze, fob Medals. — Copper, 89 parts ; tin, 8 parts ; zinc, 3 parts. Brass, for Heavy Work. — Copper, 100 parts ; tin, 15 parts, zinc, 15 parts. Another. — Copper, 112 parts ; tin, 13; zinc, 1. Brass, for Tubes. — Copper, 2 parts ; zinc, 1 part. Alloy, for Cymbals. — Copper, 80 ; tin, 20. Mirrors op Reflecting Telescopes. — Copper, 100 ; tiif, 50. White Argentan.— Copper, 8 parts ; nickel, 3 parts ; zinc, 35 parts. This beautiful composition is in imitation of silver. Chinese Silver. — Silver, 2.5; copper, 65.24; zinc, 19.52; cobalt of iron, 0.12 ; nickel, 13. Tutenag. — Copper, 8 ; nickel, 3 ; zinc, 5. Printing Characters.-1. Lead, 4; antimony, 2. 2. For stereo- type plates, lead, 25 parts; antimony, 4 parts; tin, 1 part. ' Fine White German Silver. — 1. For Castings. Lead, 3 parts; nickel, 20 parts; zinc, 20 parts; copper, 60 parts: mix. 2. For Rolling. Nickel, 5 parts ; zinc, 4 parts ; copper, 12 parts : mix. Imitation Platinum. — Melt together 8 parts brass and 5 parts of zinc. This alloy very closely resembles platinum. Imitation Gold. — Platina, 8 parts ; silver, 4 parts ; copper, 12 parts : melt all together. Imitation Silver. — Block-tin, 100 parts ; antimony, 8 parts ; bis- muth, I part ; copper, 4 parts : melt all together. Tombac, or Red Brass. — Melt together 8 parts of copper and 1 part of zinc. Parisian Bell-Metal. — Copper, 72 parts ; tin, 2Q^ parts ; iron, IJ parts. Used for the bells of small ornamental clocks. Bell-Metal. — 1. Copper, 25 parts ; tiiK 5 parts : mix. 2. Cop- per, 79 parts; tin, 26 parts: mix. 3. Copper, 78 parts ; tin, 22 parts : mix. Prince's Metal. — 1. Copper, 3 parts ; zinc, 1 part. 2. Brass, 8 parts ; zinc, 1 part. 3. Zinc and copper, equal parts : mix. Queen's Metal. — 1. Lead, 1 part; bismuth, 1 part; antimony, 1 part, ; tin, 9 parts : mix. 2. Tin, 9 parts ; bismuth, 1 part; lead, 2 parts ; antimony, 1 part : mix by melting. Brass. — Copper, 3 parts : melt, then add zinc, 1 part. Button-Makers' Fine Brass. — Brass, 8 parts ; zinc, 5 parts. Button-Makers' Common Brass. — ^Button brass, 6 parts ; tin, 1 part ; lead, 1 part : mix. Organ Pipes consist of lead alloyed with about half its quantity of tin to harden it. The mottled or crystalline appearance so much admired shows an abundance of tin. 194 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &0,, RECEIPTS' Baron Wbtterstbdts Patent Shbathino for ships consists of lead, with from 2 to 8 per cent of antimony; about 3 per cent, is the usual quantity. The alloy is rolled into sheets. Lead Shot are cast by letting the metal run through a narrow slit into a species of colander at the top of a lofty tower ; the metal escapes in drops, which, for the most part, assume the spherical form before they reach the tank of water into which they fall at the foot of the tower, and this prevents their being bruised. They are afterwards riddled or sifted lor size, and afterwards churned in a barrel with black lead. Metal for Anatomical iNJECTioNS.-Tin, 16.41 parts t lead, 9.27 parts; bismuth, 27.81 parts; mercury, 46.41 parts. Yellow Dipping Metal. — Copper, 32 lbs ; 6 to 7 oz. zinc to every lb. of copper. Lead Fip^ are now manufactured byhydraulic pressure, instead of by the old process of drawing out on triblets. MuNTZ Metal FOR Ships. — Best selected copper, 60 parts: best zinc, 40 parts. Melt together in the usual manner, and roll into sheets of suitable thickness. This composition resists oxidation from •xposure to sea-water, and prevents the adhesion of barna- cles. Acid Bronze.— Cobalt, 4 lbs. ; pulverize ; sift through a fine sieve ; put in a stone pot ; add ^ gal. nitric acid, a little at a time, stirring frequently for 24 hours ; then add about 5 gals, muriatic acid, or, until the work comes out a dark brown. Alkali Bronze. — Dissolve 5 lbs. nitrate of copper in 3 gals. water, with 5 lbs. pearlash ; add 1 or 2 pints potash water ; then add from 2 to 3 lbs. sal-ammoniac, or, until the work comes out the required color. Coatinq Dip.— Sulphate of zinc, 8 lbs. ; oil of vitriol, 5 gals. ; aqua fortis, f gal. To use, warm up scalding hot. To Clean and Polish Brass. — Wash with alum boiled in strong; lye, in the proportion of an ounce to a pint ; afterwards rub with strong tripoli. Not to be uaed on gilt or lacquered work . Ormolu Coloring. — Alum, 30 parts ; nitrateofpotassa, 30 parts; red ochre, 30 parts ; sulphate of zinc, 8 parts ; common salt, 1 part; sulphate of iron, 1 part. It is applied with a soft brush. The articles jire placed over a clear charcoal fire until the salts, melted and dried, assume a brown aspect. They are then suddenly cooled in nitric acid water containing 3 per cent, of hydrochloric acid ; after- wards washed in abundance of water and dried in sawdust. Quick Bright Dipping Acid, for Brass which has been Ormo- LUKD. — Sulphuric Acid, 1 gal. ; nitric acid, 1 gal. Dipping Acid.— Sulphuric acid, 12 lbs. ; nitric acid, 1 pint; nitre, 4 lbs. ; soot, 2 handfuls ; brimstone. 2 oz. Pulverize the brimstone, and soak it in water an hour. Add the nitric acid last. Good Dipping Acid for Cast Brass.— Sulphuric acid, 1 qt. ; nit*e, 1 qt. ; water, 1 qt. A little muriatic acid may be added or omitted. Ormolu Dipping Acid, for Sheet Brass. — Sulphuric acid 2 gals. ; nitric acid, 1 pt. ; muriatic acid, 1 pt. ; nitre 12 lbs. Put in the muriatic acid lust, a little at a time, and stir the mixture with o •tick. MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, iC, RECEIPTS, 195 Dipping Acid. — Sulphuric acid, 4 gals ; nitric acid, 2 gals ; satu- rated solution of sulphate of iron (copperas), 1 pint; solution of sulphate of copper, 1 qt. Ormolu Dipping Acid, for Sheet or Cast Brass. — Sulphuric acid, I gal. ; sal ammoniac, 1 oz. , sulphur (in flour), 1 oz. ; blue vitriol,! oz. ; saturated solution of zinc in nitric acid, mixed with an equal quantity of sulphuric acid, 1 gal. To Prepare Brass Work for Ormolu Dipping. — If the work is oily, boil it in lye ; and if it is finished work, filed or turned, dip it in old acid, and it is then ready to be ormolued ; but if it is un- finished, and free from oil, pickle it in strong sulphuric acid, dip in purfa nitric acid, and then in the old acid, after which it will be ready- for ormoluing. To Repair Old Nitrio Acid Ormolu Dips. — If the work after dipping appears coarse and spotted, add vitriol till it answers the purpose. If the work after dipping appears too smooth, add muri- atic acid and nitre till it gives the right appearance. The other ormolu dips should be repaired according to the receipts, putting in the proper ingredients to strengthen them. They should not be allowed to settle, but should be stirred often while using. Tinning Acid, for Brass or Zinc — Muriatic acid, 1 qt. ; zinc, 6 oz. To a solution of this, add water, 1 qt. ; sal-ammoniac, 2 oz. Vinegar Bronze, for Brass. — Vinegar, 10 gals. ; blue vitriol, 3 lbs. ; muriatic acid, 3 lbs. ; corrosive sublimate, 4 grs. ; sal-ammo- niac, 2 lbs. ; alum, 8 oz. Directions for making Lacquer. — Mix the ingredients, and let the vessel containing them stand in the sun, or in a place slightly warmed, three or four days, shaking it frequently till the gum is dissolved, after which let it settle from twenty-four to forty-eight hours, when the clear liquor may be poured off for use. Pul- verized glass is sometimes used, in making lacquer, to carry down the impurities. Lacquer for Dipped Brass. — Alcohol, proof specific gravity not less than 95-100th3, 2 gals. ; seed lac, 1 lb. ; gum copal, 1 oz. ; English saffron, 1 oz. ; annotto, 1 oz. Lacquer for Bronzed Brass. — To one pint of the above lacquer, add gamboge, 1 oz. ; and, after mixing it, add an equal quantity of the first lacquer. Deep Gold-colored Lacquer. — Best alcohol, 40 oz. ; Spanish Annotto, 8 grs. ; turmeric, 2 drs. ; shellac, I oz. ; red sanders, 12 grs. ; when dissolved, add spirits of turpentine, 30 drops. Deep Gold-colored Lacquer for Brass not Dipped. — Alcohol, 4 gals. ; turmeric, 3 lbs. ; gamboge, 3 oz.'; gum sanderach, 7 lbs.; shellac, Ij lbs.; turpentine varnish, 1 pint. Gold-colored Lacquer, for Dipped Brass. — Alcohol, 36 oz. ; seed lac, 6 oz. ; amber, 2 oz. ; gum gutta, 2 oz, ; red sandal wood, 24 grs. ; dragon's blood, 60 grs. ; oriental saffron, 36 grs. ; pulve°- rized glass, 4 oz. Gold Lacquer, for Brass. — Seed lac, 6 oz. ; amber or copal, 2 j oz. ; best alcohol, 4 gals. ; pulverized glass, 4 oz. ; dragon's I blood, 40 grs. ; extract of red sandal wood obtained by water, 30 igrs. i96 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. . Lacquer for Dipped Brass.— Alcohol, 12 gals. : seed lac, 8 lbs. } turmeric, 1 lb. to a gallon of the above mixture ; Spanish saffron, 4 OK. The saffron is to be added for bronze work. Good Lacquer. — Alcohol, 8 oz. ; gamboge, 1 oz. ; shellac, 3 oz. ; annottOj 1 oz. ; solution of 3 oz. of seed lac in 1 pint of alcohol ; when dissolved, add i oz. Venice turpentine, i oz. dragon's blood, will make it dark ; keep it in a warm place four or five days. To Bronze Iron Castings.— Cleanse thoroughly, and afterwards immerse in a solution of sulphate of copper, when the castings will acquire a coat of the latter metal. They must be then washed in water. Antique Bronzk Paint. — Sal-ammoniac, 1 oz. ; cream tartar, 3 oz. ; eommon salt, 6 oz. Dissolve in 1 pint hot water, then add 2 oz. of nitrate of copper dissolved in J pint water, mix well, and apply it repeatedly to the article, in a damp situation, with a brush. Gilders Pickle. — Alum and common salt, each, 1 oz. ; nitre, 2 oz. ; dissolved in water, l pt. Used to impart a rich yellow color to gold surfaces. It is best used largely diluted with water. To Silver Ivort. — Pound a small piece of nitrate of silver in a mortar, add soft water to it, mix them well together, and keep in vial for use. When you wish to silver any article, immerse it in this solution, let it remain till it turns of a deep yellow ; then place it in Clearwater, and expose it to the rays of the sun. If you wish to depicture a figure, name, or cipher, on your ivory, dip a camel'p- hair pencil in the solution, and draw the subject on the ivory. After it has turned a deep yellow, wash it well with water, and place it in the sunshine, occasionally wetting it with pure water. In a short time it will turn of a deep black^color, which, if well rubbed, will change to a brilliant silver. Pale Lacquer for Tin Plate. — Best alcohol, 8 oz. ; turmeric, 4 drs. ; hay saffron, 2 scs. ; dragon blood, 4 scs. ; red sanders, 1 sc. ; shellac, I oz. ; gum sanderach, 2 drs. ; gum mastic, 2 drs. ; Canada balsam, 2 drs. ; when dissolved, add spirits of turpentine, 80 drops. Red Lacquer for Brass. — Alcohol, 8 gals.; dragon's blood, 4 lbs. ; Spanish annotto, 12 lbs. ; gum sanderach, 13 lbs. ; turpentine, Igal. Pale Lacquer, for Brass. — Alcohol, 2 gals.; Cape aloes, cut small, 3 oz. ; pale shellac, 1 lb. ; gamboge. 1 oz. Bllt: Bronze on Copper. — Clean and polish well, then cover the surface with a fluid obtained by dissolving vermilion in a warm solution of sulphide of sodium, to which som« caustic potassa has been added. Application of Bronze Powders. — The proper way is to varni.^h the article and then dust the bronze powder over it, after the varnish is partially dried. Bronze Dip.— Sal-ammoniac, 1 oz. ; salt of sorrel (binoxolate of potash), i oz. dissolved in vinegar. Parisian Bronze Dip. — Sal-ammoniac, J oz. ; common salt, ) oz. ; spirits of hartshorn, 1 oz. dissolved in an English quart of, vinegar. A good result will be obtained by adding i oz. of sal- ammoniac, instead of the sjjirits of Lartshoru. Tlie piece of metal aiACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 19? being well cleaned is to bo rubbed with one of these solutions, then dried by friction with a fresh brush. Best Lacquer, for Brass. — Alcohol, 4 gals. ; shellac, 2 lbs. ; 'amber gum, 1 lb. ; copal, 20 oz. ; seed lac, 3 lbs. ; saffron, to color ; pulverized glass, 8 oz. Color for Lacqckr. — Alcohol, 1 qt. ; annotto, 4 oz. Gree\ Bhqxze Dip. — Wine rinegar, 2 qts. ; verditer green, 2 oz. ; sal-ammoniac, 1 oz. , salt, 2 oa. ; alum, ^ oz. ; French beri'ies, 8oz. ; boil the ingredients together. Aqua fortis Bronze Dip- — Nitric acid, 8 oz. ; muriatic acid, 1 qt. ; sal-ammoniac, 2 oz. ; alum, 1 oz. ; salt, 2 oz. Olive Bronze Dip, for Brass. — Nitric acid, 3 oz. ; muriatic acid, 2 oz. ; add titanium or palladium, when the metal is dissolved, add 2 gals, pure soft water to each pint of the solution. Brown Bronze Paint, for Copper Vessels —Tincture of steel, 4 oz. ; spirits of nitre, 4 oz. ; essence of iendi, 4 oz. ; blue vitriol, 1 oz. ; water, ^ pint. Mix in a bottle •, apply it with a fine brush, the vessel being full of boiling water ; varnish after the application of the bronze. Bronze for all kinds op Metal. — Muriate of ammonia (sal-am- moniac), 4 drs. : oxalic acid, 1 dr. ; vinegar, 1 pint. Dissolve the oxalic acid first; let the work be clean ; put on the bronze with a brush, repeating the operation as many times as may be neces- tnrj. Bronze Paint, for Iron or Brass. — Chrome green, 2 lbs. ; ivory black, 1 oz. ; chrome yellow, 1 oz. ; good japan, 1 gill ; grind all I'iigether, and mix with linseed oil. Green Bronze. — Dissolve 2 oz. nitrate of iron, and 2 oz. hypo- sulphite^ of soda, in 1 pt. water. Immerse the article until the required shade is obtained, as almost any shade from brown to red can be obtained, according to the time of immersion, then well Vrash with water, dry and brush. Pale Deep Olive Green Bronze. — Perchloride of iron, 1 part; ■»rater, 2 jiarts ; mix, and immerse the brass. Dark Green. — Saturate nitric acid with copper, and immerse the brass. Dead Black on Brasswork. — Rub the surface first with tripoli ; then wash it with a solution of 1 part neutral nitrate of tin, with 2 parts chloride of gold ; after 10 minutes wipe it off with a wet cloth. Removing Zinc and Iron from Plumbers' Solder. — Digest the netal in grains in diluted sulphuric acid. The acid will dissolve ;he zinc first, the iron next, and all traces of these metals by sub- sequent washing. Tinning Cast Iron. — Pickle your castings in oil of vitriol ; then over or immerse them in muriate of zinc imade by putting a sufii- ient quantity of zinc in some spirit of salt) : after which dip it in '. melted bath of tin or solder. Silvering by Heat. — Dissolve 1 oz. silver in nitric acid; add a ■mall quantity of salt ; then wash it and add sal-ammoniac, or 6 •2. of salt and white vitriol ; also i oz. corrosive sublimate ; rub hem together till they form a paste ; rub..iRie^piece which is to be ilvered with the paste ; heat it till the silver runs," after which dip tin a weak vitriol pickle to clean it. »— o^.--*-.' '.._.- ■ 158 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. To Tin Copper and Brass. — Boil 6 lbs. cream of tartar and 4 gals, of water and 8 lbs of graiu tin or tin shavings. After the material has boiled a sufficient time, the articles to be tinned are put therein and the boiling continued, when the tin is precipitated on the goods in metallic form. Mixture for Silvering. — Dissolve 2 oz. of silver with 3 grs. of corrosive sublimate ; add tartaric acid, 4 lbs. ; salt, 8 qts. To Separate Silver from Copper. — Mix sulphuric acid, 1 part; nitric acid, 1 part ; water, 1 part ; boil the metal in the mixture till it is dissolved, throw in a little salt to cause the silver to subside. To Write in Silver. — Mix 1 oz. of the finest pewter or block tin, and 2 oz- of quicksilver together till both oecome fluid, then grind it with gum water, and write with it. The writing will then look as if done with silver. Best Bronze for Brass. — Take 1 lb. muriatic acid, and ^ lb. white arsenic. Put them into an earthen vessel, and then proceed in the usual manner. Another Bronze for Brass. — One ounce muriate of ammonia, | oz. a) urn, i oz. arsenic, dissolved altogether in 1 pt. of strong vine gat. Zincing. — Copper and brass vessels may be covered with a firmly adherent layer of pure zinc by boiling them in contact with a solu- tion of chloride of zinc, pure zinc turnings being at the same time present in considerable excess. Clocding Metal Work. — Metal work may be clouded by putting a piece of fine emery paper under the thumb or finger, and work- ing it over the surface of the metal with a spiral motion. Cement for Belting. Waterproof. — Dissolve gutta percha in ► bisulphide of carbon to the consistence of molasses, slice down and thin the ends to be united, warm the parts, and apply the CMnent, then hammer lightly on a smooth anvil, or submit the parts to heavy pressure. To Prevent Incrustation in Boilers. — 1. Charcoal hag a great affinity for any thing that causes scale or incrustation in boilers. That made from hard Avood is the best, broken in lumps of i to J inch in size, and the dust sifted out. Two bushels of this will generally protect a boiler of 30 horse power for 3 weeks, when running, after which the old coal should be removed and fresh coal used. 2. Throw into the tank or reservoir from which your boiler is fed, a quantity of rough bark, in the piece, such as tanners use, sufficient to turn the water of a brown color ; if you have no tauk, put into the boiler from a half to a bushel of ground bark when you blow off, repeat every month, using only half the quantity after the first time. 3. Add a very small quantity of muriate of ammonia, about 1 lb. for every ],50() or 2,000 gals, of Water evapo- rated. It will have the effect of softening and disintegrating the carbonate of lime and other impurities doi)o.sitcd by the water dur- ing evaporation. 4. Potatoes and some otlir* vegetable substances introduced into tiie boiler are most effectual in preventing incrus- tation, and animal substances such as refuse skins, are still more 80. 5. An English firm ])Ut oak sawdust into their boiler in order to stop a leak, and to their surprise it also resulted in preventing incrustation. I should say if oak sawdust could prevent scale in MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, 4C., RECEIPTS. 199 boilers, that there is no visible »«ason -why hemlock and various uii.ei' kiu 3 uf sawdust will not do the same thing. 6. Cows feet wit I tb<.- slianks aiiached are strongly recommended as a preven- tative o scale. Twij in a large boiler is amply sufficient, and those wlio wiih .0 do business econumicallj', can get their oil for lubri- cating purposes cheaply by boiling the feet and shanks for a few hours in - large kettle, setting it aside to cool and then skimming oflf the oil from the surface of the water, using the feet for the boiler afterwards. If you wish to get rid of the hair on the shanks, you cau get rid of that by using lime, &c., as done by tanners. Maxagemkst of the Steam Exgixe. — Steam Packixg; — To pack the cylinder or piston, plait some packing yarn suflBcieatly tight that it will need driving; if cotton rope is convenient, put in a coil first, driving it to fit tight ; then fill the remainder of the chamber of the piston with the plaited yarn, driving it tight and full, leaving room for the nuts to go on the bolts ; screw the nuts evenly and alike until they are fast. The packing should be well soaked in bees wax and tallow before using it. A new kind of packing has been brought out lately, consisting of a mixture of duck, paper and tallow mixed in proper proportions. Metallic vulcanized rubber packing is strongly recommended as the best packing. This is so prepared that 300 ' Fahrenheit will not affect it. No other subs- lance has so much elasticity which stands so high a degree of heat, nr which may be used about all parts of the machinery, as this jiacking, where packing is nee ssary, namely : cylinder heads, man hole plates, piston rods, steam chests, steam joints, stuffing boxes, &c. The journals of the crank and the T head require close watctiing; if thev are loose in the boxes, or too tight, they will run badly : thus, if tightened too much, they will heat and wear out tbe brass runners, if they are not sufuciently tight, there is danger of the keys flying out and breaking the engine. All the valves belonging to theeng ne -hculd te ground in with emery, to keep them from losing either steam or water. Care should be taken of them as they will wear. When you find them leak, they should be ground over again. If suflFesed to remain long when leaking steam, there may be new ones required. The boilers require to be often cleaned out, and care should be taken to remove the scales and mud from adhering to the inside, otherwise, if the scales are suffered to remain, the boiler will burn and want repairing. It is necessary to try the gauge-cock often, to see if there is sufficient water in the boilers. There is great danger in running after the water is below the lowermost gauge- cock, and the flues should be kept cleanly swept. To Mend Broken Saws. — Pure silver, 19 parts ; pure copper, 1 part; pure brass, 2 parts; all to be filed into powder, and tho- roughb' mixed ; place the saw level on the anvil, broken edges in contact, and hold them so ; now put a small line of the mixture along the seam, covering it with a larger bulk of powdered char- coal ; now with a spirit lamp and a jewellers' blow-pipe, hold the coal dust in place, and blow sufficient to melt the solder mixture ; then with a hammer set the joint smooth, and file away any su- perfluous solder, and you will be surprised at its strength the lisat will uot injure the temper of the saw, 200 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. Wfitwg Inscriptions on Metals — Take i lb. of nitric acid and 1 oz. of muriatic acid. Mix shake well together, and it is ready for use. Cover the place you wish to mark with melted bees-wax ; when cold, write your inscription plainh'^ in the wax clear to the metal with a sharp instrument ; then apply the mixed acids with a feather, carefully iiUing each letter. Let it remain from 1 to 10 minutes, according to appearance desired ; then throw on water, which stops the process, and remove the wax. Etching Fluids. — For copper. Aquafortis, 2 oz. ; water, 5 oz. For steel. Iodine, 1 oz. ; iron tilings, 5 dr. ; water, 4 oz. Digest till the iron is dissolved. For fine touches. Dissolve 4 parts each of verdigris, sea salt, and sal-ammoniac, in 8 parts vinegar, add 16 parts water ; boil for a minute, and let it cool. Exguaverb' border Wax. — Beeswax, 1 part; pitch, 2 parts ; tal- low, 1 part. Mix. Engravers^ cement. Rosin, 1 part ; brick dust, 1 l)art. Mix with heat. Japanners' Gold Size. — Gum ammoniac, 1 Ih. ; boiled oil, 8 oz. ; si)irits turpentine, 12 oz. Melt the gum, then add the oil, and lastly spirits turpentine. Black Varnish for Iron Work. — Asphaltum, 1 lb. ; lamp- black, i lb. ; i-esin 5 lb. ; spirits turpentine, 1 quart; linseed eil, just .'sufficient to rub u]) the lampblack with before mixing it with the others. Apply with a camel's hair brush. To Petrify Wood. — Gem salt, rock alum, white vinegar, chalk and pebbles powder, of each an equal quantity. Mix well together. If, after the ebullition is over, you throw into this liquid any wood or porous substance, it will petrify it. The Fi.nest Bronze. — Put in a clean crucible 7 lbs. copper, melt, then add 3 lbs. zinc, afterward 2 lbs tin. Geari.ng a Lathe for Screw Cutting. — Every screw cutting lathe contains along screw called the lead screw, which feeds the carriage of the lathe, while cutting screws; upon the end of this screw is placed a gear, to which is transmitted motion from another gear i)laced on the end of the spindle, these gears each contain a different number of teeth, for the purpose of cutting different threads, and the threads are cut a certain number to the inch varying from 1 to 50. Therefore to find the proper gears to cut a certain number of threads to the inch, you will first: — multiply the number of threads you desire to cut to the inch, by any small number, four for instance, and this will give you the proper gear to put on the lead screw. Then with the same num- ber, four, multii)ly the number of threads to the incli in the lead screw, and this 'will give you tlie ])roper gear to put on the spindle. For example, if you want to cut 12 to the inch, multijily 12 by 4, and it will give you 48. Put this gear on the lend screw, then with the same number, 4, multiply tiie number of threads to tiie inch in the lead screw. If it is five for instance, it will give you twenty, put this on the spindle and your lathe is geared. If the lead screw is 4, 5, C, 7, or 8, the same rule holds good. Always ^ multiply the number of threads to be cut, first. Some, indeed most ' .■-■niall lathes, are now made with a stutl geared into the spindle, whieh stuil only runs half as fast as the spindh-, and in finding the gears for these lathes, you will first multiply the nmnber of MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 201 threads to be cut, as before, and then multiply the number of threads on the lead screw, as double the number it is. For instance if you want to cut 10 to the inch^ multiply by 4, and you get 40, put this on the lead screw, then if your lead screw is five to the inch, you call it 10 ; and multiply by 4 and it will give you 40. Again put this on your stud and your lathe is geared ready to commence cutting. Cutting a Screw in an Engine Lathe. — In cutting V thread- screw, it is only necessary for you to practice operating the shipper and slide-screw handle of your lathe, before cutting. After having done this, until you get the motions, you may set the point of the tool as high as the centre, and if you kfeep the tool sharp, you will find no diflBculty in cutting screws. You must, however, cut very light chips, mere scrapings in finishing and must take it out of the lathe often, and look at it from both sides, very carefully, to see that the threads do not lean like fish scales. After cutting, polish with an emery stick, and some emery. Cutting Square Thread Screws. — In cutting square thread- screws, it is always necessary to get the depth required, with a tool somewhat thinner than one-half the pitch of the thread. After doing this, make another tool exactly one-half the pitch of the thread, and use it to finish with, cutting a light chip on each side of the groove^ After doing this, polish with a pine stick, and some emery. Square threads for strength should be cut one- half the depth of their pitch, while square threads, for wear, may, and should be cut three-fourths the depth of their pitch. Mongrel Threads. — Mongrel, or half V, half-square threads are usually made for great wear, and should be cut the depth of their pitch, and for extraordinary wear they may even be cut 1^ the depth of their pitch. The point and the bottom of the grooves should be in widfch i the depth of their pitch. What is meant here by the point of the thread, is the outside surface. And the bottom of the groove is the groove between the threads. In cutting these threads it is necessary to use a tool about the shape of the thread, and in thickness about one-fifth less than the thread is when finished. As it is impossible to cut the whole sur- face at once, you will cut it in depth about one-sixteenth at a time, then a chip oif the sides of the thread and continue in this way alternately till you have arrived at the depth required. Make a gauge of the size required between the threads and finish by scraping with water. It is usually best to leave such screws as these a little large until after they are cut, and then turn off a light chip, to size them, this leaves them true and nice. Planing Metals. — The first operation about planing, is to oil your planer and find out if the bed is smooth. If it is not, file off the rough places ; then change the dogs to see if they will work well, and find out the movements of the planer. After doing this, bolt your work on to the bed, and if it is a long, thin piece, plane off a chip, then turn it over and finish the other side, taking two chips, the last of which should be very light. Great care should be taken, in bolting it to the bed, not to spring it. After finishing this side turn it to the other side, and take off a light cut to tinish it. 202 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. Planing Perpendicularly.— In planing perpendicularly, it is necessary to swivel the bottom of the small head aiound, so \t will stand about three-fourths of an inch inside of square, towards the piece you are to plane. This prevents breaking the tool when the bed runs back. , , i i. ■ Gear Cutting.— In cutting gears, they are reckoned a certain number of teeth to the inch, measuring across the diameter to a certain line which is marked on the face or sides of the gear with a tool This line is one-half the depth of the teeth from the outar diameter. That is, if the teeth of the gear are two-tentlis of an inch deep, this line would be one-tenth of an inch from the edge and is called the pitch line. Depth of Teeth.— Every gear cut with a different number ot teeth to the inch, should be cut of a depth to the pitch line, to correspond with the number of teeth to the inch. This is called proportion. Therefore, if you cut a gear eight to the inch, th9 depth to the pitch line should be one-eighth of an inch, and tho whole dept'h of the tooth would be two-eighths. Again, if you cut a gear twelve to the inch, the depth to pitch line should be one- twelfth of an inch, and the whole depth of tooth two twelfths And again, if you cut a gear twenty to the in«h, the depth to pitch line should be one-twentieth of an inch, while the whole depth should be two-twentieths, and so on ad infinitum. . Mhasurino to find the Number of Teeth,— To find the size a certain gear should be, for a certain number of teeth, is an easy matter, if you study carefully these rules. If you want a gear with thirty-two teeth and eight to the inch, it should be four inches measuring across the diameter to the pitch line, and the two- cio-hths outside of the pitch line would make it four inches and two-eighths. Again, if you want a gear with forty teeth, and ten to the inch it should measure across the diameter to pitch line four inclies and the two-tenths outside the pilch line would make the whole diameter four inches and two-tenths. And again, if you -vant a gear with eighty teeth, and twenty to the inch, it should measure to the pitch line, across the diameter, four inches, and the two-twentieths outside the pitch line would make it four inches and two-twentieths, and these examples will form a rule for the measurement of all except bevel gears. . ^ , , Bevel Gears —These are turned a certain bevel to correspond with each otiier, according to the angle upon wliich the shafts driven by them are set. For instance, if two shafts are set upoa an angle of ninety degrees, the surfaces of the faces of these gears will stand at an angle of forty-five degrees To get the surface of these gears, in turning them, puts a straight edge across the face. Then set your level ou an angle of forty-live degrees, and try the face of the teeth by placing the level on the straight edge After turning the face of the teeth, square the outer diameter by the face of the teeth • and to get the size to which you wisli to cut, measure from the centre of the face of the teeth. Thus, if a bevel gear is fix inches in diameter, and the face of the teeth is one inch, vou will measure from the centre of the face, and find it is five inches On this line you calculate the number of teeth to the inch, and if you want a gear with twenty teeth, and ten to the inch, it shyulU MACHINISTS, UNQINEERS, AC, RECEIPTS. 203 measure two inches across tbe face to the centre of the surface of the teeth ; and if the face of the teeth were one inch in length, the diameter of the gear would be three inches, and the inside of the teeth would measure only one inch. Again, if you want to cut a gear with forty teeth, and ten to the inch, it would measure four inches to the centre of the teeth on the surface. And if the surface of the teeth were one inch long, the diameter of the gear would be hve inches, while it would only measure three inches inside the teeth. These examples will form a rule for all bevel gears. Draw-Filing and Finishing — To draw-file a piece of work smoothly and quickly, it is best to first draw-file it with a medium fine file, and finish with a superfine file. After doing this, polish the work with dry emery paper and then with emery paper and oil. Lining Boxes with Babbitt Metal. — To line boxes properly, 80 as to insure their filling every time, it is necessary to heat the. box nearly red hot, or at least hot enough to melt the metal. Then smoke the shaft where the metal is to be poured upon it. This insures its coming out of the box easily, after it is cold. After smoking the shaft, put it into the box or boxes, and draw some putty around the ends of them, for the purpose of stopping them, taking care not to press upon it, for if you do it will go into the box and fill a place that ought to be filled with metal; and in the meantime your metal ought to be heated, and after you have poured it, let the box stand till it is nearly cold ; drive out your shaft, and it is done. Putting Machines Together.— In putting machines together no part should be finished except where it is necessary to make a fit, as it is sometimes the case that machinery is miscalculated, and by finishing it would be spoiled, while if it were not, it might be saved by slight alterations in design. And again, in finishing certain parts before you get a machine together, you are unknowingly finishing parts not necessary to be finished, and making them of a shape anything but desirable. This rule, however, is not intended to apply to machinery being made to detail drawings. To Drill a Hole where you have no Rbameb. — It is some- times necessary to drill a hole of an exact size to fit a certain shaft, and at the same time have it smooth without reaming it. This may be done, by first drilling a hole, one-hundredth of an inch smaller than the size desired, and then making a drill the exact size and running it through to finish with. This last drill should have the corners of its lips rounded, like a reamer, and the hole should be finished without holding the drill with a rest. Squaring, or facing up Cast Iron Surfaces. — A round-end, tool is best for this. A rough chip should first be taken off, over the entire surface to be faced. Then speed your lathe up and taking a light chip, merely enough to take out the first tool marks, run over the entire surface again. In turning up surfaces it is always best to begin at the centre and feed out, as the tool cuts freer and will wear twice as long. Boring a Hole with a Boring Tool. — In boring a hole with a boring tool, it is usually necessary to drill the hole first, and too much cave cannot be taken in finishing. An iron gauge should b§ 204 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &0., RECJiirTS. made first ; it is usually made of a piece of sheet iron or wire. The hole should then be flrilU'd smaller than the size desired, and then bored to the required size, and it is impossible to bore a hole perfect without taking two or three light chips, mere scrapings witb, which to finish. Holes, m this way, may be bored as nicely as they can be reamed. BouiNG Holes with Boring Arbor.— A boring arbor is a shaft with a steel set in it, for the ]>urpose of boring holes of groat length, and is designed to be used in a lathe. In doing this pro- perly, you must first see if your lathe is set straight ; it uot, adjkist it. Having done this, put the piece of work to be bored in the carriage of your lathe, pass your arbor through the hole to be bored, and put it on the centres of your lathe liaving done thig, adjust your work true to the position dasired by measupiag from the point of the tool, continually turning round the arbor from side to side of the piece to be bored, while you are bolting it to the carriage, aud measure until it is perfectly true. Having done this, bore the hole, and take for the last chip only a hundredth ot in inch. Thi« makes a true and smooth hole. It is impossible to make a hole true with tmy kind of a tool when you are cuttiug a large chip, for the tool springs so that no dependence can be placed upon it. To Make a Boriko Aubob and Tool that will not Chatter.— Boring tools, when used in small arbors, arc always liable to chat- ter and make a rough hole. To prevent this, the tool should bo turned in a lathe, while in its position in the arbor, ui>on the circle of the size of the hole to be bored, and the bearing lengthwise ot the arbor, should bo only as wide as the feed of the lathe; for if the bearing of a tool is on the face, the more it will chatter To Reduce Metallic O.^D»8. — '1 his may be effected by the dry and the moist processes ; but the deoxidizing agent of tlie greatest value to the metallurgist is coal in its several varieties, and the derivative materials yielded by its combustion. When coal is burned in a furnace, the product of combustion may be considered to be carbonic acid gas ; but inasmuch as the latter is readily decomposed by permeating ignited pieces of solid carbon (coke), losing a portion of its oxygen, and becoming carbonic acid gas, we may say that the products of the combustion of coal are, firstly, carbonic acid ; secondly, carbonic oxide and carbonic acid ; and lastly, carbonic oxide alone. The latter, in combination with heat, is a most powerful deoxidizing agent. Were it not for the production in furnaces of carbonic oxide gas — were it necessary that the solid carbon of the coke should be alone the deoxidizing body — then it follows that every particle of the ore to be reduced must be broiiglit into intimate contact with the reducing bndy : a jirocess involving more care and trouble than are compatible with large metallurgic operations. The reducing agent being a gas, there is no longer a nece.-^sity for that intimate mixture of fuel and ore whicli won. (I otherwise be necessary. Provided that the ga.scous results of c(jinbustii)n are placed under circumstances of re.adily jirTuicating the ore, tlus nccessilics of jiracticc are amply sii ).-(erved. riicre is great diU'crciice as to Die amount of hi'at at which the icductioy ofUiU'crcul lactttUic oxides can beefTected. The oxides of MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &0., RECEIPTS. 205 lead, bismuth, antimony, nickel, cobalt, copper, and iron require a strong red heat in the furnace, whilst the oxides of manganese, chron \um, tin, and zinc, do not lose their oxygen until heated to whiteness. On a large scale, the reduction of oxides is generally eflfected by mixing charcoal, together with the oxide to be reduced, in a refrac- tory clay crucible, the charcoal furnishing the carbon necessary to the proper performance of this work. Some use a crucible thickly lined with charcoal, putting in the oxide on the top of the charcoal. It is necessary, however, when using the crucible and charcoal, to use a tlux, say a little borax in powder, stiew«d on the mixture to accelerate the reduction of the oxide. The borax is generally the first to fuse, and, as the metal is eliminated, seems to purify and cleanse it, as it gathers into a button at the bottom of the crucible. It is all the better if you give the crucible a few sharp taps when you take it off the fire. Copper Plates or Rods may be covered with a superficial coat- ing of brass by exposing to the fumes given off by melted zinc at a light temperature. The coated plates or rods can then be rolled- into thin sheets, or drawn into wire. Solution op Copper or Zinc. — Dissolve 8 oz. (troy) cyanide of potassium, and 3 oz. cyanide of copper or zinc, in 1 gal. of rain water. To be used at about 160° F., with a compound battery of 3 to 12 cells. Brass Solution. — Dissolve 1 lb. (troy) cyanide of potassium, 2 oz. cyanide of copper, and 1 oz. cyanide of zinc, in 1 gal. of rain- water ; then add 2 oz. of muriate of ammonia. To be used at 160° F., for smooth work, with a compound battery of from 3 to 12 cells. Beassino Iron. — Iron ornaments are covered with copper or brass, by properly preparing the surface so as to remove all organic matter which would prevent adhesion, and then plunging them into melted bra?s. A thin coating is thus spread over the iron, and it admits of being polished or burnished. To Enamel Cast Iron and Hollow Ware. — 1. Calcined flints, 6 parts ; Cornish stone or composition, two parts ; litharge, 9 parts; borax, 6 parts ; argillaceous earth, 1 part • nitre, 1 part ; calx of tin, 6 parts ; purified potash, 1 part. 2. Calcined flints, 8 parts ; red lead, 8 parts ; borax, 6 parts ; calx of tin, 5 parts ; nitre, 1 part. 3. Potters' compo-ition, 12 parts ; borax, 8 parts ; white lead, 10 parts; nitre, 2 parts; white marble, calcined, 1 part; purified potash, 2 parts ; calx of tin, 5 parts. 4. Calcined flints, 4 parts ; potters' composition, 1 part ; nitre, 2 parts ; borax, 8 parts ; white marble, calcined, 1 part; argillaceous earth, ^ part; calx of tin, 2 parts. Whichever of the above compositions is taken must be finely powdered, mixed, and fused. The vitreous mass is to be ground when cold, sifted, and levigated with water ; it is then made into a jiap with water, or gum water. The pap is smeared or brushed over the interior of the vessel, dried, and fused with a proper heat in a muffle. Clean the vessels jierfectly before apply- ing. Enamelled Cast Iron.— Clean and brighten the iron b-^fore applying. The euauiel consistij of two coats— the boa* and li^a 206 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS, glaze. The body is made by fusing 100 lbs. ground flints, 75 lbs. of borax, and grinding 40 lbs. of this frit with 5 lbs. of potters' clay, in water, till it is brought to the consistence of a pup. A coat ef this being applied and dried, but not hard, the glaze-powder is sifted over it. This consists of 100 lbs. Cornish stone in fine pow- der, 117 lbs. of borax, 35 lbs. of soda ash, 35 lbs. of nitre, 35 lbs. of sifted slaked lime, 13 lbs. of white sand, and 50 pounds of pounded white glass. These are all fused together ; the frit obtained is pulverized. Of this powder, 45 lbs. are mixed with 1 lb. of soda ash, in hot water, and, the mixture being dried in a stove, is the glaze powder. After sifting this over the body-coat, the cast-irou article is put into a stove, kept at a temperature of about 212"=>, to dry it hard, after which it is set in a muffle-kiln, to fuse it into a glaze. The inside of pipes is enamelled (after being cleaned) by pouring the above body composition through them while the pipe is being turned around to insure an equal coating ; after the body has become set, the glaze pap is poured in in like manner. The pipe is finally fired in the kiln. To Enamel Copper and Other Vessbls. — Flint glass, 6 parts ; borax, 3 parts ; red lead, 1 part ; oxide of tin, 1 part. Mix all to- gether, frit, grind into powder, make into a thin paste with water, apply with a brush to the surface of the vessels, after scaling by heat and cleaning them, repeat with a second or even a third coat, afterwards dry, and lastly fuse on by heat of an enamelled kiln. Emeky Wheels fob Polishing — Coarse emery powder is mixed with about half its weight of pulverized Stourbridge loam, and a little water or other liquid to make a thick paste j this is pressed into a metallic mould by means of a screw-press, and, after being thoroughly dried, is baked or burned in a muffle at a temperature above a red, and below a white heat. This forms an artificial emery stone, which cuts very greedily, with very little wear to itself Unequalled for grinding and polishing glass, metals, enamels, stones, &c. Holes in Mill3tonk8 are filled with melted alum, mixing burr sand with it. If the hole is large, i)ut some pieces of burr mill stones in it first, and pour in melted alum. These pieces of block should be cut exactl7 to fit. There should be small joints, and fastened with plaster of Paris. These holes should bo cut at least 4 inches deep ; there is then no danger of their getting loose. Fitting a New Back on an Old Mills'wjne.— Block your stono up with a block of wood, having its face down until it lies even, solid, and perfoclly level; then pick and scrape olf all the olcl plaster down to tlu! face blocks, so that none remains but wliat is in the joints of the face blocks; then wa.sh these blocks, and keep them soaked with water. Keep a numl)er of pieces of burr blocks, at the same time, soaked with water. Take a pail half filled witii clean water, ami mixed with 2 tablespooiifiils of glue watci-j Ixiiled and dis.solved ; mix in with your iiaiid plaster of Paris uulil it bo thick enough that it will not run ; and, breaking all the lumps, pour this on the stone, rubbing it in with your hand ; the stono being at the same time dam[)ed ; and place small pieces of stono all over the joints of the face blocks ; yon then, with more plaster, mixed in the same way but more stilF, wiUi tUia aud pieces of burc MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, AC, RECEIPTS. 2l[J7 Stones, build walls round the eye and verge 4 or 5 inches high leaving the surface uneven and the eye larger, as it will be brought to its proper size by the last operation. It is better to build up the wall of the running stone round the verge for 3 inches without any spalls, so that the holes may be cut in to balance it. If you wish to make your stone heavier, you will take small pieces of iron, perfectly clean and free from grease, and lay them evenly all around the stone in the hollow place between the two walls just built ; and, with plaster mixed a little thicker than milk, pour in under and througn all the crevices in the iron until the surface is nearly level with the two walls, If the stones do not require addi- tional weight added, instead of iron, use pieces of stone the same way, leaving the surface rough and uneven. Again, as before, build walls round the verge of the stone, and round the eye of the stone, until they are within 2 inches of the thickness you want your stones to be, the wall round the eye being 2 inches higher than that round the verge, and filling the space between the walls with, stones ; and, pouring in plaster again, make it nearly level with the walls, but leaving the surface rough and jagged, to make the next plaster adhere well to it. Let it stand until the back is dry and perfectly set, when you raise the stone upon its edge, and, with a trowel, plaster round the edge of the stone neatly, giving it a taper of half an inch from the face to the back of the stone. When cased round in this way, lay the stone down on the cock- head ; it being in the balance ryne, but the driver off, then raise the spindle, and balance the stone as already directed before putting on the remainder of the back. Then have a tin made the size of the eye, and to reach from the balance ryne to the thickness you want the stone to be at the eye. This tin shoulcJhe. exactly fitted to its place, and made fast ; then fit a hoop of wood or iroa round the verge, having the upper edge of the thickness from the face you want the stone to be at the verge, and equal all round. This hoop should be greased ; and, all the cracks round it, and the tin in the eye, being stopped, you pour thin plaster (with more glue water than in previous operations, to prevent it from setting so quickly, and to give time to finish off the back correctly) until it be level with the hoop round the verge, and with a straight edge, one end resting on the hoop, and the other end resting on the tin at the eye ; then, by moving it round, and working the plaster with a trowel, make the surface of the back even and smooth between these two points. The hoop is then taken off, and the back and edges planed smooth ; then lower the spindle until your runner lies solid, and put your band or hoop on, it being first made nearly red hot, and taking care that it is of sufRcieut size not to require too much driving ; if fitting too tightly, it may loosen the back in driving it to its proper place ; it may be cooled gently by pouring water on it ; and, wlien cool, it should fit tight. Balancing a Millstone. — First, take off the driver, that the stone may have full play on the cock-head ; then raise the spindle so that there may be room between the stones to see the balance. Find the heaviest parts, and near the verge lay on sufficient weight to balance it. Cut a hole in the back of the stone, as deep as you can make it and as near the verge as possible that the binding 208 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS^ &C., RECEIPTS, iron hoop of the stone may keep the lead'' in its place. This hole should be wider at the bottom than the top in order to retain the lead when the stone is in motion, and into this the melted lead should be poured until it brings the stone completely into balance. "When the lead is cold, cover over with mixed plaster, even with the back of the stone. Composition to Keep Millstones Clean. — Hot-water, 1 gal.: borax, 2 oz. ; washing soda, | lb. and 3 balls of the size of a hazel nut each of sal prunel. Mix and apply it to the burrs with a scrubbing brush. When grinding garlic wheat it is not necessary to take up the burrs at all. It is sufiicient to drop through the eye of the burr twice per day one of the above described balls of sal prunel and that will keep the burrs sharp and clean, enabling the miller at all seasons to use the No. 13 bolt, to make finer flour and in greater quantity than usual. To VcLCANizE India Rubber. — The vulcanizing process patented by the late Charles Goodyear consists in incorporating with the rubber from 3 to 10 per cent of sulphur,, together with various me- tallic oxides, chiefly lead and zinc, the quantity of the latter articles being regulated by the degree of elasticity &c., required in the desired article. The goods of one large establishment are vul- canized in cylindrical wrought iron steam heaters, over 50 feet long and from 5 to 6 feet in diameter. These heaters have doors opening on hinges at one end, and through these doors the goods to be vulca- nized are introduced on a sort of railway carriage, then, after the door is shut, steam is let on, and a temperature of from 2.i0 ° to 300° of heat is kept up for several hours, the degree of heat being ascertained by means of thermometers attached to the heaters. The value, solidity, and quality of the goods is much increased by keeping the articles under the ])ressure of metallic moulds or sheets while undergoing this jirocess. The whole process requires careful manipulation and great experience to conduct it properly. To Deodorize Rubber. — Cover the articles of rubber with char- coal dust, place then in an enclosed vessel, and raise the tempera- ture to 94® Fahr., and let it remain thus for several hours. Remove and clean the article from the charcoal dust, and they will be found free from all odor. Approved Friction Matches. — About the best known prepara- tion for friction matches consists of gum arable, 16 parts by weight; phosphorus, 9 parts ; nitre, 14 parts ; iicro.xyd or manganese, in powaer, 16 parts. The gum is first made into a mucilage with water, then the luanganesc, then the jiliosphorus, and the whole is heated to about 130 degr. Fah. "When the i)hosphoru3 is melted the nitre is added, and the whole is thoroughly stirred until the mass is a uniform paste. The wooden matches i)repared first with sulphur, are then dipped in this and afterward dried in the air. Friction i)aper8, for ciirrving in the pocket, maybe mr.de in the same manner, and by adding some gum benzoin to the mucilage they will have nn agreeable odor when ignited. Mill Dams. — When building a dam, you shoula select the most suitable place. If you can, place it across the strcrjn near a rocky bluff, so tliat the ends of the dam may run into the bluff. This will prevent the water ruuuing by at the cuds of the dam. lixxdi MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 209 your dam very strong: if tMs is not done, they axe breaking up often, causing ruinous expense in money and loss of time. Rock Dams are incomparably the best in use, if there is plenty of material at hand for building, and a rock bottom to the stream ; if there is not a rock bottom, you should dig a trench in the bottom, deep enough, so that the water cannot undermine it. This should be the same as if you were building the foundation of a large building. The wall to be built should be of a small, circular form, BO that the back of the circle should be next to the body ef water, which may by its pressure tighten it. To secure the water from leaking through at the ends of the dam, dig a ditch deeper than the bottom of the river ; then fill this with small pieces of rock, and pour in cement. This cement is made of hydraulic cement, and is made of one part of cement to five parts of pure sand. It will eflfectually stop all crevices. A rock dam, if well built, will be perfectly tight. Use as large rock as you conveniently can move ; building this wall 4 to 6 feet thick, according to the length of the dam, with jam or buttresses every place where they are needed to strengthen it. Make true joints to these rocks, especially on the ends so that they may join close together. When you have the outside walls laid in cement, for every layer fill the middle up with pieces of small rock, pouring in your grout, so that there may not be a crevice but what is filled. If there is any crevice or hole left open, the water will break through, wearing it larger and larger. If the stream is wide and large, it is necessary to build the dam in two sections, which should be divided by a, waste way, necessary for the waste, or surplus water, to run over to keep the head in its proper place or height. Let each section, next to where the water is to be run over, be abutments, built to strengthen the dam. The last layer of rock, on the top where the waste water runs over, should project 5 or 6 inches over the back of the dam, 80 that the water may not undermine it. This last layer should be of large rocks and jointed true ; then laid in hydraulic cement, in proportion of 1 of cement to 3 of sand. When the dam is built, the front should be filled up with coarse gravel or clay ; this is best done with teams, as the more it is tramped the more durable it becomes. Frame-Dams. — In building a frame-dam commence with a good foundation, laying the first sills in the bottom, of sufficient depth. They should be large square timbers that will last in the water without rotting. Where there is a soft foundation, the bottom should first be made level ; then dig trenches for the mud sills, about 7 or 8 feet cpart, lengthways of the stream, and 10 or 12 feet long. Into these first sills other sills must be framed, and put crosswise of the stream, 6 or 8 feet apart, to reach as far across the stream as necessary. Then two outside sills should be piled down with 2-inch plank driven down to a depth of 4 or 5 feet. If this can be done conveniently, they are to be jointed as closely as possible. It would be better to line with some stuff 1 inch thick ; then with posts their proper length, about 12 or 14 inches square, which should be framed into the uppermost sills, in both sides, and all the way across the dam, from bank to bank, at a distance of 6 feet apart. Then, with braces to each post, to extend two-thirds 210 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. of the length of the post, where they should be joined together with a lock, instead Oi :>j mortise and tenon, with an iron bolt of 1 or IJ inches in diagietcr, going through both, and tightened with a screw and nut. When mortises and tenons are used, they often become rotten and useless in a few years. These oraces should be set at an angle of 50 or 60° with the other ead mortised into the mud sill. These braces require to be r.bout 6 to 8 inches, and as long as you find necessary ; being covered with dirt, it will not decay for a long time, as the air is excluded. These posts should be capped from one to the other, plate fashion. The posts should be lined witli 2 or 2i inch plank on the inside, pinnod to the plank, and should, in the middle, be filled in with dirt. If tiie stream is large and wide, the dam should be built in two sections, which should be divided by a waste-way for the surplus water, which should bo in the centre of the dam, and sufficient for all the waste-water to run over. Let each section of the dam form an abutment next lo the waste-way, placing cells or sills 4 feet apart the length of the waste-way ; in each of these sills, posts should be framed, with a brace for the sides. These rows of posts, standing across the dam, will form the sectional abutments ; the middle one may bo constructed by being lengthways of the stream, ■with short braces, so that they will not be in the way of drift-wooa passing down the stream ; it being necessary for strong pieces for a bridge. Then cover the sills with an apron of 2-inch plank joined perfectly straight, to extend 30 or 40 leet below the dam, to prevent undermining of the dam. The planks which are used for the purpose of lining the posts which form the abutments of each section of the dam, and the ends of the waste-way, should be truly pointed, so as to prevent any leakage. The dam being built, the dirt should be filled in with teams, as the more it is tramped the better. Clay or coarse gravel is the best. Then place your gates «n the upper side of the waste-way, the size that is necessary to a level witn low-watermark ; which gates are not to be raised, except in times of high water, as the proper lieight of the mill-pond should be regulated by boards placed over the gate for the desired head, as the water should be allowed to pass at all times freely over them. To strengthen the dam, if you think necessary, 2-inch plank may be used in lining the front side of the dam, long enough to reach from the bottom of the stream (on an inclined plane, and next to the body of water) to the top of the dam, and filled up nearly to the top of the dam with clay or gravel well trampled down. Bklthh OB Loo Dams are very often used in small, muddy streams. When the bottom of the stream is of a soft nature, take a flat boat where you want to fi.v your dam, aud drive piles the whole length of the stream, about '.^ or 4 feet apart, as deep as you can. Tako young oak saplings, pointed at the end, for the purpose. If you can, construct a regular pile-driver, similar to those in use for making trestle-work on the railways. This weight may be pulled up by horses instead of an engine. When you have finished driving jiiles, make some boxes or troughs of 2 or .i inch |)lank, about 3 ieet wide and as long us the plank is. Sink these in the water, the length of the dam, close to the piles, by loading them WitU MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C„ BECEIPTS, 211 rock, until they are at the bottom of the stream, filling in the front part of the dam with dirt and brush, nearly to the height you want it. This kind of dam will last a long time. Whenever there is a small break in the dam or race, cut up some willows and brush, put them in the break along witn some straw and dirt, and ram them down with clay. In rt^gard to toe flume, the greatest care must be taken to insure strength and durabilityircombined with tightness. Every step taken in its construction must be of such a nature as to unite these qualities in the highest possible degree, otherwise the whole is, in li ma^nner, labor lost. CuEij FOR Drunkenness. — Take 5 grs sulphate of iron, 10 grs. magnesia, 11 drs. peppermint water, I dr spirit of nutmeg; mix all 'together, and take twice per day. To MAKE Gun Cotton. — Take dry saltpetre, i oz. ; strong oil •ritriol, I oz. Mix in a tumbler, add 20 grs. of dry cotton wool, Rtir with a glass rod"i minutes, remove the cotton and wash from nil traces of the acid in 4 or 5 waters ; then carefully dry under 420° This IS gun cotton. The Drummond Light is"produced by directing a jet of mixed ©xygen and hydrogen upon a pencil of pure lime, the gases being conveyed in separate tubes or pipes, to within a very short distance from the aperture at which they are to be delivered, and then flow- ing together and mixing in very minute quantity before combus- tion takes place This arrangement is adopted to ensure safety. The gases are used in the proportion of 2 of hydrogen to 1 of oxy- gen, which form a dreadfully explosive mixture. NiTRO Glycerine is made by submitting glycerine to the action of tl (mixture of 2 parts of sulphuric and 1 part of nitric acid. The use'of the sulphuric acid being to concentrate the nitric acid, which IS alore concerned in the reaction. In the apparatus ordi- narily used, the glycerine and the acids are allowed to mix in the stream, and are afterwards agitated for a short time in the recep- tacle into which they flow. The nitro-glycerine is then allowed to settle at the bottom, the acidsi are drawn off and after a single washing with water the explosive is ready for use. The Great Secrets for Trapping Fo.xes and other Game. — Musk-rat musk and skunk musk mixed. Can be procured at the druggists, or from the animals themselves To be spread on the bait of any trap. This receipt has been sold as high as ^75. Another, costmg %bQ, Jor minks, ^c— Unslaked lime, i lb.; sal-ammoniac, 3 oz., or muriate of ammonia, 3 oz. Mix, and pulverize. Keep in a covered vessel a few days until a thorough admixture takes place. Sprinkle on the bait, or on the ground around the trap. Keep in a corked bottle. Food for Singing Birds. — Blanched sweet almonds, pulverized, J lb. ; pea meal, 1 lb. ; safiFron, 3 grs. ; yolks of 2 hard boiled eggs. Reduce all to a powder by ruljbing through a sieve. Place the mix- ture in a frying pan over a fire, and add 2 oz. butter and 2 oz. honey. Slightly cook for a few minutes, stirring well, then set oflF to cool, and preserve in a closely corked bottle. Photograph Painting in Oil Colors. — Tints fob the First Painting. — Flesh. — White and Light Red. — White, Naples yellow, 212 ilACHINlSTS, ENGINEERS, AC., RECEIPTS. and vermilion. White, vermilion, and light red. Gray, Pearly, and Half Ttnts. — White, vermilion, and black. White and terre verte. White, black, Indian red, and raw umber. Deep Shades. — Light red and raw umber. Indian red, lake and black. Carnations. — White and Indian red (powerful color). White and rose madder. White and lake. Hair. — Ltyht Hair. — White and yellow ochre. White and Roman ochre. White and Vandj'ke brown for the dark parts. White and raw umber for the dark parts. Dark Brown Hair. — Raw and burnt umber. White and raw umber. White and V^andyke brown. Tints foe the Second and Third Painting. — High Lights. — White and Naples yellow. Car- nations.— Roqq madder and white. Indian red, rose madder, aiit white. Oreen Tints. — White and ultramarine, with any of the yel- lows. White and terre verte, with the addition of a little raw timber. The above green tints may be converted into green grays. Gray Tints. — Ultramarine, light red, and white. Indian red, lake, black and white. White, ultramarine, Indian red, and raw umber. Purple Tints. — Any of the lakes or red madders, with ultramarine and white. Powerful Shadow y^?;^*.— Indian red, purple lake, and black. Indian red, raw umber, and black. Strong Glazing Colo — Light red and lake. Brown madder. Vandyke brown, Indian red, and lake asphaltum. Draperies. — Back Ground Colors. — Pearly. — White, vermilion, and blue. White, vermilion and black. White and black. Gray. — White, Venetian red and black. Yellow. — Yellow ochre and white. Olive. — Yellow ochre, terre verte, and umber. Stone. — Raw umbt-r and yellow. Black, white, and raw umber. Sky. — French blue ana white. French blue, vermilion, and white. Edges of Clouds. — Yellow ochre and white. Clouds. — Indian red, lake, and white. Brown madder, French blue, and white. Photograph Water Colors. — Flesh Tints. — No. 1. Fair Com- plexion. — Light red, a little carmine or vci'inilion, and Indian yel- low. Be careful in using the latter, and, in the flesh tints of very fair children, allow the vermilion to predominate ; carnations, ro.- • m^idder, and if the face be full of color, add a little vermilion to it. 2. .\hddling Complexion. — Much the same as No. 1, saving thai the liglit ri'd must be in excess over the other colors— carnations rose madder, and lake. 3. Dark Complexion. — Light red and Incji.ni yellow, or light red and Roman ochre, and, if the complcxioh b,' generally ruddy, you may add a little, Indian red, biu it must b- sparingly usea, as it is a jiowcrful color, and likely toiimpart a f)urple tone to the flesh. Carnations chiefly lake, but if the com l)k-xion be warm, lake and a little yellow. The carnations foi children's portraits are rose madder and vermilion, inclining more to the latter tint. Aged persons have rose madder, and a little cobalt to give a cold appearance to the colorju their cheeks and lips. These tints, Nos. 1, 2, and 3, are indispensable as general washes, for the purpose of rccenrmg the other colors, which are to be worked over them to bring up the complexion to the life. IJncolored photographic portraits vary so much in tone, that the beginner will, perhaps, find some difficulty in mixing up the tints for the washes. He must note that the warm-toned ones do not require so much Indian yellow as the cold ones do. MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &0., RECEIPTS. 213 To IsocHRONiSE A Pendclcm Spring. — A pentlulum is iaochronal when its vibrations are performed '."^ equal times, whether the vibrations be larg-e or small, but it can only possess this property by bemg constrained to move in a cycloidal arc. This is managed by causing the spring to wrap and unwrap itself round two equal cycloidal cheeks, the diameter of whose generating circle is equal to half the length of the pendulum. Isochronism is closely approximated in practice by causing the pendulum to describe r, very small circular arc. To Whiten Silver Watch Dials. — Get a piece of cork, a jewel- ler's scrub brush, some puttice powder, a small japanned sauce- pan, a spirit lamp, a piece of wire bent into a bow, and a little vitriol Lay the dial on the cork, wet the end of the brush, dip it in the puttice powder, and scrub the dial very clean ; then put about a cupful of water in the saucepan, and enough vitriol to make :t very tart ; make it hot, lay the dial on the wire face up- wards, make it white hot over the spirit lamp, drop it flat into the vitriol and water, let it lay a few seconds, if it is at all stained put it in again for a short time ; if that does not take it out it must be scrubbed over again; the most particular point is getting the dial to the right heat. To Construct an J5olian Harp. — Make a box with the top, bot- tom, Hnd side.^ i^f thin wood, and the ends 1^ inch beech, form it the same leng h a^ the width of the wmdow in which it is to be placed The box -hould be 3 or 4 inches deep, and G or 7 inches wide In the lup of the box. which acts as a sounding board, make 3 circular holes about 2 inches in diameter, and an equal distance apart Glue across the sounding board, about 2^ inches from each end, 2 pieces of hard wood i inch thick, and i inch high, to serve as bridges You must now procure from any muii- cal instrument maker twelve steel pegs similar to those of a piano- forte, and 12 small brass pins Insert them in the following man- ner into the beech . hrst commence with a brass pin, then insert a steel peg, and so on, placing them alternately 4 in. apart, to the number of twelve Now for the other end, which j'ou must com- mence with a steel peg, exactly opposite the brass pin at the other end, then a brass pin, and so on, alternately, to the number of 12 ; by this arrangement you have a steel peg and a brass pin always oppo- site each ^ther, which is done so that the pressure ot the strings on the instrument shall be uniform Now string the instrument with 1 2 first violin strings, making a loop at one end of each string, which put over the brass pins, and wind the other ends round the oppo- site steel pegs Tune them in unison, but do not draw them tight. To increase the current of air. a thin board may be placed about 2 inches above the strings, supported at each end by 2 pieces of wood. Place the instrument in a partly opened window, and, to increase the diaft, open the opposite door. To Forge a Twist Drill. — It is necessary to forge a flat blade similar to a flat drill, and then twist this blade into the resem- blance required, then, with a light hammer and careful blows, ham- mer the twisted edges so that they will be thicker than the central line of the tool. This will give greater strength and a better drill, and, to cut well, the central hue or cutting point must be made 214 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, iC, RECEIPTS. quite thin Be careful to f^et tbe mme twut at the point of the drill as upon the body of the drill The ir.experienced often leave tho point straight, with no twist, like flat drill. Moulding Sand for Casting Buass or Iron. — The various kindu of good moulding sand employed in foundries for casting iron or brass, have been found to be of almost uniform chemical composi- tion, varying in grain, or the aggregate form only. It contains be- tween 93 and 96 parts silex, or grains of sand, aad from 36 to (i parts clay, and a little oxide of iron, in each 100 parts. Moulding; sand, which contains lime, magnesia, and other oxides of metal, is not applicable, particularly for the casting of iron or brass. S ich sand is either too close, wdl not stand or retain its form, or it wnll cause the metal to boil through its closeness. Reflxing Fluxes, for Metals. — Deflagrate, and afterwards pul- verize, 2 parts of nitre and 1 part of tartar. The followiiig fluxes answer very well, provided the ores be tieprived of all their sul- phur, or if they contain much earthy matter, because, in the latter case, they unite with them, and convert them into a thin glass, but, if any quantity of sulphur remains, their fluxes unite with it, and form a liver of sulphur, which has the power of destroying a portion of all the metals, consequently the assay must be, under such circumstances, very inaccurate. Limes'one, feldspar, fluor- spar, quartz, sand-slate, and slags, are all used as fluxes. Iron ores, on aceount of the argillaceous earth they contain, require calcareous additions ; and the copper ores, rather slags, or nitres- cent stones, than calcareous earth. Burning Iron Castings together. — The usual mode is by imbed- ding the castings in the sand, having a little space left vacant round about the joint where it is to be burned. Two gates must then be provided, one lying on a level with the lower side of thi.j space, and the other raised so that tl»e metal, which must be very hot, is poured in at the higher one ; it passes round, fills up tho space, and runs off at the lower gate. A constant supply of metal is thus kept up, till the i)arts of the casting are supposed to be on the eve of meltinjj. The lower gate is then closed, and the supply stopped. When cool, and the superfluous metal chipped off, it forms as strong a joint as if it had been original. Pot Metal. — Copper, 40 lbs.; lead, 16 lbs.; tin, U lbs. To Bend Glass Tubes.— Hold the tube in the upper part of the flame of a spirit-lamp, revolving it slowly between the lingers; when red hot it may be easily bent into any desired shape. To soften largo tubes a lamp with a double current of air should bo used, as it gives a mucii stronger iieat than the simple lamp. To Lessen Noisr in Workshdi-s — Place a piece of India-rubber under the feet of tlio machines or benches on which the machiiiei are ])laccd. To Solder Tortoisb Shell. — Bring the edges of the pieces of shell to lit each other, observing lo give the same inclination of grain to each then secure them in a piece (if jiaper, iind place them between hot irons or pincers; apply pressure, and let them cool. The heat must not be so great as to burn the shell, therefore try j^ first on a white piece of paper. Machinists, exgixeers, &c., receipts. 21^ To MAKE LiNSKED AXD CoTTON SEED OILS. — In making linseed oil quite a variety of machinery is used, more or less expensive accord- ing to the enterprize and capital of the manufacturer. The seed is first passed through iron rollers, to be crushed or ground, one of the rollers is made to revolve more rapidly than the other, which subjects each seed to a pulling as well as to a crushing process. The meal is taken from the mill to the ' chasers,' when it is subjected to another crushing process, more severe than the first. The chasers are 2 large circular stones about five feet diameter, and 18 inches thick, rolling upon a third stone in the manner of an old-fashioned bark or cider mill. These heavy stones start the oil from the seed, and to keep it from adhering to the chasers it is moistened with water. The meal is next put into an iron cylinder, which is kept revolving over a fire until the water is evaporated. Much of the skill of making oil depends upon this heating process. It must not be scorched, and yet it must be brought up to a high temperature, so that it will readily giVe out its oil. The presses are of various structure, some of them are patented, and others not open to public inspection. In one, the vats or hoops holding about 2 bushels each, were placed opposite each other against two immense beams or • plights, made fast in the foundations of the building. The FuUowers were forced down upon the meal by 2 large levers worked l\y hydraulic powers. The meal is kept under pressure about an hour, and the two presses work up about 92 bushels of seed every 24 hours, the mill being kept running night and day. The product is not far from 2 gals, of oil from a bushel of seed, a little more or less, according to the quality of the seed and the skill in pressing. The cakes, as taken from "the press, are generally sold by the ton without grinding, and are generally exported in this form, but when there is a market in the vicinity of the mill, the cakes are put under the chasers, ground into meal, bagged and sent to the feed stores. The price of the cake is from $30 to $40 per ton ; ground into meal it retails at about $2 per 100 lbs. The process of making the cotton seed oil and cake is nearly the same. The seed of the upland cotton is surrounded with a husk, to which the cotton adheres. It is surrounded with a soft down after it leaves the gin, and in this condition it is purchased from the planter. The seed makes better oil and better meal when it is deprived of this hull and down. The yield of oil is about 90 gallons per 100 bushels of the Sea Island, or 2 gals, to 56 lbs. of the hulled cotton seed. Black Dip for Brass.— Hydrochloric acid (commonly called smoking salts), 12 lb., sulphate of iron 1 lb., and pure white arsenic 1 lb. This dip is used in all the large factories in Birmingham, but the dip used in the London trade is 2 oz. of corrosive sublimate, in 1 pt. of the best vinegar, cork both air tight in a bottle, let it stand 24 hours, then it is fit for use. To Rk-cover HAM.MERS IX PiAKos — Get felt of graduated thickness, out It in strips the exact width, touch only the two ends with glue, not the part striking the strings. Hold in place with springs of narrow hoop iron. Abtificial Pearls. — Are made from beads of opaline glass filled 216 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. tvith gum, the polish of the glass being reduced by the vapor oC hydrofluoric acid. Stalba's Nickel Plating Process. — Consists in plating -witbi nickel, by the action of zinc upon salts of nickel, in the presence of chloride of zinc and the metal to be plated. By this process, Stalba states that he has succeeded in plating objects of wrought and cast, iron, steel, copper, brass, zinc and lead. It is only necessary that the size of the objects should permit them to be covered entirely by the plating liquid, and that their surfaces should be free from dirt. The following is the modus operandi : — A quantity of concentrated chloride of zinc solution is placed in a; cleaned metallic vessel, and to this is added '.n equal volume of water. This is heated to boiling, and hydrochloric acid is added drop by drop, until the precipitate which had formed on adding the water has disappeared. A small quantity ofrzinc powder is now added, which produces a zinc coating on the metal as far as the liquid extends. Enough of the nickel salt (the chloride or sulphate answers equally well) is now introduced to color the liquid distinctly green ; the objects to be plated are placed in it, together with some zinc clippings, and the liquid is brought to boiling. The nickel is precipitated in the coursei of 15 minutes, and the objects will be found to be completely coated.. The coating varies in lustre with the character of the metallic surface ; when this is polished, the plating is likewise lustrous and vice versa. Salt of cobalt afl'ords a cobalt plating, which is steel gray in color, not so lustrous as the nickel, but more liable to tarnish, Guaoi.no Streams. — Multiply the square root of the cube of tho height in inches of the water on the sill of the weir or guage by tho constant 17.13, wUich will give the number of gallons per minute. If tho water huatany initial velocity it must be determined by experiment, and i"ti that case multiply the square of the height by the square of the velocity, and by 0.8 ; to the product add the cube of the height, extract tho square root of the sum, and multiply by 17.13 as before. To PREVENT pirnxo TTTTn Small-pox. — As soon as the disease is distinguished, apply an ointment made of lard and charcoal to the face, neck, hands, ' secured to a block of wood in such a manner that the very points only may be jointed, so that the cutting edge of the same may be in a straight line, or circle, if it is a circular saw ; every tooth should cut a little as the saw is worked. The teeth of a hand saw for all kinds of work should be filed fleaming, or at an angle on the front edge, while the back edges may be filed fleaming, or square across the blade. The best way to file a circular saw for cutting wood across the grain, is to dress every fifth tooth square across, and apart one twentieth of an inch shorter than the others, which should be filed fleaming at an angle of about forty degrees. As regards such saws as are used for cutting up large logs into lumber it is of the utmost importance to have them filed at such an angle as will ensure the largest amount of work with the least expenditure of power. The following diagrams will help to illustrate our meaning. Fig. 1. shows the shape of teeth whick nearly all ex- » Fio. 1, 218 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. perienced mill-men consider as thaUstandard form which combines the greatest amount of strength and capacity for rapid work, with the minimum of driving power while doing the work. Figure No. 2 represents a passable form of teeth which are capa- ble of doing a good deal of work, but their great weakness lies in their slender points. Look out for " breakers" when teeth of this description are passing through dry spruce or hemlock knots. Fig. 2. Fig. No. 3 illustrates the appearance of one of those iutolerabk* wood rasps which are altogether too common in saw-mills. Only think what an appalling waste of valuable power is required ta drive a "jigger " like this through a large log I Fig. 3. Fig. 4, at a, is intended to show the method of ascertaining th* proper angle, that of sixty degrees, at whidi such saws ■t/ioidil hk, iilcd. The diagram being solf-e.xplanatory requires but little furtlK'i* elucidation here. A quarter circle with lines radiatin from the centre towards the circumference is represented near the verge of the segment of a circular saw. The lower part corresponds with tho level of the horizon, and the higher part iit ItO" corresponds Machinists, engineers, &c., receipts. 219 with the zenith or meridian, where the sun appears at noon-daj. Exactly half-way up is 45° ; look up a little higher and you will find 60» indicated by the radiating line which runs parallel with the angle of the tooth of the saw and this is the guide you must follow in filing. The same rule is seen applied to a straight mill ^ Many good authorities contend that mill saws should in on cast fie^set w.ith the instrument commonly used for that purpose, but 220 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. that in lieu thereof the teeth should be spread out at the points with the swage or upset to a sufficient extent to permit the body of the saw to operate without binding. Both instruments require to be skilfully handled, and the swage, when used in this way, has proved itself equal to every emergency without the risk of break- ing the teeth. It would be quite safe to say that the saw-set should only be used on saws of this description with the most extreme caution and care. Every manufacturer, however, has his own opinion, and consequent practice on the subject, some contending that one way is right and the other directly the reverse. To Repair Fractured Circular Saws. — The best way to do this is to drill a small round hole at the termination of the crack, which effectually prevents its further extension. I have seen some circular saws very neatly repaired by riveting thin clamps to each side of the fracture, both clamps and rivets being countersunk so they will be level with the surface of the saw, and placed in such a position across the cract as to impart the greatest possible strength to the weakest place. A table of the speed of circular saws can be seen at page 169, this, however, does not embrace the velocity of shingle machine saws, which ought to make at least 1400 revolutions per minute. To Mend Broken Cross cut Saws. — In the first place scarf oflf the broken edges in such a manner that when lapped over each other they will be about the same thickness as the rest of the plate, and rivet them together loosely with iron rivets inserted through holes which must be punched for that purpose ; the ends must be united with great accuracy so that the teeth, &c., of the saw may range truly. Now place the saw in the fire, then a flux of powdered borax and sal ammoniac is tiowed all over it after having it raised to the proper heat. See page 173 for preparing and using the composition. Return the saw to the fire and when it is raised to the proper welding heat, place it on the anvil and unite the joint as rapidly as possible with the hammer; be careful not to heat so hot as to injure the steel. When ihe job is well done, and the part properly tempered, it will be found as strong as the rest of the plate. I know one blacksmith in Canada who told naothat this class of work was the best paying part of liis business. Power of Engines. — Horse-power in steam engines is calculated as the power which would raise 3.3,000 lbs. a foot high in a minute, or 90 lbs. at the rate of 4 miles au hour. One horse-power is equal to the lifting, by a pump, of 250 hogslieads of water ten feet in an hour. Or it would drive 100 spindles of cotton yarn twist, or 500 spindles of No. 48 mule yarn, or 1000 of No. 1 10, or 12 power looms. One horse-power is produced by 19 lbs. of Newcastle coals, 50 lbs. of wood, or 34 lbs. of culm. Coals 1, wood 3, and culm 2, give equal heats in the production of steam. Sixteen lbs. of Newcastle coal converts 100 lbs. of water into steam. A bushel of coal per hour raises steam to 15 lbs. the square inch, whose velocity is 1350 feet per second, and 2 bushels raise it to 120 lbs., or velocity of 3800 feet per second. A horse- power requires from 5 to 7 gallons of water per minute for conden- Btttion of steam. A steam engine whose cylinder is 31 inches, with Machinists, engineers, &c., receipts. 221 |17 double strokes per minute, performs the constant work of 40 horses with 5 tons of coal per day. One of 19 inches and 25 strokes of 12 horses, with 1^ tons per day. They raise 20,000 cubic feet of water 24 feet for every hundred weight of coals. One bushel of good coals raises from 24 to 32,000,000 lbs. one foot per minute. Four bushel of coals per hour, with a cylinder of 31^ inches and ITj strokes of 7 feet per minute, is a force equal to 40 horses con- stantly. A rotative double engine, with a cylinder of 23.75 inches, making 21.5 strokes of 5 feet per minute, is a 20 horse-power; and a cylinder of 1 7.5, making 25 strokes of 4 feet is a 10 horse-power ; the consumption of coals being proportional. On Steam Boilers. — Regarding the steam engine as under Pro- vidence, one of the most powerful civilizing agents in existence, and the procuring cause of the bread of many thousands of our fellow-beings, it seems highly proper to place on record some well- known facts regarding boiler construction and the properties of steam, &c., in order that such knowledge may be used to mitigate the number of those lamentable accidents which, in too many cases, owe their origin to ignorance and incapacity. Regarding the/orm of boilers, it is now an ascertained fact that the maximum strength is obtained by adopting the cylindrical or circular form, the haycock, hemispherical, and waggon-shaped boilers, so general at one time, have now deservedly gone almost out of use. Good boiler plate is capable of withstanding a tensile strain of 50,000 lbs. or 60,000 lbs. on eve^y square inch of section ; but it will only bear a third of this strain without permanent derangement of struc- ture, and 4000 lbs., or 3000 lbs. even, upon the square inch, is a preferable proportion. It has been found that the tenacity of boiler-plate increases with the temperature up to 570^^, at which point the tenacity commences to diminish. At 32° the cohesive force of a square inch of section was 56,000 lbs.; at 570° it was [66,500 lbs. ; at 720°, 55,000 lbs. ; at 1050°, 32,000 lbs. ; at 1240° i22,000 lbs. ; and at 1317°, 9,000 lbs. Strips of iron, when cut in the [direction of the fibre, were found by experiment to be 6 per cent, stronger than when cut across the grain. The strength of riveted joints has also been demonstrated by tearing them directly asun- der. In two different kinds of joints, double and single riveted, [the strength was found to be, in the ratio of the plate, as the numbers 100, 70, and 56. Assuming the strength of the plate to be 100 The strength of a double riveted joint would be, after knowing for the adhesion of the surfaces of the plate 70 And the strength of a single riveted joint 56 These figures, representing the relative strengths of plates and joints in vessels required to be steam and water tight, may be safely relied on as perfectly coiTect. The accidental overheating of a boiler has been found to reduce the ultimate or maximum strength of the plates from 65,000 to 45,000 lbs. per square inch of section. The greatest caution should be exercised against low water and incrustations in the boiler, for, in that case, the plates [over the furnace are apt to get red hot, and,when in this state, they mave lost five-sixths of their strength, and there is then danger of 22^ MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPT^* bursting the boiler, even at tlie common working pressure, ag ft force of less than one-sixth of the usual strength of the plates will be found sufficient to do so. To let in a great body of water on the incandescent plates at such a time o^lyi-^^^reas^s the danger, by suddenly generating a large volume of highly elastic steam. The proper way, during such emergency, is not to draw the fires, for then there is no time for that, but to open the furnace doors and dash in a few bucketsful of water upon the fire, and blow oflf the steam as rapidly as possible. Every description of boiler used n manufactories or on board of steamers should be constructed to a bursting pressure of 400 to 500 lbs. on the square inch i and loco- motive engine boilers, which are subject to much harder duty to a bursting pressure of 600 to 700 lbs puch boilers are usualy worked at 80 to 100 lbs. on the inch, but are frequently worked up to a pressure of 120, and, when rising steep grades, sometimes even as high as 200 lbs. to the square inch. In a boiler subject to such an enormous working pressure, it requires the utmost «are and attention on the part of the engineer to satisfy ^^i^'self that the flat surfaces of the fire box are capable of resisting that P assure and that every part of the boiler is so nearly balanced in its POwers of resistance L tliat, when one part is at the pomt ot rupture every other part is at the point of yielding to the same uniform force for we find that, taking a locomotive boiler of the usual size even with a pressure of 100 lbs. on the square inch it retains arexplnding Lee within its interior of nearly ^^OfO tons which is rather increased than diminished at a high speed. To show the strain upon a high-pressure boiler, 30 feet ong, 6 feet diameter, having 2 centre Hues, each 2 feet 3 inches diameter, working at a pressure of 50 lbs. on the square incti, we have only to multiply the number of the square feet of surface, 1030 exposed to pressure bv 321 and we huve the force of 3319 tons, which such a boi cr has to sustain. To go farther, and estimate the pressure at 4d0 lbs. on tSe square inch, which a 'well-constructed boiler of this s.ze w.l bear before it bursts, and v/e have the enormous force o 29,871 or nearly sSooO tons, bottled up within a cylind.r 30 leet long and 6 fett d-.ameter. Boilers in actual use should be tested at least once a vearbv forcing water into them by the hand feed-pump unti fhrSety-valve is lifted, which should.be loaded with at leas tw ce the w.-rking pressure for the occasion. It a toiler will not srand his pressure it is not safe, and either its strength should be id ed «l the working pressu^ should '-.d;'-."f«d. Internal flues such as contain the furnace in the interior of the boiler should be kept as near as possible to the oyl.ndncal form ; and, as wroudi iron will yield to a force tending to crush it about one- Lif o wla wouhl tear it asunder, the flues should m no case exceed on '-! alt- the diameter of the boiler, with the same thickness of iTatcs hey may be considered ecjually safe with the other parts. The force of compression being so diflerent from that of tension. creaLr safety wiuld be ensured if the diameter of the internal ^ues were in^he ratio 1 to 2i instead of 1 to 3 of the diameter of the boiler. As regards the relative .size and f.t^engtl "t »ues it may be stated that a circular flue 18 inches in diameter will resist MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, tC, RECEIPTS. 223 double ihe pressure of oie 3 feet in diimeter. Mill owners with jilen.y of roo u and a limit d experience wita steam power would do wdl to dispense wi.li boilers containing many flues, tUe exnease IS greater and the durability bss tiaan wliere there is two or turee only. The foam caused by a large number of flues is apt" to d-ceiva an inexperienced engineer, causing him to believe that there is plenty of water in the boiler when be tries the gauge cock, when there is really but very little, oftea causing an explosion, a ime mill-owners insert a fusible plug in the crown of the 'orn^co to indicate danger from low water. As common lead melts ai, 620° a rivet ot tljis metal, 1 inch in diameter, inserted immediately over the fire place, will give due notice, so that relief may be obtained before the internal pressure of the steam exceeds that of the resist- ing power of the heated plates. In France, an extensive use is made of fusible metal plates, generally covered by a perforated metallic disk, which protects the alloy of which the plate is com- posed, and allows it to ooze through as soon as the steam has attained the temperature necessary to insure the fusion of the plaCe which varies from 280° to 350°. The reader will find a number of such alloys under the tabular view of alloys and their meltin»- heats, page 243 Another method is the bursting plate, fixed in a tranoe and attached to some convenient part of the upper side of the boder, of such thickness and ductility as to cause rupture when the pressure exceeds that on the safety valve. But, beyond all ques- tion, constant use should be made on all boilers of a good and reli- able system of steam gauges, glass tubes, guage cocks, safety valves &c. By means of th« glass tubes affixed to the fronts of the boilers the height of tho water within the boiler is indicated at once, for the water will stand at the same height in the tube that it stands in the boder, communication being established with the water below and the steam above, by means of stop cocks. The guage cocks are cocks pene 'rating the boiler at different heights, and which when opened tell whether it is water or steam that exists at th& level at which they are respectively inserted. The average level of the water in the boiler should be above the centre of the tube, ^u u- I ^^"^^^^ <^f the guage cocks should always run water, and the highest blow steam. The steam gauge indicates the pressure ot steam by a hand on a dial. It sometimes happens that the glass tube gets choked up, and, to correct this, the cocks connecting the tube with the boiler should be so constructed that the tube may be blown through with the steam, to remove any obstacle that may interfere with i1^ use. By blowing off the boiler frequentlv, a large amount of calcareous, and, on ocean vessels, saline matter, will be got rid of, which ctherwise would cause trouble and per' plexity by forming incrustations and denosits on the boiler, and which interferes most seriously with the transmission of the heat trom the boiler plates to the water. In many cases the plates get red hot, causing the scale to crumble ; the water thus suddenly admit- ted to the highly heated surface is at once transformed into hishlv rarefied steam, and the boiler is bursted. Too much caution cannot be exercised to see that the safety valve is properly loaded and that no impediment exists to impair its free action, and that all the other apertures, valves, &c., belonging tothebyjler are in good 224 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. ■working order, but be specially particular that the care and mano agemeut of the whole is entrusted to a person well recommended for caution and intelligence in his profession. Ko fact is better as- certained than that the great majority of boiler explosions have resulted from the employment of ignorant and incapable prac- titioners, who, being utterly oblivious to all sense of danger on their own account, cannot be expected to care for th* safety of others. For cements for Steam Boilers, &c., see page 182. For pre- venting incrustation, see page 189, to which 1 will here add that Irish moss is also a good preventive of scale. Regarding the power of boilers, it may be stated that aboiler 30 feet long and 3 feet in diameter,will aflbrd 30 x 3 x 3.14 x 2 — 141 .30 square feet of surface, or steam for 14 horse-power, if 10 feet are assumed f-r one horse- power. Two short boilers are preferable to one long one, on ac- count of having more fire surface, — it being always necessary to have as much tire surface as possible to make the best use of the fuel — as the hotter the surface is kept, the less fuel it takes to do the same amount of work. In some localities, such as the Itimb.ering territory of New-Brunswick, it would be no economy to save fuel, many of the mills driven by water being put to a heavy expense in removing and burning off the debris. When there is a large furnace it gives the hreman a better chance to keep the steam regu- lar, for when clearing out one part of the furnace, he can keep a hot fire in the other. For each horse-power of tlac engine theie ought to be at least one square foot of grate, and three feet would be better. In setting a boiler, arrangement should be made to carry on combustion witli the greatest possible heat. This requires good non-conductors of heat, such as brick, with which to surround the fire. If these bricks are of a white color, the combustion is more perfect than if of a dark color. The roof, as well as the sides, of the furnace should be of white fire-brick. The bars of the furnace should be 18 or 20 inches below the boiler or crown of the furnace. The fire should be kept open and thin, and frequently and spar- ingly supplied, to allow the air to enter between the bars, for the better consumption of the inflammable gases. The bars should slope downward toward the back ])art, about half an inch to the foot. The ashes should be often cleaned out, and not suffered to accumulate, otherwise it will stop the draft, burn out the bars,' and take more fuel. A crack in a boiler plate may be closed by boring holes in the direction of" the crack and inserting riveta, with large heads, so as to cover up the imj)erfection. If the top of the furnace be bent down, from the boiler having been accident- ally allowed to get short of water, it may be set uj) again by a screw- jack, a tire of wood having been previously made lieneatb the in- jured plate ; but it will in general be nearly as expeditious a course to remove the plate and introduce a new one, and the result will be more satisfactory. There is one object that requires very parti- cular attention, and which must be of a certain size to produce the best effect, and that is the flue leading from the boiler to the chim- ney, as wi'll as the size and elevation of the chimney itself. Every chimnev should be built several feet above the niiil house, BO that then; la no obHtructioii to break the air from llie to{) of tlio cbiuiney. In England a factory chimney suitable for u -0 horse* . MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C.7 RECEIPTS. 226 power boiler is commonly made about 20 inches square inside, and 80 feet high, and these dimensions are correct for consumption of 15 lbs. coal per horse-power per hour, a common consumption for factory engines. In the Dominion of Canada and the United States, chimneys of plate iron, from 30 to 50 feel high, are in quite common use by owners of saw, and other mills, and they seem to answer every requirement. Composition for Covering Boilers, &o. — Road scrapings, free from stones, 2 parts ; cow manure, gathered from the pasture, 1 part ; mix thoroughly, and add to each barrowful of the mixture 6 lbs of fire clay ; ^ lb. of flax shoves or chopped hay, and 4 ozs. teased hair. It must be well mixed and chopped ; then add as much water as will bring it to the consistency of mortar, — the more it is worked the tougher it is. It may either be put on with the trowel or daubed on with the hand, the first coat about 1 inch thick. When thoroughly dry, another, the same thickness, and so on, three inches is quite enough, but the more the better. Let each coat be scored like plaster, to prevent cracks, the last coat light and smooth, so as to receive paint, whitewash, &c. The boiler, or pipes, must first be brushed with a thin wash of the mixture to ensure a catch. Rule for Size of Cylikder. — The requisite diameter of cylinder for a 25 horse beam engine is 28 inches, and about 5 feet stroke. The nominal horse-power of any sized cylinder can be found by the following formulas : — For low pressure or beam engines, divide the area of cylinder by 25, which will give the number of horse-po,wer. For high pressure horizontal engines divide the area of cyhnder's diameter by 125, which will give the number of horse-power, including all friction. Stroke op Engines. — Tlie stroke of an engine varies according to circumstances, which the designer must take into consideratioUg but the general rule is to make the stroke about twice the diameter of the cylinder. The diameter of the fly wheel should be about 4 times the stroke of the engine, and the rim should weigh about 3 cwt. per horse poorer. Balance Wheels. — Every balance wheel should be speeded up so as to run twice or three times as fast as the crank shaft it is intended to balance. When a balance wheel is applied in this way it makes the machine run a great deal more steadily, for, when the balance wheel ig geared into the crank shaft, and runs Wo or three times faster than the crank shaft, it forms a power cf 'tsclf, ■wtien going over the centre, which propels the crank shaft until jt reaches the quarter where it again takes its power from the machine. Although it takes an additional shaft and gears to apply C balance wheel in this way, the saving of metal in the balance 'ZV'hcel fully compensates for the extra labour, for, when a balance wheel is speeded three times as fast as the crank shaft, it needs only one third of the metal in it that iC would were it not speeded up at all, and if balance wheels were applied in this way gener- ally it would make all engines run far more steadily. To Straighten Shafting. — This should be done by centreing, then put it into a Inthe, and square the ends up with what is called a side tooL. After doing this, take a piece of chalk and try it jQ p 226 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C,, RECEIPTS. several places, to find out where the worst crooks are : then, if you have not a machine for springing shafting, spring it with a lever where the most crook is, and continue this operation till the shaft is straight. Tpbnijjg Shafting. — To do this properly, two chips should always be run over the shaft, for the reason that it saves filing and leaves the shaft truer and more round, and on shafts thus turned, the time saved in filing more than compensates for the time lost in turning. Before you commence you will put your feed belts or gear on a coarse feed ; turn off one a sixty-fourth of an inch larger than the size required ; having turned off this chip, com- mence the finishing chip, and turn it small enough to have the puUy wring on about an inch without tiling. This will leave it large enough to file and finish. If there are couplings to go on a shaft, with holes smaller than the holes in the pulleys, the ends of the shaft, where they fit on, should be turned down to a sixty-fourth of an inch of the size required before any part of the shaft is finished ; that is, every part of a shaft should be turned to within a sixty-fourth of an inch of the size required before any part if it has the finish-chip taken off. The reason for that is that it leaves every part of the shaft perfectly true, which would not be the case were it done otherwise. Having done this, you will file the shaft so that the pulleys will slide on, and the couplings so that they will drive on ; polish the shaft with a pair of polishing- clamps and some emery and it is done. VVoRKiNQ Steel for Tools. — In working steel for tools, great care should be taken to hammer all sides alike, for if one side is hammered more than another it will cause it to spring in harden- ing. Again, steel, when being hammered, should be heated as hot as it will stand, until finishing and should then be hammered until almost black hot, for the reason that it sets the grain finer, and fives the tool a better edge. The reason for heatin;^ the steel so ot while hammering is simply because it makes the steel tougher when hardened, and softer when annealed ; while, if it were worked at a low red heat, the continued percussive shocks of the hammer would so harden /C as to make it nlmost impossible to anueal it, and at the same time render it brittle when hardened. Tkmperinc Tooto. — Drawing the temper of tools is usually dono In r, chcrcoal flamo, and to draw the temper of a tool properly it should be held in tbc thickest part, or the part not requiring any temper .owards the fire, and in the meantime, should be often wiped with a picco of waste or rag, dipped in oil. The oil keeps the temper even, and prevents it drawing mure to one t)lace than unotiier. And in drawing the temper of any tool it' should be drawn very slowly, otlierwise it will run loo far ere you are aware of it. Lancet blades and razors should be drawn to a straw color. Knife blades and chisels jhould be drawn to a copper or almost red color. Plane irons, shaving knives and shoemakers knives the same temper; cold chisels and stone drills, should bo drawn to a dark blue. Fluted reamers should only be drawn to u straw color, on !,hc end, as they never bfeak elsewhere, and keep their size lonpor by leaving the lips hard. Half round or tapering reamers, also taps, dies, and drill.-i, sliould be drawn to a titraw MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &G., RECEIPTS. 227 color. Jijucs and gauges, also common lathe tools, need no drawinpr, being tempered enough when merely hardened. Malleable Cast Iron. — The great secret of this sort of work 13 the annealing; which if not done properly the castinp^ are ^f no use at all. The best mode is to take an iron pan, say en: loot square; put in a layer of charcoal, then some of the castings, then another layer. When the pan is full cover it over with some sand, to keep the charcoal ,';rom burning away. Put on an :ld piece of iron for a lid to cover r.ll, put it in the annealing furnace, and get the heat up quite«slow and gradually, taking care not to get the heat up too quick. After you have got it to the proper !:ulverize Jill togo- ther and iiicoriioratc throughly, use by powdering all over the iron while it i.s hot, then plunging it in cold water. To .MAKE I'.OFUX.— Alum, 2 ozs. ; dilute with water ; and mix with 2 ozs. potash, Ijoil in a pot half an hour over a gentle Iwe, take it •MACHINISTS. ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS, 231 out of the -water, add 2 ozs. gem salt in powder, as much of alkal- ine sal' lbs. honey, and 1 of cow's milk, mix all together, set it in the sun for 3 days and the borax is ready for use. This will go twice as far in a ol ksmlth's shop as common borax. Welding Cast Steel— Silver sand 2 lbs. plaster of Paris, 1 lb. ; mix thoroughly. Heat your article and dust it with the above, placa it in the fire again until you get a red heat and it will weld Respirator. — An excellent respirator may be made of a thick sheet of carded cotton wool placed between two pieces of musliuo Unequalled for arresting dust, steel panicles &c. AsxEALixG Steel.— For small pieces of steel, take a piece of gas pipe 2 or 3 inclies in diameter, and put the pieces in it, first heat- ing one end of the pipe, and dra^ving it together, leaving the other end open to look into. When the pieces are of a cherry red, covor the fire with saw dust, use a charcoal fire, and leave the steel in over night. To DRILL HardenedSteel.— Cover A-our steel with melted bees wax; '■when coated andcoldmake a hole in the wax with a fine pointed aee^ die -;r other article the size of hole you require, put a drop ^tstrong ni.ri J acid upon it, after an hour rinse off, and apply again, U, will gradually eat through- To Prevent Iron Rusting.— Give it a coat of linseed oil and whiting, mixed together in the form of a paste. It is easily removed and will preserve iron from rusting for years. To Cast Brass solid.— The metal should not be run an;- hotter than is necessary toinsure sharp castings. The most probable cause of the honey combings o*" castings is that the air cannot get out of the way ; and there :ught to be proper vents mad- fo" it from the highes'. parts of thv. mould ; the metal shouid b : run in near or atthe bottom of the mould. Fabout 1 lb. of Lad b. added to cve-^' ry IG Ibs.of old brass, wh.n ju:t :,: the meltingpoint,sclid good bras- ses will be the result, in melting old brass, the "inc. c: lead, con^ tained in it (when fluid) o.xidizes ireely. consequently the propor- tions of the metal are altered, and re:^uir in additi-^n . imiiar to the above. If the brass has not been re-cast r little less lead will do, but if re-cast several times it may take the full quantity. To Reco\-er the Tin from Old Britannia.- Jlelt the metal, and while hot sprinkle sulphur over it ; and stir h up for a short time, tliis burns the other metals out of the tin, which may then be used for any purpose desired. Glue for Labelling on Metals.— Boiling water, 1 qt. : pulver- ized borax, 2 ozs. • gum shellac, 4 ozs. Boil till dissolved. Used for attaching labels to metals, or it will do to write inscriptions with, and dust or dab on a little bronze powder over it, varnishing over the bronze. Russia Sheet Iron.— Russia sheet iron is, in the first instance, a very pure articl?, rendered exceedingly tough and flexible by refining and annealing. Its bright, glossy surface is partially a silicate, and partially an -xide of iron, and is produced by passing the hot sheet, moistened with a solution of Nv'ood-ashes, through polish d teel rollers Composite Iron Railings.— Th. process by which this light elegant and cheap fabric is manufactured, is as follows :— Rods 232 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C.,^ RECEIPTS. andbarsofwronght-iron are cut to the lengths desired for the pattern and subjected to a process called cnmpmg, by ^hich they are ben to the dtsired shape. These rods are then laid m the form of the design, and cast-iron moulds are affixed at those pomts whSre a connection is desired ; the moulds are then failed with melted metal, and immediately you have a complete railing of KtifuTdesign. Casting in iron moulds has this great advantage orer the old slnd moulding, it does not require any time for cool- fnTas the metal is no sooner run than the moulds may be removed an^d used a?ain immediately on another section of the work and besides it I so much more easily effected. By the combination of wrought and cast-iron in this process, the most curious and com- plex designs may be produced with great rapidity and cheap- ness. VoN BiBUA's Alloy for MEOALS.-Bismuth, 27.2 7 parts ; lead, 59 09 parts tin, 13.64 parts. If the cast objects be bitten with dilute nitric acid 'washed with water, and rubbed with a woollen rag the SeyatedslJts become bright while the sunken portions are dull, and the casting acquires a^dark gray appearance, with an antique lustre Without biting, the color is light-gray^ New Sheathing MkxAL.-This alloy is made by melting 2^ parts of copper m one crucible, in another 9 parts of zinc, 87 ot lead, 1 bart ?Fr^ercury, and * part of bismuth, then mixmg the contents Sf both crucibles cohering the surface with charcoal dust, and stirrfng weU till all are incorporated. It is stated that the rner- cufvTn this al oy protects-both the zinc and copper from the action of sea^wSer The contents of the crucible are run into ingots, and '"IkI" TuB?MAKUFACTrEE.-In the P^e^^t method. of manufac- turing the patent welded tube, the end of the ske p is bent to the circufar form, its entire length is raised to the welding heat in an annroDriate furnace, and, as it leaves the furnace almost at the appropriate iniii^ , ^ ^ ^y the chain of a draw-bench, K thVmaS^Tof Vi'rerS^olgh l pair of tongs with two bell Bhavied jaws ; these are opened at the time of introducing the end of a skelp which is welded without the agency of a mandril. By ?hisinSnimrs arrangement wrought iron tubes may be made from Se dZe ?r of 6 infhes internally and about 1-8 to 3-8 of an inch thick to as small as 1-4 of an inch diameter and 1-10 bore, and so idmirabirisThe oining effected iu those of the best description ?W they will withstaucl the greatest pressure of water steam or Las to whch they have been subjected, and they adm. of being bent both in tlJ heated and cold state, almost with impunity Sometimes ?he tubes are made one upon the other when great SnSs is required ; but those stout pipes, and those larger than 3 nchc-s are bv^t seldom required. The wrouglit iron tubes of hy- drostatic presses which measure about ^, an inch internally and J JoTs of aninch thick in the metal, are frequently subjected to a ^XfTs? &"^-nr.t SrduiT?utera'e formed of rolled metal which is cut to' the desired width by mean., of "-volving discs ; in Urge sizes of tub.s, the metal is parUally curved in Us I ngjj by means of a pair of rolls, when in this condition it is passca MACH'INISTS, KNOINIIERS, AC, RKOEIPTS. 233 through a steel hole or a die, a plug being held in such a position as allows the metal to pass between it and the interior of the hole. Oil is used to lubricate the metal, the motion is communicated by power, the drawing apparatus being a pair of huge nippers, which holds the brass, and is attached to a chain and revolves round a windlass or cylinder. The tube in its unsoldered state is annealed, bound roimd at intervals of a few inches with iron wire, and solder and borax applied along the seam. The t.peration of soldering is completed by passing the tube through an air stove, heated with " cokes '' or "breezes" which melts the solder, and unites the two eyes of the metal, and forms a perfect tube ; it is then immersed m a solution of sulphuric acid, to remove scaly deposits on its sur° face, the wire and extra solder having been previously removed • it is then drawn through a " finishing hole plate " when the tube is completed. Mandril drawn tubes are drawn upon a very accurately turned steel mandril, by this means the internal diameter is rendered smooth. The tubes drawn by this process are well adapted for telescopes, syringes, small pump cylinders, &c. The brass tubes for the boilers of locomotive engines are now made by casting and drawing without being soldered, and some of them are drawn taper in their thicliness. Tubes from 1-10 inch internal diameter and 3 or ten inches long, up to those of two or three inches diameter and 4 or 5 feet long, are drawn vertically by means of a stronsc chain wound on a barrel by wheels and pinions, as in crane. In Donkin's tube drawing machine, which is applicable to making tubes, or rather cylinders, for paper-making and other machinery^ as large as 26j inches diameter, and 6^ feet long, a vertical screw is used, the nut of which is turned round by toothed wheels driven by six men at a windlass. The fluted tubes of pencil cases are drawn through ornamental plates, with elevations and depressions corresponding to the impres- sions left on the tube. Damascus Twist and Stub-Twist Gun-Barrels. — The twisted barrels are made out of long ribbands of iron, wound spirally around a mandril, and welded on their edges by jumping them on the ground, or rather on an anvil embedded therein. The plain stub barrels arc made in this manner, from iron manufactured from a bundle of stub-nails, welded together, and drawn out into rib- bands, to insure the possession of a material most thoroughly and intimately worked. The Damascus barrels arc made from a mix- ture of stub-nails and clippings of steel in given proportions, pud- dled together, made into a bloom, and subsequently passed through all the stages of the manufacture of iron, in order to obtain an iron that shall be of an unequal quality and hardness, and therefore display different colors and markings when oxidized or browned. Other twisted barrels are made in the like manner, except that the bars to form the ribbands arc twisted whilst red hot, like ropes, some to the right, others to the left, and which are sometimes \a.mu nated together for greater diversity. They are subsequently again drawn into the ribbands and wound upon the mandril, and fre- quently two or three differently prepared pieces are placed side by side to form the complex v'.nd ornamental figures for the barrels oj 2S4^ MACHINISTS,' ENGINEERS," &C.," llEOEIPTSi^ fowling-pieces, described as stub-twist, wire-twist, Damascus-twist, &c. Sometimes Damascus gun-barrels are formed by arranging twenty-five thin bars of iron and mild steel in alternate layers, welding the whole together, drawing it down small, twisting it like a rope, and again welding three such ropes, for the formation of the ribband, which is then spirally twisted to form a barrel, that exhibits, when finished and acted upon by acids, a diversified, laminated appearance, resembling, when properly managed, an ostrich feather. , Manufacturing Chains.— For this purpose the iron is cut off with a plain chamfer, as from the annular form of the links their iextremities cannot slide asunder when struck. Every succeeding link is bent, introduced, and finally welded. In some of these [welded chains the links are no more than I an inch long, and the iron wire \ inch diameter. These are made with great dexterity by a man and a boy, at a small fire. The curbed chains are welded in the ordinary way and twisted afterwards, a few links being made red-hot at a time for the purpose. The massive cable chains 'are made much in the same manner, although partly by aid of 'machinery. The bar of iron, now one, one and a half, or even [two inches in diameter, is heated, and the scarf is made as a plain 'chamfer, by a cutting machine ; the link is then formed by insert- ing the edge of the heated bar within a loop in the edge of an oval 'disk, which may be compared to a chuck fixed on the end of a lathe mandril. The disk is put in gear«by the steam engine; it inakes exactly one revolution and throws itself out of motion. This bends the heated extremity of the iron into an oval figure. After- Iwards it is detached from the rod with a chamfered cut by the cut- bng machine, which, at one stroke, makes the second scarf of the detached link, and the first of that next to be curled up. The link is now threaded to the extremity of the chain, closed together and transferred to the fire, the loose end being carried by a traverse 'crane. When the link is at the proper heat, it is returned to tlie knvil, welded, and dressed off between top and bottom tools, after [which the cast iron transverse stay is inserted, and the link haviag been closed upon the stay, the routine is recommenced. Th- work 'commonly requires three men, and the scarf is placed at the side '«f the oval link, and fiat Avay through the same. In similar chains made by hand it is, perhaps, more customary to weld the link at the crown, or small end. Button Manufacture.— Metal buttons are formed of an inferior kind of brass, pewter, or other metallic compositions. For button metal, see a variety of alloys on ])agcs lai and 103. Buttons with shanks are usually made of these compositions, which is supplied to the manufacturers in sheets of the reciuired tliickness. By means of lly presses and i)unches, circular disks called hlanks, are cut out of these sheets. This is mostly performed by females, who can furnish about :W blanks per minute, or 12 gross per hour. Hand jiunching is the general mode of cutting out blanks, but more complicated machines, which cut out 8 or ID blanks at a time, are in use. After being punched, the edges of the blanks are very sharp, and require to be smootiicd and rounded. Their surfaces arc llieu idauisLed on the face by placing them separately in u dio -SUeaU^ISTS- ENOINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 236 under a small st&tLp, ahd allowing them to receive a smart blow from a polished steel hammer, lii this state they ."re ready to receive the shanks or small metal loops by r/hi^h they ire attached to the dress. They are made by a machine in jvrich a coil of wire is gradually advanced towards a pair cf shears which cuts ofif short pieces. A metal finger then presses cgain:t the middle of oach piece, first bending it end then pressing it into a vice, when it se compressed so as to form a loop ; a hammer then strikes the twc ends, spreading them into a fiat surface, and the shank is pushed out of the machine ready for use. The sht.nks are attached to the blanks by women, with iron '.vire, solder and rosin. They are then put into an oven, andj v/hen firmly united, form plain buttons. If A crest or inscription ?.s ■t7anted, it is placed in a .^.ie and stamped. Buttons are gilded by gold cmalgam, by being put into an earthen pan with the proper quantity of gold to cover them, amalgamated with mercury in the follow .ng manner: the jjold is put into an iron ladle in thin strips, iind a email quantity of mercury, say 1 part of mercury to 8 of gold, added to it, the ladle is held over the fire till the gold and mercury are perfectly united. This amal- gam being put into the pan with the buttons, r.s much aquafortis, diluted with water, as will wet them cM over, is thrown in, and they are stirred up with a brush till the acid, by its afidnity to the copper in the buttons, carries the amalgam to every part of their surface, giving it the appearance of silver ; this done, the acid is washed away with clean water. This is called the quicking pro- cess. In drying off, the pan of buttons is heated by a charcocl fire expelling the mercury in the form of a vapor, %7hich, under the improved system, is conducted into an oblong irou flue or gallery, gently sloped downwards, having at its end a small rurtical tube dipped into a water cistern, for condensing the mercury, and a large vertical pipe for promoting the draught of the products of the combustion. The gold thus deposited in an exceedingly thin film upon the buttons^resents a dull yellow col:r, and must now be burnished ; this is enected by a piece of hematites, v^r bloodstone, fixed on a handle and applied to the button, as it revolves in the lathe. Cdtlery Mandfactuee. — There are three kinds of cteel employed in mauMfacture of different articles of cutlery, common steel, shear steel, and cast steel. All edge tools which require to be tenacious without being very hard, are made of shear steel. The best scissors, razors, penknives, &c., are made from cast steel, which is able to take a very fine polish, common steel is only used in making cheap articles of cut'.ery. In making good table-knives, sheau stee'l and cast steel a^e generally preferred. In the ordinary method O' mak- ing kaives, the blades arc- cut out of a sheet of steel, and the backs, shou dera a;£d tangs oi' wrought iron, are attached to the steel blrtc by w-lainp; a* the/forge. The knife is then ground to the prope: shape, and the blade tiohshed and hardened. The fork manufac-tur* is a distmc* branch oi industry, and the manufacturer^ ol lat.t knives generaJlv buy their forks from the tork makers reaay tc be ru* into their handles. In makmg table knives, tvo men a:e generally employed ; one is. called the foroman, or maker, fiiiG the o'lhei the striker Penknives are usually forged by a single 236f ~ MACHINISTS,^ ENGINEERS, AC, RECEIPTS* hand, with hammer and anvil simply ; they are hardened by heat- ing the blades red-hot, and dipping them into water up to the shoulder. Razors are also hardened in the same manner. The grinding and polishing of cutlery are generally performed by ma- chinery, the business of the grinders is divided into grinding, glazing and polishing. Grinding is performed upon stones of va- rious dimensions. Those articles which require temper being ground on wet stones. Glazing is a process by which lustre is given to cutlery ; it is performed with a glazier, consisting of a circular piece of wood, sometimes covered with leather, or an alloy of lead and tin ; it is fixed on an axis like a grindstone. The polishing pro- cess is the last, and is performed on a similar piece of wood cover- ed with buff leather. Only articles of cast steel which have been hardened and tempered are subjected to this operation. Damaskeenink. — This is the art, now in a great measure lost, of producing a watered or wavy appearance oi steel sword-blades, armour, &c., or of inlaying and encrusting steel with gold and silver, originally practised at Damascus. Various methods of damaskeen- ing were practised, but the most common seem to havS been those of wi -ding two different kinds of steel, or steel and iron, together, or oi cutting lines on the surface of the steel and filling them with gold or silver, which was either forced into the incised lines and brought to a level with the surface of the steel, or remained in' relief above it. When the former method was used, a light pattern,' generally in many lines, was produced on a dark ground, or vice versa, and the junction of the metals caused the pattern to run through the entire thickness of the blade, so that it could not bo obliterated even by grinding. Die Sinking. When a die is required for a coin or medals, the engraver takes apiece of soft steel of suitable dimensions, generally 3 or 4 inches in length, and about an inch greater in diameter than the coin or other article required, on this he hollows out the exact form of the desired impression by cutting away the steel by degrees, with small, well-tempered, case-hardened tools. As soon as this work is thoroughly accomplished the steel is hardened by being heated red-hot in a crucible with charcoal and oil or bone-dust, and then plunged into cold water. When a great number of coins of ono sort are required, the original die is termed the matrix, and copies are made from it by taking impressions from it in soft steel, which is in relief, and is called the puncheon, and from which, when it has been hardened, other dies are produced by pressure exactly similar to the matrix, and in intaglio, which are case-hardened in their turn before they are lit to transmit an imjiression to any metal used for money. The metal used for our coiuage, whether gold, silver, copper, ur bronze is stami)ed in a cold and solid state ; but medals and casts can also be produced by a method called casting en cliche, in wliich the metal is used in a soft state. For this i)uri>ose an alloy is used, consisting of i lead, i tin, and ^ bismuth, which fuses readily at the boiling ])()int, '212° Fall. When the metal is soft, resembling paste in consistency, the die is placed upon it, and the impression i)r()diiced by a smart blow from a mallet ; the surface of the metal sets instantly, from coming into tliyulacl with the cold die, and^ thus readily retains the form tlmt i MACHINISTS, ENaiNEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 237 has been given to it. Copies of medals may be readily made in this way, but each face will be obtained in a separate piece, and these must be joined to give representations of the coin in a complete form. Onamental work is produced in thin metal for gasfitting, cornices, parts of cruet-stands, trays, &c., by means of a pair of dies,on one of which the pattern is formed in relief, and on the other in intaglio, the metal being placed between them, and brought into the desired shape by pressure. Dies are also made in metal for forming articles in gutta-percha and leather, and producing embossed figures on the cloth covers of books, as well as on card- board, paper, &c. SrEELPLATE ENGRAVING. As regards steelplate engraving it has proved immensely superior to the old copperplate system. A soft steelplate is first engraved with the required subject in the most finished style of art, either by hand or mechanically, or the two com- bined, and the plate is then hardened ; a softened steel cylinder is then rolled over the hardened plate, with great pressure by powerful machinery, until the engraved impression appears in relief, — the hollow lines of the original becoming ridges upon the cylinder, the roller is re-converted to the condition of ordinary steel, and hardened, after which it serves for returning the impression to any number of decarbonized plates, every one of which becomes abso- lutely a counterpart, of the original, and every plate, when hardened, would yield the enormous number of 150,000 impressions, without any perceptible difference between the first and the last. In one instaice, from one engraving of the Queen's head on the postage stamp, over 6000 plates were produced from the original, and plates for bank-note printing are multiplied in the same way. Great caution must be used in the various processes of annealing and hard- ening, as only slight carelessness would result in ruining the most costly plates. The method in use in the bank of England is as follows : the work to be hardened is enclosed in a wrought-ironbox with a loose cover, a false bottom, and with three ears projecting from its surface about midway ; the steel is surrounded on all sides with carbon from leather,, driven in hard, and the cover and bottom are carefully luted with moist clay, thus prepared, the case is placed in the vertical position, in a bridge fixed across a great tub, which is then filled with water almost to touch the flat bottom of the case ; the latter is now heated in the furnace as quickly as will allow the uniform penetration of the heat. When suflElciently hot, it is removed to its place in the hardening tub, the cover of the iron box is removed, and the neck or gudgeon of the cylinder is grasped, beneath the surface of the carbon^ with a long pair of tongs, upon which a couplet is dropped to secure the grasp. It only remains for the individual to hold the tongs with a glove whilst a smart tap of the hammer is given to their extremity ; this knocks out the false bottom of the case and the cylinder, and the tongs prevent the cylinder from falling on its side, and thus injuring its delicate but still hot surface. For square plates, a suitable frame is attached by four slight claws, and it is the frame which is seized by the tongs ; the latter are sometimes held by a chain which removes the risk of accident to the individual. The steel comes out of the water as 238 MACHINISTB, ENGINEERS, ^C, RECEIPTS. smooth to the touch as at first, and mottled with all the beautiful tints of case-hardened gun-locks. , ^ ^ „ , , , „ , On File Ma\ufacture.— Files are made of bars of steel, renderel doubly hard by a process called double conversion, drawn the required size at the tilt hammer, and then shaped the square and flat ones by the hammer and common anvil only, but those of round half-round, and three-angled forms, by means of bosses and dies made in the above shapes, which fit into a groove left for them in the anvil. The steel blanks having been thus formed, are next annealed, or softened, to render them capable of being cut, by placing a number of them together in a brick oven, rendered a,ir- tieht by filling up all the interstices with sand (to prevent the oxida- tion of the steel, to which it is very liable, if air be admitted), and then making a fire play as equally as possible all round iinlil they are red hot, when the heat is discontinued, and the steel allowed to cool gradually before it is uncovered. The surface to contain tlie teeth is now rendered as smooth as possible by grinding or falling ; the teeth are then cut with a carefully ground chisel, each inc.s.oa being made separately. The next and last process, that f harden- ing is performed in various ways by different makers the ordinary method, however, is to cover the files with a kind of compositioa or protecting varnish to prevent oxidation and scalding of the steel when heated; and, lastly, they are plunged in cold, fresh water to cool them'as quickly as possible. Some file-makers coat their files, before tempering, with a composition of cow-dung or pig-flour, which not only protects the sharp angles of the cutungs From the action of the fire, but furnish a highly azotized subs ance, fwhich conduces greatly to still further harden and steelify the fenished work. I know several file manufacturers who make use of a bath of melted lead for tempering purposes. The hies are tu-st coated with a greasy composition to prevent any oxide adhering ■then introduced for a short time into melted lead, or the 'metallic bath" as it is called, and then plunged into tlie tempering liquid. (The melted lead may be kept covered with charcoal, or other 'suitable ingredient, to prevent oxidation. In some manufactoriea a charcoal fire is kept burning on the surface of the melted lead ' Pen Making.— Pens should be made of the best steel that can be eot as peculiar elasticity is required in them, which could not bo Sbtkined if poor steel were used. The steel is cut into slips 3ome3 feet long and 4 inches broad; these slips are then plunged into a pickle bf diluted sulphuric acid so as to remove the scales from the Surface • next it is passed between heavy rollers by which it id teduced to the thickness requked, and made fit to uudergo the iirst Wocess in pen making. This is 'performed by a girl, who, seated ^ a stamping-press provided with a bed and corresponding punch, ^eedily cuts^out the blank, which is perfectly flat The next step is to p/rforate the hole which terminates the slit, and to remove any superfluous steel which might interfere with the elasticity of the neu The embryo pens are then annealed in a muffle, and tfae maker's name stamped upon them. The pens are next transferred to another class of workmen, who, by means of a pre s.-» either make the pons concave, if they arc merely to be nibs or, it th(;y an. to tie tanel pens, the^ roll the banyl X^^^^ih'^^- 'rUo u^i^t ^yccaiiS Machinists, 'engineers, &o., eeceipts. 239 termed the hardening, and consists in placing a number of pens in an iron box which is introduced into a mufHe. After they become of a deep red heat they are plunged into a tank of oil, and. when they get cool, the adhering oil is removed by agitation in circular tin barrels ; tempering is the next step, by heating to the necessary elasticity in a warm bath of oil ; and, finally, the whole number of pens are placed in a revolving cylinder along with sand, ground cru- cible, and other cutting substances, which tends to brighten them up to the natural color of the steel ; next the nib is ground down finely, with great rapidity, by a girl, who picks it up with a pair of pliers, and, with a single touch on an emery revolving wheel, perfects it at once. The sht is now made by means of a press. A cbisil, or wedge, with a flat side, is affixed to the bed of the press, and the descend- ing screw has a corresponding chisel-cutter, which passing down with the greatest accuracy on the pen; which had been placed on the chisel affixed to the bed, and the slit is made and the pen com- plete. ^ They are next colored brown or blue, by placing them in a revolving metal cylinder, under which is a charcoal stove, and, by watching narrowly the dififerent gradation of color, the requisite tint is speedily attained ; a brilliant polish is subsequently imparted by immersing the pens in lac dissolved in naptha; they are then dried, counted, selected and placed in boxes for sale. Gold Pens. — Gold pens are made much in the same manner as steel, with this important difference, that, as they cannot be tem- pered in the same way that steel is, the necessary elasticity is imparted to them by hammering, and by rubbing them with a small hard stone and water, instead of the tempering, &c., in oil. As gold is too soft of itself to make a durable pen, it is found necessary to attach a minute portion of an alloy of iridium and osmium, by soldering to the tips. This makes an extremely hard and durable point. On Needle MANtrPACTtniE, Tempering, &c. — This small but im- portant implement has to go through the hands of about 120 workmen during the process of manufacture. The steel wire, being drawn to the proper size, is submitted to various tests to ascertain its quality, and is then cut into proper lengths by shears, which, by striking 21 blows in a minute, cut in 10 hours fully 400,000 ends of steel wire, which produce about 800,000 needles. These are passed on for further manipulation to other workmen, who straighten and point the pieces of wire. After pointing they are cut in two, so as to form two separate needles of equal length and quality. For each dif- ferent size a small copperplate is employed. It is nearly square, and has a turned-up edge on two of its sides, the one is intended to re- ceive all the points, while the other resists the pressure of the shears. On this plate a certain number of wire are put with their points in contact with the border, and they are cut together flush with the plate, by means of a small pair of shears moved by the knee of tho workman. These even wires are now taken to the headflattener. This workman, seated over a table with a block of steel before him about 3 inches cube, takes up from 20 to 25 needles between his finger and thumb, spreading them out like a fan, with the points under the thumb, he lays the heads on the steel block, and, with.a small flat-facvd hammer strikes a few nuccessiv* blows upon thera 240 MACHlNI8TS,'*ENGtINEKRS, 'ftd., 'RECEIPTS. eo as to flatten them in an instant. The heads, having become hardened by hammering, are now annealed by heating and slow cooling, and are handed to the piercer, generally a child, who forms tne eye in a second by laying the head upon a block of steel, and by driving a small punch through one side with a smart tap of the hammer, and then exactly opposite on the other. The eyes are then trimmed by driving the punch through them again on a lump of lead and, after laying the needle with the punch sticking through it, upon the block of steel, hammering the head on the Bides, which causes it to take the form of the punch. The next operator makes the groove at the eye and rounds the head, which he does with a small file. The needles, being thus pre- ■pared, are thrown by the workmen pell-mell into a sort of drum or box, in which they are made to arrange themselves in parallel lines by means of a few dexterous shakes of the workman's arm. They are now ready to be tempered, for whicii purpose they are ranged on sheet-iron plates, about 30 lbs. weight at a time, con- taining from 250,000 to 500,000 needles, and are placed in a proper furnace, when thej' are heated to a bright redness for the larger needles, and to a less intense degree for tlie smaller ; they are then removed, and inverted suddenly over a bath of cold water in such a way that all the needles may be immersed at the same time, yet separate from each other. This has the effect of making them very hard and brittle. The water being run off, the needles are removed for further operations. Some manufacturers heat the needles by means of immersion in melted lead, others throw them into a pan along with a quantity of grease, which, being placed on the fire, the oily matter soon ignites, and after it burns out, the needles are found to be in the proper temper; those which are twisted in the tempering being afterwards straightened by the hammer on the anvil. Polishing is the next and most expensive and prolonged operation. This is effected on bundles containing 500^000 needles intermi.\-ed with quartzoze sand, and a little rape-seed oil. Thirty of those bundles are exposed to the vibratory pressure of wooden tables, which make about 20 horizontal double movements per minute, causing the bundles to run over 2 feet each time, or 800 feet per hour. This agitation is kejjt up about 18 or 20 hours, causing such a move- ment and attrition as to polish the needles in the liags or bundles. They are then removed from the packets into M'oodeu bowls and mixed with sawdust to remove tlio grease and other impurities^ placed in a cask, which is turned by a winch ; more sawdust is introduced as required, and the turning is continued until the needles become clean and bright. They are tlien winnowed by a fan to clean them fi'ora the sawdust and refuse matter, and are subsequently arranged in regular order on a small, somewhat con- cave iron tray. The operation of making up tlic rolls or bags, poli.shing, winnowing and arranging them, have to be repeated lea times on the best needles. It is found that omerv ])owdcr mixed with (juartzand mica or pounded granite is preferable to anything else for jiolishing needles by friction in the bagsatthe first, emery mixed, with olive oil, from the second to the seventh operation, putty, or oxidn of tin for the eight and ninth, putty with very little Machinists, engineers, &a., receipts. 24! oil for the tenth, and lastly bran to give a finish. In this mode of oper- ating, the needles are scoured in a copper cask studded in the, inte- rior with raised points to increase the friction and a q.uantity of hot soap ,:uds is introduced occasionally to keep them clean. The cask must be slowly tuunedupon its axis for fear of injuring the mass of needles it contains. They are finally dried in the wooden cask by attrition with saw dust, then wiped with a linen rag or soft leather — the damaged ones being thrown aside. The sorlin<; is performed in dry appartments, where all the points are first laid the same way, and the needles arranged in the order of their polish with great rapidity. The workman places 2000 or 3000 needles in an iron ring two inches in diameter, and sets all their;, heads in one plane, theil, on looking carefully at their points, he easily re- cognizes the broken ones and removes them with an instrument adapted for tae purpose. These defective needles pass into the hands of ihQ pointer in order to be ground again, when they form articles of inferior value. Those needles bent in the polishing must now be straightened, and the whole are finally arranged by the tact of the finger and thumb of the sorter, and weighed out into quantities for packing into blue papers. The bluer puts the final touch to them by taking 25 needles at a time between his fore-finger and thumb, and pressing their points against a small hone-stone of compact micaceous schist, quadrangular in form, mounted in a small lathe, turning them briskly round, giving the points a bluish cast, while he polishes and improves them. Balance Springs of Chronometers. — The balance springs of marine chronometers, which are in the form of a screw, are wound into the square thread of a screw of the appropriate diameter and coarseness ; the two endsof the spring are retained by side screws,and the whole is carefully enveloped in platinum foil, and lightly bound with wire. The mass is next heated in a piece of gun barrel closed at one end, and plunged into oil, which hardens the spring almost without discolouring it, owing to the exclusion of the air by the close platinum covering, which is now removed, and the spring is let down to the blue before i-emoval from the screwed block. The balance or hair spring of common watches are frequently left soft, those of the best watches are hardened in the coil upon a plain cy» linder and are then curled into the spiral form between the edge of a blunt knife and the thumb, the same as in curling up a nar- row ribbon or paper, or the filaments of an ostrich feather. The soft springs are worth 60 cents each, those hardened and tempered $1.26 each. This raises the value of the steel, originally less than 4 cents, to $2000 and $8000 respectively. It takes 3200 balance springs to weigh an ounce. "Watch Spring Manufacture. — Watch springs are hammered out of round steel wire, of suitable diameter until they fill the gauge, for width, which at the same time insures equality of thickness. The holes are punched in their extremities, and they are trimmed on the edge with a smooth file. The springs are then tied up with binding vire, in a loose open coil and heated over a charcoal fire upon a perforated revolving plate. They are hardened in oil and bla- zed ofiTThe spring is now distended in a long metal frame, similar to that used for a saw blade, and ground and polished with emery and 5»42 MACHINISTS, ENGINEER^ &C., "RECIIPXS; oil between lead blocks. By this time its elasticity appears quite lost, and it may be bent in any direction ; its elasticity is, however, entirely restored by a subsequent hammering on a very bright an- Til which puts the " nature into the spring:' The coloring is done over a flat plate of iron, or hood, under which a small spirit lamp ia kept burning ; the spring is continually drawn backward and forward, about two or three inches at a time, until it assumes the orange or deep blue tint throughout, according to the taste ot tne purchaser. By many the coloring is considered to be a matter ot ornament and not essential. The last process is to coil the spring into the spiral form, that it may enter the ban-el in which it is to be contained. This is done by a tool with a small axis and wincH handles, and does not require heat. ., ,-« „ Compensation Balance of Chronometers.— The ba,lance is a small piece of steel covered with a hoop of brass. The rim, consist- ing of the two metals, is divided at the two extremities the one dia- metrical arm of the balance, so that the increase of temperature which weakens the balance springs contract, in a proportionate de- gree.the diameter of the balance, leaving the spring less resistance to overcome. This occurs from the brass expanding much more by heat than steel, and it therfore curls the semicircular arcJ inwards, an action that will be immediately understood, if we conceive the compound bar of steel to be straight, as the heat would render the brass side longer and convex,and in the balance it renders it more cur- ved In the compensation balance the two metals are umted as fol- lows I the disk of steel when turned and pierced with a central hole i* tixed by a little screw-bolt and nut at the bottom of a small cru- cible, with a central elevation smaller than the disk ; the brass is now melted and the whole allowed to cool. The crucible is broken, the excess of brass is turned off in the lathe, the arm? are made with the file as usual, the rim is tapped to receive the com- pensation screws or weights, and, lastly, the hoop is divided in two places at the opposite ends of its diametrical arm. ^ Tabular View of the Processk3 of Soldering.— Z/ara soiaer- inq The hard solders most commonly used are the spelter solders, and silver solders. The general flux is borax, marked A^ on the table, and the modes of heating are the nai-ed hre, the furnace or muffle, and the blow pipe, marked a, h, g, applicable to nearly ai) metals less fusible than the solders ; the modes of treatment are nearly similar throughout. Nole.-Th^ Cxampks commence With the solders (the leasl fusible first) followed oV the J^'-'f ^f fo^ which they are commonly employed. Fine gold, laminated and cut into shreds, is used as the solder for joming chemical vei,sci3 made of platinum. Silver is by many considered as much the ot«i solder for German silver, for silver solders, see pages Ui and lo*. Copper cut in ahreds, is sometimes similarly used «Qr iron tjoia solders laminated are used for gold alloys see 153 and lo4. &i.ai- er solders, granulated whilst hot. are used for Iron, copper, bra.ai gun metaisT German silver, &c, see 189. Silver solders, laminated are emi)loyed for all silver works and for common gold woric, aiso for German silver, gilding metal, iron, cteel, brass, gun mei«l. «c.. wlien greater neatneft !• required than is obtained from »\^^vn: •older. -— ' ilACHINISTS, EifSINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS, ^213 White or button solders, granulated, are employed for the white alloys called button metals j they were introduced as cheap substi- tutes for silver solder. Hard Soldering. Applicable to nearly all thcmotals ', the modes of treatment are very different. The soft solder mostly used is 2 parts tin and one of lead ; sometimes, from motives cf economy, much more lead is employed, and 1^ tin to 1 lead i3 the most fusible of the group, unless bismuth is used. The fluxes B to G, and the modes of heating a to f, are all used v^ith the soft solders. Note. — The examples commence with the metals to be soldered, Thu: in tho list zinc, 8, r,/, implies, that zinc is soldered with No. 8 alloy, by thj aid of the muriate or chloride of zinc, and the copper bit. Lead, -1 to 8, F, d, e, implies that lead is soldered with alloys varying from No. 4 to 8, and that it is fluxed with tallow, the heat being applie:! by pouring oi: melted solder, and the subsequent use of the heated iron, ::ct tinned ; but in general one only of the modes of hcctiug i:; r;clc>ctod, cccording to circumstances. Iron, cast-ircn and :;teeL 8, B, D, if thick, heated by «, 6, or c, and also by g. Sec p-ige 190. Tinned iron, ^, 0, D,/. Gold and silver are soldered with pure tin, or else with 8, EjO! , g, or h. Copper and many of its alloys, namely, brass, gilding metal gun metal. &c., 8, B, C, D; when thick, heated by a, 6, c, e, or g^ when thin by/, or,$r. Speculum metal, 8, B, C, D, the heat should be cautiously applied, the sand bath is perhaps the best mode. Zinc, G, C./. Lead and lead pipes, or ordinary plumbers work 4 to 8 Fj d^ or e. Lead and tin pipes, 8, D, and G, mixed,/?, and also/ Britannia metal, 0, D, g. See page 189. ^ Pewters, the solders must vary in fusibility according to the fu» sibity cf the metal, generally G, and i, are used, sometimes also G, and g^ or /. Lead is united without solder by pouring on red-hot lead, and employing a red-hot iron d, e. Iron and brass are sometimes burned, or united by partial fusion, by pouring very hot metal over or around them. See page 214. Alloys and their Melting Heats. FluseSo A. Borax. B. Sal-am. or mur. of amm. C. Muriate or chlor. of zinc, D. Common resin. E. Venice turpentine, F. Tallow. G. Gallipoli oil, or common [sweet oil. Modes op Applying Heat. a. Naked fire. b. Hollow furnace or muflSe. c. Immersiou in melted sold. No. 1 1 Tm 25 Lead 558 ] ?ah 2 1 - 10 u ■ 541 « ii 1 « 5 % 611 A 4 1 « 3 * 482 C 6 1 « 2 (1 441 (( G 1 -' 3. 370 «: g 1J« a 334 a 2 « u 340 C( 9 3 « It 356 (( 10 4 « (1 365 u 11 5 « a 378 Ii 12 6 " u 3§1 u 14 3 f( 3 " 1 :< 310 a 15 2 (( 2 " 1 a 292 ii 16 1 c 1 « 1 £.' 254 ti 17 2 u 1 " 2 :« 236 li Mi ' MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., IlECEIPi*S. Alloys and their Melting Heats. Modes of Applying Heat. 13 4 Lead 4 Tin 1 Bismuth 320 Fahr d. Melted solder or me- tal poured on. e. Heated iron, nottin'd. /, Heated copper tool, tinned. ff. Blow pipe flame, h. Flame alone, gene- rally alcohol. 18 3 " 5 " 2 =« 202 " i. Stream of heated air. To Refine Sweepings Containing Gold or Silver. — To 8 ozs. of the dirt, which has been washed and burnt, add salt, 4 ozs. ; pearlash 4 ozs. ; red tartar 1 oz. ; saltpetre i oz., mix thoroughly in a mortar, melt in a crucible, and dissolve out the precious metals in a button. To Fuse Gold Dust. — Use such a crucible as is generally used for melting brass ; heat very hot; then add your gold dust mixed with powdered borax ; — after some time a scum or slag will arise on tho top, which may be thickened by the addition of a little limo or bone ash. If the dust contains any of tho more oxidizeablc metals, add a little nitre, skim off the slag or scum very carefully ; when melted grasp the crucible with strong iron tongs; and pour off immediately into cast iron moulds, slightiv greased. The slag and crucibles may be afterwards pulverized, and the auriferous matter recovered from the mass through cupellation by means of lead. To Kecovee Gold from Quartz. — Pulverize the quartz rock as usual, and fuse the mass with lime and oxide of iron. When fused, immerse thin plates of wrought iron in the mixturo. The plates soon become coated with a thin film of gold, and are then with- drawn and immersed in a bath of melted lead, which removes the adhering gold, when the plates can be at once returned to tho fused quartz and the operation repeated as frequently as the case may require. Another method, when the metal is dissciniuatcd through quartz pyrites or lead, is to pulverize the ore as usual and wash the whole with a stream of water, which carries away the lighter portions of sand, leaving the lieavy metal behind. It is farther freed from impurities by being amalgamated with quick-silver, which is afterwards distilhid off. In this state it generally contains from 2 to 10 per cent, of sil-er or tellurium. It is further refined by being finely granulated and boiled with concentrated culi)huric acid until every other constituent is boiled out. Gold by being alloyed, loses much of its ductility and malleability, but gains in fusibility and hardness. Gold alloys are assayed in two ways, first, by rul)hing the r,rticlo on a touchstouc ( which is a velvety, black flinty variety of jasper) so as to make a metallic streak, which is touched with ik/iki r'\(/ia, and tho efl'ect is compared with that of a similar streak made l^y an alloy of known composition. By this I'K'aiis an experienced operator can estimate the amount of iilloy in any mixture coriectly within one per cent. Full inf'orma- lioii rcgiinlinK the second process can be seen under the article ou lljjnNl.NU GOLU A.NU SavjsR. MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS, 245 Gold Alloys. The " Nevr Standard " for watch cases, &c., is 18 carats of tiue gold and G of alloy. No gold of inferior quality can receive the '• Hall mark "; and gold of lower quality is generally described by its commercial value. The alloy may be entirely silver, which will give a green color, or entirely copper for a red color, but the copper and silver are more usually mixed in one alloy according to the taste of the jeweller. It will be understood that these are all made witli fine gold, fine silver, and fine copper, direct from the refiner. Gold of 22 carats fine being so little used, is intentionally omitted. 1. Gold o/'18 carats, of yellow tint. Gold 15 dwt, silver, 2 dwt, 18 grs, copper, 2 dwt 6 gcs, 2. Gold of 18 carats, red tint. Gold 15 dwt, silver, 1 dwt ^8 grs. copper, 3 dwt 6 grs. 3, Spring gold of 16 carats. Gold 1 oz. 16 dwt, silver, 6 dwt. copper, 12 dwt. This^^when drawn or rolled veryliard, makessprings little inferior to steel; 4 Jewe/Zers'-Fiwe Gold, gelloiv tintj^ 16 carats nearly. Gold, 1 oz. silver, 7 dwt. copper, 5 dwt, 5. Gold of red tint, 16 carats. Gold, 1 oz. silver, 2 dwt. copper, 8 dwt. Gold alloys in great variety will be found by consulting the '' Jewellers' Department" pages 153, 154, 155 and 156. Smelting of Copper. — After the ore is raised from the mine, it is freed from its matrix and sorted, the purest portions being broken into pieces the size of a nut. The first calcination is effected in a reverberatory furnace, the heat not being raised too high. At the end of 12 hours the ore is converted into a black powder, contain- ing sulphide of copper, oxide and sulphide of Icon, and earthy impurities. The roasted ore is next fused with a quantity of sili- cious slag, by which means it is converted into a fusible slag con= sisting of silicate of iron and sulphides of iron and copper, which sink through the slag, forming at the bottom a heavy mass, termed a matt. The matt thus procured is, while melted, run into water, by which it is granulated. The product obtained i:; called coarse metal. It is roasted once more for twenty-four hours, by which means the larger proportion of the sulpbido of iron \z converted into oxide. It is then calcined with some copper ore known to contain oxide of copper and silica. The oxide of copper transforms any remaining sulphide of iron into oxide, v.'hich is taken up by the silica to form a slag, through which the sulphide of copper sinks. This matt contains aS)out 80 per cent, of copper, and is known by the name of fine metal. It is cast into pigs, the lower portions of which contain most of the impurities; tho metal extracted from the upper portions being known in the market as best selected copper. The fine metal has now to be freed entirely from sulphur by a final calcination, at a heat just short of that required to fuse it. During the process the metal becomes oxidized at the surface. The oxide thus formed decomposes the rest of the sulphide, sul- phurous acid escaping, and metallic copper remaining behind. The metal obtained is run ott into moulds, forming ingots full of bub- bles, from the escape of the sulphurous acid gas. These ingots, which are known asj)imple, or blistered copper, from their peculiar appearance, have now to undergo the process of refining. They are placed in a reverberatory furnace, and kept in a melted state for upwards of 20 hours, to oxidize the last traces of foreigq jcnetals. Slags are formed on the surface and skimmed otf, and a 246 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., ERCEIPTS. great deal of oxide is produced -wbicli is absorbed bj the metal. To reduce this oxide, the surface of the melted metal is covered with anthracite or charcoal, and towards the last a joung tree is thrust in. This process, which is called poling, disengages the whole of the oxygen from the oxide diffused through the mass. The above is, as ueaiiy as possible, the method of copper-smelting, as em- ployed in England, the processes adopted in Saxony and Xorth America being nearly identical with it, the difference merely being modifications to suit the various impurities contained in the ore. When the ore consists of oxide or carbonate of copper only, it is reduced to the metallic state by simple fusion with charcoal and subsequent poling. Smelting of Lead.— The ore having been brought to the surface, is first sorted by hand, the purest portions being set aside ready for smelting. The rist is broken by hammers into lumps as large as a walnut, and again sorted. The remainder is then crushed in a mill, and sifted through coarse slaves, the coarser portions being set aside for the stampers, and the finer being subjected to the pro- cess of ^V^^/«^. This consists in plunging a sieve containing the ore Into water, and shaking it dexterously, so that the smallest particles pass through, leaving the larger pieces in the sieve, with the lightest and least metallic portions uppermost. If the sorted galena be tolerably free from gangue, about 1^ ton of the ore is mixed with l-lSth to l-40th its weight of lime, and heated to dull redness in a reverberatory furnace, through which a current of air is passing. By this means a large portion of the sulphur is burnt off as sulphiTrous. acid, oxide of le.id and sulphate of lead being formed, and much of the ore remaining undecomposed. When the roasting has been carried sufficiently far, the furnace doors are shut and the heat /s raised. The sulphate and oxide of lead re-act on the undecomposed sulphide, a large quantity of sulphurous acid is formed, which passes off, leaving large quantities of metallic lead behind. The hro ia now damped, :^,ud a quantity of lime thrown in, which forms a very infusible slag, allowing tiie metallic lead to be drawn off into moulds. The slag, which contains a large proportion of lead, is smelted with an additional portion of ore. Lead is refined by being melted in a shallow pan in a reverberat- ory furnace. By this C)neration any tin or antimony it may contain is oxidized and removed as skimmings. When a ladleful of the lead under this operation cools with a peculiar crystalline surface, the process is discontinued, and the metal is run off into pigs. For some purposes, such for instance as the making of red lead for the manufacture of Hint glass, it is necessary that the lead sliould be almost chemically pure, as a proportion of copper for instance, amounting only to a few grains per ton, woidd color the glass auu spoil the batch. Silv:r may be profitjibly extracted from lead, even when it contains only three or four ounces to the ton, by Pattin- Boii's ])roce3s. This ]>rocess dcjjcnds upon the fact that, as lead solidifies, the first portions that crystallize are pure lead. The operation is, therefore, performed by melting the metal in an iron pot and allowing it to cool gradually ; as it cools, the crystals of pure lead arc removed by a i)erforatc(l ladle, and tlie ])roces3 con- tinually repeated with fresh portions of lead until the mass con- .MACHINISTS, ENaiNEERS, &.O., REfflpiPTg* .247 tains about bOO ounces to tiie ton. n is t&en saomlttdct to cupee^ lation. See Refining Gold and Silver, page 164. Manufacture of Iron. — The preparation of the ore is effected in a very simple manner, either by pounding or levigating, to separate the clay and silica, or other impurities, or by roasting, to draw off sulphur and carbonic acid, and to render the ore more easily crushed. The extraction of the metal from the ore was formerly effected by means of charcoal, in what was termed a Catalan forge, but it is only used now in a few instances. On account of the loss of metal during the process, it will be better to describe the usual method of smelting ores in England by the blast-furnace. A blast-furnace consists of a long cone inverted upon a shorter cone, at the bottom of which is a verti-cal passage called the crucible, into which are inserted three pipes called tuyeres, through which the blast is conveyed ; also a larger open- ing, through which the slag may be withdrawn, at intervals. At the bottom is a hole called the tap-hole, usually closed with clay for drawing off the reduced metal when a sufficient quantity is collected. The furnace is fed with coal, limestone and ore, from a hole near the top, the chargebeing renewed from time to time as the materials burn down. ' The action by which the ore ia reduced to the metallic state may be traced as follows. The oxy- gen of the air of the blast combines with the carbon of the coal to form carbonic acid during the process of combustion. The carbonic acid; during its passage through the rest of the heated fuel, is decomposed, being converted into carbonic oxide. The carbonic oxide, still ascending, meets with the hydrogen and coal- gas, togethei with which it forms a reducing mixture, abstracting the oxygen of the ore and setting free the iron in a metallic state, which sinks down to the bottom of the furnace, where it comes in contact with the carbon of the coal. With this carbide of iron ia formed, increasing the fusibility of the reduced iron to such au extent that the lime, clay, and silica present, which have been con- verted into a fusible slag, float on the top as an imperfect glass. The slag runs over through the side apertures provided for the pur- pose, and the metal is withdrawn every 12 or 24 hours through tho tap-hole. It is run into moulds consisting of a long channel, from each side of which run shorter ones. The central channel is known as the sow, the side ones as ih& pigs, hence the term pig iron, as applied to rough cast-iron. Great improvements have lately beea made in the process of smelting iron, by the introduction of a heated blast for urging the combustion, and by using the com- bustible gases issuing from the top of the furnace for heating the blast, or the boilers of the steam-engines used for the blowing machines. These improvements are now in use at most of tho principal iron works throughout the kingdom, and an idea of their importance ma}" be gathered from the fact that 15 years ago a yield of 200 tons per furnace was thought to be a large quantity, whereas now, at the TJlverstoue and other works, 600 and 630 tons per week is thought an ordinary yield ; not only this, but the amount of fuel used has been reduced to one-quarter by the same means. The iron that comes from the furnace is generally much too impure to be used for any but the very roughest castings, 248 JMACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &G., RECEIPTS. it therefore has to be remelted, to drive off, as much as possible the uncombiiied carbon, or graphite, silicon, phosphorus, sulphur.'and other impurities. A single refusion converts it into what is termed "No. 2 pig," or a grey iron, a fusible and liquid metal ; a second and third still further purifying it from carbon, until it is converted mto rehned or white iron, in which „he whole of the carbon is combined with the metaL This description of cast-iron is only used for conversion into malleable iron, for although it melts easily, it forms a much more pasty mass than some of the inter- mediate qualities of grey iron, which melt into a more liquid metal fatting them for casting purposes. Rehned iron made from the German spathose ores contains a large quantity of combined carbon and manganese, and crystallizes iu large plates. It is termed spiejel-eisen, or viirror iron, from the brilliancy of its crystalline structure, and is much valued for making steel. Founders are accustomed to divide cast-iron into three or four qualities. No. 1 pig or black cast-iron, which contains a large proportion of uncom- bined carbon ; No, 2, or grey cast-iron, which contains more com-' bined carbon ; No. 3, or mottled, which contains only a few grains of uncombined carbon, here and there, giving it a mottled appear- ance ; No, 4, or refined iron, iu whic h the whole of the carbon is combined. No. 4, is very hard and brittle, and is lit for puddling' or conversion into malleable or wrought-iron. This is effected by bringing an ingot of refined iron to a state of fusion in a reverber- atory furnace, taking care to avoid the contact of fuel. The heat IS contmued until the ingot parts with its carbon, which is assisted by throwing on it scales of oxide, if produced in the forge i As the carbon burns off, the ingot becomes more and more pasty' until at length it is converted into a granular sandy mass Tho' heat is now raised until it becomes very intense, and tlic air is' excluded by closing the damper and doors. The metal begins to* agglomerate into round masses, or blooms, which the puddler col- lects on the end of an iron rod, and subjects, while still hot either to the action of a hammer or to a powerful jircss, called a sloughing press, which squeezes out the slag aud other impurities, and forced the particles of iron closer together. The iron is then rolled into' bars, and forms Avhat is called liomogeneous iron, a quality of metal much used when great hardness is reipiired. It is distin- guished by Its granular texture when notched aud broken. It is much used for the tops of railway bars, and for the wearing sur- faces of railway wheels. "Where the fibrous quality of iron ia required, it is cut into lengths, after the first process of rolling^ then jMled longitudinally, heated in a reverberatory furnace, ani hamiiKjred out. Tliis process is repeated several t'imes. Fibrous' inui has a fracture like a piece of cane, and is used wliere resistance' to a pulhng strain is required, such as anciiors, chains, &c. Rail- way bars are mostly made witii tiie interior of the rail of fibrous' iron, to bear the weight of passing trains, while tiie exteriors aro' made of granular iron to bear the wearing action of tlie wheels. The' mailcal)lc iron of conmi(;rce is ne.nrly pure, and may l)e taken as a typo of iron for metallurgical pnrjio.ses. Wrought-iron is of blinsli wlntc color; it is hard and lualiuus wh(ni polished, ;ind,wheii rubbed forcibly, it emits a peculiar odour. Us specific gravity iki 7.7 tq MACHINISTS, ENaiNEERS, &0., RECEIPTS. 249 7.9, and it requires the most intense heat of a wind furnace to melt it. Smelting of Antimony. — The reduction of antimony to the reguline state consists of two operations. The crude ore is first melted in an inclined plane, in a reverbatory furnace. The melted sulphide fuses and flows away from the sla,g,ov gangue as it is called. The sulphide is again roasted, and mixed with carbonate of soda and charcoal. On heating this mixture in a crucible, a quantity of the metal is formed at the bottom. The unreduced oxysulphide which remains on the top is afterwards used for preparing Kerme's mineral. It is never used alone in the arts, but always in con^ junction with other metals, to which it imparts a hardening quality and likewise the valuable property of expanding when they cool, Common type metal is composed of 4 parts lead and 1 of antimony. Music type contains in addition a small portion of tin. kSMELTi.NG OF TiN. — To extract the metal, the ore is first stamped or washed, to get rid of the lighter particles of sand or earth ad- hering to it. It is then roasted to free it from arsenic and sulphur, and again washed to carry off the sulphate of copper and oxide of iron. The washed ore is mixed with from one-fifth to one-eighth its weight of powdered anthracite, or charcoal, and a small portion of lime to form a fusible slag with any of the remaining ganguc. The charge is placed in the hearth of a low crowned reverberatory furnace, and the doors are closed up. Heat is applied very gradu- ally for five or six hours, care being taken to raise the temperature high enough to cause the carbon to reduce the tin without mcltfhg the silicious gangue, which would form with the binoxide an enamel too troublesome to remove. When nearly all the tin is reduced, the heat is raised considerably, the slags being thus rendered fluid and capable of floating on the surface of the melted metaL The tin is then run off into cast-iron pans from which it is ladled off into moulds to form ingots. The tin thus procured is far from being pure, it is therefore submitted to the process of lignation, which consists in heating the ingots to incipient fusion. By this means the purer tin, which fuses at a comparatively low heat, separates, ruijning down and leaving the impure portions behind. The less fusiblo portion, when re-melted, forms block tin, and the part which has nm out is again melted and run out with wet stakes. The steam thus formed bubbles up to the surface, carrying with it all the mechan- ical impurities contained in the tin. The mass is then skimmed and allowed to cool. When just about to set, the upper half ic ladled out, the other metals and impurities having sunk into the boto torn half, from the tendencj-that this metal has to separate fromita alloys.^ The finest quality of tin is frequently heated to a temper- ature just short of it9 melting point ' At this heat, it becomes brittle and is broken up mto masses, showinj;; the crystals of tho metal, and forming what ig known as grain tin. The formation cf crystals is to some extent a guarantee of its purity, since impure ixa does not become brittle in this way. English tic generally containo small quantities of arsenic, copper, iron and lead. Tin fuses at 442** Fahr, but ft is- not sensibly volatilized at that or any .higher temperature. For the mannfacture of tin plato the best soft char- coal iron is obliged to be used. After it has been rolled and cut to 250 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, AC, RECEIPTSo the requisite size, its surface is made chemically clean by immersion for a few minutes in dilute sulphuric acid. The sheets ."-re then heated to a red heat in a rcTerberatory furnacej withdriiTvri, al- lowed to cool, hammered Act, passed between polished rollers, and are now washed in dilute acid. This preparation is needed tc free the surface of the iron from the slightest portion of oxide, to which the tin would not adhere. In order to tin them they are plunged one by one into a vessel of tallow, from which they are transferred to a bath of tin,, From this they arc taken, after a, certain time, allowed to drain, and dipped again. The superfluous tin at the edge of the plate is removed by dipping it in the melted tin once more, and detaching it by giving tho plate a sharp blc"r. Zinc. — In the extraction of zinc from its ores, :he blende or cala- mine is first crushed between rollers and roasted. In the case of the blonde this is a tedious process and requires great care. The result in either case is oxide of zinc which is mixed with half ii3 weight of powdered coke or anthracite and introduced into crucibles of peculiar construction. A circular furnace is employed, within which the crucibles are ranged. In the bottom of each crucible is an opening to which a short iron pipe is attached, passing through the bottom of the furnace. To the end of this is aflixed a rcmov« able tube communicating with a sheet iron-vessel. The hole in the bottom of the crucible having been partially plugged with coke, a charge of ore and coal is introduced, and the top of tho crucible luted down. The tube connected with the iron vessel is lowered so as to leave the crucible tube open, and the heat is raised. As soon as the flame at the month of the r h^rt ircn tube begins to turn from white to blue, connectiou is made with thj tube leading to the iron pan, and the ainc gradually distils down- wards, partly in powder, and partly in stiilactitic masses Th'j crude metal is remelted, skimmed and cast into ingots Hard Tinning Compound. — An alloy of nickel, iron and tin h&z been introduced as an improvement in tinning met.ls, by th^ firm of Blaise & Co., Paris. In an experiment to show the tenacit;^ of the nickel, a piece of cast-iron tinned with the compound waj sub- jected for a few minutes to a white heat under the blast, and, Lilthough the tin was consumed, the nickel remained as a perma- nent coating upon the iron. The proportions of nickel and iron mixed witli the tin, in order to produce the best tinning, ate 10 ozs. of the best nickel and 7 ozs. of sheet iron, to 10 lbs. of tin. Theso metals are mixed in a crucible to prevent the oxidation of the tin by tho high temperature necessary for the fusion f tho nickel ; tho metals are covered with 1 f*?:. of borax and 3 ozs. pounded glass. The fusion is complete in half an hour, when tho composition ig run off through a hole made in the flux. In tinning metals with this composition the workman proceeds in the orctinary manner. 8teelJIa.nufactui!E. — Steel is manufactured from miremaricablo iron by the process called cementation. The Swedish iron from the Dannemora Mines, marked with tno letter L ja the centre of a circle, and called '• Hoop V is generally preferred Irons of a few other marks are also used for secontl-rate kinds of!^tecl. Tho bars arc arranged in a furnace that consists of IWO troughs^ about fourteen feet long and two feet square. A layer of charcoal-powdcv MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 251 is spread over the bottom, then a layer of bars, and so on, alter- nately, — the full charge is about ten tons ; the top is covered over first with charcoal, then sand, and lastly with the slush or wast* frcm the grindstone trough, applied wet,'so as to cement the whole closely down for the entire exclusion of the air. A coal fire is now lighted below and between the troughs ; and at the end of about seven days, the bars are found to have increased in weight, the one hundred and fiftieth part, by an absorption of carbon, and to pre- sent, when broken, a fracture more crystalline, although less shining, than before. The bars, when thus converted, are also covered with blisters, apparently from the expansion of the minute bubbles of air between them, this gives rise to the name, blistered steel. The continuation of the process of cementation introduces more and more carbon, and renders the bars more fusible, and would ultimately cause them to run into a mass if the heat were not checked. To avoid this mischief a bar is occasionally with- drawn and broken to watch the progress, and the work is com- plete when the cementation has extended to the centre of the bars.- The conversion occupies, with the time for charging and emptying the furnace, about fourteen days. A very small quantity of steel is employed in the blistered state, for welding to iron for certain parts of mechanism, but not for edge-tools. The bulk of the blistered steel is passed through one of the two following processes, by which it is made either into shear-steel or cast-steel. Shear-steel is produced by piling together six or eight pieces of blistered-steel, about 30 inches long, and securing the ends within an iron ring, terminating in a bar about 5 feet long by way of a handle. They are then brought to a welding heat in a furnace and submitted to the helve or tilt hammer, which unites and extends them into a bar called Shear-steel from its having been ur 1 in the manufac- ture of shears for cloth mills, and also German steel, from having been in former years procured from that country. Sometimes the bars are again cut and welded and called double-shear steel from the repetition. This process of worlilng, as in the manufacture of iron, restores the fibrous character, and retains the property of welding : the shear-steel is close, hard, and elastic ; it is much used for tools, composed jointly of steel and iron, its superior elasticity also adapts it to the formation of springs, and some kinds are pre- pared expressly for the same, under the name of spring-steel. In making cast-steel, about 26 or 28 lbs. of fragments of blistered steel, selected from different varieties, are placed in a crucible made of clay, shaped like a barrel, and fitted with a cover, which is ce- mented down with a fusible lute that melts after a time, the better to secure the joining. Either one or two pots are exposed to a vivid heat, in a furnace like the brass-founder's air furnace in which the blistered-steel is thoroughly melted in the course of 3 or 4 hours • it is then removed by the workman in a glowing state, and poured into a mould of iron, either 2 inches square for bars, or about 6 x 18 inches, for rolling into sheet-steel. For large ingots the con- tents of two or more pots are run together in the same mould, but it requires extremely great care in managing the very intense tem- perature that it shall be alike in both or all the pots. The ingots are re-heated in an open fire much like that of the common torgc. 252 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. and are passed under a heavy hammer weighing several tons, such as those of iron-works, the blows arc given gently at first, owing to the crystalline nature of the mass, but, as the fibre is eleminated. the strength of the blows is increased, till is reduced under the heavy hammer to sizes as small as f cf an inch squarfe Smaller bars are finished under tilt hammers, which are much lighter than the preceding, move considerably quicker, and are actuated by springs instead of gravity alone 5 these condense the steel to the utmost. Rollers are also used, especially for steel of round, half-round, and triangular sections, but the tilt hammer is greatly preferred. Steel, by the Bessemer Process. — Mr. Goransson, a Swedish iron master, having fully examined the Bessemer proccEs of making steel, and erected the necessary apparatus at his works tit Edsken, after considerable delay in experimenting, has, within a recent period, succeeded in establishing the manufacture of good steel, on a practical scale, and in short devotes his whole establishment to this one process. This steel has been made into engineers' tools, boiler plates, and cutlery ; and the improvement must now be re- garded as an accomplished commercial fact. Mr. Goransson states, that he has carried out Bessemer's invention to the fullest extent, without ever having had recourse to any of the numerous plans which have been patented by others, under the idea of improving the original simple process. The converting vessel is erected, near the tap hole of the blast-furnace, so that about one ton of fluid pig- iron can be run into the apparatus at a time. The pressure of the blast is from 7 to 8 lbs. to the square inch ; and, when continued for 6 or 7 minutes, the whole charge is converted into steel. The fluid steel is discharged into a loam-lined ladle, Avhen it is well stirred, and considerable carbonic oxide disengaged and inflamed. After a short interval of repose, which is probably necessary for the steel to condense from the aerated condition in which it leaves the converting vessel, it is run oS from the bottom of the ladle, in a vertical stream from the ingot moulds. The whole time occu- pied, from the moment the pig-iron leaves the furnace im til it is cast in the mould, does not exceed 12 minutes. The loss in weight, including the impurities thrown off, does not exceed 15 per cent., which is only about one-half of the waste incurred in the manufacture of bar-iron by the old system in Sweden. By this improvement, Mr. Goransson states, in a letter to the Loudon Engineer^ that more than 1000 tons annually of cast-steel can be made with the same quantity of fuel as is now required for making 500 tons of bar-iron. He says : " So completely have we accomi)lished the ob- ject that we now make several tons of large ingots of cast-steel in succession, without a single misbap or failure of any kind. The steel can be made either hard, medium, or soft at pleasure. It draws under the hammer perfectly sound and free from cracks or faults of any kind, and has the property of welding in a most remarkable degree. PiiiLui-'a FiuK ANjnmLATon.— Consists of a case containing water, within which ie a smaller case containing clilorate of pot- ash and sugar. Dijiped in the latter is a small tube containing sulphuric ttcid ; when this tube is broken the chlorate of i^otash MACHINISTS/ ENGINEERS, "&C., RECEIPTS.' " i!53 and sugar become ignited, throwing oflF large quantities of mixed 'gases wliich are non-supporters of combustion ; the action is maintained bp the water in the outer case becoming heated. The gases are conveyed to tlie fire by means of a flexible tube fitted with a proper nozzle and stop-cock. I have seen still another kind constructed of copper in quite an elegant style, fitted with shoulder straps, &c., for easy transportation, in which the gases were generated by means of chemicals on the principle of what may be seen every day in the effervescence of carbonic acid gas from the intermixture of seidletz powders in water. The chemicals being introduced from Avhite and blue paper packages into the water contained in the copper case. To Remedy Slip of DRmxG Belts. — Dab on a little of the sticky oil which oozes away from the bearings of machinery. To Besd Copper and Brass Pipes. — Run melted lead into your pipe till full, and you may then bend it gradually into any shape you choose, the pipe may then be heated and the lead melted and run out again. Boring Gun Barrels. — Take a piece of rod, cast steel, | inch smaller than the interior of the barrel, and a few inches longer, beat one end up something larger than the size of bore, then turn or file it in the shape of an egg, leaving the swell, or centreing part l-20th of an inch larger than the bore. With a saw file, cut longitudinal cuts, ^th inch apart, laying them the same angle as a rose bit countersink, taking care not to injure the periphery of the tool ; harden and temper to straw color. Drilling CmNA, Glass, &c. — To drill china use a copper drill and emery, moistened with spirits turpentine. To drill glass, use a steel drill tempered as hard as possible and camphor and water as a lubricant. Mallet's Brass. — Copper 25-4 ; zinc, 746, Used to preserve iron from oxidizing. To Prevent Corrosion in Lead Pipes. — Pass a strong solution of sulphide of potassium and sodium through the inside of the pipe at a temperature of 212, and allow it to remain about ten or fifteen minutes. It converts the inside of the pipe into an insoluble sulphide of lead and prevents corrosion. To Enamel Copper Vessels. — Pulverise finely 12 parts of fluor spar, 12 parts of unground gypsum, and 1 part borax, and fuse together in a crucible ; when cold, mix with water to a paste, and apply to the interior of the vessel with a paint brush ; when dry the vessel should be thoroughly baked in a muffle or furnace. Shoeing op Horses. — As many parts of the horse's hoof are more tender then others, in the case of such animals as have very tender feet, it is the province of the shoeing smith to give ease to such parts aud to throw the weight more upon those parts which are better calculated to support it, thus assisting nature in all her operations, in the animal economy. The horse in raising the fore foot for extension, the stress is put upon the flexor muscles, — in particular, the Flexor pedis perforans, the tendon of which is insert- ed into posterior part of the og pedis, or bone at the foot. The longer the toe of the shoe, and straight, the greater leverage is required against the unyielding edge of the toe. By keeping the 254 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. toe a moderate length, and turning up the toe of tne shoe a little, it allows the foot to be easily rotated, consequently less stress is thrown upon the flexor muscles and tendons, and more particu- larly upon the tendon at that part when it passes over the navi- cular bone ; it thus lessens the tendency to navicular disease, and, if so affected, this mode of shoeing will give great relief Portable Turkish Bath.— Make a small circular boiler of copper or tin, and fit the same into an upright tin stand, in which, directly under the boilor, you must leave an aperture to contain a small spirit lamp. The boiler lid must fit tightly and be provided with three small tubes pointing upwards. The boiler being filled with water and the lamp lighted, as soon as the steam gets up, it rushes through these tubes,and the patient, seated on a cane chair, with his or her feet in a pan of warm water, with a suitable cloak tightly fastened around the neck, is speedily enveloped in a cloud of steam. Ten minutes is the time recommended for the duration of the first few baths. It may be afterwards increased, but not beyond half an hour. On getting out of the cloak, plunge into a cold bath for a few minutes, then rub the skin till it is quite dry and glowing with a coarse towel and a pair of good hair-gloves. Persons in health or disease will experience a woi;uerful recupera- tive power in the frequent use of this bath, and all will find it in- comparably superior to the use of drugs in any form whatever. In this connection a new and very ingenious invention called Spongio PiLiNE, is deserving of favourable mention. It consists of wool and small particles of sponge felted together, and attached to a skin of India-rubber, the whole about half an inch in thickness, and of inestimable value as a means of applying cold or tepid water &c., to such exterior parts of the human frame as may be nearest to tlie seat of pain or disease. The water is sponged over the felted sur- face, the surplus, if any, wiped off; it is then placed on the skin, and covered over with several folds of bandages, which assist in re- taining tlie heat and moisture, thus attracting healthy blood to the part, from whicli nature selects such food as is most conducive to expel disease and build up healthy tissue. Nothing is so conducive to health of body, and the eradication of disease therefrom, as pure water when properly applied; and in most beautiful correspondence with natural water we have in the Water of Life^ or Truths from the JMvine Word, that sovereign antidote winch alone when applied to the life, can cure the malignant diseases of our spiritual nature, and purify our an'ecAions and thoughts with those hallowed influences which come from above. 15i,ACK- Lhad Pe.ncils.— The best pencils are made by grmding the blaok lead into a fine iniiial[iable powder, then forming it intQ blocks by compression without any cementing substance, and finally sawing it uj) into the square i)risms, whicli, when placed in grooves in wood form the blacK lead pencils of commerce. The color can be graduated to any desired tinge bv tlio intermixture of very finely ground clay. \W the process of Prof. Jlrodic, the most untraclable gra[ihit(r mnv be reduced to the finest powder witii great ease. The mineral is coarsely powdered and mixed with l-ir.th of dilorate of potash, to which mixture is added twice ilB weight of sulphuric acid. (!liloricacid Is disengaged, and, after JIACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS, 255 the mass has cooled, it is well washed, dried, and heated to red- ness. During the latter operation, the black lead swells and be- comes reduced to so fine a powder that it will swim upon water, a little fluoride of sodium is used to dissolve the silicious im- purities. The finest quality is found near Burrowdale in Cumber- land, England. It is nearly pure carbon, and perfectly free from grit. It is used principally in the manufacture of lead pen- cils, the coarser quality being used, when ground, for polishing iron work, glazing gunpowder, as a lubricator for machinery, com- pounded with four times its weight of lard or tallow, and in the manufacture of crucibles for melting metals, as it is very intract- able in an intense heat. To Polish Plaster of Paris work. — The addition of 1 or 2 per cent, of many salts, snch as alum, sulphate of potash, or borax, confers upon gypsum the property of setting slowly in a mass capable of receiving a very high polish. To MAKE Plaster of Paris as hard as Marble. — The plaster is put in a drum, turning horizontally on its a.xis, and steam admitted from a steam boiler ; by this means the plaster is made to absorb in a short space of time the desired quantity of moisture, which can be regulated with great precision. The plaster thus prepared is filled into suitable moulds ; and the whole submitted to the action of an hydraulic press ; when taken out of the moulds, the articles are ready for use, and will be found as hard as marble, and will take a polish like it. Moire Metallique. — Is a beautiful crystalline appearance given to tin plate by brushing over the heated metal a mixture of two parts of nitric acid, 2 of hydrochloric acid, and 4 of water ; as soon as the crystals appear, the plate is quickly washed, dried and var- nished. Mother of Pearl work. — This delicate substance requires great care in its workmanship, but it may be cut with the aid of saws, files and drills, with the aid of muriatic or sulphuric acid, and it is polished by colcothar, or the brown red oxide of iron, left after the distillation of the acid from sulphate of iron. In all orna^ mental work, where pearl is said to be used, for flat surfaces, such as inlaying, mosaic work, &c., it is not real pearl, but mother of pearl that is used. To Polish Pearl. — Take finely pulverized rotten stone and make into a thick paste by adding olive oil ; then add sulphuric acid, a sufficient quantity to make into a thin paste, apply on a velvet cork; rubquickly and, as soonas the pearl takes the polish, wash it. To Polish Ivoay. — Remove any scratches or file marks that may be present with finely pulverized pumice stone, moistened with water. Tien wasu the ivory and polish with prepared chalk, applied moist upou a pieco of chamois leather, rubbing quickly. Kerosene or Carbon Oil Mandfactdre. — Petroleum, or rock oil, IS a liquid substance, of a daru color, exudmg from the^arth and containing certain liquid and solid hydrocarbons such as benzole, or benzine, kerosene, paraffine, asphaltum, &c., m a state ot solution, in different proportions. It differs greatly in composition, some samples contaimng solid paraffine and benzole in large quan- tities, while others do not. Petroleum is separated from its dif- ii56 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, AC, RECEIPTS. ferent products by careful distillation at different temperatures. The crude material is first heated in a retort to a temperature of about 100° Fah. This causes a light oil of a strong odour to pass over into the condenser. The residue is then distilled at about 120° to 160°, the result being burning oil. When this is distilled off steam is forced into the retort and a heavy oil, fit for lubrica- ting purposes, comes over, a black, tarry mass being left behind. The light oil is now used as mineral turpentine, and as a grease solvent. It is often of a dark colot, "which is easily removed by agitation, first with sulphuric acid and afterwards with soda-lyo and vater. In many instances this light oil (benzine) is sold for illuminating purposes under th: name of Sunlight Oil, Combina- tion Burning Fluid, Lightning Oil, &c. I knew one gentleman in Philadelphia who paid one man over $3000 for the receipt for making, together with the sole right to manufacture, vend and sell a compound of this kind in that city. The curious, or those interested (vill find the receipt under the name of the " Northern Lio-ht" under the Grocer's Department in this work. Truth requires me'to state that this article requires to be handled with great cau- tion when used for lighting purposes— many lamentable accidents having resulted from a careless use of it. The heavy lubricating oil when cooled down to 30° Fah., often yields paraffine in large quantities, which is separated by straining and pressure. The asphaltum may be used for pavements, or mixed with grease as a lubricant for heavy machinery. The most important product is however, the burning oil, which is now used as a cheap and efficient illuminating agent in nearly every household in this country. An average sample of petroleum contains, according to W B Tcgetmeier, 20 percent, of benzine or mineral turps, 55 per cent, of burning oil, 22 per cent, of lubricating oil, and 8 per cent, of carbonaceous and tarry matter. Macki.ntosh Cloth.— The material is merely two layers of cotton cemented with liquid India rubber; but the junction is so well effected that the three become, to all intents and purposes, one. The stout and well-woven cloth is coiled upon a horizontal beam like the yard beam of a loom ; and from this it is stretched out in a tight state and a nearly horizontal direction ; a layer of liquid or rather paste-like solution is applied with a spatula, to a consider- able thickness, and the clotk is drawn under a knife edge which scrapes the solution and diffuses it equally over every part of the cloth which may be 30 or 40 yards long. The cloth is then ex- tende'd out on a horizontal framework to dry ; and when dried a second coating is applied in the same way, and a third or fourth coat if necessary. Two pieces, thus coated, are next placed face to face with great care, to prevent creasing or distortion ; and, being j.laced between two wooden rollers, they are so thoroughly pressed as to unite durably and permanent! v. Cloth, thus cemented and doubled and dried, may be cut and made into garments which will bear many a rough trial, and many a deluging, before rain or water can penetrate, .,^ , »^ . .. mi. MANUfACTHUE OF CoKN SxARcn.-TTa^'.t PaUnt. The corn ,3 Btcepcd in water, ranging in temperature from 70°_ to 140° hah for about a week, clianging the water at least once in 24 hours. A MACHINISTS, ENGiNERRS, &0., RECEIPTS. 257 certain amount of acid fermentation is thug produced, causing the Btarch and refuse of the corn tz be easily separated afterwards. The swollen corn ic ground in a c urrent of clear soft water, and the pulp passed through sieves, with the water, into vats. In these the starch gradually settles to the bottom, the clear water is then run off by a tap, and the starch gathered and dried in a proper apartment for the purpose. ' Refining of Sugar. — Both cane and beet-root sugar are refined on the same principle, by mixture with limewater, boiling '7ith animal charcoal, and filtration through twilled cotton. In some establishments bullock's blood is used to aid in the clarifying. (The albumen of the serum becomes coagulated on the application of heat, forming a network, which rises to the the top of the liquorp carrying with it a great part of the impurities. The reddish syrup obtained by the first filtration is next passed through filters into large vats, twelve or fourteen feet deep, upon which are laid coarse ticking, coarsely ground animal charcoal, and a second layer of jticking. The syrup is allowed to flow over the surface of the filter, and runs slowly through the charcoal, coming out perfectly colourless. The concentrated syrup is then boiled in vacuo, by means of which two important results are arrived at. The viscid liquid would boil in air at 230° Fah., at which temperature a quantity of uncrystallizable sugar would be formed. By performing the ope<= ration in a vacuum-pan the boiling point is brought down to 150** or 160°, no formation of uncrystallizable sugar takes place, and a great siiving in fuel is effected. When the concentration reaches a certain point, the syrup is transferred to a vessel heated by steam to 170°, and forcibly agitated with wooden beaters, until it forms thick and granular. From the heating-vats it is transferred into inverted conical moulds of the well-known shape, at the bottom of each of which is a movable plug. The syrup is well stirred to prevent the formation of air-bubbles, and then left at rest for se- veral hours, at the end of which time the plug is removed, and the uncrystallized syrup runs out. The loaves are further freed from all colored matter by a portion of perfectly colorless syrup being run through them. They are then dried in a stove and finished for market by being turned in a lathe. Crushed or granulated sugar is made by causing the granular syrup to revolve in a perforated drum, by which means the uncrystallizable portion is separated from the crystals by centrifugal force. The Mariner's Compass. — The needle or magnet is said to poini always to the north, r^nd as a matter of course the thcr points, as east, west, &c., arc easily found by the -j^edij pointing north anc". south. In certain parts of the world, however, the needle does not point to the north, but. is drawn considerably '? ':he rights.' Icftci true north. This is calied the variation of th: compass, and must be known accurately by the navigator in order t. correct . nd -tee!; \hf', right course. For instance- in crossing thi Atlantic Ocean, Xhe variation of the compass amounts in sailinrj' Tessels to 2^ or 2J points westerky, end the course steered must be corrected a'ccord- ingly. Say tha*^ you yvish to make a due east course^ you must steer 2J or 2^ points south of that or to the rijht Land in order to make r. direct course. 258 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS ( Off the Cape of Good Hope in the South Atlantic Ocean, strange enough, the variation of the compass in ships bound to India or Australia is 2| points easterly, and in order to make a due east course it is necessary to steer '2i to the north or left of her course, while again towards the equator or centre of the glob'^ there is hardly any perceptible variation of the compass at all. The way of finding out how much the compass varies in different, pans of the world, is by observations of the sun taken with the\ompas3, and the difference between the true and magnetic or compass bearing is the variation, which must be applied as a correction to the course steered. Wc have, however, in iron ships or steamers what is called the deviation of the compass to attend to besides the variation. This is the local attraction caused by the iron, and must be carefully understood before steamers or iron ships attempt to go to sea. As in steamers of the Allan or' Cunard line, each vessel before proceeding on her firr.t voyage must be carefully swung, and magnets fixed to the deck, besides small chains placed on each side of the compasses in boxes, in order to counteract the attraction of the iron. Thus the compasses are so nicely bi.lanced with the magnets and iron, that it is rare .indeed at this dr,y that they get out of order on a trans-Atlantic passage. The conse- quences to either steamer or sailing ship whose compa^jses are astray would be terrible to contemplate, even if it wer: but one«= half point, on dark winter nights a])proaching the and These difliculties are now happily obviated by the discoveries cf modern science, and their application in correcting the compass at sea. There are, however, other disturbing agencies constantly at work. Heat diminishes the magnetism of the needle ; for this reason the best magnetic observatories are kept under ground, and lat a low and uniform temperature the year round. Eartliquakes and the aurora borealis are fruitful causes of irregularity. Thunder-storms do no injury except when a vessel is struck and its iron acquires so much magnetism as to affect the correct indications of the compass on board. When the sun shows a great number of spots, or even one very large spot, the variations of the needle are greatest. This is accounted for by two theories ; first, the revolving east and west electric current of the earth's crust, which are the causes of the earth's magnetism, are caused by the solar radiation of heat, before which the earth revolves east and west, and this must be affected by any change in the solar surface by which this radiation of heat is inodilied. The second tlieory contends, tiiat inasniucii as we know from discoveries made by the spectroscope, that the sun contains enormous masses of iron, which must, from the intense heal, be in a state of iucandescenco re- sembling a molten ocean, anu as such is inaccessible to magnetic influences; nevertheless, the solar spots being most likely solid islands (compose feet over the surface to be covered. When these have become suf- ficiently hard to withstand the pressure of a straight edge, the interspaces between the screeds should he filled out flush with them, so as to produce a continuous and straight, even surface. Slipped Coat is the smoothing off of a brown coat witli a small quantity of lime putty, mixed with three per cent of white sandso as to make a comparatively even surface. This finish answers when the Buri'ace is to be finished in distemper or paper. Hard Finish: Fine stuff applied with a trowel to the depth of about ^ of an inch. Eakth Diggino. — Number qf cubic Jeet of earth in a ton. Loose earth 24; coarse sand 180. Clay 18-6. Earth with gravel 17 8. Clay with gravel, 144. Common soil 150. The volume of earth and sand in bank exceeds tliat in embaukn.enl in the following proportions; gatid \, clay ^. gravel ^'pi "■'"' ^''^ volume of rock in embankments quarried in large fragmculs exceeds that ia bunl( fuU^ oae half. t > ^MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C,, RECEIPTS. • 273 Estimate of materials and labor for 100 square taeds of lath and plaster. Materials Three Coats Two Coats; Materials fhree Coats Two coats and Labor. Hard finish Slipped and Labor. dard finish Slipped. Lime 4 Casks. 3} Casks. White Sand 2^ bushels Lump Lime f " Nails 13 lbs 13 lbs. Plaster of :^^ Masons 4 days 3i days Paris i '* Labourer. ., 3 " 2 " Laths 2000 2000 Cartage 1 . " i •• Hair 4 bushels 3 bushels ^ ^^ Sand 6 leads. 6 loads '■• Terra Cotta Manufacture. — In the terra cotta manufacture of the north of England and Scotland, the purest lumps of fire clay are selected by their color and texture, and used alone without anj' other clay, while the firms near London prepare more care- fully a mixture of clays, which produce a body of better texture. One of the chief difficulties met in manufacturing terra cotta figures and ornamental works is the contraction the clay suffers after it has left the mould ; first, in drying ; afterwards, in firing. By mixing the clays, a further advantage is gained in the diminished shrinkage, as fire' clay terracotta (that is, unmixed) shrinks in lineal dimensions about 12 per cent from the time it leaves the mould until it leaves the kiln ; the mixed clay terra cotta shrinks 6 per cent or less, and red clays shrink 3 per cent. To enhance the durability of the body of terra cotta, a partial vitrification of the mass is aimed at by adding clays and substances which contain a small amount of alkalies which act as a fiux to fuse the body harder; also vitrifying ingredients, pure white river sand, old fire brick, ground fine, previously ground clay called " grog." are added in various proportions, amounting even to 25 per cent. They counteract excessive shrinkage, act as vitrifying elements, and keep the color lighter. In the manufacture the mixture of clays is ground under an edge runner to the consistency of flour. The mills have either revolving or stationary pans ; the former do the most work. In order to mix and incorporate the different clays, a subsequent careful pugging is required, for which hot water is sometimes used. The mixture, when brought to the pro- per homogeneous consistency, is placed in a plaster mould, dried near the kilns or otherwise, and baked in a kiln for five or seven days, during which time it is slowly brought to a' white heat, and as gradually cooled down again. In order to avoid twisting and warping during the firing, it is necessary, besides complete mixing of clays, that the mould be shaped so as to give a uniform thick- ness of material throughout, aud if the temperature of the kiln be well graded, the homogeneous body will, not warp. To cheapen terra cotta building blocks, they are made hollow, and filled, dur- ing the construction, with concrete or cement. Although in the kilns the productions are separated from the wares, it ic found that the use of sulphurous fuel darkens and tarnishes the surface, and it is to be avoided. This material admits of being used with the greatest facility in the formation of the most elaborate architcc- '271 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. toral ornaments and other beautiful designs, which can be multi- plied to any required extent at a very cheap rate. A piece of four inch column tested at the 1851 Exhibition required a pressure of 400 tons per square foot to crush it, or as much as good granite and two to three times as much as most building stone. Blasting Rocks, &c. — In small blasts 1 lb. of powder will loosen about 4^ tons. In large blasts 1 lb. of jiowder will loosen about 2^ tons ; 50 or 60 lbs. ot powder, inclosed in a resisting bag hung or propped up against a gate or barrier, will demolish any ordinary construction. One man can bore, with a bit 1 inch in diameter, from 50 to 60 inches per day of 10 hours in granite or 300 to 400 ins. per day in limestone. Two strikers and a holder can bore with a bit 2 ins. in diameter 10 feet per day in rock of medium hardness. Labour ON Embankments. Single horse and cart. A horse with a loaded dirt cart employed in excavation and embankment, will make 100 lineal feet, or 200 feet in distance per minute, while moving. The time lost in loading, dumping, awaiting, etc, =4 minutes per load. A medium laborer will load with a cart in 10 hours, of the following earths, measured in the bank : Gravelly earth 10, Loam 12, and ^andy earth 14 cubic yards ; carts are loaded as follows ; Descending hauling., ^ of a cubic yard in bank, Level hauling f of a cubic yard in bank ; Ascending hauling, \ of a cubic yard in bank. Loosening ^'c. In loam, a three-horse plow will loosen from 250 to 800 cubic yards per day of 10 hours. Tho cost of loosening earth to be loaded will be from 1 to 8 cents per cubic yard, when wages are 105 ceuts per day. The cost of trimming and bossing is about 2 cents per cubic yard. Scooping, A scoop load will measure -i\f of a cubic yard, measured in excavation. The lime lost in loading, unloading and trimming, per load, is 1^ minutes. The time lost for every 70 feet of distance, from excava- tion to bank, and returning is 1 minute. In Double Scooping, the time lost in loading, turning, &c., will be 1 minute; and in Single Scooping, it will be 1| minutes. (EUwood Morris.) Hauling Stone — A cart drawn by horses over an ordinary roar' will travel 11 miles per hour of trip. A 4 horse team will haul from 25 to 36 cubic leet of lime stone at each load. The time expended in loading, unloading, Ac. including dclnyg, averages 35 minutes per trip. The cost of loading and unloading a cart, using a horse cram at the quarry, and unloading by hand, when labour is $1.25 per day, and a horse 75 ceuts, is 25 cents per perch=24.75 cubic feet. The work done by an animal is greatest when the velocity with wliich he moves is \ of the greatest with which lie can move when not imjieded, and the force then exerteu ■45 of the utmost force the animal can exert at a dead pull. IIav. — 270 cubic feet of new meadow hay, and 216 and 243 from large or old stacks, will weigh a ton, 21)7 to 324 cubic feet of dry elover weigii a ton. _y\VuiiEL Geauino. — The Pitch Line of a wheel, is the circle upon which the pitch is measured, and it is tiie circumference by which the diameter, or the velocity of the wheel is measured. The J'itch, ja,lhc arc of the circle of the pitch line, and is determined by tha MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 275 number of teeth in the wheel. The True Pitch, (chordial), or iba.ihy which the dimensions of the tooth of a wheel are alone determined, is a straight line drawn from the centres of two contiguous teeth upon the pitch line. The Li/ie of Centres, is the line between the centres of two wheels. The Radius of a wheel is the semi-diameter running to the periphery of a tooth. The Pitca Radius, is the semi- diameter running to the pitch line. The Length of a tooth, is the distance from its base to its extremity. The Breadth of a tooth, is the length of the face of wheel. A Cog Wheel, is the general name for a wheel having a number of cogs set upoa or radiating from its circumference. A Mortice Wheel, is a wheel constructed for the reception of teeth or cogs, which are fitted into recesses or sockets upon the face of the wheel. A Cog Wheel is the general term for a wheel having a number of cogs or teeth set upon or radiating from its circumference. A Mortice Wheel, is a wheel constructed for the reception of teeth or cogs^ which are fitted into recesses or sockets upon the taco 3f the wheel. Plate Wheels, are wheels without arms. A Rack is a series of tfeeth set in a plane. A Sector is z wheel vhich reciprocates without forming a full revolution. A Spur Wheel, is a wheel having its teeth perpendicular to its axis. A BevBu Wheel, io a wheel having its teeth at an angle with itg axis. A Croicn Wheel, is a wheel having its teeth at a right angle with its axis. A Mitre Wheel is a wheel having its teeth at an angle oi 45 ^ with its axis. A Face Wheel, is a wheel having ita teeth s-t upon one of its sides. An Annular or Internal Wheel, is a, wheel havmg its teeth convergent to its centre. Spur Gear^ Wheels which act on each otii^r in the si^me plane. Bevel Qear, Wheels which act upon each other at an angle. When the tctoth of a wheel is made of a different material from thatof the wheel, it ih! termed a cog: in a pinion it is termed a leaf, and in a trundle it is termed a stave. A wheel which impels another 's termeJ. the spur, driver, or leader: the one impelled ia the />e«2'o?i, driver, ov fol- lower. A series of wheels in connection with each other is termed a train. When two wheels act on each other, the greater is termed the wheel and the lesser the jo?«io?i, A Trundle, Lantern, or Wat- lower is when the teeth of a pinion are constructed of round brass solid cylinders set in two discs. A Trundle with less than oight staves cannot be operated uniformly by a wheel with any number of teeth. The material of which cogs are made is about one fourth the strength of cast iron. Buchanan riiles that to increase or diminish the velocity in a given proportion and with the least quan- tity of wheel-work, the number of teeth in each pinion should be tw the number of teeth in its wheel as 1, 3, 59. Even tj sav^ space and expense, the number should never exceed 1;^. The least num- ber of teeth that it is practicable to give to a wheel is regulated by the necessity of having at least one pair always in action, in order to provide for the contingency of a tooth breaking. The teeth of a wheel should be as small and numerous as is consistent with strength When a pinion is driven by a wheel, the number of teeth in the pinion should not be less than eight. When a wheel ii driven by a pinion, the number of teeth in the pinion should not be less than ten. The number of teeth in a wheel should alway:j be prime tQ 276 MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. the mimber of ths pinion, that is, the number of teeih in the wheel should not be divisible by the number of teeth in the pinion without a remainder ; this is in order to jirevent the same teeth coming together so often as to cause an irregular wear of their faces. An odd tooth introduced into a wheel is termed a hunting tooth or cog. To compCte the number of teeth required in a train of wheels TO produce a given velocity. Rule. — Multiply the number of teeth in the driver by its number of revolutions, and divide the j)roduct by the number of re volutioas of each pinion, for each driver and pinion. Example. — If a driver in a train of three wheels has 90 teeth,and makes 2 revolutions, and the velocities required aie 2, 10, and 18, what are the muuber of teeth in each of the other two. 10 : 90: : 2 . IS^teetli in 2nd u-lieel. 18: 90: : 2 : Id—teethin 3idivlieel. To COMPUTE the diameter OF A WHEEL, Nule. — Multiply the num- ber of teeth by the pitch, and divide the product by 3, 1416. Example. — The number of teeth in the wheel is 75, and the pitch 1, 675 ins: what is the diameter of it? 75 X 1.6755 • =10 ins. 3.1416 To COMPUTE THE TRUE OR cuoRDiiL PITCH, Ktile. — Divide 180 by the number of teeth, ascertain the sine of the quotient, and multi- l>ly it by the diameter of the wheel. Example. — The number of teeth is 75, and the diameter 40 inches; what is the true jiitch ? 180 =2p24' and sin. of 2p24'=. 04188, which x40=1.6752 ins. 75 Hoe'sComposition FOR Printers' Rollers. — This consists of glue and molasses, the i)roitortions varying from 8 lbs. of glue in sum- mer, to 4 lbs. in winter for each gallon of molasses. The glue should be i)laccd ^ an hour in a bucket, covered with Avater, then pour the water cff, and allow the glue to sofien. Put it into a kettle and heat it until thoroughly melted ; if too thick a little water may be added. Lastly, tlie molasses is added and well etirred in with the glue. When properly prepared an hour's boil- ing will be sufllcieut, as too mucn boiling is apt to candy the mo- lasses. A late improvement consists in the addition of glycerine to the usual mi.xture. Swab the mould with oil before ])Ouring. Cement for Petroleum Lamps. — Bull 3 parts of ressin with 1 l)art of caustic soda and 5 of water. The composition is then mixed with half i^s weight of plaster of Paris, anU sets firmly in ^ to i of an hour. It is of great adhesive i)ower, not ])ermeable to ))etroleum, a low conductor of heat, and but superliciaily attacked by hot water. To Dedouize Benzine. — Shake repeatedly with plnmbate of soda (oxide of lead dissolved in caustic soda), and reclifV. The follow- ing plan is said to l)e better. Shake repeatedly with fresh portions uf metallic quick silver; let it stand for 2 days, and rectify. Specific Ohavitv. — Is the density of the matter of whicli any body is cymj)OSod, compared Mith the density of another body f SIACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS.,^ 271 assumed as the standard, or 1000. This standard is pure distilled M-ater for liquids and solids, and atmospheric air for gaseous bodies and vapors Thus as gold is 19 and silver 10 times heavier than water, those numbers 19 and 10 are said to represent the specific gravity of gold and silver. The heaviest known substance is iridi- um, used for pointing gold" pens; its specific gravity is 23. The lightest of all liquids has a specific gravity of 0-6., it is called chimogene, and is made from petroleum, it is exceedingly volatile and combustible, being in fact a liquefied gas. Carbonic acid gas or choke damp is 500 limes lighter than water, common air, 800, street gas about 2000, and pure hydrogen the lightest of all sub- stances, 12,000 times. The heaviest substance has thus 23x12,000, or more than a quarter of a million times more weight than an equal bulk of the lightest; and the substance of which comets con- sist, has by astronomers been proved to be even several thousand times lighter than hydrogen gas. To Galvanize Ghey Iron Castings. — Cleanse the articles in an ordinary chafliug mill, which consists of a barrel revolving on its axis, containing sand ; when the sand is all removed, take them out and heat one by one, plunging, while hot, in a liquid composed as follows 10 lbs. hydrochoric acid and sufficient sheet zinc tc make a saturated solutio.i. In making this solution, when the evolution of gas has ceaseii,add muriate, or preferably sulphate of ammonia, 1 lb., and let it stand till dissolved. The castings should be so hot that when dipped in this solution, and instantly removed, they will immediately dry, leaving the surface crystallized like frost work on a window pane. Next plunge them while hot, but perfectly dry, in c bath of melted zinc, previously skimming the oxide on the surface away, and throwing thereon a small amount of powder- ed sal ammoniac. If the articles are very small, inclose them in ^ wrought iron basket on a pole, and lower them into the metal. When this is done, shake off the superfluous metal, and cast them into a vessel of water to prevent them adhering when the zinc solidifies. To Purify Petroleum or Kerosene Oil. — The distillate or crude burning oil is converted into ordinary burning oil by being placed in a tank when it is violently agitated by forcmg air through it, and while thus agitated, H to 2 per cent., sulphuric acid is added, after which the agitation is continued 15 to 30 minutes. The oil is then allowed to settle, when the acid and impurities are removed, and any acid remaining in the oil is neutralized. It is then taken to shallow bleaching tanks, where it is exposed to light and air, and allowed to settle. It is next heated by means of a coil of steam pipe running through it, to expel all gaseous vapours which will ignite at a temperature below 110° Fahr The oil is now called afire test oil, and is ready to be barreled and sent to market. Kerosene oil is decolorized by stirring it up with 1 or 2 per. cent, of oil of vitriol, which will carbonize the coloring matter, then with some milk of lime or some other caustic alkali, settling, and re-distilling. To Frost Polished Silver. — Cyanide of potassium 1 oz., dis- solve in J pt. of water. Do not hold the silver in your hands, but use pliers made of lance wood or box wood, and apply the mixture with a brush to the polished surface. J78 v./ MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, ocC, RECEIPTS, To Restore Burnt Cast Steel. — Borax 1^ lbs., sal ammoniac i lb., priissiate of potash i lb., rosin, 1 oz. Pound the above tine, add a gill each of water and alcohol, and boil all to a stiS paste in an iron kettle. Do not boil too long, or it will become hard when cool. The burnt steel is dipped while quite hot in the com- position and slightly hammered. Yellow Dipping Metal. — Melt together 2 parts of brass, 1 part copper, with a little old brass, and j oz. tin to every lb. of copper. This alloy is almost of the color of gold coin. SiLVERi.vG Hooks and Eyes, &c. — The small iron articles are suspended in dilute sulphuric acid until the iron shows a bright clean surface. After rinsing in pure water they are placed in a bath of a mixed solution of sulphate of zinc, sulphate of copper and cyanide ot potassium, and there remain until they receive a bright coating of brass. Lastly, they arc transferred to a bath of nitrate of silver, cyanide of potassium and sulphate of soda, in which they quiclily receive a coating of silver. To Apply Decalcominb Pictures.— Varnish the pictures care- fully with the prepared varnish, (which can be obtained with the pictures), with an ornamenting pencil, being careful not to get the varnish on the white paper. In a few minutes the picture will be ready to lay on the panel, and the paper can be removed by wet- ting it, and when thoroughly dry, it should be varnished like an oil painting. Be particular to purchase only those transfer pict- ures which are covered with a gold leaf on the back, for they will show plainly on any colored surface, while the plain pictures are used only on white or light ground Composition Orname.nts for Picture Frames, &c. — Mix as much whiting as you think will be re(iuired for present use, with thinish gbie, to the consistence of putty ; and liaving a mould ready, rub it well ah over with sweet oil, and press your composi- tion in it ; take it out and you have a good impression, which you may set by to dry ; or, if wanted, you may, before it gets hard, apply it toyour work with thick glue, and bend t into the form required. Drill [jCBRicator. — For wrought iron use 1 lb. soft soap mixed with 1 gal. boiling water. It insures good work and clean cut- ling. Cement for Emerv on Wood. — Melt together equal parts of shellac, white rosin, and carbolic acid in crystals ; add the last after the others are melted. An unrivalled cement. Weight of Earth, Rocks, aste. Apply to the broken part of the retort while at a good working heat, tlien cover it with a fine coal dust, and cliarge the retort for working. To Stop Leaks in Clay Retorts Wuen at Working Heat.— Five ])arts lire chiy, 2 par(8 wliite sand, 1 part of borax pressed and ground. Mix the whole togetlier with as much water as may be necessary to bring it to the consistence of putty. Roll it in the hands to a proper length and ajjply it over the crack, pressing it with a long spatula into the crack. To Prevent Gas Meters From Freezino.— Half a pint of good glycerine is said to prevent the freezing of 1 gal. water, though at least double the i)roportion is preferable in the country, what- ever the temucrature in the winter may hai)pca to be. 280a MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. Magnetized Watch Works.— The only cure is to put in a gold or brass balance and new pendulum spring. The most intense heat will not eradicate the trouble. Cement fok Leather.— Bisulphide of carbon, 5 oz.-; tick gutta percha, 1 oz. The latter is like thin curly shpvings of leather and must be added a little at a time. Cork up tight, .md it is fit for using in 10 or 12 hours. To Repair Leakages in Fire Engine Hose.— Pass a round bar of ironint: the hose under the leak, then rivet on a patch of leather, preriouslj coated with marine glue. Aquaria Cement.— Mix equal quantities of dry white lead and red lead to a paste with mastic varnish, and use as soon as mixed. New Kteam Packing.— Take long coils or continuous strands of flax or hemp loosely twisted, or better still, with scarcely any twist, saturate these coils in melted grease or tallow, and give them a good thorough coating with as much black lead or plumbago (finely pulverized), as the material will absorb. It is a most supe- rior article. Paper Friction Pullets. — These superior mechanical contri- vances are made by cutting pieces of pasteboard into a circular form, and of the desired diameter of the pulley, and placing them in layers one on the top of another, cementing properly with a good coat of glue between each layer, pounding or pressing them together as close as possible, and leaving a perforation in the centre of each, for the shaft. When you have got enough of these layers together to give you the proper breadth of pulley, allow the glue to harden, then turn it off to a smooth finish in a lathe. Secure each side of the pulley with a good stout iron flange large enough to cover the entire diameter, or nearly so, and with proper usage it will last a long time. Quantity and Cost" of Supplies fok Horses and Lumbering Crews in the Woods. — The following figures have been kindly furnished for this work by the obliging manager of Messsrs. Gil- mour's mill on the Gatineau, near Ottawa, Canada, and are most valuable as affording a basis for calculating the quantity and quality of th: supplies required for men and horses engaged in this branch of industry. These calculations are the result of long experience in the business, and are based on actual consumption. Quantity of Oats for each span of horses, 51 lbs per day. « Hay " '■■ 40 " (1 Flour used by each man 11 Pork 11 11 li Beef 11 II it Beans 11 11 a Fish II 11 11 Onions 11 11 11 Potatoes II II 1.80 1.22 0.85 0.33 0.12 0.13 0.47 Total daily consumption per man 4.92 Quantity of Tea used " IJ lbs. per month. The daily allowance of oats for each span of horses may appear large, but it must be remembered that the labour i: extremely MACHINISTS, ENGINEERS, &C., RECEIPTS. 280^ seyere and more hay will be required if any part of the oats is wi held. On making enquiry with reference to the item of molasses, so largely used by our lumbering friends m New Bruns- wick and Maine, the answer returned was that owing to the heavy cost of the commodity, it was entirely omitted from the ]iosing edges of tli: fracture wherever they come in contact. This will restore the original tone of the bell. To Separate Tin from Lead.— If the lead and tin are in solution precipitate the former by sulphuric acid and the latter with sul- phuretted hydrogen gas. In an alloy the lead will dissolve in nitric acid, leaving the tin as au oxide. Ornamental Designs on Silver.- yelect a smooth part of the silver, and sketch on it a racnogram or any other design you choose, with a harp lead pencil, then place the article in a gold solution wi ! the battery in good working order, and in a short time all the parts not sketched with the lead pencil will be covered with a coat of gold. After cleansing the article, the black lead is easily removed by the fingers, and the silver ornament disclosed. A gold ornament may be i)roduced by reversing the process FfsiBLE :1etal for Casts.— Blsmutli, 8 parts, lead, 5 parts tin 3 parts. It will melt at 200 o , or uader boiling water. For male casts use tin only. I'Hi.MTER's Ink.— Linseed oil boiled to a thick varnish, and a Fullicicnt quantity of vennillion ov Prushian blue ground with it to give the required depth 'f color. To Uei'Aiu Leaks in Lead Pipes.— Place the point of a dull nail over the leak, give it a gentle tap with a haiiauer and the flow of water will cease. To Improvh Printkk's Rol^rus.— The French composition pre- vents damp rollers and otherwise improves them. It is made as loUows: for a 24 inch roller take Russian isinglass .| oz. ; gelatine \ oz. ; when the usual composition, (see ])age IOC,) is ready for I'ouring, add the above to it, let all boil i hour longer, and cast in the usual way. " ' USEFUL ITEMS FOR DAILY REMEMBRANCE. 281 On Mkltino and Refining.— In melting Brass Gold, urge th« fire to a geat heat, and stir the metal with the long stem of a tobacco pipe to prevent honey combing. If -S^ee^ or Iron filing- get into gold while melting, throw in a piece of sandiver the size of a common nut ; it will attract the iron or steel from the gold into the flux, or, sublimate of mercury will destroy the iron or steel. To cause Gold to roll well, melt with a good heat, add a teaspoonful of sal ammoniac and charcoal, equal quantities, both pulverised, stir up well, put on tho cover for 2 minutes and pour. For Silversmiths, Sterling Silver.— 1. Fine Silver 11 oz, 2 dwts., fine copper 18 dwts. 2. Equal to Sterling— Fine silver 1 oz., fine copper 1 dwt-, 12 grs. 3. Another ditto— Fine silver 1 oz., fine copper 5 dwts. 4. Common Silver for Chains— Fine silver 6 dwts., fine copper 4 dwts. 5. Solder/or ditto— Fine silver 16 dwta., fine copper 12 grs., pin brass 3 dwts, 12 grs. 6. Alloy for rioting, —Fine silver 1 oz., fine copper 10 dwts. 7. Silver Solder— FinQ, silver 1 oz., pin brass 10 dwts., pure spelter 2 dwts. 8. Copper. Solder for Plating— Fine silver 10 cwts., fine copper 10 dwts. 9. Common Silver Solder— Fine silver 10 ozs., pin brass 6 ozs. 12 dwts, spelter 12 dwts. 10. Silver Solder for Enamelling, %lper oz. —Fine silver 14 dwts, fine ^copper 8 dwts. 11. Ditto, for filling aignet Rings—Fine silver 10 ozs., fine copper 1 oz. IG dwts., fine pin brass 6 ozs 12 dwts., spelter 12 dwts. 12. Silver Solder for Gold Plating — Fine silver 1 oz., fine copper 5 dwts., pin brass 5 dwts. 13. Quick Silver Solder— Fine silver 1 ob., pin brass 10 dwt?., bar tin 2 dwts. 14. Imitation Silver— Fine silver 1 oz., nickel 1 oz. 11 grs., fiue copper 2 ozs. 9 grs. 15. Another ditto — Fine silver 3 ozs., nickel 1 oz. 11 dwts., fine copper 2 ozs. 9 grs., spelter 10 dwts. 16. Fine Silver Solder for Filigree Work. — Fine silver 4 dwts. 6 grs.. pin brass 1 dwt. 17. Bismuth Solder— Bia- muth 3 ozs. lead 3 ozs. 18 dwts., tin 5 ozs. 6 dwts. USEFUL ITEMS FOR DAILY REMEMBRANCE. Leoal Brevities. — A note dated on Sunday is void. A note obtained by fraaid, or from one intoxicated, is void. If a note be lost or stolen, it does not release the maker, he must pay it. An endorser of a note is exempt from liability, if not served with notice of its dishonor within 24 hours of its non payment. A notq by a minor is void. Notes bear interest only when so stated. Prin-. cipalsare responsible for their agents. Each individual 'a partner-r ship is responsible for the whole amount of the debts of the firm. Ignorance of the law excuses no one. It is a fraud to conceal ^ fraud. It is illegal to compound a felony. The law compels no one to do impossibilities. An agreement without a consideration is void. Signatures in lead pencil are good in law. A receipt for money is not legally conclusive. The acts of one partner bind all the others. Contracts made on Sunday cannot be enforced. A contract with a minor is void. A contract made with a lunatic is void. Written contracts concerning land must be under seal. 282 TTSEPUL ITEMS FOR DAILY REMEMBRANCE. A TABLE OF DAILY 8ATIXGS AT COMPOUND INTEREST. Cents per Day Per Tear In Ten Tears Fiftt/ Tear 21 f 10 $ 130 $2,900 5J 20 260 5,800 11 40 520 11,600 27J 100 1,300 29,000 55 200 2,600 58,000 1.10 400 5,200 116,000 1.37 500 6,500 145,000 By the above table it appears that if a mechanic, or clerk saves 2 J per day from the time be is 21 till he is 70, the total with interest Tvill amount to $2 900, and a daily saving of 27| cents reaches the important sum of !Ji29,000. Save all you can in a prudent manner for a time of possible want, but act justly by paying your debts, and liberally by assisting those in need, and helping in a good cause. On Profane Swearing — Let every man do his best to discoun- tenanoe this abominable habit, and shun it as an accursed sin in every i)0ssible 'way. No respectable person will allow himself to be guilty of it. Business men who make a practice of it will tiud themselves avoided by the best class of customers, for I know that some persons can suffer no mental punishment equal to that in- flicted by being compelled to listen to profane language. Besides, every man known as a profane swearer, will not be credited by those whose good opinion is worth having, even when he may be speaking the truth. Act Well Your Part, Don't be Selfish. — Remember that it is by imparting happiness to others, and making ourselves useful that we receive happiness. Stand by this truth, live it out, and always keep doing something useful for the common good, doing it well, and acting sincerely. Endeavour to keep your heart in the attitude of cherishing good will to all, thinking and speaking evil of no one, and always with a kind word for everybody. Sel- fishness is its own curse ; it is a starving vice. The man who does no good gets none. He is like the heath in the desert, neither yielding fruit nor seeing when good cometh, a stunted awarfish, miserable shrub. Let all your influence be exerted for the purpose of doing all you can for the common good, and individual welfare of every one. Maruiagb Maxims. — A good wife is tbc greatest earthly blessing. A wife never makes a greater mistake than when she endeavours to coerce her husband with other weapons than those of love and affection. Those weapons are a sure pull if he has any thing human left in him. Forbear mutual upbraidings. In writmg letters, during temporary separation, let nothing contrary to love and sincere affection be expressed, such letters from a wife have a most I owcrfiil emotional effect, sometimes little understood by those who writ- them. It is the mother who moulds the character and destiny of the child as to the exteriors, therefore let calmness, peace, affection, and firmness rule her conduct towards her child- ren. Children are great imltiitors, whether they have scolding or peaceful mothers, they are generally sure to learn from the examples BCt before them, aqd thus the consequent joy or sorrow is tran?- USEFUL ITEMS FOR DAILY REMEMBRANCE/ 283 ferred to other families, therefore let mothers take heed to their conduct. It is not possible to exercise judgment and prudence too much before entering on the married life. Be sure that the affec- tions on both sides are so perfectly intertwined around each other, that the two as it were, form one mind, this requires time ; and a thorough mutual knowledge on both sides. Marry in your own re- ligion, and into a different blood and temperament from your own. Bend your whole powers to avoid depreciatory remarks, jibing and anger in every form, and specially avoid everlastingly dishing up any unsuccessful past action that was done from a good motive and with the best intentions at the time. Let nothing foreign to the spirit of love and mutual affection intervene to cause distance between husband and wife ; to this end let self-denial rule ovet each, and reciprocal unselfishness. Avoid habitual fault-finding, scolding, &c., as you would perdition itself; many men tremble as they cross their threshold into the presence of scolding wives. Let husband and wife cultivate habits of sobriety, and specially avoid drunkenness in every form. What a dreadful spectacle it is to see a husband transformed into a demon, tottering homeward to a broken- hearted wife, whose noble self-sacrificing devotion to him seems to partake mor^ of the nature of heaven than of earth. Never part even -or <^ journey, without kind and endearing words, and as a kiss symbolizes union from interior affection, do not spare it on such occasions, repeating it when you return. In one word, let love rule supreme. Children and Home Conversation. — Children hunger perpetu- ally for new ideas. They will learn with pleasure from the lips of parents what they deem drudgery to learn from books, and even if they have the misfortune to be deprived of many educational ad- vantages they will grow up intelligent if they enjoy in childhood the privilege of listening to the conversation of intelligent people. Let them have many opportunities of learning in this way. Be kind to them, and don't think it beneath you to answer their little questions, for they proceed from an implanted faculty which every true man and woman should take a great delight in gratifjing. Home after BtJSixEss Hocjrs. — Happy is the man who can find that solace and that poetry at home. Warm greetings from loving hearts, fond glances from bright eyes, and welcome shouts of merry hearted children, the many thousand little arrangements for comfort and enjoyment, that silently tell of thoughtful and expec- tant love, these are the ministrations that reconcile us to the prose of life. Think of this ye wives and daughters of business men! Think of the toils, the anxieties, the mortification and wear that fathers undergo to secure for you comfortable homes, and compensate them for their toils by making them happy by their own fire side. Well Worthy of Imitation. — A worthy Quaker thus wrote : — " I expect to pass through this world but once. If therefore, there be any kindness I can do to any fellow being, let me do it now, let me not defer nor neglect it, for I will not pass this way again." Were all to act thus how many would be made happy ! Another Sensible Qdakkr. — A Quaker lately propounded the momentous question to a fair Quakeress, as follows ; " Hum ! yea 284 USEFUL ITEMS FOR DAILY REMEMBRANCE and verily ; Penelope, .oe sp-.-i, urgein ana movetn me wonaer- fully to beseech thee to cleave unto me, flesh of my flesh, and bone of my bone." " Hum ! truly, Obadiah, thou hast wisely said. Inasmuch as it is not good for man to be alone, lo, I will sojourn with thee." Table Conversation. — Instead of swallowing your food in sullen silence, or brooding over your business, or severely talking about others, let the conversation at the table be genial, kind, social and cheering. Don't bring any disagreeable subjects to the table in your conversation, any more than you would in your dishes. Avoid scandalizing people, and never cherish a jubilant feeling over the infirmities or misfortunes of others. The more good company you have at your table the better. Hence the intelligence, refinement and appropriate behaviour of a family given to hospitality. Never feel that intelligent visitors can be anything but a blessing to you and yours. Keep the Hodsb Clean and well Ventilated. — A neat, clean, fresh aired, sweet, cheerful, well arranged house, exerts a moral influence over its inmates, and makes the members of a family peaceable and considerate of each other's feelings ; on the contraiy, a filthy, squalid, noxious dwelling, contributes to make its inhab- itants selfishj sensual, and regardless of the feelings of others. Never sleep in a small close bedroom, either during summer or Avinter without free ventilation from door or windows, unless other- wise supplied with abundance of fresh air. It will be seen that a person's house usually corresponds to his character. Safe Business Rules. — Business men, in business hours, attend ONLY to business matters. Social calls are best adapted to the SOCIAL circle. Make your business known in few words, without loss of time. Let your dealings with a stranger be most carefully considered, and tried PRiENDSnn> duly appreciated. A mean act will soon recoil, and a man of honour will be esteemed. Leave " Tricks ok Trade " to those whose education was never completed. Treat all with respect, confide in pew, wrono no man. Be never afraid lo say No, and always prompt to acknowledge and rectify a wrong. Leave nothing for to-morrow that should be done to-day. Because a friend is polite, do not think his time is valueless. Have a place for every thing, and every thing in its place. To preserve LONG friendship, keep a short credit, the way to get credit is to be punctual; the way topRESEUvg it is not to use it much. Settle often ; have short accounts. Trust no man's appearances, they are often deceptive, and assumed for the purpose of obtaining cre- dit. Rogues generally dress well. The rich are generally plain MEN. Be well satisfied before you give a credit, that those to WHOM YOU BITS IT arc SATi MBN to be trusted. APPENDIX TO " THE ARTIZAN'S GUIDE.'* ON CORRESPONDENCES. By reference to page 265 ii will be seen that something was stated regard- ing correspondences, together with an allusion to the appendix for farther intormation. The amplitude of the subject being very great, no more can be promised bere than a very abridged statement by way of Illustration. Not being aware that the subject has ever been rJluded to in connection with , . work of this kind, perhaps some will be inclined to attach a certain amount of blame on account of introducing it here, as there is apparently but very slight relationship between the subjects treated of throughout this work and the topic under consideration. But inasmuch as it is believed that its consideration will fulfil a much needed use and command the ap- probation of all good men, the censure of others is but little regarded in comparison Furthermore, th-^ discrepancy is only apparent, for many things mentioned in this book, together with thousands or other things, will be comprehended just In oroportion as correspondences are understood; consequently any effort that tends to dissipate the obscurity, and enlighten the darkness, with which, as regards this subject, many minds are becloud- ed, must be productive of "cod, while the knowledge in question will enable us to account for many of the phenomena of the visible creation, such as chemical afBnities, the constitution and qualities of different kinds of metal, and their action en each other, besides suggesting innumer- able instructive ".houghta on other interesting questions of a purely natural kind : nevertheles; the writer desires to state that his motive for considering the subject in this -lace, is a desire to give a few examples of the working of the principle as an unerrinf; rule in unfolding the true meaning of the Sacred writings, for, :trang- as the assertion may appear to many, the meaning of the Divine Word as to its true or internal sense, can be evolved in no other waT. It should be known that the Woed being Divine, is com- posed in a manner different from all other writings whatsoever, being written by yuro correspondences, for which reason, through the use of emblems, symbols, types, and representatives, it contains and embraces within its bosom things which regard .he Lord, his heaven, the Church, man, and the things ot love andfaith, even when such subjects do not in the least appear in the 'etter while it is being read, for it is a Di vino truth, that there are indefinite :hinga in :ach expression of the Word, which appears to ^an »» simple r.nc" rude ; yea, there is contained therein more than man can ever comprehend, because it is the embodiment of Infinite wisdom, and is a: tc its inmosts, the Lord Himself. John i -1., Rev. xix, 13 Treat with the ut303- reverence therefore, I pray you, whatever has relation to the Word of GOD, ~Dr by so doing you do honour to that Sacrkd Name Which should nover JC laken in vain. Of all the abounding iniquities of society, none are . icre destructive of the germs of goodness implanted by our Heavenly Father li man's heart, and none ministers less gratificatiou to the depra 'ed crrvin~s of fallen man, than the profanation of the Name and WoRn of t::c verblessed God. Let every one discountenance this anpaliin- enormity, and :^?ware of it is as he would shun eternal ruin, not oiily on account of its infamou: character as a sin against God, but also out of sommon regard for the feelings of our neighbours. The science of correspondences unfolds those spiritual laws in accordance with which tho word of God is written. The word correspondence is derived from the Latin terms con and respondee, and means, radically, to answer with c- to agree. It will serve our purpose here to define it as the appearance of the interna", in the external, audits representation there: in other words, internal and spiritual things are mixrored forth and repre- sented in external r.nil natural forms. The Wono throughout, is written with a constant reference to an exact and immutable relation between spiritual and natural things. Various descriptions are there given of the 2 "appendix to_the artizans' guide. sun moon 'and stars ; of the earth with her mountains, valleys and rivers ; of men, animals and plants, gold and silver, brass and iron, and a thousand other things which appear in the natural world. In all these descriptions there is a constant reference to the internal and spiritual causes from which these things exist, and to which they correspond. The Word, id its literal — ^ spirit and life .. — , - „„ . ,. you, they are sjnrit and they are life " John vi. 63. Ihe science of corres- pondences is to the Word of God what the mathematical science is to the phenomena of the material universe. It reveals order, harmony, beauty and Divine perfection in the midst of what seemed to be disorder, uncer- tainty, inextricable confusion and even contradiction, It is a most melancholy spectacle at this day to see professed expounders of the Wcrd. tell their hearers that the Bible is full of errors, that such and such passages bontradict each other, and then proceed forthwith to communicate a vast amount of erudite seU-derived intelligence in the shape of glosses, commenU and explanations, with the only effect of causing real confusion where there never was anv, whilst a knowledge of this heavenly science.for such indeed it is, would have enabled them to harmonize all apparent discrepancies at i\'ot 80 were the men of the most Ancient Church described in those Divinely composed allegories in the beginning ot Genesis, previous to that awful apostacy and declension from goodness described imder the repre- Bensation of a flood which swept over the whole earth, 'ihey were gifted with sucn an intuitve knowledge from above, that they could. as it were,reaa God's woriinUis WorKS, and learn and think of heavenly things through and by mpans of the contemplation of corresponding earthly things. For fexample, when with the natural eye they beheld a mountain, instantly the emotions of their minds would assume a corresponding elevation towavls the Loud, for by a mountain in the most Ancient Ciinreh was signihed Uie Lord, and all that is celestial from Him, as the good of love and charily ; the most ancient people, and all the ancients, even the Gentiles, worsLipped on mountains from this origin. Hence it is written, " I will lift up mine eyes to the mountains (or bills),' from whence cometh my help, my help Cometh from the Lord, which made heaven and earth," Ps. cxxi. We may see from this the true reason why the bles.sed Ukdekmkr taught the people from mountains, ascended up into high mountains, and abode in mountains to such an extent as is recorded of Uim in thc> gospels. For the sake of farther illustration it may bo proper in this place to adduce a harmony of passages where mountains arc mentioned, tocothor with the internal sense signified by them. All the high mnunlainswvaroA with the waters of the flood (Gen. vii. 19.) denotes that all (he goods of charity were extinguished by falses and persuasions of the false, or what is the same, overflowing wickedness. The ark of Noah resting ujion the monntaiiis of Ararat. [Gen, viii, 4, 5], denotes the first light after temptation, which is from charity. The children of Shem dwi'lling from Mesha, a.** thou goest Unto .Sephar, amount of the east, (Ocn. x. 30 ), denotes worship from the truths of faith extending to the good of cliarity as ita end, Abnihanra removal unto a mountain on the east of Bethel (Gen. xii. 8), denotes the progression of celestial love with which the i>(»RU was imbued in infancy, for by Abraham in the word is represented the Lord ado the divine celes- tial principle, or divine good. They that remained flying to ^\\omountains after Abraham's victory in Hiddim (Gen. xiv. 10). denotes the love of self and the world against which the Lord fought from his |,>ve for the whole liuniaii race. I.otsaid to ascend from '.oar and dwelling in .", cave in the tu'iunlain (Gen, xix. .3lJ] denotes the obscure g.>od of tlio.se who aro with- out the truths of faith. .lacob sacri'icing asacrittoe intlie mouulain Uien. Kxxi. fyS), denotes worship from the good oClove. '.?he angel of the Lord appeiiring to Moses in the ,>,(Hint of God (K.x. iii. 2-), denotes the divine human manifested in the good of love; ye shall .'erve God unon thi8?m)i(«- Inin, said to Moses (Kx. iii. 12), denotes the nerception and ackuowledgo- niont of the Uivinc! from love. Moses to staiui on the top ol Wwrnoutit with the rod of (Joi) in his hand, during the hattle with Anialek. denotes the 5ouj\^WVU«n '*•' ^^\h divw.e y(i{k the good of charity, and truth in power APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. 3 I from good; Israel prevailing when Moses raised his hand and Amalek prevailing when he let down his hand, denotes that the victory is with those who are in the truth and good of faith when they look upwards to the Lord ; but that the false overcomes them when they look down to self and the world, for Amalek represents interior evil. Israel to be planted in the mountain of the Lord's inheritance, (Ex. xv. 17,) denotes regenera- tion, and heaven, from the life of truth and goodness. The Israelites encamped at thewoitn^of God'Ex. xviii. 5], denotes the new arrangement of truths when about to be conjoined with good in the -second stage of regeneration. The Loed came from Sinai, He shone from mount Paran (Deut. xxxiii. 2), denotes the proceedure of Divine truth or the law, from Divine good. The mountains filled with horses and chariots of fire round about Elisha(2 Kings vi. 17), denotes doctrinals good -nd true from the Lord. The mountains shall bring peace and the little hills by righteousness (Ps. Ixxii. 3), denotes love to the Lord and the neighbour, such as it was in the most ancient church. Upon every lofty mountain, and upon every high hill, rivers and streams ot water, (Isa. xxx, 25), denotes the goods of love and charity, and the truthsof faith from them, for, rivers and streams of water signify truths ; like one go=ng to the mountain of the Lord, to the Mighty One ot Israel f Isa. xxx. 29), denotes the Lord as to the good of love and the good of charity. Get thee up into the high mountain, lift up thy voice with strength {Isa. xl. 9; xlii. 11). denotes the worship of the Lord from love. He that putteth his trust in me shall possess the land, and shall inherit my holy mountain, ( Isa. Ivii. 13), denotes the Lord's King- dom where all is love and charity. The glory of the Lord upon the moun- tain east of the city (Ezek. xi. 23). denotes the sphere of celestial love from the Lord. The louse and the top of thewio/jUaiumade holy (Ezek. xliii. 12), denotes the Lord's celestial kingdom from the good of love. Judah called a.mountain in a field, (Jer. xvii. 3), denotes the principle of celestial love in t'le Lord's Kingdom represented by them. The mountain of the congregation in the sides of the north (Isa. xiv. 13), denotes the obscure state where the influx of good, which flows in with light from the Lord, is terminated. Four chariots going out from between two mountains of brass (Zee. vi. 1-8), denotes the precedare of doctrinals from the good of love to the Lord and love to the neighbor in the natural degree . The mountains shall distil sweet wine and the hills shall melt, when captive Israel is restored (Amos ix. 13), denotes the good of love and charity when the spiritual church is delivered from falses. Tue Lord of hosts came down to fight for mount Zionand for the hill thereof (Isa. xxxi. 4) denotes the omnipotence of divine good and divine truth. Contend with the mountains and let the hills hear thy voice(Mic vi. 1), denotes truth speak ing with those who are elate of heart in self-love, and with those who arc in charitv. And it shall come to pass in the last days that the mountain of the Lord's house shall be established in the top of the mountains and shall be exalted above the hills and all the nations shall flow unto it, and many people shall go and say. Come ye, andlet us go up to the moioj^a/n; ot the Lord and to the house of the God of Jacob, and He will teach us His ways, and we will walk in His paths, (Isa. ii. 2-3)^ These words are spoken of che New Church to be established by the Lord ; by the mountain of the Lord, which shall then be established in the top of the mountains, is under- stood Zion ; and by Ziou, is signified the celestial church, and love to the Lord which is communicated to those who belong to that church, that this is the primary principle of the church, and that it shall increase and gain strength, is signified by its being in the top oithe mountains, and exalted above the hills; that they who are principled in the good ol love shall acknowledge the Lord, and accede to the church, is signified by all nations flowing to that mountain, nations signifying those who are in celestial good, which is the good of love to the Lord, and people, those who are in spiritual good, which is the good of charity towards the neighbor. They of the south shall possess the mount of Esau, (Obad. 19), denotes the good of love with those who are in the light of truth. His feet shall stand in that day upon the mount of Olives, and the mountain shall divide, etc. (Zee. xiv. 4), denotes the advent of the Lord in the good of love and charity, and tne church formed by such goods receding from the Jews to the nations. The Lord set upon a high mountain and upon a pinnacle of 4 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS* GUIDE. thfe ffmple, by the devil, denotes the ejttfeme temptation combats that he sustained against the lovea of selt and the world, thus against hell. Let them which be in Judea flee into the mountains (Matt. xxiv. 16), denotes salvation in love to the Lokd and charity to the neighbor. Thev shall say to the mountains. Fall on us, and to the hills, cover us (Rev. vi. 16), denotes the state of the evil unable to bear the Lord's presence. A great mountain purnmg with Are cast into the midst of the sea (Rev. viii. 8), denotes the love of self in the scientifics of the natural man. From the examples it niav be seen that there is an opposite side from love and goodness, when *^ 'i " t'"eated of, for who does not know that there are mountains of pride »nd self-love of a very different kind from the love of the Lord and the neighbor? Other instances could be noted, but enough has been brought forward satisfy the present purpose. Mention has been made of those ancestors of the human race who existed in the times of primitive integrity, happiness, purity and goodnesi. Not without the best of reasons did the ancients speak of that period as the GOLDEN age. In modern times, for a similar reason, we speak of the golden rule, a heart of gold, golden fruit, golden opinions, (70/aen opportu- nity, etc., and no one is ever at a loss to perceive the correspondence exist- ing between the symbol and the preciousness of the thing or quality repre- sented by it. The nature and qualities of gold are well known. Its red, bright color, corresponding to that of burning fire, is symbolic of love or goodness, as is also the inherent warmth of the metal. No uncombined acid can cor- rode or dissolve it, acids corresponds to truth falsified, which in other words is evil or wickedness, so " charity suffers long and is kind." The most Intense heat has no further effect on gold than to still further purify it, while its intrinsic value renders it a most proper emblem of that desirable quality which it is used to represent or symbolize in the Word of God, viz., that of the good of love from the Lord. Silver in the internal sense of the word signifies truth, and in an opposite sense, the false. From thii correspondence we can understand how the solution of silver used in photography is so sensitive to the rays of light, for natural light corres- ponds to spiritual light, which is the veriest divine truth, or that True Light which lighteth every man that cometh into the world. The color of silver is also in correspondence with the resplendency of lis^ht. Regarding gold and silver it may be well to state that in the Word tliey stand in a sort of mutual relation to each other, representing respectively love and wisdom, charity and faith, goodness and truth, will and under- standing: the affections, or the feminine principle, and the Intellectual, or the masculine principle. From this correspondence arises the mutual affinity these metals have for each other in the numerous intermixtures and ai)pliances in the various arts and manufactures of the world. lnfi>rior metals, such as brass, iron, etc., are used in the Word to denote a lower dogreeof goodness and truth. We will now approach the sacred writings to see to what extent these remarks will be confirmed. The river of Kden encompassing the whole land of Ilavilah, where there is gold and precious stones (Gen. Ti, 11, 12) denotes the state of the celestial man as to love and faith. Abram's being very rich in silver and gold (Gen. xiii. 2) denotes the state of the Lord in youth as to celestial good and truth. The Israel- ites borrowing jewels of silver and jewels of (fold and raiment of the Kgyptians (Exodus xii, .351 denotes scientific truths and goo* taken away from the evil, and acquired by those who are of the spiritual church. The ppople offering gold and silver, and brass, and blue and purple, etc , for the works of the tabernacle, denotes interior things collated and disposed In externals, where they are representeil. The gold of the ark, and the border of gold round about it, denotes good in the inmost, and the common sphere of pood which proceeds from the I.,ori), and contains all. The mercy Seat and the cherubim of ,90/rf denotes the hearing and reception of worship, and approach to the Lord from the good ot love. The table of show bread covered with gold, and the border of gold round about it, denotes the recep- tion of all that conduces to the spiritual lite in good, and the sphere of good affording protection from evil. The candlestick, its branches, etc., all »t yifoi;d 1 .r his land, for the precious things of heaven, for the dew. and fur tin d -eu that coucheth beneath, and for the precious fruits brought forth by b.the.iM«, andfor theprecious things put forth by the m«OH" (Lteut. xxxiii. i.J, 14.]. This nnrticular blessing was pronounced on Joseph, for the r":iB0ii that by Josoiih arc understood the spiritual coleslhil, who are the hi'hest or supreme in the spiritual kingdom, lly his land is signified that Kingdom, likewise the church thence derived. I5y the precious things of h.' wen, the dew, and the deep that coucheth beneath, are signilied Ihing.s tiiatareH])iritual celesthil in the Internal and external man. Hy llienreciou.s thinss brought forth by tho sun aiiroceed from His spiritual kingdom, conse- I, lently all tlie goods niicl truths which are thence derived. " I'ralso ye tho Lord, praise ye lliin all His hosts. I'raise ye him sun and At^PENDIX TO TflE ARTIZANs' GUIDE. 7 iilooii, praise Him, all ye stars of light" [Psa. cxlviii. 2, 3]. Here by praising the LoRU is signified to worship Him. By tlie angels are signified tliose who are in divine truths fr(jm the good of love, tor all such are augels. By all His hosts are signified goods and truths in their whole compass. By the sun and moon are signified the good uf love, and the truth from that good. By the stars of light are signified the knowledge ot truth from good. Inasmuch as man worsliips the Lord from tho.'-e things which he receives from the Lord, thus from the goods and truths that are in him, and as it is al-;o by virtue of such things that man i-? man, it is therefore said to such things namely, to the sun, moon, and stars, by which are signified goods, truths, and knowledges of truths, that they should worship the Lord. It is clear that the command is not addressed to those luminaries which enlighten the natural world, for how can such tilings oflfer praise and worship? And God made two gruat lights, the greater light to ride the day, and the lesser light to rule ihe night, He made the stai-s also [Gen. 1. 16]. The subject tieated of in this chapter is the new creation cr regeneration of man, that is of those who constituted the Most Ancient church which is here described in the literal sense cf the Word by the creation of the heavens and the earth, those who imagine that this description applies to the creation of the natural universe are much deceived, for how could day and night, or light have an existence previous to the creation of the sun, which according to this account did not come into being until the fourth day ? Or how could the earth bnng forth grass or the herb yield seed, or the fruit tree yield fruit aft> r his kind, before the sun of nature came into being? These and ma»y other objections have been brought forward by infidels and scoffers, against the authenticity of the Word, and by many others who would consider themselves soiily aggrieved by having these terms applied to them, many who are indeed earnest seekers after truth. Let all such know that the Word of God as revealed to us, and the works of God as made known to us through those faculties with which He has endowed us, aie never in conflict and never contradict each other, but are always in heavenly correspondence and celestial harmony one with the other. God's love in the will, and His truth in the understanding, are here called two great lights, and after- wards love is called a greater light, and faith a less, and it is said of love tliat it shall rule by dcuj, and of faith that it shall rule by nhjht. The Most Ancient church acknowledged no faith but love itself; ana the universal heaven is of love, no other life being existent in heaven but the life of love. From love is derived all heavenly happiness, which is so great that no degree of it admits of description, or can ever be conceived by any human idea. Those who are under the influence of love, love the Lord from the heart,but yet know, declansand perceive, that all love, and consequently ail life which is of love alone, and tliereby all happiness, come only from the Lord and thattheyhave not the leastof love, of life, or of happiness, from themselves. The protuiidity of the Word is such that as to its inmost sense it does not treat In the least of natural things, but only makes use of them to represent and svmbolize things that are spirit ual, as may bo s^en irom the following in reference to a consummated church, as the end of the age, or " the end of the world" as it Is erroneou-^ly translated in the authorized version.lt is written, " Immediately after the tribulation of lhos(> days shall the sun be darkened, and the moon shall not give her light, and the stars shall fall from heaven, and the powers of the heavens sliall be shaken; and there shall appear the sign of the Son of Man in heaven; and then shall all the tribes of the earth mourn, and they shall see the .Sun of Man coming in the clouds of heaven with power and great glory. And he shall send his angels with a great sound of a trumpet, and they shall gather to<;ether his elect from the four winds, from one end of heaven to the other". (Matt. xxiv. 29-31). By all these expressions are meant s))iritual things re- lating to the Church, of whose final state or period they are spoken, for in the spiritual sense, by the sun which shall be darkt-ned, is meant love to the Lord ; by the moon which shall not give her light, is meant faith towards Him, by the stars which shall liiU from the heavens is meant the knowledge of goodness and truth. Every intelligent person will know that it is no more possible for the stars in the firmament to fall to the earth, than it would be for a million of worlds to fall ou a pebble by the sea shore. By 8 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE; the sijfn of the Son of Man in heaven, is meant the appearance of Divine truth in the Word from Him; by tlie tribes of the earth which shall mourn, Is meant the failure of all truth which is of faith, and of all pood which is of love; by the coming of the sou of Man in the clouds of heaven with power and great glory, is meant the presence of the Loku in the \V ord, and revelation ; by the clouds of heaven is signified the literal sense • f the Word, by power and great glory is meant its internal sense, which has retereuce solely to the Loud and His kingdom, in each and every passage, and from this, that sense derives its pov,-er and glory ; by the angels with a great sound of a trumpet is meant heaven, whence divine truth comes, by gathering together theelect from the four winds, from one . nd of heaven to theother, is meanta new heaven and a new Church, to be formed of those who have faith in the Lord and live according to His jM-ecepts. "Behold the day of the Loud cometh, for the stars of heaven and the constellations thereof shall not give their light, the .<;un f^hail be darkened in his going forth, and the moon shall not cause her light to shine, (Isa. xiii., 9-10). I will cover the heaven and make the stars thereof dark, 1 will cover the sun witb a cloud, and the mdoh shall not give her light. (Ezek. xxxii. "-8.) ^hc day of the Lord is near, the tiuii vLuC moon shall be darkened, and thj stars shall withdraw their shin- i'ig,(Joel. iii, 14-1.5 ) The same idea is visible in all these passages. By the day ofthaLouD, is meant His advent, wliicl: was at a time when there was no longer any good of love or truth of faith remaining in the Church, or any kiiowledgeof the Loud, therefore it iscalled ., day of darkness- and tiiirk darkness. From want of knowledge respecting the si-iritual sense of the NV^ord, as unfolded by the science of correspondences, many Chris- liiins at the present day suppose that the Lord will appear in the clouds of the atmosphere, and, accompanied by the whole ^f the heavenly host, will be visible to the natural eye, when the dead bodies and mouldering dust i)f all who have ever lived on the earth will be raised (at the sound ol the arcliangel'u trumpet), out of tlieir graves, and wherever else tiieir dust may be scattered, no matter what form they may have assumed. It is thought 'hi-i inconceivable mas.s of corruption will be raised u]>, and the soul of •■ach be re-implanted, the judgment set, and the trooks opened, each one being judged out of what is written in those books, just as if the Omnis- cient Onk could possibly require a set of books; that then the earth and all that is therein will be burnt up, the stars fall from heaven and the 8un and moon be blotted out Iroin the creation. Slaiiy good people enter- lain these thoiigiits becau.se things are thus described in the letter of the Word, but the case is tar otherwise, for it is most true thai, by clouds in the •Scripture is meant the Word in the let ti'r, for it is written that "His strength is 111 the c/()i(^/.v." that "Histrnlh reuchelh unto the £-/oi((/.s-," that "He inaketh the rtimils His chariot," that " His faithfulness reacheth unto the r.'ouils, • that the " clouds are the dii-t of ILs feet ; that thick clouds are a rovering to Him. In his niiclouili'd purity. He is described as a " morn- ing \\\l\\ou\. clouds.' Tlii'se and many other siniilare.xpressionscan never be jiredicated of the clouiis of nature, but that they are true of the Word is most clearly nianile>t ; liHiict', when the Loiu> is spoken of as coming in the clouilu of heaven, a literal or ))ersonal coming is not to be understood or expected, but instead tliore< f, on unfolding or opt-ningol thai s)n ritual or internal sense of the Word which lias hitherto lain so di-eply concealed within the clouds of the letter, and which as toils inmost is the LoHD llinis(>lf', and though iheaiino.ncenieiit may seem premature, this coming has actually taken place during these latter days by mid througf. the dis- closure ol tlidt seii-o to munkind. But more regarding this in what follows. When ri;jlitly niiderstood, the \\'ord leaches that the only resurrect ion that will "ver be accorded to man's body consists in the raising lip <>r the soul or spiiitiiiil body, which takes place immeiiately after natural death, and uller death, the judgnient. This does not take p'jice in t Ills World, but ill the spiritual world into wliieli every one enters after Iho 1 1 "ill hoi' I lie bod v.t he biioks which \\ ill then be opened. and troin whii^h lie will bejiidj^ed, signify the interiors of the mind of man, becausu iu theiu are written ill I tlmiys appertain ig to his lil'e. Another reHiirrection is indeed spoken of in John v.25., a.s follows; — '' The hour id coming, and now in, when the dead Hbull heur tliu vuic« uf APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. 9 the Son ofOoD.and theythat hear shall live ;plainly indicatinp; a resurrec- tion from the fjravHs of carnality and thelove ol self and thi^ world, which is spiritual death, to the life of spiritual mindodness, and the love of the Lord and ll'c neighbor, which alonais true life. This resurrection must take place during man's life in the body, it cannot take place atter death, for such as the ruling love is in this lifr> it will irrevocab'y remain to all eternity. It is also a great fallacy to infer from any description in the Word, that this earth will ever be.destroyed, no such doctrine being ever taught or inculcated therein. In the modern discoveries of geology, the testimony of God through His works, points unerringly to the sublime truth that Infinite power has been constantly engaged during countless millions of ages in preparing the earth for the abode of man. It has been created that the human race might exist, and thence heaven, for the hu- man race is the seminary of heaven, and when infinitp Love is satisfied to its fullest capacity with intelligent and rational beings on whom it may shower its blessings and celestial beatitudes, for it creates them for no other end. tiien, just so soon, but no sooner, will the procreations of the human race cea'^e, and the world become a blank in the creation. The most ample testimony is not wanting to prove that it was He who laid the found.ition- of the earth, that it should not b6 removed for ever," Ps. CIV., 6. " He built his sanctuary like high palaces, like the earth which he hath established for ever," Ps. lxxviii 69." The world also is established that it cannot be moved." P.-i. xciii. 1. " Say among the heathen that the Loi d reigneth ; the world also shall be established that it SHALL N> 'T BE MOVED, Ps. xcvi. 10. " One generation pas'ethaway, and another generation cometh, but the earth abideth for ever. Eccle,s 1,4. Uf the sun moon, and stars, we read : — " They shall fear thee as long as the sun and moon endure, throughout all generations." Ps. Lxxii., 5. " His name shall endure for ever ; his name shall be continued as long as the sun,"— ver. 17. " Praise ye him, sun and moon : praise ye him all ye stars of light. Let them praise the name oi the lord; for he commanded, and they wore created. He hath established them FOR ever and ever : he hath made a decree which shall not pass. " Ps. cxLViii.,3, 5, 6. These euuciations are certainly all that will bo required to manifest the divine intention that tlie universe shall not cease to exist. A perishing earth is used in the language of correspon- dences to describe a perishing church in the following and many other passages " The earth is utterly broken down, the earth is clean dissolved, the earth is moved exieediiifjly ." Isa. x.xiv, 19. " 1 he cur.^e devoured the earth and they that dwell therein are desolate ; therefore the inhabitants of the eirth are burned, and few men left," Isa. xxiv 6, " For my people is foolish and they have not known me; they are ^ottish children, and they have no understanding ; they are wiseto doevil, butto do good they have no knowledge, 1 beheld tha earth, and, lo, it was without form and void, and the heavens, and they had no light." Jer. rv. 22. 23. Here we have the picture of an apostate church in a .,tate of declension from goodness, described by the earth being clean dis-olved, as moved exceedingly, as being without form and void, and the inhabitants thereof as being burnt up. J t is most evident that neither of these statements can be lite- rally true of the natural earth. It is written in Joel " In those days will I pour out mv spirit and I will show wonders in the heavens and in the earth,blood,"andflre, and pillars of smoke. The sun shall be turned into darkness, and the moon into blood, before the great and terrible day of the Lord come," ii. 30., 31. The apostle Peter on the day of Pentecost, Acts XI, 16, 21, cites theeutire passage from Joel, and refers to it as being fnlfilled on that day, but we know as well as we can know any thing, that these great commotions did not actually take place in the kingdom of nature, at that time. Our ever blessed Lord and glorilied Redeemer was seen by the beloved disciple in Apocalyptic vision, as '• One like unto the Son of Man, clothed with a garm mt down to the foot and girt about the paps with a golden girdle. His head and his hairs were white like wool, as white as snow, and his eyes woie as aflame of tire, and his feet were like unto fine brass as if they burned in a furnace, and his voice as tho sound of many waters. And he had in his right hand .seven sfnra, and put of his mouth went a sharp two-edge4 sword, aad bis couatenance was 10 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS GUIDE. as the sun shining in his strength." Rev. i,'13, 16. One like unto the Son of Man, siguities the Lord as to tlie Word, clothed with a garment down \o the foot signifies the proceeding divine, which is divine truth, for gar- ments in the Word denote truths, and girt about the paps with a golden girdle signifies the proceeding and at the same time the coujohiing divine which is divine good; by the paps or breast, divine love is signified, as is evident from those passages in the Word where thev are mentioned as also from their correspondence with love: and his eves' were as a flame of fire, sigiiilies the divine wisdom of the divine love, "and his feet like unto fine brass as if they burned in a furnace, signilies ilivin*- good natural ; fire, or what burns, signilifs good ; and fine brass siijnities the good ofti uth natural, tlierelbre by the feet of the Son of the Man like unto fine brass, as if they burufd in a furnace, is signified divine good nifural, and. His voice as the soundof many waters, signify divine truth natural; for waters in the Word denote truth : and in his right hand seven stars, signilies all knowledges of good and truth iu the church from ilim, whioli aje tliarth ; and the dragon stood before the woman which was ready to be delivered, for to devour her diild as soon as it was born." Rev.xii,!. 4. And there appeared a groat wonder in heaven, signifies revelation from the Lord concerning the New Church in the heavens and on earth, ami concerning tliu diliicult reception and resistance which its doctrines will moot with. A woniun clothed with the sun, and the moon under her fei't, signifies the J^ORD'8 New Church in the heavens, whicliis the new heaven, and the Lord's New Church about to be upon eartli, which is the New .Jerusalem, )or it has pleased the Loud in His Word to cause His Church to be repre- sented under th(; .- iinilitude ofa woman, as well as by the symbol of acity, as witness " C(jmc hither, and I will shew thee the bride, Iho L'Vmb's wife." Rev. x.Ki. 9. Where l)y the La. MB is signified the Lokd as to the essential innocence of His Divine Huuiuu nature, and by the bride is nignified His church, represented by the New Jerusalem about to bo con- j lined to Him. 'J"he reason why she ajjpeared clothed witli the sun ia, bcciiusc this church is principled in lovi- to the Lord, for it acknowledges lliin, and does His commandments, and this is to love Him. By the m ion is signified intelligenro in the natural ma:i, and faitli, and the reason why the inoim was seen under her feet is, becituse the church on earth is niidi'r>tood. which is not yet conjoined with the church in lieaven; by ap- 1 I' inn.^ under her feet is further Sigiiili.d lliat itis abnut to bo upon earili, and will as to doctrine be grounded on tlie divine truths of the ' W'nrd; and upon lierhead a crown of twi'h e stars, siL'iiifies the wisdo;n d iiitelli !ence of this cliurch from knowledges of' divine good and I i vine truth deriv,.,! from the Word ; by the crown on lierhead is signified windoni Hinl intelligence, and by starsaresignifie I the knowh'dgesofdivino giiol .111 1 1 triitli- Anil she being with child, cried, travailing in birth, and pained to lie delivered, signifies the doctrine of tlie New Cli'irch nboiit f 'I roiiie lorlh, and Its diliicult reception in conseeiiieiice of the resistance (I ni.ota wlfh Irom those who are understood by tlie (liagon. To tie wiili ClulU mguitteii thv birth of Uoctriue, bccauiic by the chilU which was iu the APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' QUtDS. 11 wetnb, whope birth is treated of in vor. 5. is signifl^'d tlie doctrine of the New Church, for nothing else is signified by being with child or in travail and bringing, forth, in the spiritual sense of the Word, but to conceive and bring forth those things whicli relate to spiritual life. And there appeared another wonder in heaven; signifies revela'ioa from the Lord concerning those who are against the New Churcti and its doctrine. And behold a great red dragon, signifies those in the Reformed Church who make God three, and the Lord two, and separate Charity from Faith, and insist on the latter being competent to salvatiou without the former. Such are here meant and in what follo^vs, by the dragon : for they are against the two essentials of the New Church, whicti are, that God is one in essence and in person, in whom there is a Trinity, and that the Lord is that God; also that charity and faith area one as an essence and its form; and that none have charity and faith but those who live according to the commandments, which say that evils are not to be done, and in proportion as any one does not commit evils, by shunning them as sins against God, in the same proportion he does the goods which, relate to charity, and believes the truths which relate to faith ; having seven heads, denotes insanity from the profimation and f;tlsilicatiou of the truths of the Word ; and ten horns, wliich denotes much power, and seven crowns upon his heads, signifies all the truths of the Word falsified and profaned; and his tail drew the third part of the stars of heaven, and did cast them to the earth, signifies that, by falsifications of the truths of the Word they have alienated all spiritual knowledges of good and truth from the church, and by application to false doctrines have entirely des- troyed them : and the dragon stood before the woman who was ready to be delivered, to devour her child as soon as it was born, signifies that they who are meant by the dragon will endeavour to extinguish the doc- trine of the New Church at its birth. In the narrative continued in ver^e 5, by "she brought forth a male child," is denoted the doctrine of the New Church; "who was to rule all nations with a rod of iron, signifies which, by truths from the literal .sense of the Word, and at the same time, by rational arguments drawn from the light of nature, will convince all who are in dead worship through being principled in faitli separated from charity that are willing to be convinced. " And her child was caught up to God and to his throne," signifies the protection of the doctrine by the Lord because it is for the use of the new church, and its being guarded by the angels of heaven. " And the woman fled into the wilderness." signifies the new church which is the new Jerusalem, at first confined to a few, where there are no longer any truths, for by a wilderness in the Word, is signified, 1. The church devastated, or in which all the truths of the Word are falsified, such as it was among the Jews at the time of the Lord's advent. II. The church in which there were no truths, from not possessing the Word, such as it was among the well disposed Gentiles in the Lord's time. III. A state of temptation, in which man is, as it were, without truths, because surrounded by evil spirits who induce tempta- tions, and and then as it were, deprive him of truths. It will be seen ftom this that a spiritual wilderness is in exact correspondence with a natural wilderness, which signifies a place wliere there is little or no water, for water denotes truth. Passages irom the Word in corroboration of these statements are too numerous to be cited here, but will occur to every attentive reader of its contents. And the city hac no need of the Stjs, neither of the Moon, to shine in it, for the ..^lory of God did lighten it, and the Lamb is tlie light thereof, Rev. xxl., 23. By the sun is hero signified natural love separate from spiritual love, which is self love; and by the moon is signified intelligence and also faith natural, separated from intelligence and faith spiritual, which is self-derived intelligence and faith from self; this love, and thi^^ intelligence and faith, are here signified by the sun and moon, which will not be required to shine upon those who Will be in the Lord's New Church; by the glorv of God which lightens it, i* signified the divine truth of the Word, and because that light is from the Lord, it is said that thelight thereof is the Lamb. " "That ye may be the children of your Father who is in heaven ; for he maketh his StXN to rise on the evil and the »»ood,and sendeth rain on the just and on the unjust,'' Mfttt. v., 46, signifies iu the spiritual sense that from the Lord, as a, sun 12 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. procpods light and heat ; the light which proceeds, inasmuch as it is spiri- tual light, is the divine truth, and the heat inasmuch as it is spiritual heat, is the divine love; these flow from the Lord continually into everv man', but are variously received according to the state of therecipieut; "by tlio evil they are turned into evil and what is false, by the good they are received as good and truth, and are thus comforted and built, up by them. The correspondence is closely seen in the casi' of the sun ofnatun^, which although it emits nothing but light and heat into external objects, still the eflecis are very different on a putrid carcass, and the grow- ing fruits of the earth, or a beautiful flower garden. Again, in David. " His seed shall endure forever, and his throne as the Sun before me. It shall be established for ever as the Moox," I's. Lxxxix., 36, 37. By David, who is here treated of in the literal sense, is understood the Lord, liy his seed which shall endure for ever, is signifled the divine truth, and afl those who shall receive it. By His throne which shall emiure as the sun, is signifled heaven and His church, which are principled iu celestial ko'>i1, which is the good of love. By His throne which shall be established as the moon for ever, is signified heaven and the church which are principled in , spiritual good, which is the divine truth. Concerning those who love the J.ORD it is written, "Let them who love Him be as the Sun when he goeth forth in his might," by which is signified the operation of the Lord's divine love in them. Again, in Is. lx., "20, "Thy Sun shall no more go down; neither shall thy Moon withdraw itself; for the Loru shall be thine everlasting light." These words treat otlhe Lord, and of the new heaven and new earth, that is concerning the church to bp established by Ilim. Tliatthe good of love to the Lord should not perish, nor the good ot clianty towards their neighbour iu tliose who belong to that church, is understood by, "Thy sun shall no more go down, neither shall thy moon ■withdraw itself;" That they shall continue to eternity in truths from the good ot love, is understood by, " Tlie I,oui> shall be thine everlasting light, and the days of thy mourning shall be ended," everlasting light buing predicated of those who are in the good of love to the Lord, and ending of tlie days of mourning, of tho.so wlio are in the good of charity towards their neighbour. Jn an opposite sense, we have, "The Sun shall not smite thoo bv day nor the Moon by iiiglit, The Lord shall preserve thee from all evil ; he shall preserve thv soul," Ps. cxxi., 6, 7. Bv the sun IS here understood the love of self, and by the moon the false principle thence derived; inasmuch as all evil is from thatlove, and from evil what 18 lal.se, therefore it is said, " The Loud sliall preserve thee fi om all evil ; he shall preserve thy soul," the soul here signifying the life of trutli. ihis .3 the sun meant by our bles'^ed Loud in the parable when he says, "But wlien the Sltn was up it was scorched, and because it had no root it withered away," Marie iv., 6. This is the sun that has ripened and brouglit forth more direful fruits of evil than all other causes combined, having in short, populated hell with i.iliabitants, and filled the earth with every phase of woo and misery wliich it contains; it is the very opposite h t'^^*'^'"' ^^ which it is written; " But unto you that fear mv name ^"'''' 111" Sun of Kighteousness arise with healing "in his wings." Mai. iv., h I *""' of righteousness here denotes tlie divine celestial principle, or the Lord as to the good of love; and the wings of the Loud in which there is healing signifies truth from thatgood, which is thedivinespiritual principle; healing denotes reformatinn thereby Kromtliis uncreatedand iiiliiiitely glorious Sun, as from a boundless ocean, is deiived all the bless- ings of love, wisdom, mercy and happiness enjoved by all in heaven or on earth: through ami by the recptinn of its iiithient lii'e every thing exists, without it nnthiiigcan exist, eillier in. the visible or the invisible creation, ancl just so far as our wills and nnilorstiiniliigx are expanded to receive and aiipropriiite the ineU'.ihle delights which it ci>miniiiiicates, just so pure, unsullied and seraphic will bo our jovs and beatitinios both in this world and ttiat which is to come, for in that Saokicd puksknck there is fulness ifjoy, and jileasures for evermore. Note the corrospondeiico of o/7 and vine in the parable, where our l;Oui) said of tlie Samaritan, that coining to the man who was wounded l)y thieves, lie boiinil up Ills wounds, and pouri'd inni/ mitl mine, Luke x. ?A where by oil uud wine is not meant these things, but the good of lovo aD Lord's prayer as well as in the holy supper, is signified in the supremo sen-se, the Lord and the things of celestial love. In an opposite sense, to eat bread in the sweat of the face, Gen,iii, 19, represents celestial truths 14 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. received in a state of aversion. The Children of Israel lusting for fl^sh and the flesh pots of E;;ypt represents the desire of the natural man to live in a corporeal manner, that is, in the loves of self and the world. The flesh of the foreskin to be circumcised denotes the removal of the defiled loves of the natural man. The way of all flesh corrupted, sijiiities the understanding cf truth totally destroyed in tlie corporeal state of min. By the call addressed to every feathe'red fowl, and every beast oftho earth to eat of the flesh of the mighty and drink the fc/oorf of the princes of the earth, of rams, of lambs, of goats, of bullocks, etc., on the mountains of Israel, and to be tilled with hor.ses a"d chariots, mighty men, and all mea of war, Ezek. xxxix, 16, 17, the Hnly supper is signified, for in Rev. XIX. 17. it is called the supper of the Great God, by every feathered fowl, and by everv beast of the field, is sifruilied man as to his thoughts and afl'ec- tions, or understanding and will ; the mountains of Israel denotes the good of love and charity; these things which f.n-m the feast denote all ispiritual and celestial things proceeding from the Lord Himself, as to the good of His divine love, and the divine truth of Uis wisdom. This is the spiritual sense of the passage, for it is clearly impossible that such things could be literally eaten. The feast of uuleavened bread, or Paschal, was to signify the subjugation of hell, and the glorification of the Lord's humanity, for it denotes His presence with deliverance, hence it was forbidden to eat of any thin^ leavened, because a fermenting agent denotes the false from evil. Spiritual good is signified by those words in Ezekiel : " A new heart also will I give you, and a new spirit will I put within you; and I will take away the stony heart out of your flesh, and I will give yon a heart of flesh, XXXVI- 26. In the yVorA.hrart signifies love; hence the love of good is signified by a heart of flesh. ]Vafer, in the Word denotes truth, and for this reason waters and rivers are described, where gardens and rivers are mentioned, as siguificatives of the man of the Cliurch. To draw water denotes to be instructed in the truths of faith and to bo illustrated. Drawers of water, such as the Gibeonitcs were, denote those who desire to know truths (or no other end than to know them, A fl >od of water denotes temptation and desolation, because wicked persuasions and thoughts aciu- ally flow in fromevil spirits. Wolls of unclean water denote what is not true, Broken cisterns denote doctrines in which are no truths. In beautiful corres- pondence with this divine symbol of truth we will find that in physics, or the .science of natural things, that man applies the same standard to ascer- tain the weight of solids and !i(iuids, t-acli being said to be heavy or W-hi. specifically as they relate to water; thus the e.xact weightof a cubic inch of gold, compared with that of a cubic inch of water, is called its specific. gravity. Weight, spiritually considered, is nothing else than real worth, ence we have the expressions, solid men, or men of worth or truth, and weighty words, or words of wisdom. Furthermore, as Omnipotent power i.s continually predicated of the Lord as having relation to the principle of His divine truth, and this truth being symbolized by water, so none in civilized life can ])0ssibly be ignorant of the corresj)onding jirodi'lons power derived from water in tlie various uses it performs in the world, and the cleansing properties of divine truth on the heart, when it is apjjlied to the lite, an body, should be equally well known, ^ouie may bo solicitous to know the reason why so much is i-aid regarding love and wisdom, or good anil truth in the above pass.Tges, and the enquiry is reasonable and just. In answer to this 1 would slate that all the attributes and ])erfectionsof the evei* bles.sed (Jod resolve them.-elves as in a focus into thos(; two, viz: Lovo and Wisdom, or wliat is the same, (iood and Truth, corresponding to heat and light, or what is the same, warmtlj and illumination, as proceeding from the sun of nature, and these iji the C'KKATOU form a one, constituting what has I)c<'n called a nnirriage of good and truth. M:in, being created in the image of (ioD, ought to pre- sent a (inite transcriijt of those attributes which e.xist to an infinite extent In his Maker, and onexan-.inatinn this will be found to be the case, for there is no quality inherent in man but what belongs either to his will or undcr- Blnnding. What doe.s not belong to oneoflhese, forms no part of the man, and these together form one mind, iinil the miuil is what constitutes the iiniu himself, the body being merely a clothiui; ulimiuated liom the ultimato APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANs' GUIDE. 15 thinss of nature, such as carbon, phosphorus, silicon chlorine, phosphate of lime, sulphur, iron, magnesium, water, potassium, &c. &c., of all of which man is divested by natural death, never more to resume them, but nevertheless he tinds himsalf in the other life, possessed of the human form, and every member, faculty and sense which he enjoyed in this life, but much more keen, delicate and refined, by purification from the things of nature. Those things just mentioned are what constitute flesh and blood, of which it is written, that they shall not inherit the Kingdom of God, and one has well observed that you may as well attempt to raise a ship from the bottom of the ocean and leave down there all the wood and iron, as to raise a natural body without flesh and blood. We are much at a loss to conceive what possible improvement could be effected by the union of natural bodies to the spiritual bodies of those countless m> riads which formed the ni'ghty population beheld in heaven by the beloved dis- ciple in the Isle of Patmos. Let us go a step further and investigate the works of G"D as seen in the visible creation, and here everything will be seen to reflect the attributes of the Almighty, but always in correspondence with His love and wisdom, or goodness and truth. From this correspon- de:;ce every thing seems to go in pairs, for here we find male and female, body and soul, sun and moon, heat and light, land and water, flesh and blood, heart and lungs, gold and silver, brass and iron, and so on through- out a!i the ramifications of nature even down to the ultimates. What is true of G0D'.9 worts must in a still more exalted sense be true of that Word which is the transcript of His own perfections, and the embodiment of His divine love and wisdom; hence it comes that in the Word there is nothing but what has constant reference to either one or the other of these attributes, or of something in connection with them, or in opposition to them, such as evil and the false, and from this arises further, an apparent repetition of the same idea, sentiment or thought, very often in the course of a single verse, but it ought to be known that one of these expressions has relation to the divine Love, and the other to the divine Wisdom, or someth'ng in connection with them, or in opposition to them, as no vain reiteration can ever be predicated of the divine Word. In orderto analyze the subject still further, take for iustance that inimitable blessing wherewith Aaron and his sons were commanded to bless the children of Israel : " The Lord b'.ess thee and keep thee, the Lord make His face to shine upon thee, and begi'aoiousinto thee: the 1.,ord lift up his countenance upon thee, and give thee peace." Numb, vi, 24,26. In the internal sense these words signify that the Lord from divine love flows in with divine truth and with divine pood into all those who receive Him. The divine love from which the Lord flows in is understood by the face of the Lord, and the divine truth with which he flows in, is understood by the Lord making His face to shine upon them; and the divine good with which He flows in, is under- stood by the Lord lifting up His countenance upon them; defence from evils and falsities, which otherwise would take away the influx is under- stood hv " the Lord keep thee and be gracious unto thee," heaven and eternai'felicity. which are the gift of the Lord by His divine goodness and divine truth, are understood by'" and give thee peace," for when evils are removed from man, the interior of his mind is filled with celestial beatitudes and joy unspeakable. In their inmost sense these divine expres- sions contain such a deep meaning, and embrace such transcendent blessings that even a very faint idea of them is in a manner incommunicable to man in his present state of existence. Again in David, " Thy mercy, O Lord is in the heavens; and thy faithfulness reacheth unto the clouds. Thy righteousness is like the great mountains, thy judgments are a great deep," Ps. XXXVI. 6 7. Wnere mercy and righteousness have relation to the" love of God, and faithfulness and judgment have relation to His truth. Again in Isaiah, " And on this mountain shall the Lord of hosts make unto all people afeast offat things, a feastof wines on the lees, of fat things full of marrow, of wines on the lees well refined," xxv. 6, The subject treated of is concerning the advent of the Lord, and by a feast of fat things is denoted the communication of goods, and by a feast of lees or of the best wine, the appropriation of truths. Again in Genes-Is. " Judah is alien's whelp; from" the prey, my son, thou art gone up; he stooprd down, he couched as a lion and as an old lion 5 who snail rouse him up?" 16 APPENDIX TO THE ARTlzANS' GUIDE. XLix. 9. By Judah is here sijjnifled the LoRD's'celestial kingdom , where all are in power from the Lord by divine truth ; this power is understood ?y anon s wlielp, ana by an old liou ; by the prey from which he went up, IS signihed the dissipation of falsities and evils; by stooping down is signilied to put himself into power; by couching is signitied to be in secu- rity from every falsity and evil, wherefore, it is said, "who shall rouse him up. Again, O Lord my God thou art very great, thou art clothed witb honour and majesty," Ps. civ. 1. There by bein? clothed with honour and majesty, when predicated of the Lord, is signified his girding Himself with diviue truth and divine good, for they proceed from Him, aud tlience gird Him, and thus constitute heaven. Again in John, " In the beginnina was the Word and the Word was with Uod, and the Wokd wus G< d Ihe same was in the beginning with God. A1! things were made by him and without him was not any thing made that was made. In him wa« lite: and the life was the light of men," John i. 1 4. From the^^t^ passages it is evident that tlie Lord is God from eternity, and that this God is Himself the Lord who was born into the wor'd for It IS said that the Word was with God and Goy was the WorD' as also that without Him was not anything maJe that was made' Why the Lord is called the Word, is but lit'Je understood lu • •« i^*'"' ^^ " however caiied the Word because the Word Rigmhes Divine Truth, or Divine Wisdom; and the Loud ii Divine Tr.iih itselt, or Divine Wisdom itself, for which reason He is likewise called the LiOHT which lighteth every man that cometh into the World From the i.iPK and Light which pervades the Word comes the vivilication of the attections of that man's will who reads it devoutly; and the iUumiuation oi the thoughts of his understanding, there being something iatimaicly aliectiDg the heart and spirit which flows with iit^ht into the mi-id and bears witness. Divine Love and Divine Wisdom constitute a one, and were tr jm eternity a one in the Lord, wherefore it is said, "In him was hfe and the life was the light of men." This oneness is meant by these words '• In the beginning was the Word and the Word was God " By tho F ither is donoted the Divine Love, orthe Lord as to Divine Good By the Word made flesh is signified the Lord as to the Divine Human urineip'e v.hlch He assumed by being born into the world, from whence Ue is called " the Only Beuotten of the Father " the " sent of God " the " Arm of the Lord," for the Divine Good, or the Father, filled this Human prin- ciple as the soul fills the body, not indeed, in perfect fulness at first but beginning as it were from a germ, the Divine principlegradually expanded during His life on the earth, sustaining Him, and enabling lUm to over- come, in the conflicts, combats and temptations admitted into His huma- nity from the powers of darkness, which were of such a direful nature that they are utterly inconceivable by tlie mind of man. The Divine principle williin denoted by the Father, was that Omnipotent jjower wliich enabhd liim to work miracles, so tliat He conld say, " Tlie Father who dweilef h in me, he doetli tho works," and from this alsi emanated those g-ac-"oi:s words which proceeded out of his mouth, of which it is said, ''I liavo given them the woids which thougavest me." Before his Incarnation tho I.,ord existed in (irst principles only, by assuming tho Humanity Ho as It were de.scended to the ultimate, or lowest piinriples, and from this He culls liimself "the First and the Last," Rev. i, 17. Tliemerely human quali- ties derived from the mother were graduallv eliminated Irom the a.^sumed nature by temptations, sufferings, combats, conflicts and continual victories over tho jjowers of darkness, who at this time lield almost entire posses- sion of the human nice; by these victories He removed hell from man, and re.-(torcd "that which lie took not away," even man's liberty to choose life or death for himself, and furthermore glorified His Humanity, and made it Divine, or One with that Divine Good in which ho existed from eternity, so that He could .^ay before His ascension: "all power is given unto rae in heaven and in earth," Matt, xxviii. 18, and after full and com- ))lote glorification. He could say to the beloved disciple in I'alraos, ■' I am Alpha «nd Omega, the beginning not tho ending, saith the Lord, wliich ,!■<, and which wag, aud which is to come, the A!iiiig!:ty," Uev. I, 8. The |Lord In fun Word, is called Lord, ;or Jehovah, in iiebrew, when the word Loup in priuied in caiiitals;, from the good ol His divine I 17 .•H.V-V- God, from the divine truth of His divine Wisdom; He is called Christ, tlie Anointed, in relation to His kingly office, and Jesos, signifying salva- tion, in relation to Hisofflc;e as Saviour. He calls Himself the Son of God, when His divinity. His unity with the Father, His divine power, and the life that is from Him, are treated of, and the Son of Man, when He as the Word, suffers, judges, comes into the world, redeem-?, saves, and regenerates. Jehovah, who was in Him, appeared to be absent in temp- tations, and this appearance was proportionable to the degree of His immersion in the humanity. Hence His prayers to the Fatiier, in the Uospels and elsewhere; many of them can be seen in the I'salms, which as to their internal sense treat of the Lord alone, under the figure of David as a king. The Lord coming forth from the Father, and returning to the i' ather, means the humanity ijroceediug from the Divinity, and the union and glorification of the humanity. By the Lord's birth from eternity, is meant His birth foreseen from eternity, and provided for in time. By Lord Gud Almighty and the Lamb, mentioned Rev. XXI. 22, and elsewhere, is not meant two divine persons, but by Lord God Almighty or Lord God Omnipotent, is signified the Lord from eternity, who is Jehovah Himself, and the Lamb signifies the divine Humanity which Jehovah assumed by birth into the world, by virtue oi whicli He became Emmanuel, or God with us. From these observations it may be seen that the I^ord is the God of heaven and earth; that in Him is the Divine Trinity of Father, Son and Holy Spirit, or the Whole Fulness of the Godhead, corresponding to the heat, light, and emanat- ing influence of the Sun, or of the soul, body, and proceeding operation in man, consequently that He alone is the only true Object of love and wor- ship, in whom is the Father, for " whoso seeth Him seeth the Father. In order to still further confirm the heavenly doctrine of the Supreme Divinity of our blessed Lord, and to show the falsity of the present pre- vailing doctrine which divides the Godheadinto three persons, " the same in substance, equal in power and glory," or, as it is expressed by the Athanasian Creed, three persons, "each of whom by himself is God and Lord" (a doctrine which, and the assertion is made with all charity and respect for the numerous class who think otherwise, has no existence whatever in the VVord, and was entirely unknown in the Church until about the time of the Nicene Council), it" is thought proper to adduce the foUoNving passages from the Word. First of all, to prove the Uxity of the Divine Being, s?e (Dent. vi. 4.) "Hear O Israel, the Lord our God is One Lord." Tids divine truth is repeated by the blessed Jesus in Mark xii. 29. " lam Jehovah and there is none else." Isa. xlv.18, xlv. o. "I, even I, am He, and there is Jso God with Me." Deut. xxxii, 39. There is none other God but One" 1 Cor. viii. i. "Tliou art the God, even thou Aloxb, of all the kingdoms of the earth," 2 Kings xix. 15. " One is your Father which is in Heaven" Matt, xxiii. 9. Let us learn, with grateful reverence, who this our H^-avenly Father, Lord, and God is. Every passage of the fol- lowing evidence is refulgent with the light of divine triith, for they proceed from Him who is the Truth itself, " Unto usaCniLD is born, untousaSoN is given, and the government shall be upon His shoulders, and His name shall be called. Wonderful, Counsellor, the Mighty God, the Everlast- ing Father, the Prince ofPEACE," Isa. ix. 6. "Thou O Jehovah art our Father, our Rkdeemer, thy Name is from everlasting," Isa. Ixiii. 16. " Surely God is in Thee, and "there is None else, there is no god, verily thou art a God that hidest thyself, O God of Israel, the Saviour" Isa. xlv. 11. 15. This is said in reference to His veiling over His divine glory with tho Human nature. " Thou shalt know that 1, Jehovah am thy SAViouRand Redeemer, the Mighty One of Jacob" Isa. Ix, 16. " There is no God else beside me, a just God and a Saviour, there is none beside me, look unto me; and be ye saved, all the ends of the earth, for I am God and there is none else" Isa. xlv. 21. 22. " Thy Maker is thy Husband; Jehovah of hosts, is His name, and thy Redeemer the Holy One of Israel; the God op thi; whole earth shall He be called." Lsa. liv. 5. There can be no uncertainty as to ii-ho is meant by these announcements. "Thus saith Jehovah the King of Israel and His Redeemer, Jehovah of Hosts; I axn the First, and I am tlie Last, and brsir?" ni". there is ■>■■ God," isa. xliv. 6, ' 1 am Jehovah thy Gou, the Uoiy ^ue uflsiaei ti.. 18 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZAN's GUIDE. Savtour" Isa. xliii. 3, "Thou hast redeemed me, O Jehovah God of truth," Ps. xxxi. 5, ' I will help thee, saith Jehovah and thy kedeeheu, the Holy One of Israel," Isa. xli. 14, " As for our Redeemer, Jehovah OF Hosi'S IS His Name, the Holy One of Israel." Isa. xlvii. 4., " Thus saith Jehovah thy Redeemer, and He that formed thee Irom the womb; I am Jeiovah that maketh a'l thinf/x, that stretcheth forth the heavens alone, that sprcadeth abroad the earth hy mijself," Isa. xliv. 24, '• I, even I, am Jeho 'ah and besides Me there is no Saviour," Isa. xliii. 11. " Thus saith Jehovah, your Redeemer, the Holy One of Israel," ver. 14, " With everlasting kindness will I have mercy on thee, saith Jehovah thy Redeemer," Isa.' liv. 8, " Thus saith Jehovah thy Redeemer, the Holy One of Israel; I am Jehovah thy God which teacheth thee to profit., which leadeth thee by the way thou shouldst go," Isa. xlviii. 17 " With everlasting kindness will I have mercy on thee, saith Jehovah thy Ro- deemer, Isa. iv. 8, " Their Redeemer is strong, Jehovah of Hosts is His ■ >iame," Jer. 1. 34. " I am thy God from the landof Eg.vpt, and thou shalt know no God but Me, for there is Xo Saviour Beside Me" Hos. xiii. 4, " Thus saith Jehovah, that formed thee O Israel, fear not, for I have n'^^DEEMED thee." Isa. xliii. 1, " Be strong, fear not; behold your God will come with vengeance, even God with a recompense, he will come and save you." Isa. 3&xv, 4, "The Lord Jehovah is my strength and my song, he also is become my salvation," Isa. xii. 2, "Behold Jehovah God ehall come with strong hand, and His arm shall rule for Him, He shall feed his Hock like a shepherd," Isa xl. 10. -11. The Saviour lays claim to tins title, John x. 11. " Let the words of my mouth, and the meditation of my lieart, be acceptable in thy sight O Jehovah, my stren^^th, and my Redeem- er," Ps.xix. 14, " But God shall Redeem my soul from the power of the ,"-rave, he will receive me," Ps. xlix. 15, " I will also praise thee with tho jfsaltpry, even thy truth, O my God ; unto thee will 1 sing with tho harp, U thou Holv One of Israel. My lips shall greatly rejoice when I sing unto thee; and my soul, which thou hast REDEKMED,"Psa. lxxi22-23, "ForGodis my King, ofold.woikingsa/i'a^/oH in the midst of the earth," Psa. Ixxlv. 12. " i'hey remembered that God was their rock, and the high God their Redeemer," Psa. Ixxviii. .35. "I will praise theeO Jehovah my GoD,-~ i\\o\x\\2iit deliveredmy soul from f'e lowest hell," Psa. Ixxxvi. 12- '.3, 'Bless Jehovah, Omy soul, and ibrget notall his benefits, who redeemeth thy life Jrom destruction ; who cro wneth thee with loving kindness and tender mer- cies," Psa. ciii. 2-4, "Let Israel hope in Jehovah, for with Je- hovah there is mercy, and with him is plenteous redemption, and lie shall redeem Israel from all his iniquities" Psa. cxxx, V-8 " O God Jehovah, the strength of my salvation, thou hast covered my head in the day of battle," Psa. cxl. 7. By which ."s signified, humble acknowledgement that redemption, protection, and con- sequently deliverance from hell, are from the Lord alone, " O give thanks unto Jehovah, for he is good, for his mercy eudureth forever, l,et the redeemed of Jehovah say so, whom/jf hath redeemed from the hand of tho e emv " Ps cvii. 1-2, " Jehovah liveth; auii blessed bo mvrock; and let the (ioD of my salvation be exalted," Ps, xviii. 46, " And they remembered that God was their Rock, and the high God their Redeemer," Ps.lxxviii. 35 " They forgot God their Saviohh, which had done great things in E'vpt," Ps. cvi, 21, "The salvation of tho righteous is of Jehovah; heis their strength in tho time oftroublo," " Truly in jEHovAHOurGoDis the salvation of Israel, Jer. iii. 23. In tho New Te.stament, James calls our Blessed [{edeemer, the " Lord of glory." The Loiid of glory can bo none other than the King of glory. " Who is this Ki.no of glory? Jehovah of Ho>ts,heis the King of glory, "Ps, xxiv., 10. In Rev. xix. 16. the Lord as to the WuiiD, is described as having on his vesture and on his thigh, a name writK n, Kino ok Kings, and Lord ov Lords. This sacred truth is re- echoed by Paul when lie declares Christ to bo " Tho blessed and only Pot<>ntate, the King of Kings, and Lord of Lords, w/w o)i/i/ hath immortal- ity," I. Tim. vi. 15. Elsewhere ho says, " For of him, and by him, and through him aro. all things ,10 whom be glory for evi-r. Amen, "Jehovah thy God in th'-midst of iliee is mighty, li.' wil.l, save, ho will rejoice over ttiee with joy," Zeph. Iii. 17, "I will rejoice in Jhhovaii, I will joy in tho God of my salvation," Hub, iii. 18, " I will look unto Jehovau, I will APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZAN's GUIDE. 19 wait for the God of mil snh'ation; my God shall hear me" Micah. vii. 7, ' Ttie voice oi nim that crieth in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Jeho-vah, makes raight in the desert a highway for oar God. Every valley shall be exalted, and everv mountain and hill shall bo made low," Isa. xl. 3-4. ^y which is signified the mission of John the Baptist preparing the way for Christ's Advent by the preaching of repentance, baptism, and the remi-sion oi sins, at a time when there were no truths left in the Church, but what vTere filsified and made of none effect. By "every valley shall be exalted, andev»jry mountain and hill shall be laid low," is not meant these natural objects but theexa'tation into heaven of those who are meek and lowly in heait, orpoor in spirit. and the removal and remission to their final abode r>f the wicked who have lived in the pride of self-love and the love of the world, for all i^uch avert from themselves the divine protection, and are in conjunction with hell The influx of divine truth flowing into their teriors, when the Lora comes to judgment, causes such exceeding pain and tormeni 'o the w-cked, ■^hat they actually cast themselves head- 1 ng into hell Thr.t the Lord executed such a judgment when on earth, is mostevident both ■rom the literal and spiritual sense of many passages in the Word ; reference will u made to some of them in what follows, and that the last judgment loretold in the Revelation, and many other places, has also taken place, may be seen proved in the writings to be mentioned presently. It is to be noted, however, that these general judgments do not take place in the natural world, but in the spiritual world, int j which all enter after death, '■ after death the judgment." To continue, in tho sublime vision described bv Tsaiah, chap, vi., the prophet relates that tho seraphim cried, "Holy, holy, holy is Jehovah op H-3Tr, the who'e earth is full of his glory." 'xhe message given to Isaiah at that tii le i3 quoted in John 3.;ii. 38, A, where it is written, "These things spako Esaias, when he saw His glory, and spake of Him," and the apostle applies the whole as having reference to the Incarnate God in the person of the Blessed Saviour then on earth. The Hebrew term, Jehovah, retained in the above passages, is always expressive of self existence, un- derived Being, and the Divine principle as to Love, while the term, Go:>, is predicated of, and corresponds to, the Divine principle as to Wisdom, or, what is the same, Truth, which always emanates or proceeds from the former, as light proceeds from fire or heat. It was as the Divine Truth, or the Word, that the Lord was made flesh and dwelt among us, hut still he did not separate from Himself the Divine Good or Love, denoted by the Father As previouslj^ stated, this existed in Him in but a comparatively small degree at the first, and glorification was a gradual work, extending over the whole of His earthly life, progressing only as what was merely human was cast out, or made "perfect through suffer- ings," until at last He comprehended in His glorious Person "all the fulness of thr? Godhead bodily," anJ became God even as to His Human- ity having all power in heaven and in earth." To have all poioer is to possess nothing less than exclusive and supreme Divinity, and notwith- standing the deplorable fact that this heavenly doctrine is not recognized in the prevailing Church, still it is the veriest truth in the universe, that He was the great Jehovah, or " God manifest in the flesh," [ITim. iii. 16], and also " over all, God blessed for ever," Rom. Ix. 5, for " by Him were all things created that are in heaven and that are in earth, visible and invisible, whether they be thrones, or dominions, or principalities or powers ; all things were created by Him and for Him, and He is before all things, and by Him all things consist." Col. i. 16, '7. With all this evidence before us we may well unite with Jude in saying, " To the only wise God our Saviour, be glory and majesty, dominion and power, both now and ever. Amen." We may see from ihe above passages as in the very light of heaven, the great and" glorious truth that the Blessed Jesus is Jehovah, the God of Heaven and Earth, the Lord op Glory, the first and the last, THE Mighty G-^d, the Everlasting Father, the Creator of Alt THINGS, the Redeemer op the World, God manifest in the Flesh, the King of Kings and Lord op Lords, over all, God blessed fob F.VER, A JrSTGOD AND A SaVIOUR, BESIDES WHOM THERE IS NONE ELSE, AMD AS 6UCU lb E^TIXLEi; TOOUK EXCLUSIVE LOVK AND AdORATION.-i 20 . APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS GUIDE. And here we cannot omit noticing the ominous silence which pervades not only the above passages of Scripture, but also the entire Word, res- vindictive justice of the first Person, and appease his wrath and vengeance against the human race on account of the violation of his law of whicb they were guilty, by taking on himself that punishment, which would otherwise have descended on the sinner, the implication being, that the attributes and pprfeciions of God the Father, rendered it Impossible for him to forgive the sinner until the majesty of his outraged law was vindicated and satis- fied to tlie uttermost, by the infliction of adeciuate punishment either en tlie innocent, or on the guiJty. The greatmajority of professing Christians retain this belief, tog tUer with the dootnne of three distinct Persons in the Godhead, most of us having been educated in it from our infancy, and so are not to biame in consequence, more especially as these doctrines are usuallv held up as an inexplicable mystery which it is almost a profana- tion either to investigate or dispute. A man under such circumstances is not to blame for holding this belief in ignorance, simplicitj^ and innocence, even although it is unscriptural, for lie will be instructed in the real truth in the next world, if not in this, and if his heart is good he will receive it most gratefully, for goodness always desires truth and union with it. But, if, on the other hand, a man should say that since Christ obeyed the law lor !i.-m and suffei ed in his room and stead, therefore he is at liberty to do as he pleases, and forthwith carries that thought into action by plunging into a career of fcrtOifrt eui/ and wickedness, under the belief that every- thing will beset right at last by a simple cry for mercy, and a " Lord save me," uttered on his death bed, sucli a line of thought and consequent action would be perfectly infamous, and after death the ruling love of such a man will infallibly entail a righteous retribution by carrying him to his like in liell, and wiiat is wonderful, he goes there of his own accord. Tne power and love of evil draws him there. This is what we are fore- warned to fear, Luko xii. 5, It is not God who sends him there, for it is impossible for Ilim who is Mercy itself, to damn any one. The " Loud is gr.od to all, and his tender mercies are over all His tvorks," thus even to the lowest hell. The true reason is " Ye will twt come unto me th&t ye may have life." " Your iniquities have separated between you and your God, and your sins liave hid his face from you." To return to the question of the Trinity, as commonly received, it is impossible to suppress the enquiry, why is it'that the second and third Persons of the Trinity, as described by this scheme (tlie attributes and perfections of each person being essentially the same), have not, or do not, put forth an equal claim witli the first person, to full, perfect, and complete satisfaction on account of Uieir violated law ? Yet here we have them described as not only put-' ting lorth no such claims, bat the second person is represented as coming forward and drinking the very dregs of the bitter cup of His Father's wrath, even to sutfering tlie accursed death of the cross, and by this raeaus satisfying or appeasing the so called Divine displeasure of the first person. Olio Doctrine of that new Dispensation wliicli cometh down from God out of lieaven, drawn from the Word, is, that God is Mercy Itself and Love Itself, and that wrath, fury, anger and vengeance areas far removed from the Divine nature as heaven is from liell, yea, and infinitely farther. These are qualities which could not consistently be ascribcil to. a good man, because he would not bo good if he possessed them, wherefore itia blasphemy to ascribe them to God. O when will mankind learn tliat it was lore, love, unutterable, Inftnite Love, that brought our Heavculy I'atherinto tlie world to save and redeem His erring clnhlren at tlie very period when they wcio about to be eiigulled in eternal ruin through i-ho ikIuo preponderance of the powers ot hell over mankind. Most true it is that " God so loved the world that he gave his only begotten .Son that /lioBoever believetli in him should not perish, but have everlasting lil'e," .lolin iii. 16, most true that "In His love and in His pity he redeemed u -," l»a. xlii. 9, for " God was iu Christ ruconciknl and lecoiiciling guilty hiiiners to Himself, " being moved to that infinite condescension by a "Ipve which iittBseth knowledge," Kph. iii. 19. Zacliarias spoke Appendix to the artizans' guide. 21 Ihfi truth when he said, "Blessed he the Lord God of Israel, for H« hath visited and redeemed His people," Luke i. 68; also aged Simeon, when he said, " Lord, now lettest thou thy servant depart in peace, according to thy word, for mine eyes have seen thy salvation," Luke li., 29-30. This was aid of the only Begotten Son of God (born of the virgin) in whom was .^e Father, of whom it was written, "Behold a virgin shall conceivo and i.-ear a son. and shall call his name Immanuei," Isa. vii. 14. Yes, j^>yful thought. He was indeed and now is, God with us, so that all can say " Lo, this is our God, we have waited for Him, we will be glad and rejoice in His salvation." The suSTerlngs of Christ were great, beyond all human comprehension, and they were endured solely on our account and for our salvation, but not to satisfy or appease the wrath of any one, but to satisfy His own Divine Love, for that desires nothing in comparison with man's salvation, and that it may communicate all its fulness of joy and unspeakable delight to every soul it has created. It is thus that " God oommendeth His Love toward us, in that while we were yet sinners Christ died for us," Rom. v.?. And not only so, but " we also joy in God through our Lord Jbbus Christ, by whom WE have now received the atonement," ver. 11. It is thus seen that it is WB who received the atonement, not God, as is commonly supposed. It is man who went astray, became wicked, and thus became an enemy and needed reconciliation, at-one-ment, or being brought at-one or in agree- ment with his Maker. And this that Infinite Love that never slumbers nor sleeps has been incessantly endeavouring to do ever since man declined from goodness, for it followed him step by step in his downward career, until at the very moment when hell was about to claim him for her own, the great Jehovah assumed the Humanity, thus supplying the last link of the golden chain which was thenceforward to unite God more closely to His erring children, and enable Him to become their Saviour. In this Humanity He encountered the powers of hell, and executed a judgment in the spiritual world, on those infernal hosts who were infesting and obsessing mankind, the indwelling Divinity sustaining the Humanity, and enabling it to overcome. in the midst of combats, temptations and sufferings so dreadful that it is impossible for tne mind of man to conceive of them, among the last being tbe temptations In the garden, and on the cross. Many of these combats are described in the internal sense of the word in the following, and many other places which cannot be mentioned here by reason of their abundance : Ps. xviii . xxii., XXXV., xl. 1 2, V. 1, 6, Ixix., cii. 11, 1., cxxx., 1, 2., Isa. liii., lix, 16. 19, Ixiii. 1. 6., Ixiv. 1, 13., Mai, iv., 1, 3., Matt. iv. 1, ,10 xxvi. 38, 44, Mark 13, Luke xxii., 42, 44, John xiv. 30, xvi. 33. In these passages the temptations, combats, and victories referred to are described in a Divine manner by mere correspondences, each possessing an internal or spiritual meaning. These are some of the ways in which the " kindness and love of God our Saviour toward man appeared,'' Titus iii. 4, "This is the true God and eternal life," 1 John v. 20, and the Beneficent Being whose kindness we are exhorted to imitate, " by forgiving one another even as God in Christ hath forgiven us." Ephes. iv. 32, This is the right translation of the passage. In the English Bible it reads, " even as God for Christ's sake hath forgiven you," but this sense is unscnptural, and does not exist in the original. The prevalent custom of asking mercies from God for Christ's sake is the result of ignorance regarding the true God in the mind of the worshipper, who in such a case is actually thinking of two or three Gods, although he does not say so with his lips. " S^ve us for Thy name's sake," and " Redeem us for Thy mercies sake,' are common expressions in the Word. The great Jehovah, whom we nave seen to be none other than Christ Himself, says " I, even I, am He that blotteth out thy transgressions for mine oion sake," " Whatsoever ye ask in my name, I will do it," and thus it always is. The question will now be asked, if these statements are true, how does it come that wrath, anger, and vengeance are so frequently ascribed to God in the Word ? The answer is that these expressions contain appear- ances of truth, but not the real truth. Man 7 things are thus expressed in the Word. It speaks of the rising of the sun and the going down of the pame, because it appears to do so. It tells us to pluck out our right eye 22 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. and cnt off our right hand, if they offend us. It tell? us to take no thought for our hfe, what we ehail eat, or what we shall drink, or for our body, what we shall put on. Does any man in his senses act thus? It tells us that it is almost impossible for a rich man to enter heaven. It tells us that Christ came not into the world to p'omote peace on the earth, but ratlier division, wlien nevertheless He is the Prince of Pence. It tells us that unless a man hates his father, and mother, and wife and children, aL.d brothers, and sisters, yea and his own life also, he cannot be Christ's disciple. Every one knows that these expressions are not to be under- stood literally, and 8) it is in the case of auger, wrath, and vengeance when such qualities are ascribed to God. but it is most true that to the wicked he appears to bo invested with such attributes. The children of Israel are described as an evil and perverse generation who did always err in their heart, and knew not the vi'ays of Jehovah, Ps. xcv. 10. Their vine is def-cribtd as the "vine of Sodom and of the fields of Gomorrah; their grapes are grapes of gal! and their clusters are bitter; their wine is the poison of dragons, and the cruel vrnoin of asps," Deut. xxxii. 32 33. By these correspondences is described a most intense degree of wicked- ness, iS pertaining to the interiors of that peopie. We find inconsequence of this, that at the giving of the Law on Mount Sinai, that "the glory of Jp;hovah was lise devouring fire iu the eyes of The children of Israel," Ex. xxiv. 17. On the other hand, wlien Moses and Aaron, Nadab and Abihu and seventy of the elders of Israel (seventy, as well. as seven, in the Word, are numbers which are expressive of holiness, or what is good ov sacred), ascended iuto the mountain, "they saw the God of Israel; and there was under his feet, as it were, a pavedwork of a sapphire stone, and as it were the body of heaven in clearness," ver 10. Now mark the contrast, the great Jehovah was seen under these various aspects altogether according to the state of the different spectators. It was only the '• wicked and slothful servant," who possessed the "evil eye" by which he perceived his hord to be "aliard man, reaping where he haii not sown, and gathering where he had not strewed," Matt. xxv. 24. From this cause proceeds the cry of the wicked to the mountains and rocks, ' Fall on us, and hide us from the face of Him that sittetu on the throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb," Kev. vi. 16. Ttie sole cause of his dreadful apjX'arance to them, lay in themselves, not in God, thus con- firrnir.g the Divine words, " With the merciful thou wilt shew thyselt merciful; witli an upright man thou wilt shew thyself upright; with the pure thou wilt shew thyself pure, and with tlie fio ward thou wilt shew thyself fro ward," Ps. xviii. 25 26. Thus, when the Word declares that the Lord is gracious, and lull of compassion, slow to auger and of great ratTcy, and says further, " Fury k not in me," it expresses a reaZ t>-uth, but when in tiie letter of the Word, wrath and anjrer are ascribed to (iOD, oniy involves an appartitt truth, fir the internal sense o» the Word teaciies. and the regenerated heart of every child of God will teli him. that the " Lord is good, that His mercy is everlasting, ana that liis trutli eiiduroth to all generations." It is most tru? in Lve:y cas;: thjii it is " cvL) which slays the wicked," for the Divine Love most intensely desires to elevate all to heaven, an^ would do so in every case, if man wou'i' on v make u^e of that free will with which it has pudnwed hiin to choose li/e ana goodness, (icir man's willingco-opera'inn in 'h'scnseisindispensah'.ei, and thus suffer hiiase and ar. co«itinuaUv restralueu from accomplishing their InTi'inal wortf by nothing le.sg ih;in iiiffnita power, but wli'itliheki, arc evi! agents pprform the evil woi !••, and tips actually apprarc to bo as if dcte by tho Lon'), ami is so expressed in tlir Worti. '■ ile sow t'ainoirs Kings, for liis mercy cndnreth fur over," "He sent evil aiigeis among ttiem ' and so on. Many other things are aesc:'i'jfd vi Jie Word according to npj.ear- aiices, such lor iiistDiice as tho Iax'D repenting, being grieved at the hcu't, &c., tlio Internal sense of these expresaions being very differeut jroiii what iipi;earb in the l-ttcf. APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. V, 23 "We will now proceed to conclude the grafeflil task of shewing ffiai tne Blessed Jesus is the only Only True Obji'ct of worship, and as such, ought to be recognizf^d in the Church, and by every hnman being. In doing tJiLs we do not anticipate any objections from professed Christians, when we S^iy that it would be quite safe to emulate the example of the Apostles ou earth and that of the angels in heaven. After our Blessed Redeemer had ascended up on high, it is written, that he sat doivn " on the right hand of God." By this is signified, tliat He even as to His Humanity took possession of Divine Omnipotence, having " all power given unto Him in heaven and in earth," for in Him dwelt all the fulness of the Godhead bodily, Col. ii. 9. After the ascension, it is written concerning the disciples, "And they worshipped him, and returned to Jerusalem with great joy." We read further that " they lifted up their voice with one accord and said, Lord thou arti God, which hast made heaven and earth, and the sea, and all that in them Ls," Acts iv. 24. And Stephen died, "calling upon God, and saying. Lord Jesus receive my spirit," Acts vii. 59. Concerning worship in heaven, we read that " the four and twenty elders [by whom are signitied the superior angelic powers], fell down before Him that sat on the throne and worshipped Him that liveth for ever and ever, and cast their crowns before the throne saying, Thou art worthy O Lord to receive glory and honour and power; for thou hast created all things and for thy pleasure they are and were created," Rev. iv. 10, 11. Chapter v. ver. 10 records that " the four beasts and four and twenty elders, [signify- ing the hosts in the superior heavens], /e/Z rfojtni before the Lamb, and gave utterance to the sublime glorification recorded in ver. 9. 10. "And they sung a new song, saying. Thou art worthy to take the Book and to open the seals thereof; for Thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by Thy blood out of every kindled, and tongue, and people, and nation; and hast made us unto our God kings and priests, and we shall reign on the earth." " And they sung a new song," signifies an acknowledgment and glorification of the Lord, that He alone is the Judge, Redeemer and Saviour, thus the God of heaven and earth. These things are contained in the song which they sung, and the things they contain are also signi- fied: as an acknowledgment that the Lord is the Judge in this: "Thou art worthy to take the Book and to open the seals thereof." That He is the Redeemer in this, " For Thou wast slain, and hast redeemed us to God by Thy blood," that He is the Saviour in this, " Thou hast made us unto our GOD kings aud prie.-'ts, and we shall reign on the earth," by which is signified, that from the Lord they are in wisdom from divine truths, and in love from divine g"od, for all such are spiritual kings and priests, and will be in His kinsrdom. He in them, and they in Him: that He is the God of heaven and earth, in this: " They fell down and worshipped Him that liveth lor ever aud ever," see ver. 14. Since the acknowledgement of the L>KD alone as the God of heaven and earth, and of the Divinity of His Humanity, and that in no other wav could He be called a Redeemer and Saviour, was not before in the Church, it is called z-neic song. After this it is recorded that ten thousand times ten thousand and thousands of thousands, were heard saying, with a loud voice, " Worthy is the Lamb that was slain, to receive power; and riches, and wisdom, and strength, and honour and glory, and blessing," denoting confession and glorification from the heart, by the angels of the inferior heavens, that to the Lord's Divine Humanity belong Omnipotence, Omniscience, divine good, divine truth, and all felicity, " And every creature which is in heaven, and on the earth, and under the earth, and such as are in the sea, and all that are in them heard I saying, Blessing, and honour, and glory, and power, be unto Him who sitteth upon the throne, and unto the Lamb for ever and ever," ver. 13. By which is signified, confession and glorification by the angels of the lowest heavens, that in the Lord from eternity and thence in His Divine Humanity, is the all of heaven and the church, divine good, and divine truth, and divine power, and Irom Him in those who are in heaven and the church, " After this I beheld, and lo a great multitude which no man could number, of all nations, and tribes, and tongues, stood before the throne and before the JiAMB, clothed with white robes aud pahns in their hands ; and crie4 2i APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. with a loud voice, saying, " Salvation to our God fnat slttPth upon the throne, and to the Lamb " chap. vii. 9, 10. To cry with a loud voice sig- nifies an acknowledsment from the heart that the Lord is their Saviour. " Salvation to our God that sitteth upon the throne, and to the Lamb," eigiiifles that the Lord is Salvation itself, and that the salvation of all is from Him, thus that He is their Redeemer and Saviour. By Him that git'eih upon the throne, and the Lamb is meant the Lord alone; by Him that sitteth upon the throne His Divinity from which He came forth; and by the "Lamb," His Divine Humanity. That one Being is meant, may be seen confirmed by ver. 17, where the Lamb is described as being in the rnidst of the throne. " And all the angels stood round about the throne, and about the e'ders and the four beasts and fell down before God on their faces and worshipped God, saying, Amen, blessing and flory and wisdom, and thanksgiving, and honour, and power, and might, e unto our God for ever and ever, Amen," ver. 11, 12. By this great company is signified, all in the universal heaven; " And fell before the throne on their faces and worshipped God," signifies, the humiliation of their heart, and from humiliation, adoration of the Lord. "Blessing, and glory, and wisdom, and thanksgiving," signifies the divine spiritual things of the Lord; " And honour and power and might," signifies the divine celestial things of the Lord; "Be unto our God for ever and ever," signifies these things in the Lord, and from the Lord to eternity. "And there were great voices in heaven, saying. The kingdoms of the world are become tne kingdoms of our Lord and of His Christ, and He shall reign for ever and ever," Rev. xi. 15, signifies, celebration by the angels, because heaven and the Church are become the Lord's as they were from the beginning, and because they are now in subjection also to His Divine Humanity, consequently that now, both as to His Humanity and Divinity, the Lord will reign over heaven and the church to eter- nity. " And the four and twenty elders, that sat before God on their thrones, fell on their faces, and worshipped God," ver. 16, signifies an acknowledgment by all the angels of heaven, that the Lord is the God of heaven and earth, and supreme adoration; saying, " We give thee thanks, O Lord God Almighty, who art, who wast, and who art to come," ver. 17. signifies a confession and glorification by the angels of heaven, that it is the Lord who is, who has life and power from Himself, and who rules all things, because He alone is eternal and infinite; ■ because thou hast taken thy great power and hast reigned," ver. 17, signifies the new heaven and the new Church where they acknowledge Him to be the only God. " And they sing the song of Moses, theservant of God, and the song of the Lamb," Rev. xv. 3, 4, signifies, a confession grounded in charity, and in a life according to the commandments of the Law, which is the decalogue, and in a belief in the Divinity of the Lord's Humanity; saying, "Great and marvellous are Thy works, Lord God Almighty," signifies that all things in the world, in heaven, and in the Church were created and made by the Lord, from divine love by Divine Wisdom. " Just and true are Thv ways. Thou King of saints," signifies, Hiat all things which proceed from Him are just and true, because lie is divine good and divine truth in heaven and in the Church ; " Who shall act fear thee, O Lord, and gloriiy thy name," signifies, that lie alone is .,0 be loved and wor-ihijiped ; " For Thou only art holy," signifies that He is the Word, the truth and the illumination. " For all nations shall .jomo and worship before thee," signifies, that all who are in the good of love anl charity, will acknowledge the Lord to be the only God. " For J'liy ju voice of a great multitude, and as the voice of many waters, niid as the voice of many ttiunders, sajing, Allelu ia! for the Lord God Omnii'Otknt reigneth," ver. 6. signifies, the joy of the an|[ol8 of the A5?I>ENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE., 25 lowpst heaven, of the angels of the middle heaven, and of the 'angels of the highest heaven; because the Loed alone reigns in the Church which is now about to come, signified by the Bride the Lamb's wife, or the new Jerusalem mentioned in ver. 7, 8, and chap. xxi. 2." In order to banish aU doubt as to who is meant by the term " God," in these passages, we now quote the testimony of the Blessed Jescs in Eev, xxi. 6, 7: " And He said unto me, It is done," signifies tliat it is Di^-ine truth. " I am Alpha and Omega, the Beginning and the End." signifies, that the Lord is the God of heaven and earth, and that all things in the heaven and earth were made by Him. and are governed by His Divine Providence and done accordmg to it. "I will give unto him that is athirst of the fountain of the water of life freely," signifies, that to those who desire truths from any spiritual use, the Loed will give from Himself through the Word, " He that overcometh shall inherit all things; and I WILL BE HIS God, and he shall b€ my son," signifies, that they wno overcome evil in themselves, that is. the devil, or the love of self and the world, and do not vield or sink in temptations, will go to heaven, and there live in the Loed and the Loed in them. This is the testimony of Jescs. Let it be supplemented by the testimony of the angel: " Fear not; for behold 1 bring you good tidings of great joy, which shall be to all people. For unto you 1= bom this day in the city of David, aSAViouB, which is Che --'i- the Loed," Luke ii. 10,11. That our Blessed Loed received divine honours and worship when on earth may be seen, Matt, ix, 18, xiv. 33, XV. 28, xxviii. 9, ilark i, 40, v. 22, vii. 2o, x. 17, Luke xvii, 15. 16. It is known from the science of correspondences that such meanings are actually involved in the above mentioned passages of Scripture, yea, and much more, for each expression being from a Divine origin embodies within itself infinitely more than man or angel can ever comprehend. But we have seen enough to convince us that the Loed is in very deed the supreme God of heaven and earth, in whom is the Divine Trinity of Father, Son and Holy Spirit " Now the Loed is that Spirit, and where the Spirit of the Loed is, there is liberty," 2 Cor. iii. 17. Go then, my friend, to this Saviour God, who once for your sake became " a Man of sorrows and acquainted wi:h grief," serve Him by obeying His command- ments, draw near to Him at all times with humility, love, and faith unfeigned, for He will have mercy, and you wUl "hear a word behind you, "aying, This is the way, walk ye in it," Isa. xxx. 21. Confide in Him during every trial and under every difllculty, and you will indeed find that the eternal God is thy refuge, and that underneath thee is the everlasting arms. In every weak and doubtful state He will impart strength bv lavin^ " His right hand upon you, saying. Fear not, I am the First and'the' Last," Rev. i. 17. Let all act thus and the time wil] be present concerning which it is written: "And the Loed shall be King over all the earth ; in that day there shall be_one Lord and His name O^E " Zee xiv. 9. Such is the Doctrine of the Lord as taught in" the "Word," and such was the doctrine held by the apostles and the primitive Christian Church (as may be seen by consulting the writings of the early Fathers^ until the time of the council, convened at Xice, in Bithynia, by command of the Emperor Constantine. A.D. 32.5. This was called for the purpose of repressing- the Arian heresv, and a creed, the first that ever recognized the existence of three distinct Persons in the Trinity, was drawn up by Hosius of Corduba, at the instance of this council, and hence was called the Nicene Creed. What is called the Athanasian Creed came out about a century later, but it is now known that Athanasius never composed it. The assertions and claims of this last mentioned document are really astounding, and none can be ignorant of the powerful efforts put forth in England by all classes of the people, among them the very highest dignitaries of the English Church, to exclude it from tho liturgy. From the doctrine of Three Persons in the Godhead as taught by these creed-, flow many other doctrines equally inimical to truth, as for instance, that God the Father imputes the merit and righteousness of His Son to those who believe that he died for them, and that Christ ha-s-ing obeyed the Jaw in our rvom and st«ad, we are there by exempted from all 26 APi?ENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUrbE. obligation to obey it except as an outward rule of life, thus nullifying and makiug of none effect the spirituality of those commandments of whicii it is said, that " if a mau do, he shall live in them," Levit. xviii. 5. It is certainly true that man has, and cau have, no goodness or righteous- ness but what emanates fiom the Loud alone, from wliich ground He is called "Jehovah our Righteousness," Jer. xxxiii. 16. It is also true that the Lord's method of imparting this righteousness involvescontinual warfare against evils as sins, on the part of man, for goodness can only enter as evils are expelled, but this is a very ditfereut thing from the imputation of the Lord's merit and righteousness, which is divine, infinite, and eternal, for it is no more possible to ascribe, imoute, or adjoin, what is divine, infinite and eternrJ to any human being, than itis to ciotlie him with the attributes of Omnipotence, and empower him to creite a universe. It would be like plunging him into a furnace healed sevenfold, which would consume him in a moment. The righteous Lord cau never recognize any righteousness in a mau which has not bet-n implanted in his life. Christ says, that He ".shall reward every man according to his works," Matt. xvi. 27, Uev. ii. 23, xx. 12, 13, xxii. 12. It is never said according to his belief, but according to his works. " And it shall be our rigtiteousness if we observe to do all these commandmeuts before J khovah our God, as He hath commanded us," Deut. vi. 25. "I command thee this day to love Jehovah thy God, and to keep His commandments and His statutes and His judgments, that thou mayest live," Deut. xxx. 16. " Ye shall command your children to observe to do all the words of this law. For it is not a vain thing for you, because it is your life," chap. xxxii. 46, 47. Concerning the violation of His law it is written, " O tliat they were wise, that they understood this, that they would consider their latter end," ver. 29. And in Isaiah: "O that thou hadst hearkened to my commandments, then had thy peace been as a river, and thy righteou.-i- ness as the waves of the sea," chap, xlviii. 18, " I will recompense them according to their deeds, and according to the works of their own hand," Jer. XXV. 14. " Thine eyes are open upon all the ways of the children of men, to give to every one according to his ways, and according to the fl-uit of his doings," xxxii. 19, " He hath shewed tnee. O man, what is good; and what doth Jkhovah require of thee but to do justly, to love mercy, and to walk humbly with thy God," Micali vi. 8, " According to our ways and according to our doings, so hath he dealt with us," Zcch. 1, 6, " JKvery one who beareth tliese sayings of miue and doeth them, 1 will liken him unto a wise man who built his house upon a rock— and every one who hoareth these sayings of mine and doeth them not, shall be likened unto a foolish man who b ;ilt liis house upon thesand," Matt. vii. 24, 26, " And why call ye me Lord, Lord, and do not tlie things which 1 say," Luke vi. 46, "They that have done good shall come forth to the resurrection of life," John v. 29, " If ye know these things, happy are ye if ye do them," John xiii. 17, " He.'-ein i^ my Father glorified, tliat ye bear much fruit," John xv. 8. "if ye keep my conunandmeuts ye shall abide in my love," v. 10, " Ye aie my friends if vo do wtiatsocv^T 1 command you," v. 14. "He that halU my conim mdment^ and koencth them, he it is that loveth me," xiv. 21, " Circumcision is nothing aii(i un- circumsion is njthing, but the kecjjing of the commandments of God," 1 Cor. vii. 19, " For this is the love of (jOd that we kiep His cominand- ments, and His comniandraents are not grievous," 1 .lohn v. 3, " Yo see then how by works a man is jusiilied and not by laiih onlv," James ii. 24. When it is said "that a man is jnstilicd bv failh, without the deeds of the law," Rom. iii. 2H. we are to undcrNtand'this passage as having foIo reference to the law of outward ciicnmcisio:i and external wa.'ihiiigs an 1 pnrifyingB. which being merely representative rites, were abolished bv the comirg of Christ, see v. 30. Acts xvi. 1-24. In what was writt. n to the seven churches in Asia (by whom is repro.'jent<'d the Church of Christ as to every nossible stale), the .searcher of hearts states in eich and every ca«te, " r know Ihy works." and rewards are promi^ed to those who over- come evils in themselves, or, what is the same, obey the coniinardmen's. Thes« rewards are described in a figurative mnniier hy corn.spo.i.'i-r.ces, which in the internal ^ellBo are bigiiilictttUe of every v.4.''(';y c ' lieweiily joy, and supreme felicity. APPENDIX TO THS ARTIZ vXS' GUIDE. 27 Every man is born into the world with evil propensities and depraved Inclinations, derived from a long line of ancestors. These propensities and inclinations, are not imputed to man as sins, because they have been inherited through heredit try transmission, and thus he cannot prevent them. But these depraved affections are the avenues through which infer- nal agencies flow in as a flood and tempt man by the insemination of evil desires and wicked thoughts, and it is just here where man's responsibility begins. If he, by virtue of the free will given hira by God, compels him- self [and in this compulsion there exists the highest freedom], to resist and abhor these evil desires and thoughts, and turns from them as accursed and abominable, and does that which is just and right, he obeys the commandments, and saves his soul. If, on the other hand, he does not restrain himself, but yields to temptation, if in his heart he thinks that evil is permissible, even though he does not actually carry it out to the extreme of actual perpetration, for want of opportunity, or through fear, or other causes, in this case he makes it his own by loving it, and doing it whenever he can, and thus disobeys the commandments which say that evils are not to be done. " He who is willing to be saved, must confess his sins and do the work of repentance. To con/ess sins is to know evils, to see them in himself, to acknowledge them, to make himself guilty, to condemn himself on account of them; when this is done before God," it constitutes the confession of sins. To do the work of repentance is to desist from sins, when he has thus confessed them, and from an humble heart to make sujjplication concerning remi-ssiou, and it is further to lead anew life according to the precepts of faith." As to what has been alleged in the above statements concerning the nature of every man born into the world, even our ador- able Redeemer was no exception. He, ''the Lamb of God which taketh away the sin of the world," did no sin, neither was guile found in His mouth." But for the sake of man's salvation, he assumed the Humanity, at the very lowest and darkest hour ot its existence, with all its infirmi- ties, inclinations to evil, and liability to temptation and suifering, derived from a long line of ancestry, through Mary. In no other way could the Saviour be said to bear the sins of mankind, as it is written, " Surely He hath borne our griefs, and carried our sorrows: yet we did esteem him stricken, smitten of God, and afflicted. But he was wounded for our transgressions, he was bruised for our iniquities; the chastisement of our peace was upon him; and with his stripes we.nre healed, — and the Lord hath laid on him the iniquity of us all," Isa. liii. 5, 7. These here- ditary evils in the form ot the love of self and the world, were the channels through which the powers of darkness assaulted Him in temptations a thousand times more grievous than any man could possibly sustain, and these evUs, together with the whole infernal crew. He overcame and vanquished by means of His own proper power, through the indwelling Divinity. From this ground He said to His disciples: ' The prince of this world cometh, and hath nothing in me," Be of good cheer, I have overcome the world," " I beheld Satan, as lightning, fall from heaven." "To him that overcometh will I grant to sit with me on my throne, even as I also overcame," Rev. iii. 21. In no other way could he become a Saviour than by assuming the Humanity, and thus coming nearer • the same plane as that of the spiri- tual enemies of mankind, tor in Hi? absolute Divinity, God is a consum- ing fire, unapproachable by any angel, much less by an infernal spirit. By temptations, sufferings and continual victories over evil. He overcame principai't'i.'S and powers, triumphing over th'^m on His cross, glorified His Humanity and made it Divine, and is now exalted a Prince and a Saviour to give repentance and remission of siiis. In Uis Divine exampl°, every child of God may see that his dutv is plain to take up his cross and follow his Blessed lord in the regeneration. It may now be visible to all who are willing to see, that the scripture contains a spiritual as well as a natural sense, and tliat it is pervaded by a union of good and truth, or love and wi>dom, the instances in whicli this is the case being so numerous that in order to adduce t!iem all, it would tie necessary to transcribe the entire AVord. It may be further seen in what manner the science of correspondences serves to unfold the spiritual 2§ Ai»PENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GtJIDE. sense of the Word, but great difficulty has been felt from want of space to illustrate each topic by parallel passages from the Sacred writings, and I am most reluctantly compelled to omit the notice of thousands . f f'lor matters which would be most highly instructive, for there is noth " mentioned in t!ie Scriptures, not even the smallest jot or tittle, bui w U IS pregnant with divine wisdom, and this by reason of the solciu.. ,.,i, that ill the inmost of the Word, the Lord alone is. Even in the h.-tori- cals of the Word, such as the journeys of the Israelites, we have a p rfect counterpart of the journey of every Christian from the Egypt of a natural Btate, to his triumphant entry into the heavenly Canaan, together with the whole arcana of his regeneration, all written by the linger of God, and described by mere correspondences. The first chapters of Oenesis, anpar- cntly descriptive of the creation of the natural universe, Adam and Eve, the garden of Eden, the tree of life, and of the knowledge of good and evil the serpent, Cain and ^Jbel, the flood, A^oah, and the other patriarchs, the ark, the tower of Babel, etc., down to the end of the eleventh chapter of Genesis, will be found, when interpreted by the science in question, to con- tain the most wonderful embodiment of divine truth ever unfolded to the world. This science will enable us to harmonize every apparent discre- pancy in the letter of the Word, and understand all passages which are otherwise inexplicable, and is not such a study deserving of the attention of every one, .since in these latter days, the Lord God the Saviour has been most graciously pleased to disclose the knowledge of it, so that what has hitherto lain most deeply concealed is now made manifest in the clearest light, and the transcendant importance of the disclosure is such that this is in very truth what is denoted by " the Son of Man coming in the clouds of heaven," which was to take place at the consummation of the age, or church, erroneously translated, "end of the world." These revelations and disclosures have been made through a man whom the Lord raised up, prepared, instructed, and tilled with His spirit, so that he might reduce them to writing, and that thus they might be printed and preserved for the use of His churcn through succeeding generations. That man was Emanuel Swcdenborg, and these unfoldings of the spiritual sense of the Word are to be lound in his theological writiugs, to which I would refer all who take delight in the study of tlie scriptures, for no lover of truth can fail to be both delighted and astonished, at the profundity and variety of the immense mass of knowledge presented in relation to the spiritual sense of the Word, heaven and hell, and the life of man after death. The subjects so imperfectly treated in this brief sketch, and many thousands besides, will be foundintho.se writings to be treated with the full measure of that elaborate justice which they deserve. Every sentence seems to confirm and verity their author's claim that he was called and prepared lor this holy office by the Lord iliiuself, for most a.ssuredly no- thing short of supernatural illumination could onaide anyone to make such statements, and impart such knowledges a,s are contained in these books. The exalt<'d pleasure derived from the study of these writings is the .sole reason fjr recommending them to tlieconsideration of others, and I take much pleasure in appending the names of the dilierent books, with a few collateral works, together with theaddressesof responsible parlies from whom they may lie procured. See list on lost page. The theological wriiiugs would fill about thirty octavo volumes of 500 pages each, and his philosophical works, written anterior to his illuminaticn, would fill as much more, making ahout sixty volumes in all. Jt is deemed proper to state that the writer has no pecuniary interest in the .sale of these books, the Darfies whose addresses are given on the last page having at this time, March 1S73, no iiitiinatioii whatever, that any such notice as this is intend- ed; furthermore, what has been adduc<'d in this appendix has been done from a love of the truth, and from no desire for emolument of any kind. The illustrious Swedeiiborg, who died March, 20, 1772, was a Swedish nobliTnan, held in IukIi respect by tlio royal family of Sweden, and wiuj ccrlaiuly one of the most extraordinary and learned men who ever lived. Xlie ci.'lebrated ctiemist Herzilius, savs of Swedenborg's " Animal king- dom:" " 1 have been surprised to tiiid how the mind of Swedenhorg ha« preceded iliu pre.sent state of knowleil/^P, writing his work at the time ho Old. ' i he l£ev. John Clowes of Manchester, England, writes as follows, , APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZAN'S GUIDE- 29 I '■ The author of this memoir cannot conclude his narrative without offer-, ing up to the Father of mercies his most devout and grateful acknowledge^ ments, for the extraordinary privilege and inestimable blessing vouchsaled him in having been admitted to the knowledge and acknowledgement ot the truth and importance of the doctrines unfolded by Swedenborg from the Word of God as the genuine doctrines of Christianity." This gentle- man translated Swedenborg's largest work, the " Arcana Coelestia," in ten octavo volumes, from the Latin into English. Professor Gorres ol Germany, writes as follows, " Throughout the entire career of his learned researches and activity, we everywhere discover the pious and religious man, who in all his sayings and doings, was intent upon good," Dr. Gabriel A. Beyer, professor of Greek literature in Gottenburg, in a long declaration respecting the doctrines taught by Swedenborg, delivered in obedience to the royal command, Jan 2nd., 1772, concludes thus, " Ihave found m them nothing but what closely coincides with the toords of the IjOViD Himself , and that they shine with a light truly divine." Gen. Chris- tian Tuxen, a personal acquaintance of Swedenborg's, and Commissioner of War under the King of Denmark, states in a letter, " For my part I thank our Loed the God of heaven, that I have been acquainted with this great man and his writings ; I esteem this as the greatest blessing I ever experienced in this life." The Rev. Dr. Hartley, late Rector of Wm- wick, Northamptonshire, England, the translator of Swedenborg's " Hea- ven and Hell," writes thus, " I have found him to be the good divine, the good man, the deep philosopher, the universal scholar, the polite gentle- man ; and I further believe that he had a high degree of the Spirit of God, and was commissioned by Him as an extraordinary messenger to the world." Let the enquirer after further evidence procure the " Documents concerning Swedenborg," compiled by Dr. Tafel and Professor Bush, and he will find a volume filled with evidence similar to this. The " Statement of Reasons for embracing the Doctrines and Disclosures of Emanuel Swedenborg," by Prof Bush, will also prove of great interest. The "True Christian lieligion" is a good work for beginners, being the last written by Sweaenborg. In it he says, " The particulars of faith on man's part are, 1. Tnat God is one, in whom there is a Divine Trinity, and that He is the Lord God and Saviour Jesus Christ. 2. That saving faith is to believe on Him. 3. That evil actions ought not to be done because they are of the devil, and from the devil. 4. That good actions ought to be done, because they are of God, and fiom God. 5. And that a man shall do them as of Himself, nevertheless under this belief, that they are from the Lord, ope- rating with him and by him. The first two particulars have relation to fi)=th ; the next two to Charity ; and the last respects the conjunction of cnarity and faith, and thereby of the Lord and man. In his " Doctrine of Life" he .-itates, " All religion has relation to life, and thehfe of religion is to do good." Elsewhere he states, •' There are five classes of those who read my writings. The first reject them entirely, because they are in another persuasion, or because they are in no faith. The second receive them as s -ientifics, or as objects of mere curiosity. The third receive them intellectually, and are in some measure pleased with them, but whenever they require an application to regulate their lives, they remain where they were before. The fourth receive them in a persuasive manner, and are thereby led, in a certain degree to amend their lives and perform uses. The fifth receive them with delight, and confirm them in their lives. '• Dear reader, to which class will you belong ? The following " Rules of Life," were found among the writings of this great and good man. 1. Often to read and meditate on the Word of God. 2. To submit everything to the will of the Divine Providence. 3. To observe in everything a pro- priety of behaviour, and to keep the conscience clear. 4. To obey that which is ordained, to be faithful in the discharge of the duties of our employment, and to do everything in our power to render ourselves as universally useful as possible. His motto, "The Lord will provide.' Regarding the happiness ot heaven, we quote the following from the writings of this illumined author. " It is said in heaven, that innocence dwells in wisdom, and that the angels have wisdom in proportion as they have innocence. That this is the case they confirm from these considerations : That they who are in a 30 APPENDIX TO THK ARTIZANS GUIDE. Btate of innocence attribute nothing of good to themselves, but consider tl'emselves only as receivers and ascribe all lo the Lord ; that they are desirous to be led by him, and not by themselves ; that they love every thing which is good, and are delighted with every thing which is true, because they know and perceive that to love what is good, thus to will and do it is to love the Lord, and to love what is true is to love their neigh- bor ; that they live contented with what they have, whether it be little or much, because they know that they receive as much as is profitable for Them, little if little be profitable, and much if much, and tliat they them- selves do not know what is profitable ibr them, because this is known only to the Lord, who hath a view to what is eternal in all the operations of His providence." " All who are in the good of innocence are affected by innocence, and so far as any one is in that good, so far he is affected. The inmost principles of heaven are two, viz., innocence and peace. They are termed inmost principles, because they proceed immediately from the Lord. Innocence is that principle from which is derived every good of lioaven, and peace is that principle from which is derived all the delight of Leaven. Every good is attended with delight ; and both good and delight liave relation to love ; for whatever is loved is called good, and is per- ceived as delightful ; hence it follows, that those two inmost principles, jnnoceuce and peace, proceed from the divine love of the Lord, and affect the angels from an inmost ground." "The divine sphere of peace in heaven flows Irom the Lord, and exists in consequence of His conjunc- tion v'iUi the angels of heaven, and in pariicular in consequence of the conjuuct'oa of good and truth in every augel. Those are the origins of W3i:ce, whence it may be evident that peace in heaven is the Divine sphere ^nraostly affesting with b'essedness-evsry principle of good there, thus acting as the source of of all the joy of heaven ; and that iu its essence it is thejjyof the Lord's divine love, resulting from His conjunction with heaven and with every one there. This joy perceived by the Lord in the angels, and by the an-;els from the Lord is peace. Hence, by derivation, The -.ngs's have every blessedness, deKghtand hajjpiness, or that which is te-'met' heavenly joy." " Every one may know, tliut when man leaves the I'.vternal or natural man he comes into the internal or spiritual ; whence it may be known that lieavenly deiight is internal or sjiiritual, but not c'.-.ternal or natural ; and since it is internal and spiritual, that it is purer Siu l"e known or credited by him who is iu tlio )neredelight of the body or «>f the flesh ; since his interiors look av.'ay from heaven and to'vards'the ■wo'ld, that is, backwards. Wherefore a i)erson of ihis deseriiition would -•vonder greatly, if he were only told tliat tliere are delights existing wiieu iho delights of honor and gain are removed ; and still more if lie were 'old, that the delights ol lieaven Bucceoding in their jjlaco an; iiinuinera- lili', and are such that the dol'ghts of the body and lh(> llesli, wiiich are ;;hielly the desires of honor and gain, cannot ho conijiaivd witli tnein. j'lcnte, tl;(! reason is evident, wliy it is not kncuvn whiit lieaveuiy joy is." " The angelic life consists in use, and in doing gooil works from cliurity. Vor no*liing is more delighcful to tlic angels tiian to instruct, and teach fo.'r'ta 'oming from the wond, to serve ina.ikind hy inspiring them wiih \ 'liat is .rood, and by restraining the fvi\ sjiir-its attendant on ihcni I'roin glassing then- projK'r bounds, to raise up the dead to etcnial life, and after- wards, ittheir soUiS be of sucli a (luality as to render it possibli>, to intro- lUicc them into hcayen. Jn the nerCormanco of tlieseollices tliey perceive nn iui'scrihahlo dogre(' of ih'Iignt. J'lius they become images of the Lord ; lor they love; tlicir nciglihour more than themselves, and wliere this leeriig exists, tliere is lieaven. Angelic happiness, then, is in use, •roiB use, and according to use, or, in other wnr again in every l)arlicular oft'ieir Hitertch and actions. Jt is as if tlio interiors were fully l'.\i)aii'l(.il to the recej)tion of delight and blessedness, which is dill'used APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. 31 into ail the fi'Dres, and thus througfi the whole angel ; whence its percep- tion and sensation are such as to admit of no description ; lor what com- mences from the inmost parts, flows into all derived from them, and propagates itself with continued augmentation towards the exteriors. Good spirits who are not as yet in that delight, because not as yet raised up into heaven, when they perceive it emanating from an angel by tlie sphere of his love, are filled with such delight that they fall as it were into a swoon, through the sweetness of the sensation." " That I might know what is the nature of the delights of heavenly joys, it hath been granted me by the Lord to perceive them ; wherefere, since I have had livlr.? experience, I can know, but not at all describe them ; yet something sliali be said to give some idea of them. It was perceived that the joy and delight came as from the heart, diffusing themselves with the utmost soft- ness through all the inmost fibres with such a sense of enjoyment, that the fibre is as it were nothing but joy and delight ; and in like manner every perception and sensation thence derived, receiving its life from happiness. The joy of bodily pleasures, compared with these joys, is as a gross and pungent clot compared with a pure and most gentle aura. It was observed that when I wrs desirous to transfer all my delight to another, a more interior and fuller delight flowed in its place, and it was perceived that this was from the Lokd." •.•«c„, ,*-,w Kegardiug the punishments of the wicked we extract the following from " Heaven and Hell." . . . " Evil spirits are severely punished in~the world of spirits, that by pun- ishmentstliey maybe deterred from doing evil. This appears as if it were from the Lord, when yet nothing of punishment comes from the Lord but from evil itself. For evil is so conjoined ivith its own punishment that they cannot be separated. The infernal crew di'Sire and love nothing more than to do evil, especially to inflict punishment and t'^rment; and they likewise do evil, and inflict punishment on every one who is not pro- tected by the Lord; wherefore, when evil is done by any from an evil heart, since this rejects from itself all protection from the Lord, infernal spirits rush in upon him who does it and punish him" — What infernal lire is — which is mentioned in the Word as the portion of those who are in hell, hath as yet been known scarcely to any one, by reason that mankind have thought materially respecting the things mentioned in the Word, not being acquainted with its spiritual sense, wherefore by this fire some have understood material flre, some torment in general, some the pan<;s of conscience, and some have supposed that it is mentioned merely to im- press the wicked with terror." »" The spiritual heat appertaining to man is the heat of his life, because in its essence it is love. This heat is what is meant in the Word by Are, love to the Lord and neighbourly love being meant by heavenly flre, and self love and the love of the world being meant by infernal fire ; and since such lust possesses all who are in the hells, therefore, likewise when the hells are opened, there is seen a sort of fiery appearance, with smoke issuing from it, such as is usually seen from buildings on fire. But when these are closed, this fiery appearance is not seen, but in its place an appearance like a dark mass of condensed smoke. It is however to be noted, that they who are in the hells are not immersed In fire, but that the tire is an appearance, for love corresponds to fire and all things which appear in the spiritual world appear accord- ing to correspondences. "#." As by infernal fire is meant every lust to do evil flowing from the love of self, by it is also meant torment such as has place in the hells. For the lust derived from that love is the lust of hurt- ing others who do not honor, venerate and pay court to the subject of it; and when such lust prevails in every one, in a society which is restrained by no external bonds such as the fear of the law, and of the loss of repu- tation, of honor, of gain, or of life, every one under the impulse of his own evil, rushes upon another, and so far as he prevails, enslaves the rest and reduces them under his dominion, and from a princijile of delight exercises cruelty towards those "vho do not submit. All the hells are such societies; wherefore every one there bears hatred in his heart against another, and from hatred bursts forth into cruelty, so far as he prevails." " As rebellious disturbances constantly exist there, since every one there desires to be greatest, and burns with hatred against othe-s hence como 32 AtTENDlX TO THE ARTlZANs' GtlBE. now outrages. Thus one scene is charged for another; wherefore they wlio had been made slaves are taken out to help some new devil to subju- gate others; when thoy who dc not submit, and yield implicit obedience, are again tormented by various methods, and so they go on continually. Sucl) torments are the torments of hell, which are called infernal fire." Besides these general miseries, in the first volume of the Arcana Ccelestia are described c number of specific inflictions which follow the perpetrators of various crimes. Concerning th-: medium of salvation, we quote from the Apocalypse Explained, No. 803, "It is known that faith grounded in love is the essential medium of salvation, and that hence it is the chief thing of the doctrine of the Church, but inasmuch as it is of importance to know how man may be in illustration, so as to learn the truths which must constitute liis faith, and in afiection so as to do the goods which must constitute liis love, and thi's may know whether his faiih be the faith of truth, and. his love the love of good, this will be shewn in its order ; which is this, 1. Let a man read the Word every day, one or two chapters, and learn from a competent teacher and from preachings, the doctrines of his religion ; and especially, let him learn that God io one, that the Lord is the God of heaven and earth (John, iii, 35 ; C?\ap. xvii. 2, Matt, xi, 27 ; Chap, xxviii. 18 ;) that the Word is hcly, thfit there io a Jioaven and a hell, and that there is a life after death. 2. Let him learn from the Word, (rem a com- petent teacher and from preaohings, what works aro sins, and that they are especially adulteries, thcits, murders, false testimonies, and several others mentioned in the decalogue ; likewise that lascivious and obscene thoughts also are adultery ; thr.t frauds and illicit gains alsoare thefts ; that hatreds and revenges also arc murders ; and that lies and blasphemies also are false testimonies ; and so on. Let him learn all these things as he advances from infancy to adol'^scence. 3. W hen man begins to think from himself, which takes place after the age of adolescence ; it must then be the first and primary thing with him, to desis/ from doing evils, because they are sins against the Word, thus against Ood: and that if he does them, he cannot 'have eternal life, hut hell ; and afterwards as he advances in years, to shun them as accursed, and turn away from them even in thought and intention. But in order to delist from them, and shun and become averse to tliem ho must sui)plicate the J.oud for aid. The sins from which he must desist and which he must shun and become averse to aro principally adulteries, frauds, illicit gains, liatreds, revenges, lies, hlasphemieu, and pride, and self conceit. 4. 1 n jjroportion as man detests those things by reason of their being ag;iin, in the same proportion connnuiiicatiou is given him with the Lord, and conjunction isefl'ected for hiiu with heaven ; for the Louu enters, and with the i^oKD heaven, as sins are removed ; for these and their falses are the solo hindrances The reason is, beciiuee man is set in the midst be- tween heaven and hell, wherefore hell ads from the one part, and heaven from the other in proportion therefo'e as evils arc removed which are from hell in th(> same proportion goods fioin heaven enter, for the Loni) says, ' Behold I stand at the door iiiid knock ; if :in;- man shall hear my voice, and ojjen thedonr, 1 will come in to him." J{ev. iii. 20. But if man d(^sists from doing those evils from any other cause than because they are sins, and against the Word, and t hence a^'iii list (ion, conjunction with hea- ven is notellected for him, beciiusc he desists froin himself, and not from the l>OKD. '1 he J.,()Ri) is in the U'oril, insoiiiiu'li (hat He is called the Word, .lohn i., L 2, 3, 4. because the A\'or, and the love of his iieifjlibor as liim< self, and so on ; from hence it follows that to shun evils, is to do goods C. .So (ar as man Is in these good nllections, so far he is led of the Loud, fkud not of himself, and so far as he acts from them, so far he docs good APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. 32 works ; because ho does them from the Lord and not from himself ; ha then acts from charity, from sinceritj' and justice, from charity, from truth, iu humility before God, and from these no one can act of himself. 7. The spiritual affections which arc bestowed by the Lord on the man who is in those principles, and actc from them, are the affection of know- ing and understanding the truths, and goods ot heaven and the church, to- gether with ttie affection cf willing and doing them ; likewise the affec- tion attended with zeal of fighting against falses and evils, and dissipating them with himself and with ethers ; hence man has faith and ,ove, and hence he has intelligence and wisdom. 8. Thus, and not otherwise, is man reformed ; and so far as he knows truths, and wills and does them, so far he i: regenerated, and from natural becomes spiritual, in like manner his faith and his love. If ovilo are not removed 'because they are sins, all things which man thinks, speaks, wilk and does, arc not good nor true before God, however they appear as good and true before the world ; the reason is, because they are not from the Lord, but from man, for it is the love of man and of the world, from which they arc and which is in them. Most people of this da^ beheve, that they do all come into heaven if they have faith, live pious- ly," and do good works ; and yet they do not hold evils in aversion because Ihey are sins, wht^nce they either commit them or believe them to be al- lowable, and they that believe them to bo allowable, commit them when opportunity is given ; but Jet them know that their faith ii not faith, that their piety is not piety, and that their good works are not good, for they flow from the impurities which lie inwardly concealed in man, theexter- nalsderivingall theirquality fromtheinternals ; lor the Lord says, "Thou blind Pharisee, cleanse first the inside of the cup and platter, that the out- side may be clean also, Matt xxiii. 26 ; from these considerations it may now be evident, thatif man should fulfil all things of the law, if he should give much to the poor, if he should do good to thefatherless and the widow, nay if he should also give bread to the hungry and drink to the thirsty, gather the sojourners, clothe the naked, visit the sick, go to the bound in prison ; if he should preach the gospel strenuously, convert the Gentiles, frequent temples, hear preachings with devotion, attend the sacrament of the supper frequently, devote time to prayer, with more such things, and his internal is not purified from hatred and revenge, from craftiness and malice, from insincerity and injustice, from the filthy delight of adultery, from the love of self and the love of ruling thence aerived, and the prido of self-intelligence, from contempt of others in comparison with himself, and from all other evils and the falses thence derived ; still all these works are hypocritical, and are from the man himself and not from the Lord. But on the other hand, those same works, when the internal is purified, are all good, because they are from the Lord with man ; who cannot otherwise than do them, because he is in the faith and love of doing them." — " These are the works, which are understood in the Word by works, which can by no means be separated from faith, for faith separated from them is dead, and dead faith is a faith of what is false from an evil love, or is the thought that a thing is so, whilst the life is still evil."— " That to abstain from evils from any other cause whatever, than from the Word, does not purify the internal man, is evident from the origin of ovil works and from the origin of good works ; as he who abstains from adulteries from fear of the civil law and its punishments, from fear of the loss of fame and thence of ho nor, from fear of hurt arising from poverty, cove tousness or avarice ; from fear of sickness from them, andconsequont intranquility of life, from infiimity arising from abuse, or from age, or even from natural good and the moral principle thence derived, as not being becoming and proper, &c., and from I liese causes alone lives chastely, still he is interior- ly unchaste and an adulterer, if he does not abstain from them out of spir- itual faith, which faith is, that adulteries are infernal, because they are contrary to the Divine Law, and thence contrary to the fear of God, and the love of the neighbour. And so in all other cases." As many may desire further information respecting doctrines which are silently but surely finding their way with transforming power among all classes of Christians, ] will now insert in their order, 1. \Vho are these pew Church people? by Kev, Dr. Baylej^ of Lcdon. 2. The Kibband gf 34 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS GUIDE. Blue, from " The Divine Word Opened," bf the same author, intended to illustrate the correspondence of garments, colors, &c.. iu the Word. 3. 1 lio substance of an interview held at No. 20, Cooper Union. New York, by » Sun Koporter. 4. List of Swedenborg's theolojiical writini?s. together with the names of a few valuable collateral works which will be found well worthy of perusal. WHO ARE THESE NEW CHURCH PEOPLE ? The frequency with which tlie sentiments untolded in the writings of S^i^denborg, and others in illustration of them, are met with from time lo time, impels many inquiring minds to ask the question above recorded, and has induced the information to be given which ii afforded iu the following dialogue : — Q. Who are these New Church people t A. They are Christians who believe that the higher culture and greater jjrogress of the worM towards lialit, charity, and peace, de|)end upon a clo-^er communion with the Lord .lesus Clirist, as the all iu all to His ( liurch, God over all, in Whom dwells all the fulness of the Godhead bodily. Q, But why they do they call themselves Swedenborgians ? A. They do not call themselves Swedenborgians ; but New Chuech- MKN, or Christians of tlie New Jeriisaleiu Cliurch. They esteem very highly the writings of Swedcnborg. who was an illustrious servant of the Lord Jesus. By the truths iu his writings they have been greatly j)rotifed ; tlioy find themselves assisted to draw nearer to the Saviour,' to under- stand the Scriptures more thi>roiighly, and perceive their wondrous Divinity. These writings also contain much concerning the 'aws and circumstances of the eternal world. Q. Hut what is this about the New Jerusalem : Do they think a great golden city is to come down to the earth through the clouds ? A. Not in the least. These outward wonders and spectacles in the skies they leave to others. They understand that sontinieutii golden and cle?.r are to enter men's minds. They only expect .the worlil to become nearer like heaven, as new principlesot light, love, andjustice, become more fully received, and extensively spread among men. They believe thoroughly the words of the Lord .lesus, "The kingdom of God Cometh not by out- ward observation ; neitlier shall men say. lo here I nor, to there But the kingdom of God is within you" (Luke xvii. 21). U'e can make our little world happier to-day if we vi-ill. And the whole world must learn to become wis^r, and will and strive to beconie better, and so the Lord will become king overall the earth (Zcch. xiv. 9.> y. But why do they talk of anything new on such subjects ? How can there be anything new in religion ? Chri>tianity is old enough, and if they are Christians how can they he 7ieit', A't'it" Church, or anything of that kind ? A Religion, though always pure at first, when revealed from the Lord, has a great tendency to become corrupt, in time, by the self-seeking dispositions of worldly Christians, who hope to acquire pelf and power by making religion popular, and debasing it by jxiimlar errors and human traditions, rather than by elevating the jh'oiiIc (o justice, judgment, aud the love of God. So the Jews made ihe couiMuindnients of God of none (■(Ti'Cl by their tradili"ns. So Cliri>lianily, by corrufitions commencing in the time of Constanline, became a mass of mysteries ami superstitions. The first great error was a (iod said to be ol three separate Oivine per.-ons, and then the worship of .Mary as a semi-divine person. Ne.\l came pray- ing to a host of deau nu'n. and caring niore for their bones and relics than for keeping the coiiiinandnients of (icriplui'i's were shut up away from the people until tlie time of the Reformation, and though in this country ami Ainenca we have the Scriptures fully noiv. many of the |i-:i(ling CDrruptions of dark times remain. These iicrversions and evils wliich nniti'il with, and olliers wbicli ari'^eout '■filicm, make religion old and luirig it to an (Mid , tliiMi ihe l^nrd Jesus reve. Is i lernal truths afre.sh tind culU tbeat new ; they are new to us. It is wr.ttcn in relutiou t9 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. 35 these times, He who sat upon the throne srid, Behold, I make all THINGS NEW (Eev. xix. 6). Q. What are tliebe new principles you speak of ? Tell mc the first. A. It is new ; yet it is truly old. It is that Jehovah, the eternal God, our Creator, is ab'solutely one, and He became our Saviouv Jesus Christ. So that in Jesus Christ is the flrst and the last, the human and the Divine, the Father, the Son, acd the Holy Spirit, the eternal Trinity, He is all in all to us, the Father in Him as the soul iiin the body. Q. YetChrist prayed to th Father? A. That was while He wa^ .n the world in times of temptation, while He had our nature, with its intirnaities and imperfections, and He had to teach us how to suffer and to pray. The human prayed to the Divine, as our lower nature appeals for succour to our better nature in times of distress It seems to us, in deep trials, as if there were two persons in us ; but they are not two persons, and when the trial is over and perfection attained, then there is entire unity, So when Christ's trials were over and His humanity was glorified, there was no praying to the Father, but He was manifestly the Father in the Son (John xiv, 13). He who sees Him sees the Father (John xiv. 7,8,9). He is the everlasting Father and the Prince of Peace (Isa. is. 6) He is thejrootand the offspring of David, the bright and the morning Star (Rev. xxii, 16). He is the Sun of righ- teousness (Mai. iv. 2). The Bread of Life (John vi. 48). The Light of the world (John ix. 5), The King of kings and Lord of lords {Rev. xix. 16). Come to Him, pray to Him, follow Him, serve Him. Q. But how about the Atonement ? A. Christians of the Xew Jerusalem believe in the Atonement as the Apostle Paul expresses it, God was in Christ reconciling the world unto Himself (2 Cor. v. 1). He reconciled it to Himself hrst in His owa Humanity (John xvii. 19 ; Eph. ii. 15). He has been reconcihng it ever since by His Gospel, and He will reconcile it to-Himself in us if we will repent, turn to Him, and become new men. Q. Is there not something peculiar about the way of viewing the Bible ? A. We have precisely the jame Bible that you have, but the New Church declares the Bible to have a spiritual meaning, over and above the literal meaning ; not denying the literal meaning, bat using it for history, for doctrine, and for edification, as other Christians do. The spiritual mean- ing constitutes a Bible within the Bible, always treating of the Church, the regeneration of the soul, of the battles we wage against our sins, and of the things of heaven. But this is only what the Saviour said. My words, they are spirit and they are life (John vi. 63) ; the apostles declares the same thing. The letter killeth, but the spirit giveth life (2 Cor. iii. 6). Q. But how about the early chapters of Genesis '! A. Up to the history of Abraham, they are Divine allegories, fiiU of spiritual wisdom, clothed in the language of parable, in the manner of that most ancient literature that was the origin of the Egyptian Hiero- glyphics, and the beautiful fables of the Greeks. Hence there is no con- tradiction between this part of tue Bible and geology. Natural creation is the emblematical account of moral and spiritual creation. Q, Is a man, according to these views, saved by faxth alone in tha merits oi his Saviour ? A. He must have faith in the merits of his Saviour, and he has no merits of his own. But he must also believe, love, and do his Saviour's will, or he cannot be prepared for heaven. In religion, love is the great principle, the root of all the rest (Rom. xiii. 8 10 ; Matt. xxii. 37 40). The Apostle Paul said, Now abideth these three, faith, hope, and charity 'or love), and the greatest of these is charity (or love). (Cor xiii. 13). He who loves the Lord Jesus, will believe His words, and do His commandments. Faith alone is dead, the apostle said (James ii. 26) ; whether it is in the merits of our Saviour, which are truly infinite, or anything else. The faith which loves and works is the only faith which saves. Q. How is a heavenly character formed ? A. First, by a conviction of our sinfulness, then by repentance and prayer. Next, by perseverance in well-doing, bv confidenTfaith in the .f.iord Jesus, faithfulness in the times of trial and temptation ; by daily 36 AIFENDIX TO THE ARNIZANS' GUIDE. reading of the 'Word of G< d, and prayer, and by the diligent use of the means of grace. Thus the tastes aad aims of life become entirely altered, and the soul delights in heavenly things as its chief joy. Q. What then is the New Churchman's rule of life ? A. Precisely that taught in the Old and in the New Testament by the Lord Jesus and Uis apostles : namely in humility, faith, and love to keep the Fen Commandments. What doth the Lord thy God require of thee, but to do justly, love mercy, and walk humbly with thy God ? (Micah vi. 8j. Jesus said. If ye love me, keep my commandments (John xiv. 15). The Apostle Paul wrote. Circumcision is nothing, and uncircumcisiou is nothing, but KEEPIU& THE COMMANDMENTS OF God (1 Cor. vii. 19) ; and Jo' in declared.This Is the love ot God, that we keep His commandments : and His commandments are not grievous (1 John v. 3). We must keep the Divine precepts in all the employments, engagements, habits, and acts, of daily life ; without that, our belief is vain, and our religion self-deception. Q. Can this be done by a man's own strength and merit ? A. No man has any strength or any merit, but what comes from God, every moment of his life. But God our Saviour does give strength to every one who truly seeks Him. He also gives His angels charge to aid us from our birth to our grave. And they lovingly receive us and wel- come us when we die. Q. Are all children who die taken to heaven ? A. Oh, certainly. Angels of love, who have been their guardian angel^ take them into their blessed care in heaven, train thorn in love and wis- dom, and thus lead them to enjoy the full bliss of their heavenly homo. Q. Do people know each other after death, who have known each other, in the world ? A. Certainly, and they will continue together, if their states agree and will permit. Q. Is there any other especial feature of the principles of this New Church ? A. Yes ; 'the very high and sacred character it attributes to marriage. This holy institution is regarded as one for which the Creator has formed the sexes in mind and body, and should bo entered upon only with those who are constantly striving to overcome sell, to live for heaven as well as for earth, and who shun sins against purity, as the deadliest of sins. Q. How does this Church regard the Kesurrectiou ? A. Every person has a spiritual body as well as a natural body (1 Cor. XV. 44). This spiritual body becomes more beautiful by regeneration, or more ugly by sin. Flesh and blood, as the Apostle says, cannot inherit the kingdom of God (1 Cor. xv. 50). The body thou sowest is not the body that shall bo (v. 37). Cut the angelic Christian mind has a heavenly body, for God glveth it a t)ody as it hath pleased Him, and to every seed hisown body (v. 38). Ab,sent from the earthly body, he is present with the Lord (2 Cor. v. 8). Evil ))erson3 have a spiritual body as ugly as they are vicious. Uoth are fitted at death for the worlds to which they go : and the dust returns to the dust whence it was. All the j)art8 of the Gospel which treat of the resurrection of man, mean (ho resurrection of the soul from tlio death of sin, and the grave of corruption, to the life of righteousness ano siiiritual heallli (John v. 24,25 ; Ei)li. v. 2, 5). I; not this scriptural view far more seiisiblii than to imagine that all who have di(^d are without bodies, until the scattered dust of bodies which had every hour hccn chiny'mg dariny l{fi', and hatilion, sectarianism, rationalism, narrowness, and (hirknoss, into the ijlorious liberty of tlie children of light, then conic ami hoar. Do von wish toseo goodness and truth extending their sacred inthience. and sin and felly shown to be the disorderly, brutal, coarse, and worthless things they are, then coino and hear, Wo address you In the language of Moses to Jethro, Wo are journeying unto the place of which the Loni said, I will give it you: come with us, and we will do you good ; lor the Lord hath spoken good concerning Israel. Anditshall he, if you go with us, yea, it shall be, that what good- nes*) the Lord shall do unto us, the same will we do unto thee. (Numb, x, 29, 32}. THE RIBBAND OF BLUE. " Speak unto the children of Israel, and bid them that they make them fringes iu the borders of thi-ir garments throughout their ^generations, and that tliev put upon the fringe of the borders a ribband of blue: And it shall be un'to you for a Iringe. that ye may look upon it, and remember all the commandments of the Lord, and do them."— Numh. xv. 38, 30. It 1m extrenndy to be regn>tled that so ni;uiy who hear the name of Christian, have tho most inu.le(|uale view of nllgion. To niiiny it is but. a name. They cull themselves by the name of this or that great body, but ask them what they think of llio principles which tho name implies, and APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. 39 you find the name, and little besides. Others, again, seem to think that religion is an excellent debating-ground, a favorite battle-tield. They will incessantly wrangle and dispute about its everlasting principles, but meditate little upon them, and practise them less. Those are like the left- handed men of Benjamin among the Israelites of old, who " could sling stones at an hairbreadth and not miss." They are not of much use except in war. Far more eloquently and convincingly does he speak for his religion, whose life pleads for it; who shows that he derives from it virtue and defence, consolation and strength, light and blessing; and therefore recommending it in deed, can also recommend it in word. " Ye are our epistles," said the apostle, " known and read of all men." Perhaps we cannot give a more comprehensive definition of religion, than to say it is the supjjly to the soul of all its spiritual wants. It is the soul's home, its food and its clothing; and to this latter feature, its being clothing for the soul, we now entreat your attention. 'Blessed," it is written, "is he that -sTatcheth and keepeth his garments, lest he walk naked, and they see his shame." — Kev. xvi. 15. That garments, even in the Jewish law, are the corresponding symbols of those principles which clothe the soul, may be inferred from the laws which we frequently find in relation to them. Unless there was a spiri- tual sense in them, surely it would not have been worthy of the High and Lofty One who inhabiteth eternity to give directions in relation to what kind of clothes men should wear. There is the direction not to wear a gar- ment of wooUeu and linen together : again, for a woman not to wear a garment of a man : again, for a man's garment not to be kept in pledge after the sun has gone down : and now the law before us, that a fringe should be made to the garment, and on the fringe a ribband of blue. Surely it cannot concern the Infinite Kuler of all worlds what kind of trimming His people have to their dress, or color of ribband they have thereon. The soul and its concerns are surely the only appropriate objects of a Revelation from the Eternal Father of immortal beings. To teach us how to give the spirit a dress, so that it may be beautitul in the sight of angels, is worthy of him who clothes Himself with light as with a garment [Ps. civ. 2]. " I counsel thee to buy of me gold tried in the tire, that thou mayest be rich ; and white raiment, that thou mayestbe clothed, and that theshame of thy nakedness may not appear."— Rev. iii. 18. The chief use of clothing is defence against tlie chills and variations of the weather ; two subordinate uses are for the promotion of beauty, and for distinction of office. Wo can be at no loss to perceive that there are mental uses correspond- ing to the above which require for the soul spiritual clothing. The soul has its summer and its winter, and all the varieties of a mental year. There are seasons of hopefulness and brilhancy.in which we have all the elasticity and promise of spring ; there are states of peaceful warmth, of continued serene happiness; "the soul's calm sunshine and the heartfelt joy" which bespeak the spirit's summer ; but there are likewise periods ofdecreasing warmth, of incipient depressions, and coolness to what has formerly yielded the highest pleasure ; until at length we arrive at states of pain fill chill, and even of inteii'est cold, the joylessness, the hopeless- ness, and the sadness, which are the attendants of the winter of the soul. This depressed condition of the spii its is portrayed with graphic truth- fulness by one who said — " My years are in the yellow leaf, And all the life of life is gone : The worm, the canker, and thegrief, Are mine alone." And in a sweeter spirit of piety, by another poet — " O for a closer walk with God. A sweet and heavenly frame ; A light to shine upon the road, hich leads metothe Lamb. 40 APPENDIX OF THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. Where is the blessedness I kne\ When first I saw the Lord ? Where is the soul-refreshing view Of Jesus, and his Word ? " What peaceful hours I once enjoyed How sweet tlieir memory still ; But they have left an aching void The world can never fill." In this wintry state, storms of distressing fears and darkening doubts will rush upon the soul. Strong delusions, that we may believe a lie, will like fierce tempests, howl about us. Cold, harassing, cheerless frames of mind, dispiriting anxieties, filling us with discomfort and dread ; bittbr self-accusations urged upon as, perhaps by '• spiritual wickedness in high. places," like pitiless hail-storms which come upon us again and again, all teach us how real it is that the soul has its winter as well as its sum- mer. In relation to these spiritual seasons it is written, "And it shall be in that day, that living waters shall go out from Jerusalem: half of them toward the former sea, and half of them toward the hinder sea ; in summerand in winter shall it be." — Zech. xiv. 8. Thrice happy are they who remember, the living waters of the Divine Word will be a comfort and a blessing in joy and in sorrow, in sickness and in health, in summer aud in winter ; but they should also bear in mind, that, to be a protection in all seasons, the Divine Mercy has pro- vided us with spiritual clothing. The DOCTRINES of religion, when intelligently adopted and adapted to our particular states, serve this important purpose. And when those doc- trines are as they ought to be, full, comprehensive, and comi)let(', apply- ing themselves to all the departments of human aflection, thought, and life, they make a complete dress. Hence it is said in Isaiah, " I will great- ly rejoice in the Lord, my soul shall be joyful in my tiod ; for ho hath clothed me with the garments of salvation,"hc hath covered ine with the robe of righteousness, as abiidegroom decketh himself with ornaments,and as a bride adorneth herself with her jewels." — Ixi. 10. The doctrines which teach the true character of the Lord, His infinite and unchanging Love, His unerring and all-coini)rolicnsivc Wisdom, His omnipotent and ever-orderlv Power, these form the clothing for tho head. The doctrines which teach .viul imi)el us to our duty to our neigh- bor, form the .-lothing to the breast : while those which teach that our religion should be operative, md .lescend to inspire and sanctify every word and every deed of life ; ihese are the remainder of tho spirit's dress, even to the "shoes upon the leet," With this view of the spiritual dress of tho Christian, we shall see the fullest significance in many interesting portions of the sacred Scriptures. When the jirodigrtlson returned, we are informed; " Tho father said unto his servants, IJring forth tin; best robe, and pvil it on him; andiintaring on his hand, .xnd allocs on hi-i foot," — Luke xv.22, where it is manifest that tho clothing nf a newly-]ienitent s])irit withthost^ sacred trntlis which will form its best robe, Ibiit assurance of everlasting love which conjoins it to its I^ord as a golden marriage-ring, and those true principles of virtu- ous practice which are the only bases of real religion, are the shoes upon the feet. A most important .esson .8 mlorded to as hy the Divine tVord ni .Uat- thcw. It is sai( le.'tb"- xxii. 11—13. No ono can imagine that there was any sin in a jiarliciihir earthly dross not being_ had by Itioso who cincr the Lonl's kingdom. Hut in a spiritual point <)f view, nolliing can exceed tim value of the intimation it contains. Tho kingdom of liuaven, In fact uvurything hoaveuly, is tlio result of a nmr- 'APPENDIXlTOlTHE.ARTIZANS', GUIDE. 41 nage. • vVisdom sweetly blends with love to form the heavenly state. It is not a kingdom of faith alone, but of faith united to charity. No cold knowledge is tolerated there, but must be conjoined with affection for jwhat is known, All is union in an angelic mind. All heaven is united to its Divine Head, the Lord Jesus Christ. The marriage order reigns complete, and joy is the result. -'Thou shalt no more be termed Forsa- ken ; neither shall thy land any more bo termed Desolate ; bul thou shalt be called Hephzibah, and thy land Beulah ; for the Lord delighteth in thee, and thy laud shall be married." — Isa. Ixii. 4. Not to have on a wedding garment, then, is not to have a doctrine which unfolds this glorious union of truth and love in religion, and in heaven. It is to be practically among those who say, and do not. It is to make a parade of our piety and profession, it may be, but to neglect that, without which piety is nothing, faith is nothing, doctrine is nothing, name is nothing ; that pure and holy love, which worketh, which hopeth, which believeth all things ; which, insight of all the Christian virtues, is deserv- ing of the apostolic declaration. " And now abideth fiiith, hope, charity, these three, but the greatest of these is charity." 1 Corinthians, xiii, 13. When we have taken for our religion only that which relates to belief, and not that which concerns love and conduct, the heart un- checked and unchanged will be the home of selfishness and impurity ; and the time will come, either in this world or in the next, when there will issue from the uuregenerate heart those virulent evils, which will paralyse every power of good, will bind the hand and foot, and plunge the spirit into the darkest abysses of folly. ' With these views of doctrines forming the clothing of the soul, we see at once the importance of those allusions to garments which are so fre- quently met with in the old as well as the New Testament. When the prophet prediets the advent of the Lord into the vvorld, and thus opening to mankind the glorious doctrines of Christianity, instead of the miserable shreds of Jewish tradition, ho says, " Awake,- awake,- put on thy strength, O Zion ; put on thy beautiful garments, O Jerusalem, the holy city ; for henceforth there shall no more come into thee the uncircumcised and the unclean."— Is, lii 1. Again, in that well-known prophecy which begins, " The Spirit ofthe Lord is upon me ; because the Lord hath anointed me to preach good tidings unto the meek ; he hath sent me to bind up the brokenhearted ;" the prophet continues to unfold the gracious purpose of Jehovah in the flesh ; " To appoint unto them that mourn in Zion, to give unto them beauty for ashes, the oil of joy for mourning, the garment of praise for the spirit of heaviness ; that they might be called trees of righteousness, the planting ofthe Lord, that He might be glorified.,' — Is. Ixi. 3. Here the doctrine of the love of God manifest in the flesh, is ma- nifestly and righteously called " a garment of praise." What could more powerfully induce the soul to clothe itself with praise than the perception that our Saviour is our Heavenly Father, that the High and Lofty One who inhabiteth eternity had for our sakes condescended to appear in the extreme of His vast domains, the skin of the universe as it were, and by assuming and maintaining a connection with the outer universe, he be- came First and Last in Himself, and from Himself fills, sustains, and succours all. When the Lord .lesus said, "Thou hast a few names even in Sardis, which have not defiled their garments : and they shall walk with me in white, for they are worthy ; He that overcometh the same shall be cloth- ed in white raiment," he is evidently describing the condition of those who have not stained their profession ofthe Christian doctrine with impurity of life ; they have not defiled their garments now, and in eternity their views would be still purer, they should walk with Him in white. Doc- trines in harmony with purest truth, are white raiment wherewith we may be clothed. The New Dispensation of religion which in the fulness of time would be introduced from heaven among men, is represented as coming down " as a bride adorned for her husband. ' And, by this language, we are assured, no doubt, not only that this church would regard the Lord Jesus Christ, the Divine Lamb, as the only object of her supreme love, her husband, but that her doctrines would be beyond all precedent, beautiful. She 42 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. would be adorned for her husband. Such a glorious system would she havo of celestial truth. — such disclosures of heavenly order, — such di-JCO- venes ol the divine laws as existtutin the soul; in the regeueratf life ; in the heavenly w irld ; in the s|)iritual sense of the Holy Word ; in fact, on all subjects of Divine Wisdom, that to the truly devout and thought- ful spirit, she would truly be " adorned as abride for herhusbaad." There is an interesting intimation of the character of truf heavenly clothing in Psalm xlv. "The king's daughter is all glorious within : her clothing is of wrought gold. She shall be brought unto the king iu rai- meut of needlework [verses 13, 14] where the character of true celestial doctrine is declared to be the gold of love, wrought into system, — love wrought out. The king's daughter, all such as, animated by pure affec- tions for truth derived fom the King of kings, are desirous of g aces of the heart and mind, which are worth more than the wealth of kingdoms. Tae)' become glorious within, and all their views of dictrino are love as it were sneaking, and declaring its true nature. With them, G.>d is l'>ve, h'^aven is love, love is the fulfilling of the law, love keeps the com- mandments, the Wv)rd truly understo jd, is the revelation of love. Their whole doctrine, like the street of the holy city, is of pure gold, formed by the spiritual embroidery of au intellect which spiritually discerns the har- monious relati()ns of everlasting things. The Word supplies the raw mate- rial, lino upon line, and precept upon precept. Tlie rational powers weave them into a beautiful system, and prepare them to be worn. And when the judgment, under the impulse ot a humble determination to live lor heaven, adapts these doctrines to its own especial states and re actual, practical righteousness. It is true, our righteous- ness is derived from the Lord, "their righteousness is of me, saith the Lord." — Isa. liv. 17. But no righteousness will be im])uted to us, which has not been imparted to us. His spirit will be imputed to us, so far as wo receive it, but no farther. God is a God of truth, and never imputes to any one what he does not possess. " He that doeth righteousness, is righteous."—! .John iii. 7. The merit of divine righteousness in salvation, is as incommunicable as the merit of creation. The robe of the Sariour's perfections, has a name on it, which no man knows hut Ho Himself. (Rev. xix. 16). And, yet, numbers neglect to acquire the white robe, or the wrought gold, of imparted truth and love, under the vain idea that the jjiTsoiial perfections of our Lord will bo imputed to them. Our food is from iliin, but if instead of eating tha* which Ho now jirovides, wo were to attempt to live by imputing that which he ate in the days of llis flesh, wc should die of starvation. So, if instead )f receiving, and applying to ourselves the living streams of llis righteousness by earnest prayer and earnest practice, we expect llis merits to bo imputed to us, as righteous- ues<, so that although wc r,rc really wiclied, we ..hall bo accounted good! alMiough really polluted, we shall bo accounted clean; wo shall be naked and helpless, in tho day vhon he makes up his 'ewels. No doubt, the Lord lived on earth for ur sake.", sulfi^red for our sakes, died for oursakes, rose again foi cursak;.,, mac'. U.s llunuinity righteousness nibodied, fur our sakes. " Kor their sake.s, I sanctiiy mvse'f," he sal ", ' that they may be sanctiiied by the truth." — John xvii. 1&. All wa-' done for us to enable us to bo sanctifi.d, but not to be pr*. down to our account When our account i.i made up wo shall find the rule to be, " They that have tlono good shall come forth to the resurrection o'life, and they that have done ••vil to the resurrection of cciidemnation." John v. '20. lie comes quickly to t'ive to every man as liix ?cor/; shall bo (Key. xxii. 12). Blessed shall wc lie, if we watch and keep our garments, maile white by His truth, niid thus ;ire ready to Ibllow our Divine Lend T in the realms of peace, ador- iuB, in humble love, those infinite perleciions which make his face to shiiip llki> thesun, and Ills raiment white a-s the light | Matt. xvii. 2). We are, then, to speak to tli(! Israelites, who are typified liy those ol our text tbo splriioxU Israelites, who ore an our Lord said, laraolitea indeed, and APPENDIX TO THE AETIZANS' GUIDE. 43 say first that they clothe themselves with genuine doctrines of divine truth, with the garments of salvation, and that they especially make them fringes in the borders of their garments. After we have meditated upon the doctrines of religion, and seen their fitness to our own states of mind and heart, thus clotUed ourselves in them ; the next part of our duty is to bring them into life. This is a most important point, llanv there are, who put on religion as a dress for the head, and even also for the breast, but do not bring it down to the feet. But we are to make a border for our garments, and the border must be a fringe. The distinctive feature of a fringe is, that the material of which it is composed is divided into smuU portions, firmly united at the upper part, but hanging witli separate forms of beauty at the la(ver. The idea suggested by this is, that religion must be employed in all the small affairs of daily liie, as well as on great occasions, the lowest part of our spiritual dress must be a f. inge. Our Lord declared the same important truth when he said, ' He that is faith- ful in that which is least, is faithful also in much : and he that is unjust in the least, is unjust also in much." — Luke xvi , 10. This practical admonition is of the very highest consequence. One of the mo^t serious errors of life is that our religion is only to be brought out on grand occations, as some think, or on Sundays, as others practically shew, they suppose. The only way in which we make the truths of reli- gion really ours, is to infuse their spirit and tone into all our little acts in our daily conduct. Life is made up of little things. One circumstance follows another, one act comes after another, each one small of itselt, but the whole forming the tissue of our entire outward existence. Our whole journey is made step by step. There are no great swoops made. By Little and little, we drive out our evils; and by little and little, we Introduce the principles of wisdom and goodness into the whole texture ofour conduct. By this, we must not be misunderstood to mean, that we are not to subject the whole man to the government of heavenly laws, but only that we are to do it in each circumstance as it comes to hand, and to do it now, not to wait f .r great occasions. Let the border o.^your garment be a fringe. Many, very manv, have no objection to the head or the breast being in the church, but "the feet -Jiey imagin' may be quite otherwise engaged. But the true disciple ofour Saviour adopts the language of the Psalmist, " Our feet shall cta"nd within thy gates, O Jerusalem."— Ps. cxxii, 2. He is particularly wr.tchful over hie feet, or his daily practice. If m his moments of weaknes- he wavers, h- looks up to the Saviour, the Source of strength, and prays, '• Hold up my goings in thy paths, thai my lootsteps slip not.' — Ps. xvii. b- Often will he have to confess, " But as lor me, my feet were almost gone; my steps had well nigh slipped."— Ps. bixui. 2. i et will he find invisible hands have borne him up, for his ever- watch- ful Father has given his angels charge concerning him, lest he dash his feet against a stone.— Ps. xci. 11, 12. And again, and again wUl he fand occasion gratefully to exclaim, " O bless our God, ye people, aid make the voice of nis praise to be heard: who holdeth our soul m life, and sufibret!" not cur feet to be moved."— Ps. Ixvi. 8, 9. if, like Peter, at first, he aink- it quite beneath his Master's dignity to purify the lower concerns of life, and declares. Thou shalt never wash my feet, when he is better informed, and hears the Saviour's words, " If 1 wash thee not, thou hast no prrt in me," he, with an entire spirit of self-devotion, exclaims, "Lord, not my feet only, but also my hands and my head."— Joha xiii. 9. This religioii of daily life is the grand necosrity of the world. Without that, Tur sabbath worship is but an organized hypocrisy. We should pray, that we may be ablo to practise, not to substitute prayer for prac- tice. Beautiful as is the devout worship of the sanctuary, sweet as is the devotional piety, and soul-exalting as aro hymns of gratjtude; they are only the unsubstantial beauty of a drcai^, unle.ss they are brought down to give direction, purity, and strength to 'ally life. Let there then be a fringe for the borders of your gaament: , throughout all your generations. It is for want of this descent of religion into daily life, that its blessings are often very faintly felt. The sweetness of the knowledge of the Lord is only experienced when religion has become a living hourly series of virtues witu us, It is said of the disciples who were going to Emmau^ 44 APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANs' GUIDE. though the Lord walked with them, and they felt the holy glow of his presence when he talked with them on the way, he only became known to them in" the breaking of the bread." It is so with His disciples in all ages. As long as the " bread of life " is received in a mass, and remains thus, the blessing of conjunction with the Divine Being is unknown. He is with them, but as a stranger. But let them break the bread ; let them at home and abroad, in the counting-house aad on change, in the workshop and at market, in their pleasures and in all their family duties, break the bread of heaven, and apply it to every work and word, and they will then know the Lord. " Then shall we know, if we follow on to know the Lord: His going forth is prepared as the morning, and He shall come unto us as the rain; as the latter and former rain upon the earth." O, then lot our religion not be like a Sunday dress, put on only for parade on state occasions, and put off when the occasion has passed by, but like a simple daily robe, whose usefulness is seen of all, and whose fringe goes all around the hem of our garment, so that it extends over the whole circle of our outward life. We are, however, not only commanded to have a fringe to our garments, but to have upon the fringe a ribband of blue. And this leads us to consi- der the correspondence ot colors. Natural colors we know originate in natural light. They are the separation of the beauties which are bound up in the sunbeam, and their reflection to the human eye. There is a trinity of fuiulamental colors, red, blue, and yellow. From the blending ot the.-e in varied proportions all others are made. Blue and yellow form green. Bearing in mind that the Lord is the Sun of the eternal world, and that essential truth shines as a spiritual light from Him, the three essential colors into which light divides itself, will represent the three essential features of divine truth, in its application to man. There are truths of love, which apply to our affections, truths of faith which apply to thoughts, and truths of lite, lied, the colour of fire, is the symbol of the truths of love, the (ire of the soul. Blue, the colour of the azure depths of the sky, is symbolic of the deep things of the spirit of God, on which faith delights to gaze. Yellow, is the liue of truth wliich applies to out- ward life, and in combination with blue it makes green, whicli corresponds to truth in the letter of the Word, made simple to the common eye of mankind. Bluogives^a sense of clearness and depth, in which it surpasses all ather hues. * When wo gaze into the bhu,' deptlis of the sky, far above the changes of the clouds, their tranciuil grandeur, arehiug in peaceful majesty far over the turmoils of the world, strikingly images those depths of heavenly wisdom Irom which tlie good man draws strength and peace. "Though round his breast the rolling clouds are spread, Eternal sunshines settles on his head." Blue, then, is the colour which represents the spirit of the Holy Word, the dcjiths of heavenly wisdom. There is, however, cold blue, as it has more of white in it, and warm bliK!, as it derives a certain hue from red. There has also been some ditli- cuUy in detorniiiiiiig tlic e.vact shade meant by J'echi'lcth, the Hebrew name for tliis colour. But from a full consideration of tlic sulijcct we aro satislifd it was tho name for blues tinged witli n^d, from violet to jiurple. And Ihi.'* very strikingly brings out tlitMlivine lesson by corres])oiulenco. While! the l)hie inilicat(!S that in our demeanour or in lilb we should bo correct, in harmony with the spirit of truth, the red hue indicates tluit all our truth ought to be softeneci, and wanned by love. " Speak tho truth inwove, "said the apostle, and to reiiiinr is sculiling hot, and like medicine, impossible to be tiikeii. uHelesH or injurious; but truth coming from a loving heart, Urm, but gentle, anil sweet like' the warm suiibeani, is welcome to all. TUo loving blue of tho oyo, which reveals tho sweet impulses of a soft APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANS' GTJIDE. 45 I and gentle heart, is like the color of the ribband, before uB;"it speaks of the purity and the warmth of the spirit within. Let there, then, be upon all your demeanour this color ot heavenly love. Seen in this view we have now arrived at, this commandment increases in practical importance the more we contemplate it. Perhaps the neglect ofit is the cause of more failures in the delivery of well-meant advice, than any other circumstance. We proceed to correct with the rough, stern hand of truth alone, and we encounter resistance. We are sure we are right, and we proceed to reproach and invective. Quarrels ensue, instead of amendment. We brood over our failure, and wonder at the perversity of mankind, not reflecting that we have not put on the fringe upon our garment, the ribband of heavenly blue. " O be kind to each other. The night's coming on. When friend and when brother, Perhance may be gone." Nothing can be farther from the spirit of heaven, than a stem, harsh, vindictive utterance of truth. We should ever remember that we can ourselves only be assisted by one who manifests to us a spirit ol kindness in his counsel. To an assailant we close up. We cannot bear our faults to be exposed by one who does it in a spirit of exultation and insolence. But we love the friendly hand which has a brother's touch. We delight to see the dress not starched with prudery, but having upon all its fringe the ribband of heaven's own blue. With this blessed tone, how often would homes be happy which are fascinating ' ribband to those of her own fireside. Oh, if the Christian ministry has one object which more than another should be its constant aim, it should be to contribute to the happiness of home, that sacred centre of all that is elevating, strengthening, purifying, and ennobling among men. And nothing will be a truer source of all these blessings than to speak to brothers and sisters, and say, in all your intercourse with each other, let the spirit of religion be visible. In each small act of daily intercourse with each other, let there be a fringe from your religion within, and on the fringe let the truth of intelligence be blended with the kindness of real love. You were created to learn to be fellow angels in the house. You were placed to walk together on your path to heaven, to give an assisting hand when a weak one stumbles, to exhort the slothful, to cheer the weary, to warn against danger's path and dangerous foes, to encourage the struggling, to rejoice together when you gain a glorious prospect, to animate each other to your daily progress, and often to taste by anticipa- tion the triumph you will have when all the dangers of life are gone by, and heaven is forever your home. Remember the charge of Joseph to his brethren, " See that ye fall not out by the way." In your acts and your words, let there be seen upon all your fringe, the ribband of heavenly blue. We come, now, to a still dearer connestion, which would often be more blest if the spirit of this divine command were more faithfully carried out. In that most sacred of all human ties, the marriage union, it is of the highest importance that the blue ribband should appear in all the demeanor of husband and wife. Yet, sometimes the domestic hearth is less tender and happy than it might be, for want of the gentle amenities of truth spoken in love. When that mysterious sympathy which attracts congenial souls to each other, first induces ardent thought in the young lovers, the earnestness of afl'ection presents to both only what is amiable and agreeable. Each finds a, magnifier of the excellencies of the other, and ho imperfection can be soon. And, when the hopes of both are crowned by possession, ii long visti of happiness is beheld, throngjd with an endless succession of joys and tilessin^s Yet both parties have failings. The per- fection fancy lia^ jiainted, will, in many re.spects, be found to be over- lira'vn. The bloom of outward beauty wUl wear off. Possession will 46 APPENDIX TO TUE ARTIZANS' GUIDE. deprive many attractions of the exaggerated value for which tliev were chiefly indebted to passion. Both are probably young, both imnerfect both are liuman. Hence, there come discoveries of faults and shortcom- ings which belong to us all, but which have been betore unseen \nd now IS the opportunity for the manifestation of real love, in havine patience with the loved one. If they have loved wisely, the virtues of each other, and that mutual adaptation of feeling, taste, and character which has drawn their souls to desire a union impossible with any one else,have been the chief attractions; and for their sakes, they can well afford to bear with some defects. Instead of being astonished to find that the mere mortals we have married have some ot the failings of our fallen race, we should take kindly the opportunities of showing, that ours has not been the selhsh pas^ion which desires only its own gratification, but rather the holy affection that, forgetful of self, seeks chiefly the happiness ot those we love. To assist, and be assisted,to form angelic characters in each other, these are the chief objects for which marriage has been instituted. And to accomplish tliose ends, we must have a faithtul, but a friendly eye tor the imperfections of each other. We should scarcely notice the unpleasant effect of faults ia relation to our personal gratifica- tion, but be quieksighted to perceive the injury they inflict upon the doer ! Ju . T?-*? blind as he that is perfect," says the prophet, in reference to that Divine Mercy which sees not our sins so far as they are directed against Him, and condemns them, only as they are fountains of misery to ourselves. ' Our Lord washed His disciples' feet, and said, " As I have washed your feet, so must ye wash one another's feet." And if to assist each other to remove imperfections from our conduct, which is spiritually washing one another's leet, is a duty we owe to our ordinary Christian friends, how much more is it a duty to assist in removing the spots which soil the characters of those we have undertaken to love and to cherish Yet what tender care this duty needs. The true wife, or husband, cannot bear to think that the deeply-prized love of the other is being lost. Noticinjra fault rudely, betrays the appearance of dislike, and wounds deepTy Sometimes, self-love will creep in between married partners, and the struggle for power will take the appearance of oi)positiou to faults Then lacerated feelings are poured forth in bitter expressions. Then, quarrels arise, long animosities are inaugurated, which take Irom home its sweet- ness, banish all those tender endearments, those happy confidences, those he.irt-(elt reliances on each other, those fireside pleasures whicli consti- tute earth s neare>t likeness to heaven. Then oppositions are engendered recriminations are heard, hateful everywhere, but in:olerablo from tlios4 we love. Distrusts, fears, and anxieties intrude, where only confidence should reigu, and home becomes the saddest abode of misery. All this hiut happened, will happen, it we are not careful, iu our married litij especially, to speau the truth in love. There, above all, the blue ribband should be seen upon our garments. Sweetness in our goodness and tenderness in our truth, should bo the incessant law of marned partners to each other A fearfuluess of injuring the feeling.s of the other : A friend- ly, kindly touch, when any mental i-ore requires attention : A determina- tion to do nothing, which does not manifest a constant atfection : A deference to each other's wishes : A manifest active effort to promote the oth-rs hapinness ; 1 he.^so are the disjio-^itions which can alone i)reservo and complete that choici'.st of all Divine Ule.ssings— genuine conjugal love When iiii-iuiiderstanding has been sustained, and bruised affection.s manifest how deeply they are luirt,;their pain should not bo treated li'litly. He would be thought crm-l wh./ tr.imi.led on the inflanied loot otanCtlier vet the anguished heart is .sometimes tortuicd with stinging words of bitt -rest taunt and rei)roach, under the delusion that it is necessary to blame where JUult has been coiniiiitted. The tirst necessity is to bring ourselves into a state ofrcul kindness and aflection ; then ascertain if tlio supposed fault be as real as it appeared. If so, to ask for llim who views u.s .1 I from kindness, for wi.sdDin. lir>t i)ure, then peaceable, to speak the truth 111 love. \V liile our ribband is bine, to take care that it is soft and warm. How desirable tliis is in our intercourse with others ! In our jiilercoiirHe with those who are to form with us the happiness of heart and 1)00)0, It in judispensablu. APPENDIX TO THE ARTIZANs' GUIDE. 47 And yet it is not at all uncommon for unwise married partners so far to neglect this divine commandment as to be all smiles to others, and to reserve their coldness for those whom they should most fondly cherish. The husband open, smiling, and sedulously polite to any other lady, will be reserved, negligent, uncourteous, and unkind to the heart which should be to him above all price. The wife, all-radiant with smiles to others, attentive to their minutest wishes or comforts, will not trouble herself to ^^lain or regain the affections of that one, on whom all her real happiness depends. The gentle, conciliating word, for which her husband's heart, beneath a firm exterior, is longing, she' will not speak. The one she won by gentleness, and grace, and all the feminine virtues,she will not preserve by growing in those virtues, but rudely repels. And the heart whose faintest throb she once valued beyond all earthly riches, she rudely throws away. O married partners, tenants of the same home, who should be all in all to each other, for time and for eternity, never neglect in your sentiments, your spirit, your acts, and your words to each other, to let there be visible on all the manifestations of character with which your life's dress is fringed, the trutu and the love of celestial blue. O wife, matron, mother, remember your strength is in tenderness. Never shock the feelings of your husband by harsh, bitter, unwomanly exasperations. Your peculiar province is at liome ; let it be ever preserved sacred to domestic peace, by a meek and quiet spirit. So you will be your husband's dearest trust, and chief consoler ; your children's constant refuge ; and when you have passed beyond the shades of time, the star of fond remembrance that shines high above the cares of earth, and lures them still to heaven. O husband, O father, on whom the wife's fond heart desires to lean, let no harsh ei^pressiou drive her thence. A yearning of unspeakable tender- ness keeps you within her presence, mentally, wherever you may be from niorij to dewy eve. And, when you return, she expects the friendly greeting ; let her not be disappointed. Be assured her love would encircle you, if yii were driven from the common ranks of men ; her heart would be tlie truest pillow for your aching head. Her grace, her happiness, is the worthiest ornament for you now. Your strength is cold, repulsive, aud forbiddinof, until it is combined and chastened by the gentleness and sweetness of your faithful, loving wife. Let her be cheered, then, to see upon ihe fringe of your garments, the clearness and the warmth of true celestial blue. It is equally important that the firmness and clearness of truth, blended witli the warmth and gentleness of love, should be visible in all our inter- course with our children. Firmness, without gentleness and cheerfulness is painful and repulsive to children, and they shun the circle of its influ- ence as much as possible. Softness, without firmness, strengthens their haiikerings forselfish indulgences, and increases those disorderly demands whicii at length must be restrained with rigor, a hundred-fold more pain- ful, or they must sink in ruin. Children fi ok for just direction, and their sense of justice leads them readily to acquiesce in what is right when it comes from lips they love. Only ''t the true blue ribband be seen by your children always, and they will follow where you lead, and your counsel Will be laws they will revere in your abseuce as well a.s in your presence ; and when the music ot your loved voice will be heard by them no more, its recollections within will be prized as the tones and the wisdom of those dearest and best-beloved ones who piloted them safely in tne early walks of life, and stii) have only gone before them, and are waiting to welcome them on the purer plains of heaven. This attention to the very externals of the Christian life is fraught with blessing every way. I. is only thus, in fact, we can obtain strength to be healed of our spiritual diseases, and only thus we can exhibit the worth of our principles to others. When the poor woman who had spent her all upon helpless physicians for twelve years came to Jesus, she said within herself: If I touch but the hem f his garment, I shall be made whole, and as soon as sh ■ did so, virtue went out, and sh«i was healed. In the hem of tlie vesture of Divine Truth, or in other words, in the literal sense of the Word of God, the divine virtue is ever present for the nnek and lowly, and when it is touched by trusting love, that virtue will go Ollt. '48 APPENDIX TO THE ARTlZANs' GUIDE. Tht" I roi))iet Zechannh, speaking of the glorious church of the latter iiiys, I 111' ciiurch wtiicli is now unfolding itself amougst us, the New Jerusalem, declares, ■' Thus saith the Lord of hosts : lu these days it shall ioinot.) pass, tliat ten men shall take hold out of all languages of all Qatirns. even shall take hold of the skirt of him that is a Jew, saying " We will go with you ; for we have heard that (jod is with you." — viii. 25. It is religion in lift; that is observed by, and is attractive to, good men. When it not only enlightens the head and rules the heart, but comes down to the skirts of the garment, infusing justice, kindness, and courtesy into every act and every word, then it has an eloquence which will inspire many a well-disposed heart to say: " We will go with you, for we have heard that God is with you. Let your good works, and your good words so shine before men, that they may glorify your Father which is ia heaven." While you pay due and supreme attention to the interior principles of love and faith, never forget the fringe. Let your religion come out. Be loving and truthful in little things. Let your daily duties, and daily expressions unbosom in them the spirit of heaven in their entire round, aiid thus upon the fringe let there be seen the ribband of blub. EXPERIENCE OF A SUN REPORTER IN NEW YORK. Slightly alteredfrom N, Y. Sun. A Sun reporter being desirous of finding out something definite regard- ing the New Church doctrines, proceeded to No. 20, Cooper Institute, Newr York, and inquiring who was the head man of the denomination, a gentle- man [Mr. Thomas Hitclicock] answered; — There is no head man in our denomination ; that is to say, there is no one whose lead we follow without quostion. We all think for ourselves, although, of course some are more familiar with the writings of Sweden- borg tlian others. Ilcporter. Do you understand the doctrines ? Mr. 11, 1 do, I have studied them about twenty-one years. ■ Reiiorter. Well, what are you Swodenborgians driving at? Mr. H. We think we have got the true science of religious truth, and want to teach it to the world. Jii'porter. Science of religious truth 1 Do you mean to say there is any science ia religious truth / Mr. H. We mean to say, and we do say, that religious truth is as capable of i^cientitic arrangement and o.\i)lanation as any other truth, and that we are able to give this scientilio e.Kplanation. TlieNEW Cnuucii thcjology bears thosame rolai ion to all otlier theologies that the Copernican system of astronomy boars to the Ptolemaic, the Arabic, the Hindoo, and the Chinese systems of astronomy. Those systems of astronomy were based on the mi-itaken appearance of things, whereas Copernicus and his followers got at the realities. Just so other systems or theology are basc'l on appearances, while the New Chuuch system is based on the real ti'uih. Ilcporter. What do you moan by " appearances"? Mr. II. 1 mean the way that things appear to the senses. For example, the sun appears to rise a::d set, and to go daily round the earth. The sky appmr.t to como down to the (Mrth allaronnd, lorming wliat we call the liori/.oii. The earth appears to bo stationary in tlio ceniro of our universe. The sun appears to bo a small orb, not a milliontli part as large as the emih ; the planets seem no bigger than marbles, and the (ixed stars appear to be mere twinkling points. All these appearances an? controverted by K-ieiice, and the senses have to yield to reason. It is the same in hpintiial an